The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutPlans (3) RECEIVED PROJECT MANUAL JAN 31 2013 CITY OF TIGARD FOR BUILDING DIVISION COMCAST TECHNICAL OPERATIONS CENTER Tigard, Oregon `60P2.0(3.- A. City of Tigard Owner AY p.�rove'd Plans �,r By Date 1124 1?) Comcast Cable Communications, Inc. (� 6 — One Comcast Center 1701 John F. Kennedy Blvd. OFFICE COPY Philadelphia, PA 19103-2838 Architect ��1) flfeC1rr Gromatzky Dupree & Associates ~� 3090 Olive Street, Suite 500 K ITH RABUSL r Dallas,Texas 75219 2141871-9078 o LIC. NC?. 61t % JI GDA#12018.00 I'+/tk' Issue for Permit OF OR December 14, 2012 PROJECT MANUAL FOR C 0 M CAST TECHNICAL OPERATIONS CENTER Tigard, Oregon Owner Comcast Cable Communications, Inc. One Comcast Center 1701 John F. Kennedy Blvd. Philadelphia, PA 19103-2838 Architect Gromatzky Dupree&Associates 3090 Olive Street, Suite 500 Dallas, Texas 75219 214/871-9078 GDA#12018.00 Issue for Permit December 14, 2012 GDA#12018.00 December 14,2012 Issue for Permit 1 DOCUMENT 00010-PROJECT MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 2 3 DIVISION 00- BIDDING REQUIREMENTS; CONTRACT FORMS; CONTRACT CONDITIONS 4 5 SECTION 00420- LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS 6 SECTION 00999— CAD RELEASE FORM AND AGREEMENT 7 CAD RELEASE FORM AND AGREEMENT 8 9 10 DIVISION 01 -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 11 12 SECTION 01010- SUMMARY OF THE WORK 13 SECTION 01027- APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 14 SECTION 01030- ALTERNATES 15 SECTION 01035- MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 16 SECTION 01040- PROJECT COORDINATION 17 SECTION 01045- CUTTING AND PATCHING 18 SECTION 01050- FIELD ENGINEERING 19 SECTION 01092- ABBREVIATIONS 20 SECTION 01095- REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 21 SECTION 01310- SCHEDULES, REPORTS, PAYMENTS 22 SECTION 01340- SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES 23 SECTION 01400- QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES 24 SECTION 01505- TEMPORARY FACILITIES 25 SECTION 01600- MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 26 SECTION 01631 - PRODUCTS AND SUBSTITUTIONS 27 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM 28 SECTION 01700- PROJECT CLOSEOUT 29 SECTION 01740- WARRANTIES 30 31 32 DIVISION 02-SITEWORK 33 34 SECTION 02070- SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 35 SECTION 02580- TRAFFIC MARKING PAINT 36 SECTION 02820- CHAIN-LINK FENCES AND GATES 37 SECTION 02825- GATE OPERATOR 38 SECTION 02848- CONCRETE PARKING BUMPERS 39 40 41 DIVISION 03-CONCRETE 42 43 SECTION 03301 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE (LIMITED APPLICATIONS) 44 SECTION 03355- CONCRETE SEALER 45 46 47 DIVISION 04- MASONRY 48 49 50 NONE ISSUED �� $D Re�� 0 KEIT RAI3USE r1, DALLAS, TL AS • •,� LIC. NU. 6184 CP PROJECT MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 12 OF OV GDA 00010-1 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 DIVISION 05—METALS 2 3 SECTION 05500- METAL FABRICATIONS 4 SECTION 05521 - PIPE RAILINGS 5 6 7 DIVISION 06-WOOD AND PLASTICS 8 9 SECTION 06100- ROUGH CARPENTRY 10 SECTION 06402- INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 11 SECTION 06640- FIBERGLASS REINFORCED POLYESTER PANELS 12 13 14 DIVISION 07-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 15 16 SECTION 07270- FIRESTOPS AND SMOKESEALS 17 SECTION 07901 - JOINT SEALANTS 18 19 20 DIVISION 08- DOORS AND WINDOWS 21 22 SECTION 08110- STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 23 SECTION 08120- INTERIOR ALUMINUM DOOR AND WINDOW FRAMES AND TRIM 24 SECTION 08121 - INTERIOR ALUMINUM DOORS 25 SECTION 08125- PREFINISHED STEEL DOOR FRAMES 26 SECTION 08212- FLUSH WOOD DOORS 27 SECTION 08360- SERVICE COUNTER DOORS 28 SECTION 08415- ALUMINUM STOREFRONTS AND ENTRANCES FOR INTERIOR 29 APPLICATION 30 SECTION 08386- SAFETY ALL GLASS SIDELIGHTS 31 SECTION 08710- FINISH HARDWARE 32 SECTION 08800- GLASS AND GLAZING 33 SECTION 08830- MIRRORS 34 SECTION 08842- DECORATIVE PLASTIC GLAZING 35 SECTION 08871 - SOLAR CONTROL FILM 36 37 38 DIVISION 09- FINISHES 39 40 SECTION 09250- GYPSUM DRYWALL 41 SECTION 09300- CERAMIC TILE 42 SECTION 09512- ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 43 SECTION 09650- RESILIENT FLOORING 44 SECTION 09681 - CARPET TILE t� 45 SECTION 09900- PAINTING �L�%1J Ake ke 46 �� ( KH RABUSE DALLEITA S,T E XAS NM LIC. o' `;�4 '{ 1 OF O PROJECT MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS GDA 00010-2 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 DIVISION 10-SPECIALTIES 2 3 SECTION 10155- TOILET COMPARTMENTS 4 SECTION 10260- WALL SURFACE PROTECTION 5 SECTION 10425- SIGNAGE 6 SECTION 10505- METAL LOCKERS 7 SECTION 10522- FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, and ACCESSORIES 8 SECTION 10530- EXTRUDED ALUMINUM WALKWAY COVERS 9 SECTION 10800- TOILET ACCESSORIES 10 SECTION 10990- MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES 11 12 13 DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT 14 15 NONE ISSUED 16 17 18 DIVISION 12- FURNISHINGS 19 20 SECTION 12500- HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 21 22 23 DIVISION 13-SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 24 25 NONE ISSUED 26 27 28 DIVISION 14-CONVEYING SYSTEMS 29 30 NONE ISSUED 31 32 33 END OF DOCUMENT 00010 \-D " R04. KEI H RABUSE ti DALLAS, EXAS • • LIC. NO. 61i0j4t. lo I Oft 4oroV- PROJECT MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS GDA 00010-3 GDA#12018.00 December 14,2012 Issue for Permit 1 SECTION 00420- LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS 2 3 The GENERAL CONTRACTOR indicated herein, should his Guaranteed Maximum Price be accepted 4 by the Owner, intends to employ the services of the Sub-Contractors on this Project that are listed by 5 the General Contractor on a supplemental list(unless unacceptable to Owner). If a category listed will 6 have no sub-contractor, indicate "General Contractor" for the category. If the General Contractor 7 believes that the category is not applicable to this Project, indicate"Not Applicable"for the category. 8 9 GENERAL CONTRACTOR 10 11 Name: 12 13 Mailing Address: 14 15 Physical Address: 16 17 Phone: ( ) Fax: ( ) 18 19 Contact: 20 21 Provide the following information for each Sub-Contractor for each category listed: 22 23 Name of Company 24 Mailing Address of Company, including zip code 25 Physical Address of Company, including zip code 26 Phone and Fax Number of Company, including area code 27 Contact person for the Company for this Project 28 Email Address(optional) 29 Sub-Contractor License Number 30 Bonding Company 31 32 LIST OF SUB-CONTRACTOR CATEGORIES 33 34 CONCRETE 35 STRUCTURAL STEEL 36 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 37 BUILDING INSULATION 38 FIRESTOPPING 39 CAULKING&SEALANTS 40 HOLLOW METAL DOORS& FRAMES 41 WOOD DOORS 42 SERVICE DOORS 43 ALUMINUM STOREFRONTS AND ENTRANCES 44 FINISH HARDWARE 45 GLAZING 46 GYPSUM DRYWALL 47 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 48 FLOORING 49 PAINTING 50 TOILET COMPARTMENTS 51 TOILET ACCESSORIES 52 HVAC 53 PLUMBING 54 ELECTRICAL 55 OTHER(As deemed appropriate by General Contractor or as requested by Owner) 56 57 END OF SECTION 00420 LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS GDA 00420- 1 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 SECTION 00999— CAD RELEASE FORM AND AGREEMENT 2 3 PART 1 - GENERAL 4 5 SUMMARY 6 7 The CAD Release Form and Agreement is included in its entirety, following this page. 8 9 10 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 11 12 13 PART 3— EXECUTION (NOT USED) 14 15 END OF SECTION 00999 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 CAD RELEASE FORM AND AGREEMENT GDA 00999- 1 GDA#12018.00 December 14,2012 Issue for Permit 1 CAD Disk Release 2 3 Agreement: The Contractor desires to have Gromatzky Dupree & Associates supply the 4 Subcontractor electronic media (compact disk) containing floor/site plans for Comcast Technical 5 Operations Center, Tigard, Oregon, (GDA project number 12018.00), for use by subcontractor in 6 providing services for 7 8 9 In accordance with [your] [you- subconttracto,s] request for electronic copies of our CADD files, 10 Gromatzky Dupree and Associates (GDA) will furnish diskettes of the drawings listed above for a 11 nominal preparation fee of $75.00/sheet. The information contained on the diskettes has not been 12 updated with Addenda or other revisions issued prior to the date of the Construction Contract. 13 14 Therefore, the Contractor agrees as follows: 15 1. Due to the potential that the information set forth on the electronic media can be modified by 16 the Contractor, Subcontractor, or other parties, unintentionally or otherwise, Gromatzky 17 Dupree & Associates reserves the right to remove all indices of its ownership, professional 18 corporation name, and/or involvement from each electronic medium not in its possession. 19 2. For documentation purposes, one set of an original electronic media will be prepared and sent 20 via electronic mail (email). The Subcontractor has requested 21 22 3. Contractor has requested that Gromatzky Dupree Associates send the requested electronic 23 media directly to the Subcontractor. 24 4. The Contractor/Subcontractor recognizes that use of such electronic media (disk) will be at 25 Contractor/Subcontractor's sole risk and without any liability risk or legal exposure by 26 Gromatzky Dupree & Associates. Furthermore, Contractor/Subcontractor shall, to the fullest 27 extent permitted by law, defend, indemnify and hold harmless Gromatzky Dupree & 28 Associates from all claims, damages, losses, and expenses including attorney fees arising out 29 of or resulting from the use of such electronic media. 30 5. The use of this electronic media is restricted to the original site for which it was prepared. 31 Material shall not be transferred to any other party for use in other projects. Reuse or 32 reproduction of the documents (whole or in part) for any other purpose for which the material 33 was not strictly intended is prohibited. Title to these documents is prima fade evidence of the 34 acceptance of these restrictions. 35 6. Contractor/Subcontractor recognizes that information stored on electronic media including, but 36 not limited to computer disk may not be 100% compatible with his system, therefore 37 Contractor/Subcontractor agrees Gromatzky Dupree & Associates shall not be liable for the 38 completeness or accuracy of any materials provided due to difference in computer and 39 software. 40 7. Contractor/Subcontractor recognizes that designs, plans, and data sent via electronic mail 41 including, but not limited to computer disk may be subject to undetectable alteration and/or 42 uncontrollable deterioration. Contractor/Subcontractor therefore agrees that Gromatzky 43 Dupree & Associates shall not be liable for the completeness or accuracy of any materials 44 provided via electronic mail. 45 46 Agreed to this (date) . 47 48 Subcontractor: 49 50 51 52 Signature/Title GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 SECTION 01010-SUMMARY OF THE WORK 2 3 4 PART 1 -GENERAL 5 6 RELATED DOCUMENTS: 7 8 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and 9 other Division-1 Specification section, apply to work of this section. 10 11 PROJECT/WORK IDENTIFICATION: 12 13 General: Project name is "Comcast Technical Operations Center" located in Tigard, Oregon, as 14 shown on Contract Documents prepared by Gromatzky Dupree and Associates. Drawings and 15 specifications are dated December 14, 2012. 16 17 Contract Documents: Indicate the work of the Contract and related requirements and conditions that 18 have an impact on the project. Related requirements and conditions that are indicated on the 19 Contract Documents include, but are not necessarily limited to the following: 20 21 Existing site conditions and restrictions on use of the site. 22 23 Requirements for partial Owner occupancy prior to substantial completion of the Contract 24 Work. 25 26 Summary by References: Work of the Contract can be summarized by references to the Contract, 27 General Conditions, Specification Sections, Drawings, Schedules, addenda and modifications to the 28 contract documents issued subsequent to the initial printing of this project manual and including but 29 not necessarily limited to printed material referenced by any of these. It is recognized that work of the 30 Contract is also unavoidably affected or influenced by governing regulations, natural phenomenon 31 including weather conditions and other forces outside the contract documents. 32 33 Abbreviated Written Summary: Briefly and without force and effect upon the contract documents, the 34 work of the Contract can be summarized as follows: 35 36 The work includes remodeling construction of a shell building and tenant installation on site as 37 shown. 38 39 The work includes, but is not limited to, some site paving modifications, site fencing and 40 automated gates, interior architectural woodwork, insulation, firestops and smokeseals, 41 exterior hollow metal doors and frames, aluminum doors and frames, flush wood doors, door 42 and sidelight framing, coiling service counter shutters, interior aluminum storefront and 43 entrances, finish hardware, glass and glazing, mirrors, window films, steel stud and gypsum 44 wallboard partitions, common interior finishes, toilet compartments and accessories, fire 45 extinguishers and cabinets, walkway covers and canopies, window blinds, and other work as 46 detailed in the contract documents. 47 48 The work also includes certain items of equipment, including electrical, telephone systems, 49 mechanical and plumbing systems. 50 51 The Work shall include all work on public right of ways necessary for the completion of the site 52 utility work. 53 54 The Work shall include acquisition of and payment for all permits required by controlling 55 government authorities for the construction and final occupancy of the work. 56 57 The Work shall include civil and landscape work. SUMMARY OF THE WORK GDA 01010- 1 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES: 3 4 General: The Contractor shall limit his use of the premises to the work indicated, so as to allow for 5 Owner occupancy and use by the public. 6 7 Use of the Site: Confine operations at the site to the areas permitted under the Contract. 8 Portions of the site beyond areas on which work is indicated are not to be disturbed. Conform 9 to site rules and regulations affecting the work while engaged in project construction. 10 11 Keep driveways and entrances serving the premises clear and available to the Owner 12 and his employees at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of 13 materials. 14 15 Do not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment. Confine 16 stockpiling of materials and location of storage sheds to the areas previously 17 approved by the owner. If additional storage is necessary obtain and pay for such 18 storage off site. 19 20 Lock automotive type vehicles, such as passenger cars and trucks and other 21 mechanized or motorized construction equipment, when parked and unattended, so 22 as to prevent unauthorized use. Do not leave such vehicles or equipment unattended 23 with the motor running or the ignition key in place. 24 25 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS 26 27 Owner will furnish products indicated. The Work includes receiving, unloading, handling, storing, 28 protecting, and installing Owner-furnished products and making building services connections. 29 30 Owner-Furnished Products: 31 32 Refer to Equipment Legend on the Drawings. 33 34 OWNER OCCUPANCY: 35 36 Partial Owner Occupancy: The Owner reserves the right to place and install equipment as necessary 37 in completed areas of the building and to occupy such completed areas prior to substantial 38 completion, provided that such occupancy does not substantially interfere with completion of the work. 39 Such placing of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the work or any 40 part of the work. 41 42 ALTERATIONS AND COORDINATION: 43 44 General: The work of this Contract includes coordination of the entire work of the project, including 45 preparation of general coordination drawings, diagrams and schedules, and control of site utilization, 46 from beginning of construction activity through project close-out and warranty periods. 47 48 Mechanical/Electrical Requirements of General Work: 49 50 General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with applicable requirements of Division-15 sections 51 for mechanical provisions within units of general (Division 2-14)Work. Except as otherwise indicated, 52 comply with applicable requirements of Division-16 sections for electrical provisions within units of 53 general (Division 2-14)Work. 54 55 Electrical Requirements: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with applicable provisions of The 56 National Electrical Code (NEC) and standards by National Electrical Manufacturer's Association 57 (NEMA), for electrical components of general work. Provide Underwriters Laboratories listed and SUMMARY OF THE WORK GDA 01010-2 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 labeled products where applicable. 2 3 Performance Requirements for Completed Work: 4 5 General: The Contract Documents indicate the intended occupancy and utilization of the building and 6 its individual systems and facilities. Compliance with governing regulations is intended and required 7 for the work and for the Owner's occupancy and utilization. In addition to the requirement that every 8 element of the work comply with applicable requirements of the contract documents, it is also required 9 that the work as a whole comply with all applicable national, state, and local codes and ordinances . 10 11 12 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not applicable). 13 14 15 PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not applicable) 16 17 18 END OF SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF THE WORK GDA 01010- 3 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 SECTION 01027-APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 2 3 4 PART 1 -GENERAL 5 6 7 RELATED DOCUMENTS 8 9 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and 10 other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 11 12 SUMMARY 13 14 This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements governing the Contractor's 15 Applications for Payment. 16 17 The Contractor's Construction Schedule and Submittal Schedule are included in Section 01300 18 "Submittals". 19 20 SCHEDULE OF VALUES 21 22 Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of the Contractor's Construction 23 Schedule. 24 25 Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative schedules 26 and forms, including: 27 28 Contractor's construction schedule. 29 Application for Payment form. 30 List of subcontractors. 31 Schedule of allowances. 32 List of products. 33 List of principal suppliers and fabricators. 34 Schedule of submittals. 35 36 Submit the Schedule of Values to the Architect at the earliest feasible date, but in no case 37 later than 7 days before the date scheduled for submittal of the initial Application for Payment. 38 39 Format and Content: Use the Project Manual Table of Contents as a guide to establish the format for 40 the Schedule of Values. 41 42 Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values: 43 44 Project name and location. 45 Name of the Architect. 46 Project number. 47 Contractor's name and address. 48 Date of submittal. 49 50 Arrange the Schedule of Values in a tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for 51 each item listed: 52 53 Generic name. 54 Related Specification Section. 55 Name of subcontractor. 56 Name of manufacturer or fabricator. 57 Name of supplier. APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT GDA 01027-1 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Change Orders (numbers)that have affected value. 2 Dollar value. 3 Percentage of Contract Sum to the nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 4 100 percent. 5 6 Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in sufficient detail to facilitate continued evaluation 7 of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Break principal subcontract amounts down 8 into several line items. 9 10 Round amounts off to the nearest whole dollar; the total shall equal the Contract Sum. 11 12 For each part of the Work where an Application for Payment may include materials or 13 equipment, purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed, provide separate line 14 items on the Schedule of Values for initial cost of the materials, for each subsequent stage of 15 completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. 16 17 Unit-Cost Allowances: Show line item value of unit cost allowances as a product of unit cost 18 times measured quantity as estimated from the best indication in the Contract Documents. 19 20 Margins of Cost: Show line items for indirect costs, and margins on actual costs, only to the 21 extent that such items will be listed individually in Applications for Payment. Each item in the 22 Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete including its total cost and 23 proportionate share of general overhead and profit margin. 24 25 At the Contractor's option, temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not 26 direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown as separate line items in the 27 Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense. 28 29 Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values when Change Orders or 30 Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. 31 32 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 33 34 Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified 35 by the Architect and paid for by the Owner. 36 37 The initial Application for Payment, the Application for Payment at time of Substantial 38 Completion, and the final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. 39 40 Payment Application Times: Each progress payment date is as indicated in the Agreement. The 41 period of construction Work covered by each Application or Payment is the period indicated in the 42 Agreement. 43 44 Payment Application Forms: Use forms provided by the Owner for Applications for Payment; sample 45 copies may be obtained from Owner. 46 47 Application Preparation: Complete every entry on the form, including notarization and execution by 48 person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of the Owner. Incomplete applications will be 49 returned without action. 50 51 Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. 52 Use updated schedules if revisions have been made. 53 54 Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued prior to the 55 last day of the construction period covered by the application. 56 57 Transmittal: Submit 3 executed copies of each Application for Payment to the Architect by means APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT GDA 01027-2 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 ensuring receipt within 24 hours; one copy shall be complete, including waivers of lien and similar 2 attachments,when required. 3 4 Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments, and recording appropriate 5 information related to the application in a manner acceptable to the Architect. 6 7 Waivers of Mechanics Lien: Prepare liens and submit as directed by the Owner. 8 9 Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide 10 with submittal of the first Application for Payment include the following: 11 12 List of subcontractors. 13 List of principal suppliers and fabricators. 14 Schedule of Values. 15 Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final). 16 Schedule of principal products. 17 Schedule of unit prices. 18 Submittal Schedule (preliminary if not final). 19 List of Contractor's staff assignments. 20 List of Contractor's principal consultants. 21 Copies of building permits. 22 Copies of authorizations and licenses from governing authorities for performance of the Work. 23 Initial progress report. 24 Report of pre-construction meeting. 25 Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 26 27 Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: Following issuance of the Certificate of 28 Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment; this application shall reflect any 29 Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated 30 portions of the Work. 31 32 Administrative actions and submittals that shall proceed or coincide with this application include: 33 34 Occupancy permits and similar approvals. 35 Warranties(guarantees)and maintenance agreements. 36 Test/adjust/balance records. 37 Maintenance instructions. 38 Meter readings. 39 Start-up performance reports. 40 Change-over information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation and maintenance. 41 Final cleaning. 42 Application for reduction of retainage, and consent of surety. 43 Advice on shifting insurance coverages. 44 Final progress photographs. 45 List of incomplete Work, recognized as exceptions to Architect's Certificate of Substantial 46 Completion. 47 48 Final Payment Application: Administrative actions and submittals which must precede or coincide with 49 submittal of the final payment Application for Payment include the following: 50 51 Completion of Project closeout requirements. 52 Completion of items specified for completion after Substantial Completion. 53 Assurance that unsettled claims will be settled. 54 Assurance that Work not complete and accepted will be completed without undue delay. 55 Transmittal of required Project construction records to Owner. 56 Certified property survey. 57 Proof that taxes, fees and similar obligations have been paid. APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT GDA 01027-3 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Removal of temporary facilities and services. 2 Removal of surplus materials, rubbish and similar elements. 3 Change of door locks to Owner's access. 4 5 6 PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not Applicable). 7 8 9 PART 3- EXECUTION (Not Applicable). 10 11 12 END OF SECTION 01027 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT GDA 01027-4 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 SECTION 01030-ALTERNATES 2 3 4 PART 1 -GENERAL 5 6 7 RELATED DOCUMENTS 8 9 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and 10 other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 11 12 SUMMARY 13 14 This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for Alternates. 15 16 Definition: An Alternate is an amount proposed by Bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain 17 construction activities defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from 18 Base Bid amount if the Owner decides to accept a corresponding change in either the amount of 19 construction to be completed, or in the products, materials, equipment, systems or installation 20 methods described in Contract Documents. 21 22 Coordination: Coordinate related Work and modify or adjust adjacent Work as necessary to ensure 23 that Work affected by each accepted Alternate is complete and fully integrated into the project. 24 25 Notification: Immediately following the award of the Contract, prepare and distribute to each party 26 involved, notification of the status of each Alternate. Indicate whether Alternates have been accepted, 27 rejected or deferred for consideration at a later date. Include a complete description of negotiated 28 modifications to Alternates. 29 30 Schedule: A "Schedule of Alternates" is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections 31 referenced in the Schedule contain requirements for materials and methods necessary to achieve the 32 Work described under each Alternate. 33 34 Include as part of each Alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects and similar items 35 incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not mentioned as part of the 36 Alternate. 37 38 39 PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Applicable). 40 41 42 PART 3- EXECUTION (Not Applicable) 43 ALTERNATES GDA 01030- 1 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES 2 3 Alternate No.1: Delete the fence grounding requirements indicated in Section 02820, "Chain- 4 Link Fences and Gates". 5 6 Alternate No.2: Provide 7-gage tension wire in lieu of the bottom rail requirements indicated in 7 Section 02820, "Chain-Link Fences and Gates". Provide bottom rail each side 8 at corners and fence direction changes only. 9 10 Alternate No.3: Provide interior door and window frames as indicated in Section 08125, 11 "Prefinished Steel Door and Window Frames," in lieu of aluminum frames 12 indicated in Sections 08120 and 08121. 13 14 Alternate N_o.4: Provide Armstrong Commercial Flooring, 4" x 36" vinyl wood planks, TP 047, 15 "rite wood coal," in Second Floor Break Room, Rm 299, in lieu of Armstrong 16 "Striations" 12 x 24 VCT. 17 18 Alternate No.5: Provide Armstrong Commercial Flooring, 4" x 36" vinyl wood planks, TP 047, 19 "rite wood coal," and TP 052, "american walnut sienna," in Second Floor 20 Coffee Room, Rm 258, in pattern indicated on the Drawings, in lieu of 21 Armstrong"Striations" 12 x 24 VCT. 22 23 Alternate No.6: Provide Armstrong #2758 ceiling tile and 4" Axiom trim in lieu of the #1761 24 ceiling tile indicated on the Drawings Finishes Legend. 25 26 Alternate No.7: Provide vapor retarder system as indicated in Section 09681, "Carpet Tile." 27 Provide all work to fully install system under all carpet tile locations. 28 29 Alternate No.8: Provide power poles in lieu of floor boxes. 30 31 Alternate No.9: Provide existing 2 x 4 parabolic light fixtures in Open Office in lieu of 32 suspended indirect light fixtures. Relamp all fixtures. 33 34 35 END OF SECTION 01030 ALTERNATES GDA 01030-2 GDA#12018.00 December 14,2012 Issue for Permit 1 SECTION 01035-MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 2 3 4 PART 1 -GENERAL 5 6 RELATED DOCUMENTS 7 8 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and 9 other Division 1 Specification sections, apply to this section. 10 11 SUMMARY 12 13 This section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing 14 Contract modifications. 15 16 Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 17 18 Division 1 Section "Submittals"for requirements for the Contractor's Construction Schedule. 19 20 Division 1 Section "Application for Payment" for administrative procedures governing 21 applications for payment. 22 23 Division 1 Section "Product Substitutions"for administrative procedures for handling requests 24 for substitutions made after award of the Contract. 25 26 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK 27 28 Supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving an adjustment to the 29 Contract Sum or Contract Time, will be issued by the Architect/Owner on AIA form G710, Architect's 30 Supplemental Instructions. 31 32 CHANGE ORDER PROPOSAL REQUESTS 33 34 Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Proposed changes in the Work that will require adjustment to the 35 Contract Sum or Contract Time will be issued by the Architect/Owner, with a detailed description of 36 the proposed change and supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications, if necessary. 37 38 Proposal requests issued by the Architect/Owner are for information only. Do not consider 39 them an instruction either to stop work in progress, or to execute the proposed change. 40 41 Unless otherwise indicated in the proposal request, within 10 days of receipt of the proposal 42 request, submit to the Architect for the Owner's review an estimate of cost necessary to 43 execute the proposed change. 44 45 Include a list of exact quantities of products to be purchased and unit costs, along with 46 the total amount of purchases to be made , and a complete labor cost breakdown. 47 Where requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 48 49 Include a complete labor cost breakdown. 50 51 Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade 52 discounts. 53 54 Include a statement indicating the effect the proposed change in the Work will have 55 on the Contract Time. 56 57 Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G 709 for Change Order Proposal Requests. MODIFICATION PROCEDURES GDA 01035- 1 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 Contractor-Initiated Change Order Proposal Requests: When latent or other unforseen conditions 3 require modifications to the Contract,the Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for 4 a change to the Architect/Owner. 5 6 Include a statement outlining the reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the 7 Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the 8 proposed change on the Contract Sum and Contract Time. 9 10 Include a list of quantities of products to be purchased and unit costs along with the total 11 amount of purchases to be made. Where requested, furnish survey data to substantiate 12 quantities. 13 14 Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade 15 discounts. 16 17 Comply with requirements in Section "Product Substitutions" if the proposed change in the 18 Work requires the substitution of one product or system for a product or system specified. 19 20 Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G 709 for Change Order Proposal Requests. 21 22 ALLOWANCES 23 24 Allowance Adjustment: Base each Change Order Proposal Request for an allowance cost 25 adjustment solely on the difference between the actual purchase amount and the allowance, 26 multiplied by the final measurement of work-in-place, with reasonable allowances, where applicable, 27 for cutting losses,tolerances, mixing wastes, normal product imperfections, and similar margins. 28 29 Include installation costs in the purchase amount only where indicated as part of the 30 allowance. 31 32 When requested, prepare explanations and documentation to substantiate the margins 33 claimed. 34 35 Submit substantiation of a change in scope of work claimed in the Change Orders related to 36 unit-cost allowances. 37 38 The Owner reserves the right to establish the actual quantity of work-in-place by independent 39 quantity survey, measure, or count. 40 41 Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the allowance described 42 in the Contract Documents, whether for the purchase order amount or Contractor's handling, labor, 43 installation, overhead, and profit, within 20 days of receipt of the change order or construction change 44 directive authorizing work to proceed. Claims submitted later than 20 days will be rejected. 45 46 The Change Order cost amount shall not include the Contractor's or Subcontractor's indirect 47 expense except when it is clearly demonstrated that either the nature or scope of work 48 required was changed from that which could have been foreseen from the description of the 49 allowance and other information in Contract Documents. 50 51 No change to the Contractor's indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher or lower 52 priced materials or systems of the same scope and nature as originally indicated. 53 54 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE 55 56 Construction Change Directive: When the Owner and Contractor are not in total agreement on the 57 terms of a Change Order Proposal Request, the Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive MODIFICATION PROCEDURES GDA 01035-2 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 on AIA Form G714, instructing the Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent 2 inclusion in a Change Order. 3 4 The Construction Change Directive will contain a complete description of the change in the 5 Work and designate the method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or 6 Contract Time. 7 8 Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the 9 Construction Change Directive. 10 11 After completion of the change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to 12 substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. 13 14 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 15 16 Upon the Owner's approval of a Change Order Proposal Request, the Owner will issue a Change 17 Order for signatures of the Owner and Contractor on the Owner's Change Order Form, as provided in 18 the Conditions of the Contract. 19 20 21 Chancre Order Form: Use forms provided by the Owner for Change Order Proposals; sample copies 22 are included as part of the Construction Agreement.. 23 24 PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) 25 26 27 PART 3- EXECUTION (Not Applicable) 28 29 30 END OF SECTION 01035 31 MODIFICATION PROCEDURES GDA 01035-3 GDA#12018.00 December 14,2012 Issue for Permit 1 SECTION 01040- PROJECT COORDINATION 2 3 4 PART 1 -GENERAL 5 6 RELATED DOCUMENTS: 7 8 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and 9 other Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 10 11 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 12 13 Minimum administrative and supervisory requirements necessary for coordination of work on the 14 project include but are not necessarily limited to the following: 15 16 Coordination and meetings. 17 18 Administrative and supervisory personnel. 19 20 Surveys and records or reports. 21 22 Limitations for use of site. 23 24 Special reports. 25 26 General installation provisions. 27 28 Cleaning and protection. 29 30 Conservation and salvage. 31 32 COORDINATION AND MEETINGS: 33 34 Coordination Drawings: Prepare coordination drawings where work by separate entities requires 35 fabrication off-site of products and materials which must accurately interface. Coordination drawings 36 shall indicate how work shown by separate shop drawings will interface, and shall indicate sequence 37 for installation. Comply with all requirements of the "submittals"section. 38 39 Monthly Coordination Meetings: Hold monthly general project coordination meetings at regularly 40 scheduled times convenient for all parties involved. These meetings are in addition to specific 41 meetings held for other purposes, such as regular project meetings and special preinstallation 42 meetings. Request representation at each meeting by every party currently involved in coordination or 43 planning for the work of the entire project. Conduct meetings in a manner which will resolve 44 coordination problems. Record results of the meeting and distribute copies to everyone in attendance 45 and to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting. 46 47 At Contractor's option, monthly coordination meetings can be held integrally with monthly 48 progress meetings as specified in section "Schedules, Reports, Payments". 49 50 SURVEYS AND RECORDS/REPORTS: 51 52 General: Working from lines and levels established by the property survey, establish and maintain 53 bench marks and other dependable markers. Establish bench marks and markers to set lines and 54 levels for work at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to properly locate each element 55 of the project. Calculate and measure required dimensions as shown within recognized tolerances. 56 Drawings shall not be scaled to determine dimensions. Advise entities performing work, of marked 57 lines and levels provided for their use. PROJECT COORDINATION GDA 01040- 1 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 Surveyor: Engage a Land Surveyor or Professional Engineer experienced and specializing in land 3 survey work, who is registered in the State where the project is located, to perform those services 4 specified in this article. The Surveyor for this project will be Carter and Burgess, Inc. 5 6 Survey Procedures: Before proceeding with the layout of actual work, verify the layout information 7 shown on the drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. As work 8 proceeds, check every major element for line, level and plumb. Maintain a surveyor's log or record 9 book of such checks; make this log or record book available for the Architect or Engineer's reference. 10 Record deviations from required lines and levels, and advise the Architect or Engineer promptly upon 11 detection of deviations that exceed indicated or recognized tolerances. Record deviations which are 12 accepted, and not corrected, on record drawings. 13 14 LIMITATIONS ON USE OF THE SITE: 15 16 General: Limitations on site usage as well as specific requirements that impact site utilization are 17 indicated on the drawings and by other contract documents. In addition to these limitations and 18 requirements administer allocation of available space equitably among entities needing both access 19 and space so as to produce the best overall efficiency in performance of the total work of the project. 20 Schedule deliveries so as to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and 21 equipment on site. 22 23 SPECIAL REPORTS: 24 25 General: Submit special reports directly to the Owner within one day of an occurrence. Submit a 26 copy of the report to the Architect/Engineer and other entities that are affected by the occurence. 27 28 Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at the site, 29 prepare and submit a special report. List chain of events, persons participating, response by the 30 Contractor's personnel, an evaluation of the results or effects and similar pertinent information. Advise 31 the Owner in advance when such events are known or predictable. 32 33 34 PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not Applicable). 35 36 37 PART 3- EXECUTION 38 39 GENERAL INSTALLATION PROVISIONS: 40 41 Pre-Installation Conferences: Hold a pre-installation meeting at the project site well before installation 42 of each unit of work which requires coordination with other work. Verify with local building officials if 43 there are any local conferences required by the code. Installer and representatives of the 44 manufacturers and fabricators who are involved in or affected by that unit of work, and with its 45 coordination or integration with other work that has preceded or will follow shall attend this meeting. 46 Advise the Owner, Architect/Engineer and any required local officials of scheduled meeting dates. 47 48 At each meeting review progress of other work and preparations for the particular work under 49 consideration including specific requirements for the following: 50 51 Contract documents. 52 Options. 53 Related change orders. 54 Purchases. 55 Deliveries. 56 Shop drawings, product data and quality control samples. 57 Possible conflicts and compatibility problems. PROJECT COORDINATION GDA 01040-2 GDA#12018.00 December 14,2012 Issue for Permit 1 Time schedules. 2 Weather limitations. 3 Manufacturer's recommendations. 4 Compatibility of materials. 5 Acceptability of substrates. 6 Temporary facilities. 7 Space and access limitations. 8 Governing regulations. 9 Safety. 10 Inspection and testing requirements. 11 Required performance results. 12 Recording requirements. 13 Protection. 14 15 Record significant discussions of each conference, and record agreements and 16 disagreements, along with the final plan of action. Distribute the record of meeting promptly to 17 everyone concerned, including the Owner and Architect/Engineer. 18 19 Do not proceed with the work if the pre-installation conference cannot be successfully 20 concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of 21 the work and reconvene pre-installation at the earliest feasible date. 22 23 Installer's Inspection of Conditions: Require the Installer of each major unit of work to inspect the 24 substrate to receive the work and conditions under which the work is to be performed. The Installer 25 shall report all unsatisfactory conditions in writing to the Contractor. Do not proceed with the work 26 until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. 27 28 Manufacturer's Instructions: Where installations include manufactured products, comply with the 29 manufacturer's applicable instructions and recommendations for installation, to the extent that these 30 instructions and recommendations are more explicit or more stringent than requirements indicated in 31 the contract documents. 32 33 Inspect each item of materials or equipment immediately prior to installation. Reject damaged and 34 defective items. 35 36 Provide attachment and connection devices and methods for securing work. Secure work true to line 37 and level, and within recognized industry tolerances. Allow expansion and building movement. 38 Provide uniform joint width in exposed work. Arrange joints in exposed work to obtain the best visual 39 effect. Refer questionable visual-effect choices to the Architect/Engineer for final decision. 40 41 Recheck measurements and dimensions of the work, as an integral step of starting each installation. 42 43 Install each unit-of-work during weather conditions and project status which will ensure the best 44 possible results in coordination with the entire work. Isolate each unit of work from incompatible work 45 as necessary to prevent deterioration. 46 47 Coordinate enclosure of the work with required inspections and tests, so as to minimize the necessity 48 of uncovering the work for that purpose. 49 50 Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount individual units of work at 51 industry recognized standard mounting heights for the particular application indicated. Refer 52 questionable mounting height choices to the Architect/Engineer for final decision. 53 54 CLEANING AND PROTECTION: 55 56 General: During handling and installation of work at the project site, clean and protect work in 57 progress and adjoining work at the basis of continuous maintenance. Apply protective covering on PROJECT COORDINATION GDA 01040-3 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 installed work where it is required to ensure freedom from damage or deterioration at time of 2 substantial completion. 3 4 Clean and perform maintenance on installed work as frequently as necessary through the remainder 5 of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without 6 damaging effects. 7 8 Limiting Exposures of Work: To the extent possible through reasonable control and protection 9 methods, supervise performance of the work in such a manner and by such means which will ensure 10 that none of the work, whether completed or in progress, will be subjected to harmful, dangerous, 11 damaging or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. Such exposures include, 12 where applicable, but not by way of limitation the following: 13 14 Excessive static or dynamic loading. 15 Excessive internal or external pressures. 16 Excessively high or low temperatures. 17 Thermal shock. 18 Excessively high or low humidity. 19 Air contamination or pollution. 20 Water or ice. 21 Solvents. 22 Chemicals. 23 Light. 24 Radiation. 25 Puncture. 26 Abrasion. 27 Heavy traffic. 28 Soiling. 29 Bacteria. 30 Insect infestation. 31 Combustion. 32 Electrical current. 33 High speed operation, improper lubrication, unusual wear or other misuse. 34 Incompatible interface. 35 Destructive testing. 36 Misalignment. 37 Excessive weathering. 38 Unprotected storage. 39 Improper shipping or handling. 40 Theft. 41 Vandalism. 42 43 C_ ONSERVATION AND SALVAGE: 44 45 General: It is a requirement for supervision and administration of the work that construction 46 operations be carried out with the maximum possible consideration given to conservation of energy, 47 water and materials. In addition maximum consideration shall be given to salvaging materials and 48 equipment involved in performance of the work but not incorporated therein. Refer to other sections 49 for required disposition of salvage materials which are the Owner's property. 50 51 52 END OF SECTION 01040 PROJECT COORDINATION GDA 01040-4 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 SECTION 01045-CUTTING AND PATCHING 2 3 PART 1 -GENERAL 4 5 6 RELATED DOCUMENTS: 7 8 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and 9 other Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 10 11 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS: 12 13 Definition: "Cutting and patching" includes cutting into existing construction to provide for the 14 installation or performance of other work and subsequent fitting and patching required to restore 15 surfaces to their original condition. 16 17 "Cutting and patching" is performed for coordination of the work, to uncover work for access 18 or inspection, to obtain samples for testing, to permit alterations to be performed or for other 19 similar purposes. 20 21 Cutting and patching performed during the manufacture of products, or during the initial 22 fabrication, erection or installation processes is not considered to be "cutting and patching" 23 under this definition. Drilling of holes to install fasteners and similar operations are also not 24 considered to"cutting and patching". 25 26 "Demolition" and "Selective Demolition" are recognized as related-but-separate categories of 27 work, which may or may not require cutting and patching as defined in this section; refer to 28 "Demolition"and "Selective Demolition"sections of Division 2. 29 30 Refer to other sections of these specifications for specific cutting and patching requirements and 31 limitations applicable to individual units of work. 32 33 Unless otherwise specified requirements of this section apply to mechanical and electrical 34 work. Refer to Division-15 and Division-16 sections for additional requirements and limitations 35 on cutting and patching of mechanical and electrical work. 36 37 QUALITY ASSURANCE: 38 39 Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural work in a manner that would result 40 in a reduction of load-carrying capacity or of load-deflection ratio. 41 42 Before cutting and patching the following categories of work, obtain the Architect/Engineer's approval 43 to proceed with cutting and patching as described in the procedural proposal for cutting and patching. 44 45 Structural steel. 46 47 Miscellaneous structural metals, including lintels, equipment supports, stair systems and 48 similar categories of work. 49 50 Structural concrete. 51 52 Foundation construction. 53 54 Bearing and retaining walls. 55 56 Structural decking. 57 CUTTING AND PATCHING GDA 01045-1 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Exterior curtain wall construction. 2 3 Piping, ductwork, vessels and equipment. 4 5 Operational and Safety Limitations: Do not cut and patch operational elements or safety related 6 components in a manner that would result in a reduction of their capacity to perform in the manner 7 intended, including energy performance, or that would result in increased maintenance, or decreased 8 operational life or decreased safety. 9 10 Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch work exposed on the building's exterior or in it's occupied 11 spaces, in a manner that would, in the Architect/Engineer's opinion, result in lessening the building's 12 aesthetic qualities. Do not cut and patch work in a manner that would result in substantial visual 13 evidence of cut and patch work. Remove and replace work judged by the Architect/Engineer to be cut 14 and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. 15 16 If possible retain the original installer or fabricator, or another recognized experienced and specialized 17 firm to cut and patch the following categories of exposed work. 18 19 Processed concrete finishes. 20 21 Colored concrete work. 22 23 Ornamental metal. 24 25 Stone work 26 27 Roofing. 28 29 Window wall system. 30 31 Brick work. 32 33 SUBMITTALS: 34 35 Procedural Proposal for Cutting and Patching: Where prior approval of cutting and patching is 36 required, submit proposed procedures for this work well in advance of the time work will be performed 37 and request approval to proceed. Include the following information, as applicable, in the submittal: 38 39 Describe nature of the work and how it is to be performed, indicating why cutting and patching 40 cannot be avoided. Describe anticipated results of the work in terms of changes to existing 41 work, including structural, operational and visual changes as well as other significant 42 elements. 43 44 List products to be used and firms that will perform work. 45 46 Give dates when work is expected to be performed. 47 48 List utilities that will be disturbed or otherwise be affected by work, including those that will be 49 relocated and those that will be out-of-service temporarily. Indicate how long utility service will 50 be disrupted. 51 52 Where cutting and patching of structural work involves the addition of reinforcement, submit 53 details and engineering calculations to show how that reinforcement is integrated with original 54 structure to satisfy requirements. 55 56 Approval by the Architect/Engineer to proceed with cutting and patching work does not waive 57 the Architect/Engineer's right to later require complete removal and replacement of work found CUTTING AND PATCHING GDA 01045-2 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 to be cut and patched in an unsatisfactory manner. 2 3 PART 2- PRODUCTS 4 5 6 MATERIALS: 7 8 General: Except as otherwise indicated, or as directed by the Architect/Engineer, use materials for 9 cutting and patching that are identical to existing materials. If identical materials are not available, or 10 cannot be used, use materials that match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible with 11 regard to visual effect. Use materials for cutting and patching that will result in equal-or-better 12 performance characteristics 13 14 15 PART 3- EXECUTION 16 17 18 INSPECTION: 19 20 Before cutting, examine the surfaces to be cut and patched and the conditions under which the work is 21 to be performed. If unsafe or otherwise unsatisfactory conditions are encountered, take corrective 22 action before proceeding with the work. 23 24 PREPARATION: 25 26 Temporary Support: To prevent failure provide temporary support of work to be cut. 27 28 Protection: Protect other work during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection 29 from adverse weather conditions for that part of the project that may be exposed during cutting and 30 patching operations. 31 32 Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining 33 areas. 34 35 Take precautions not to cut existing pipe, conduit or duct serving the building but scheduled to be 36 relocated until provisions have been made to bypass them. 37 38 PERFORMANCE: 39 40 General: Employ skilled workmen to perform cutting and patching work. Except as otherwise 41 indicated or as approved by the Architect/Engineer, proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest 42 feasible time and complete work without delay. 43 44 Cutting: Cut the work using methods that are least likely to damage work to be retained or adjoining 45 work. Where possible review proposed procedures with the original installer; comply with original 46 installer's recommendations. 47 48 In general, where cutting is required use hand of small power tools designed for sawing or 49 grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut through concrete and masonry using a cutting 50 machine such as a carborundum saw or core drill to insure s neat hole. Cut holes and slots 51 neatly to size required with minimum disturbance of adjacent work. To avoid marring existing 52 finished surfaces, cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 53 Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 54 55 Comply with requirements of applicable sections of Division 2 where cutting and patching 56 requires excavating and backfilling. 57 CUTTING AND PATCHING GDA 01045-3 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 By-pass utility services such as pipe and conduit, before cutting, where such utility services 2 are shown or required to be removed, relocated or abandoned. Cut-off conduit and pipe in 3 walls or partitions to be removed. After by-pass and cutting, cap, valve or plug and seal tight 4 remaining portion of pipe and conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter. 5 6 Patching: Patch with seams which are durable and as invisible as possible. Comply with specified 7 tolerances for the work. 8 9 Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of work. 10 11 Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and where necessary extend finish restoration into 12 retained adjoining work in a manner which will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. 13 14 Where removal of walls or partitions extends one finished area into another finished area, 15 patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space to provide an even surface of 16 uniform color and appearance. If necessary to achieve uniform color and appearance, 17 remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials. 18 19 Where patch occurs in a smooth painted surface, extend final paint coat over entire 20 unbroken surface containing patch, after patched area has received prime and base 21 coat. 22 23 Patch, repair or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even plane surface of 24 uniform appearance. 25 26 CLEANING: 27 28 Thoroughly clean areas and spaces where work is performed or used as access to work. Remove 29 completely point, mortar, oils, putty and items of similar nature. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit and 30 similar features before painting or other finishing is applied. Restore damaged pipe covering to its 31 original condition. 32 33 END OF SECTION 01045 CUTTING AND PATCHING GDA 01045-4 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 SECTION 01050- FIELD ENGINEERING 2 3 PART 1 - GENERAL 4 5 6 RELATED DOCUMENTS 7 8 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions 9 and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 10 11 SUMMARY 12 13 General: This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for field engineering 14 services, including, but not necessarily limited to, the following: 15 16 Land survey Work. 17 Civil engineering services. 18 Structural engineering services. 19 20 SUBMITTALS 21 22 Certificates: Submit a certificate signed by the Land Surveyor or Professional Engineer certifying that 23 the location and elevation of improvements comply with the Contract Documents. 24 Final Property Survey: Submit 10 copies of the final property survey. 25 26 Project Record Documents: Submit a record of Work performed and record survey data as required 27 under provisions of Sections"Submittals" and "Project Closeout". 28 29 QUALITY ASSURANCE 30 Surveyor: Engage a Registered Land Surveyor registered in the State where the project is located, to 31 perform land surveying services required. 32 Engineer: Engage a Professional Engineer of the discipline required, registered in the state in which 33 the Project is located, to perform required engineering services. 34 35 36 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) 37 38 39 PART 3- EXECUTION 40 41 42 EXAMINATION 43 The Owner will furnish a survey describing the physical characteristics of the site, legal limitations, 44 utility locations, and other information needed to perform the Work.. 45 46 Verify layout information shown on the Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing 47 benchmarks before proceeding to layout the Work. Locate and protect existing benchmarks and 48 control points. Preserve permanent reference points during construction. 49 50 Do not change or relocate benchmarks or control points without prior written approval. 51 Promptly report lost or destroyed reference points, or requirements to relocate reference 52 points because of necessary changes in grades or locations. 53 54 Promptly replace lost or destroyed project control points. Base replacements on the original 55 survey control points. 56 57 Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on the site, referenced to data FIELD ENGINEERING GDA 01050 - 1 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 established by survey control points. 2 3 Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents. 4 5 Existing utilities and equipment: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and 6 construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and 7 verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction. 8 9 Prior to construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary 10 sewer, storm sewer and water service piping. 11 12 PERFORMANCE 13 14 Working from lines and levels established by the property survey, establish benchmarks and markers 15 to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to properly locate each 16 element of the Project. Calculate and measure required dimensions within indicated or recognized 17 tolerances. Do not scale Drawings to determine dimensions. 18 19 Advise entities engaged in construction activities, of marked lines and levels provided for their 20 use. 21 22 As construction proceeds, check every major element for line, level and plumb. 23 24 Surveyor's Loq: Maintain a surveyor's log of control and other survey Work. Make this log available 25 for reference. 26 27 Record deviations from required lines and levels, and advise the Architect when deviations 28 that exceed indicated or recognized tolerances are detected. On Project Record Drawings, 29 record deviations that are accepted and not corrected. 30 31 On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other Work requiring field 32 engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles and 33 elevations of construction and sitework. 34 35 Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, stakes for grading, 36 fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes and invert elevations by instrumentation and similar 37 appropriate means. 38 39 Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out batter boards for structures, building foundations, 40 column grids and locations, floor levels and control lines and levels required for mechanical and 41 electrical Work. 42 43 Existing Utilities: Furnish information necessary to adjust, move or relocate existing structures, utility 44 poles, lines, services or other appurtenances located in, or affected by construction. Coordinate with 45 local authorities having jurisdiction. 46 47 Final Property Survey: Before Substantial Completion, prepare a final property survey showing 48 significant features (real property)for the Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by the 49 Surveyor, to the effect that principal metes, bounds, lines and levels of the Project are accurately 50 positioned as shown on the survey. 51 52 Recording: At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded by or with local 53 governing authorities as the official "property survey". 54 END OF SECTION 01050 FIELD ENGINEERING GDA 01050-2 GDA#12018.00 December 14,2012 Issue for Permit 1 SECTION 01092-ABBREVIATIONS 61 ANN ANNUNCIATOR 2 62 ANOD ANODIZED * 3 PART 1 -GENERAL 63 ANT ANTENNA 4 64 AP ACCESS PANEL 5 65 APPAR APPARATUS 6 GENERAL 66 APPX APPENDIX 7 67 ARCH ARCHITECT(URAL) 8 The following schedule of abbreviations represent 68 ARF ABOVE RAISED FLOOR * 9 a list of potential abbreviations that may be used 69 ASC ABOVE SUSPENDED CEILING * 10 in this Project Manual or on the Drawings. Not all 70 ASD AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER DRAIN * 11 abbreviations in this list will be used on any 71 ASL ABOVE SEA LEVEL * 12 particular project. 72 ASPH ASPHALT 13 73 ASSN ASSOCIATION 14 This list shall not be used as a bill of materials, 74 ASSY ASSEMBLY 15 products or conditions for this Project. 75 ASU AIR SUPPLY UNIT * 16 76 ASYM ASYMMETRICAL 17 77 AT AIR TIGHT 18 SCHEDULE OF ABBREVIATIONS 78 ATCH ATTACHMENT 19 79 ATM ATMOSPHERE 20 80 AV AIR VENT * 21 3/C CONDUCTORS, NUMBER OF(3) 81 AV AUDIO VISUAL * 22 NE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER * 82 AVE AVENUE 23 AAP ALARM ANNUNCIATOR PANEL * 83 AWG AMERICAN WIRE GAGE 24 AB ANCHOR BOLT 84 AZ AZIMUTH 25 ABAN ABANDON * 85 B BATHROOM * 26 ABC AGGREGATE BASE COURSE * 86 B/B BACK TO BACK * 27 ABV ABOVE 87 BA BURGLAR ALARM * 28 AC AIR CONDITIONING * 88 BAF BAFFLE 29 AC ALTERNATING CURRENT 89 BAL BALANCE 30 AC ASPHALTIC CONCRETE * 90 BAT BATTERY 31 ACOUS PNL ACOUSTICAL PANEL * 91 BB BASEBOARD * 32 ACOUS TILE ACOUSTICAL TILE * 92 BB BULLETIN BOARD 33 ACP ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING * 93 BBRG BALL BEARING 34 ACR PL ACRYLIC PLASTIC * 94 BBS BOTTOM OF BACKSLOPE * 35 ACU AIR CONDITIONING UNIT * 95 BC BACK OF CURB * 36 ACWT ACOUSTICAL WALL TREATMENT * 96 BD BOARD 37 AD ACCESS DOOR * 97 BETW BETWEEN 38 AD AREA DRAIN 98 BEV BEVEL 39 ADC AUTOMATIC DOOR CLOSER * 99 BF BOTH FACES * 40 ADDL ADDITIONAL * 100 BF BOTTOM FACE 41 ADDM ADDENDUM * 101 BFP BACKFLOW PREVENTER * 42 ADH ADHESIVE 102 BFS BOTTOM OF FORESLOPE * 43 ADJ ADJUSTABLE 103 BI BLACK IRON 44 ADJC ADJACENT * 104 BITUM BITUMINOUS 45 ADS AUTOMATIC DOOR SEAL 105 BJT BED JOINT * 46 AF ACCESS FLOOR * 106 BL BASE LINE 47 AFF ABOVE FINISH FLOOR * 107 BLDG BUILDING 48 AFG ABOVE FINISH GRADE * 108 BLK BLOCK 49 AFS ABOVE FINISH SLAB * 109 BLKG BLOCKING 50 AGGR AGGREGATE 110 BLKHD BULKHEAD * 51 AHR ANCHOR 111 BLR BOILER 52 AHU AIR HANDLING UNIT * 112 BLST BALLAST 53 AL ALUMINUM 113 BLVD BOULEVARD * 54 ALM ALARM 114 BLW BELOW 55 ALT ALTERNATE * 115 BLW CLG BELOW CEILING * 56 ALT NO ALTERNATE NUMBER * 116 BLW FFLR BELOW FINISH FLOOR * 57 ALUM ALUMINUM 117 BM BEAM 58 AMB AMBIENT 118 BM BENCH MARK 59 AMP AMPERE 119 BOT BOTTOM 60 AMT AMOUNT 120 BO BOTTOM OF Note: An asterisk (*) indicates the term is not in ANSI Y1.1 or that the abbreviation shown is not in compliance with the one shown in ANSI Y1.1. The absence of an asterisk(*)indicates the abbreviation agrees with ANSI Y1.1. ABBREVIATIONS GDA 01092-1 GDA#12018.00 December 14,2012 Issue for Permit 1 BP BASE PLATE 61 CL CENTER LINE 2 BP BOILING POINT 62 CLG CEILING 3 BR BEDROOM 63 CLG DIFF CEILING DIFFUSER * 4 BR BEND RADIUS 64 CLG HT CEILING HEIGHT * 5 BRCG BRACING * 65 CLG REG CEILING REGISTER * 6 BRDG BRIDGING * 66 CLJ CONTROL JOINT 7 BRDG JST BRIDGING JOIST * 67 CLL COLUMN LINE * 8 BRG BEARING 68 CLL CONTRACT LIMIT LINE * 9 BRG PL BEARING PLATE * 69 CLO CLOSET 10 BRK BRICK 70 CLOS CLOSURE 11 BRKR BREAKER 71 CLP CLAMP 12 BRKT BRACKET 72 CLR CLEAR 13 BRS BRASS 73 CMP CORRUGATED METAL PIPE 14 BRZ BRONZE 74 CMPST COMPOSITE 15 BS BOTH SIDES 75 CMU CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT * 16 BSHG BUSHING 76 CND CONDUIT 17 BSMT BASEMENT 77 CNR CORNER * 18 BSP BLACK STEEL PIPE * 78 CNTR COUNTER 19 BTU BRITISH THERMAL UNIT 79 CO CAPPED OUTLET * 20 BTUH BRITISH THERMAL UNITS PER HOUR * 80 CO CASED OPENING * 21 BU BUILT-UP * 81 CO CLEANOUT 22 BUR BUILT-UP ROOFING * 82 COAX COAXIAL CABLE * 23 BW BOTH WAYS 83 COEF COEFFICIENT 24 C&G CURB AND GUTTER * 84 COL COLUMN 25 C/C CENTER TO CENTER * 85 COM COMMON 26 CAB CABINET 86 COMB COMBINATION 27 CAD CADMIUM * 87 COMM COMMUNICATION 28 CAL CALIBRATE 88 COMPL COMPLETE 29 CAP CAPACITY 89 COMPT COMPARTMENT 30 CARP CARPET 90 CONC CONCRETE 31 CAV CAVITY 91 CONC FL CONCRETE FLOOR * 32 CB CATCH BASIN 92 CONF CONFERENCE * 33 CB CORNER BEAD * 93 CONN CONNECTION 34 CBORE COUNTERBORE 94 CONSTR CONSTRUCTION 35 CCTV CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION 95 CONT CONTINUOUS(ATION) 36 CCW COUNTER CLOCKWISE 96 CONTR CONTRACT(OR) 37 CEB CONCRETE EQUIPMENT BASE * 97 COORD COORDINATE 38 CEM CEMENT 98 CORR CORRIDOR * 39 CEM PLAS CEMENT PLASTER * 99 COV COVER 40 CER CERAMIC 100 COV PL COVER PLATE * 41 CER TILE CERAMIC TILE * 101 CP CONCRETE PIPE * 42 CFE CONTRACTOR FURNISHED EQUIPMENT * 102 CP CONTROL PANEL * 43 CFLG COUNTER FLASHING 103 CPLG COUPLING 44 CG CORNER GUARD* 104 CPRS COMPRESSIBLE 45 CH CHILLER * 105 CRCMF CIRCUMFERENCE 46 CH BD CHALKBOARD * 106 CRN CROWN 47 CHAN CHANNEL 107 CRS COLD ROLLED STEEL 48 CHEM CHEMICAL 108 CS CAST STONE 49 CHFR CHAMFER * 109 CS CONTROL SWITCH * 50 CHK CHECK 110 CSB CASING BEAD * 51 CHK V CHECK VALVE * 111 CSB CONCRETE SPLASH BLOCK 52 CHR PL CHROME PLATED * 112 CSG CASING 53 CI CAST IRON 113 CSK COUNTERSUNK * 54 CIP CAST IRON PIPE 114 CSMT CASEMENT * 55 CIR CIRCLE 115 CSP CONCRETE SEWER PIPE * 56 CIRC CIRCULAR 116 CSWK CASEWORK * 57 CISP CAST IRON SOIL PIPE * 117 CT COOLING TOWER * 58 CJ CONSTRUCTION JOINT 118 CT CURRENT TRANSFORMER 59 CKT CIRCUIT 119 CTC CURRENT TRANSFORMER CABINET * 60 CKT BRKR CIRCUIT BREAKERS 120 CTD&R COMBINATION TOWEL DISPENSER& Note: An asterisk (*) indicates the term is not in ANSI Y1.1 or that the abbreviation shown is not in compliance with the one shown in ANSI Y1.1. The absence of an asterisk(*)indicates the abbreviation agrees with ANSI Y1.1. ABBREVIATIONS GDA 01092-2 GDA#12018.00 December 14,2012 Issue for Permit 1 RECEPTACLE * 61 DWH DOMESTIC WATER HEATER ' 2 CTR COOLING TOWER RETURN * 62 DWL DOWEL 3 CTS COOLING TOWER SUPPLY • 63 DWR DRAWER 4 CTV CABLE TELEVISION * 64 DWV DRAIN WASTE&VENT * 5 CUB CUBICLE 65 DX DUPLEX 6 CU FT CUBIC FOOT * 66 E EAST 7 CUH CABINET UNIT HEATER * 67 EA EACH 8 CUR CURRENT 68 ECAB ELECTRICAL CABINET * 9 CV CONTROL VALVE * 69 EDR EQUIPMENT DRAIN * 10 CW CLOCKWISE 70 EF EACH FACE 11 CW COLD WATER 71 EHD ELECTRICAL HAND DRYER * 12 CWP CIRCULATING WATER PUMP 72 EL EASEMENT LINE * 13 CY CYCLE 73 EL/ELEV ELEVATION 14 CYL CYLINDER 74 ELAST ELASTOMERIC • 15 CYL L CYLINDER LOCK 75 ELB ELBOW 16 D DEEP,DEPTH 76 ELEC ELECTRIC(AL) 17 DA DRAINAGE AREA * 77 ELEV ELEVATOR 18 DAT DATUM 78 EMER EMERGENCY 19 DBC DIAMETER BOLT CIRCLE 79 EMT ELECTRICAL METALIC TUBING 20 DBL ACT DOUBLE ACTING 80 ENAM ENAMEL 21 DBL GLZ DOUBLE GLAZING * 81 ENCL ENCLOSURE 22 DC DIRECT CURRENT 82 ENG ENGINE 23 DCI DUCT COVERING INSULATION • 83 ENGR ENGINEER 24 DCL DOOR CLOSURE 84 ENTR ENTRANCE 25 DEG DEGREE * 85 EO ELECTRICAL OUTLET * 26 DEMO DEMOLITION ' 86 EP EDGE OF PAVEMENT * 27 DET DETAIL 87 EP ELECTRICAL PANEL * 28 DF DRINKING FOUNTAIN 88 EPDM ETHYLENE PROPYLENE DIENE 29 DFR DOOR FRAME • 89 MONOMER * 30 DH DOUBLE HUNG * 90 EQL SP EQUALLY SPACED 31 DIA DIAMETER 91 EQUIP EQUIPMENT * 32 DIFF DIFFERENCE 92 EQUIV EQUIVALENT 33 DIFF DIFFUSER * 93 ERECT ERECTION 34 DIM DIMENSION 94 ESCAL ESCALATOR • 35 DIP DUCTILE IRON PIPE 95 ESMT EASEMENT * 36 DISP DISPENSER 96 EST ESTIMATE 37 DIST DISTANCE 97 EW EACH WAY 38 DISTR DISTRIBUTE (ION) 98 EWC ELECTRICAL WATER COOLER 39 DISTR PNL DISTRIBUTION PANEL • 99 EWH ELECTRICAL WATER HEATER * 40 DIV DIVIDER • 100 EXC EXCAVATE 41 DIV DIVISION 101 EXCH EXCHANGER 42 DJ DOUBLE JOIST ' 102 EXH EXHAUST 43 DL DEAD LOAD 103 EXH A EXHAUST AIR * 44 DLI DUCT LINER INSULATION ' 104 EXH DT EXHAUST DUCT * 45 DLV DOOR LOUVER ' 105 EXH FN EXHAUST FAN • 46 DMPF DAMPPROOFING ' 106 EXH GR EXHAUST GRILLE • 47 DMPR DAMPER 107 EXH HD EXHAUST HOOD * 48 DN DOWN 108 EXH RG EXHAUST REGISTER * 49 DO DITTO 109 EXP EXPANSION 50 DOP DOOR OPENING * 110 EXP BT EXPANSION BOLT * 51 DP DEW POINT 111 EXP JT EXPANSION JOINT 52 DR DRAIN 112 EXST EXISTING 53 DS DOWNSPOUT 113 EXST GR EXISTING GRADE * 54 DSP DRY STANDPIPE * 114 EXT EXTERIOR 55 DST DOOR STOP 115 EXTN EXTENSION • 56 DT DRAIN TILE 116 EXTR EXTRUSION * 57 DUPL DUPLICATE * 117 F/F FACE TO FACE • 58 DVTL DOVETAIL 118 FA FIRE ALARM • 59 DW DISHWASHER 119 FACP FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL * 60 DWG DRAWING 120 FB FIRE BLANKET * Note: An asterisk (*) indicates the term is not in ANSI Y1.1 or that the abbreviation shown is not in compliance with the one shown in ANSI Y1.1. The absence of an asterisk(*)indicates the abbreviation agrees with ANSI Y1.1. ABBREVIATIONS GDA 01092-3 GDA#12018.00 December 14,2012 Issue for Permit 1 FB FLAT BAR 61 FREQ FREQENCY 2 FBD FIBERBOARD * 62 FRT FRONT * 3 FBM FEET BOARD MEASURE * 63 FRTW FIRE RETARDENT TREATED WOOD * 4 FC FOOTCANDLE 64 FS FAR SIDE 5 FCO FLOOR CLEANOUT * 65 FSH FIRE SPRINKLER HEAD * 6 FCU FAN COIL UNIT 66 FSP FIRE STANDPIPE * 7 FD FLOOR DRAIN 67 FSTNR FASTENER 8 FDC FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION 68 FT FEET OR FOOT * 9 FDCC FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION 69 FTG FITTING 10 CABINET * 70 FU FUSE 11 FDMPR FIRE DAMPER * 71 FUR FURNACE 12 FDN FOUNDATION 72 FURN FURNITURE 13 FDV FIRE DEPARTMENT VALVE * 73 FURR FURRING * 14 FEC FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET * 74 FUT FUTURE 15 FEM FEMALE 75 FWC FABRIC WALL COVERING * 16 FEXT FIRE EXTINGUISHER 76 FWP FIRE WATER PUMP * 17 FF FAR FACE * 77 FXTR FIXTURE 18 FFA FROM FLOOR ABOVE * 78 G GAS * 19 FFB FROM FLOOR BELOW * 79 G1S GOOD ONE SIDE * 20 FFE FINISH FLOOR ELEVATION 80 G2S GOOD TWO SIDES * 21 FGL FIBERGLASS * 81 G3S GOOD THREE SIDES * 22 FH FIRE HYDRANT 82 G4S GOOD FOUR SIDES * 23 FHC FIRE HOSE CABINET 83 GA GAGE 24 FHMS FLAT HEAD MACHINE SCREW * 84 GAL GALLON 25 FHP FULL HEIGHT PARTITION * 85 GALV GALVANIZED 26 FHR FIRE HOSE RACK 86 GALVI GALVANIZED IRON 27 FHWS FLAT HEAD WOOD SCREW * 87 GALVS GALVANIZED STEEL 28 FHY FIRE HYDRANT 88 GSS GALVANIZED SHEET STEEL 29 FIN FINISH * 89 GB GRAB BAR * 30 FIN FL FINISH FLOOR * 90 GD GUTTER DRAIN * 31 FIN GR FINISH GRADE * 91 GDR GUARD RAIL 32 FL FLASHING 92 GEN GENERATOR 33 FLD FLUID * 93 GENL GENERAL 34 FLDG FOLDING 94 GENL CONTR GENERAL CONTRACT 35 FLG FLANGE 95 GFI GROUND FAULT INTERRUPTER * 36 FLR FLOOR(ING) * 96 GIP GALVANIZED IRON PIPE * 37 FLR FIN FLOOR FINISH * 97 GL GLASS 38 FLR PL FLOOR PLATE * 98 GL BLK GLASS BLOCK * 39 FLR SK FLOOR SINK * 99 GLU LAM GLUE LAMINATED * 40 FLRD FLARED 100 GLZ GLAZING 41 FLT GL FLOAT GLASS * 101 GLZ CMU GLAZED CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT * 42 FLTR FILTER 102 GND GROUND 43 FLUOR FLUORESCENT 103 GOVT GOVERNMENT 44 FMBD FORMBOARD * 104 GPD GALLONS PER DAY * 45 FN FENCE * 105 GPH GALLONS PER HOUR 46 FOB FACE OF BUILDING 106 GPM GALLONS PER MINUTE 47 FOC FACE OF CONCRETE ' 107 GPS GALLONS PER SECOND 48 FOF FACE OF FINISH * 108 GR GRAD(E)(ING) 49 FOM FACE OF MASONRY * 109 GR BM GRADE BEAM * 50 FOS FACE OF STUDS * 110 GR LN GRADE LINE * 51 FPL FIREPLACE * 111 GRL GRILLE 52 FPM FEET PER MINUTE * 112 GRTG GRATING 53 FPRF FIREPROOFING 113 GSKT GASKET 54 FPS FEET PER SECOND * 114 GSNK GOOSENECK * 55 FPT FEMALE PIPE THREAD 115 GT GREASE TRAP 56 FPW FIRE PROTECTION WATER SUPPLY * 116 GT GROUT * 57 FR FIRE RATING * 117 GUT GUTTER 58 FR FRAME 118 GVL GRAVEL 59 FR MIR FRAMED MIRROR * 119 GVTR GAS VENT THROUGH ROOF * 60 FR MIR/SHF FRAMED MIRROR AND SHELF * 120 GWH GAS WATER HEATER * Note: An asterisk (*) indicates the term is not in ANSI Y1.1 or that the abbreviation shown is not in compliance with the one shown in ANSI Y1.1. The absence of an asterisk(*)indicates the abbreviation agrees with ANSI Y1.1. ABBREVIATIONS GDA 01092-4 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 GYP GYPSUM 61 INV EL INVERT ELEVATION ' 2 GYP BD GYPSUM BOARD * 62 IP IRON PIPE 3 GYP PLASTER GYPSUM PLASTER * 63 IPS INSIDE PIPE SIZE * 4 H HIGH, HEIGHT 64 IPS INTERNATIONAL PIPE STANDARD 5 H PLAM HIGH PRESSURE LAMINATE * 65 IPS IRON PIPE SIZE 6 H&CW HOT AND COLD WATER * 66 IPT IRON PIPE THREAD 7 HB HOSE BIBB 67 ISO ISOMETRIC 8 HC HANDICAP ACCESSIBLE 68 ITC INTERIOR TELEPHONE CABINET * 9 HC HOLLOW CORE * 69 ITTB INTERIOR TELEPHONE TERMINAL BOARD ' 10 HC HOSE CABINET * 70 IW IRRIGATION WATER * 11 HD HEAD 71 JAN JANITOR * 12 HD HEAVY DUTY 72 JB/J-BOX JUNCTION BOX 13 HD JT HEAD JOINT ' 73 JC JANITOR'S CLOSET 14 HDBD HARDBOARD * 74 JCT JUNCTION 15 HDR HEADER 75 JST JOIST * 16 HDWD HARDWOOD * 76 JT JOINT 17 HDWE HARDWARE * 77 K KIP(1000 LB) * 18 HDWL HEADWALL * 78 KB KNEE BRACE 19 HEX HEXAGONAL 79 KD KILN DRIED 20 HGR HANGER 80 KD KNOCK DOWN 21 HGT HEIGHT 81 KIP FT ONE THOUSAND FOOT POUNDS ' 22 HID HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE * 82 KIT KITCHEN * 23 HM HOLLOW METAL 83 KLF KIPS PER LINEAR FOOT * 24 HMD HOLLOW METAL DOOR * 84 KO KNOCKOUT 25 HMF HOLLOW METAL FRAME * 85 KOP KNOCKOUT PANEL * 26 HNDRL HANDRAIL 86 KPL KICK PLATE 27 HORIZ HORIZONTAL/HORIZONTALLY 87 KSF KIPS PER SQUARE FOOT * 28 HP HIGH PRESSURE 88 KSI KIPS PER SQUARE INCH * 29 HP HORSEPOWER 89 KV KILOVOLT * 30 HPG HIGH PRESSURE GAS * 90 KVA KILOVOLT AMPERE * 31 HPT HIGH POINT 91 KW KILOWATT * 32 HR HOUR 92 KWH KILOWATT HOUR * 33 HS HIGH STRENGTH * 93 KWY KEYWAY 34 HSB HIGH STRENGTH BOLT * 94 L LEFT 35 HT HEAT 95 LB POUND 36 HTG HEATING 96 L-B LINE-BUS 37 HTR HEATER 97 LAB LABORATORY ' 38 HVAC HEATING,VENTILATION,AIR 98 LAD LADDER 39 CONDITIONING * 99 LAM LAMINATION 40 HVY HEAVY 100 LATL LATERAL 41 HW HOT WATER 101 LAV LAVATORY 42 HWY HIGHWAY 102 LB POUND 43 HYD HYDRANT * 103 LBL LABEL 44 HYDR HYDRAULIC 104 LBR LUMBER 45 ID IDENTIFICATION * 105 LCD LINEAR CEILING DIFFUSER * 46 ID INSIDE DIAMETER 106 LCMU LIGHTWEIGHT 47 IF INSIDE FACE * 107 CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT * 48 IGN IGNITION 108 LD BRG LOAD BEARING * 49 ILLUM ILLUMINATION 109 LDG LANDING 50 IN INCH * 110 LDR LEADER 51 INCAND INCANDESCENT 111 LF LINEAR FOOT * 52 INDL INDUSTRIAL 112 LG LENGTH, LONG 53 INL INLET 113 LH LEFT HAND 54 INSTL INSTALLATION 114 LHR LEFT HAND REVERSE * 55 INSTR INSTRUMENT 115 LIN LINEAR 56 INSUL INSULATION 116 LIQ LIQUID 57 INTERCOM INTERCOMMUNICATION 117 LKR LOCKER 58 INTLK INTERLOCK 118 LKR RM LOCKER ROOM * 59 INTR INTERIOR 119 LL LIVE LOAD 60 INV INVERT * 120 LLH LONG LEG HORIZONTAL * Note: An asterisk (*) indicates the term is not in ANSI Y1.1 or that the abbreviation shown is not in compliance with the one shown in ANSI Y1.1. The absence of an asterisk(*)indicates the abbreviation agrees with ANSI Y1.1. ABBREVIATIONS GDA 01092-5 GDA#12018.00 December 14,2012 Issue for Permit 1 LLV LONG LEG VERTICAL * 61 MLDG MOLDING 2 LNTL LINTEL 62 MLWK MILLWORK * 3 LOC LOCATION * 63 MM MILLIMETER * 4 LONG LONGITUDINAL 64 MO MASONRY OPENING 5 LP LIGHT POLE * 65 MOD MODULE(AR) 6 LP LIGHTPROOF * 66 MON MONUMENT 7 LP LIQUEFIED PETROLEUM * 67 MOT MOTOR 8 LP LOW PRESSURE 68 MPT MALE PIPE THREAD 9 LPG LIQUIFIED PETROLEUM GAS * 69 MTD MOUNTED 10 LPT LOW POINT * 70 MTG MOUNTING 11 LRG LARGE * 71 MTL METAL 12 LRV LOUVERED ROOF VENT * 72 MULL MULLION * 13 LS LAWN SPRINKLING * 73 MULT MULTIPLE 14 LS LOUDSPEAKER 74 MVBL MOVABLE 15 LS LUMP SUM * 75 MZ MULTI-ZONE * 16 LT LIGHT 76 N NORTH 17 LT WT LIGHTWEIGHT * 77 NA NOT APPLICABLE 18 LTG LIGHTING 78 NAT NATURAL 19 LTG PNL LIGHTING PANEL * 79 NEC NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE 20 LUB LUBRICATE * 80 NEG NEGATIVE 21 LV LOW VOLTAGE 81 NF NEAR FACE 22 LVL LEVEL(ER) 82 NFIPA NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSN. 23 LVR LOUVER 83 NIC NOT IN CONTRACT 24 LWC LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETE 84 NO NUMBER 25 M METER * 85 NOM NOMINAL 26 MACH MACHINE 86 NP NO PAINT * 27 MACH RM MACHINE ROOM * 87 NPF NATIONAL PIPE THREAD * 28 MAINT MAINTENANCE 88 NPL NAMEPLATE 29 MAN MANUAL * 89 NPT NATIONAL TAPER PIPE(THREAD) 30 MANUF MANUFACTURER 90 NR NOISE REDUCTION * 31 MARB MARBLE * 91 NRC NOISE REDUCTION COEFFICIENT * 32 MAS MASONRY * 92 NS NEAR SIDE 33 MAIL MATERIAL 93 NTS NOT TO SCALE 34 MAU MAKE-UP AIR UNIT * 94 0/0 OUT TO OUT * 35 MAX MAXIMUM 95 OA OVERALL 36 MBF THOUSAND BOARD FEET * 96 OC ON CENTER 37 MBH MOP/BROOM HOLDER * 97 OD OUTSIDE DIAMETER 38 MBR MEMBER 98 OD OUTSIDE DIMENSION * 39 MBTU BRITISH THERMAL UNIT(1,000) * 99 OF OUTSIDE FACE 40 MC MEDICINE CABINET 100 OFCI OWNER FURNISHED-CONTRACTOR 41 MCF THOUSAND CUBIC FEET ' 101 INSTALLED * 42 MD MANUAL DAMPER * 102 OFF OFFICE * 43 MDO MEDIUM DENSITY OVERLAID * 103 OFOI OWNER FURNISHED-OWNER INSTALLED * 44 MECH MECHANICAL 104 OPNG OPENING 45 MED MEDIUM * 105 OPP OPPOSITE 46 MEMB MEMBRANE 106 ORD OVERFLOW ROOF DRAIN * 47 MEP MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL, PLUMBING 107 OVFL OVERFLOW 48 MTL METAL 108 OH/OVHD OVERHEAD 49 METB METAL BASE 109 OPP. HAND OPPOSITE HAND 50 MEZZ MEZZANINE 110 OZ OUNCE 51 MFG MANUFACTURING 111 P POLE 52 MH MANHOLE 112 PA PIPE ANCHOR * 53 MI MILE 113 PAR PARALLEL * 54 MIN MINIMUM 114 PARG PARGING * 55 MIN MINUTE * 115 PB PANIC BAR * 56 MIR MIRROR 116 PB PUSHBUTTON 57 MISC MISCELLANEOUS 117 PBD PARTICLEBOARD * 58 MK MARK 118 PC PIECE 59 MKR MARKER 119 PC PORTLAND CEMENT * 60 ML METAL LATH * 120 PCD PAPER CUP DISPENSER * Note: An asterisk (*) indicates the term is not in ANSI Y1.1 or that the abbreviation shown is not in compliance with the one shown in ANSI Y1.1. The absence of an asterisk(*)indicates the abbreviation agrees with ANSI Y1.1. ABBREVIATIONS GDA 01092-6 GDA#12018.00 December 14,2012 Issue for Permit 1 PCF POUNDS PER CUBIC FOOT 61 RA GR RETURN AIR GRILLE * 2 PCP PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER * 62 RAD RADIUS 3 PED PEDESTAL 63 RBR RUBBER 4 PERF PERFORATED 64 RC REINFORCED CONCRETE 5 PERIM PERIMETER * 65 RC REMOTE CONTROL 6 PERM PERMANENT 66 RCB REINFORCED CONCRETE BOX * 7 PERP PERPENDICUALR 67 RCP REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE 8 PGBD PEGBOARD * 68 RCVR RECEIVER 9 PH PHASE 69 RD ROAD/ROOF DRAIN 10 PHOTO PHOTOGRAPH 70 RDC REDUCER * 11 PHS PHILLIP'S HEAD SCREW * 71 RDL ROOF DRAIN LEADER 12 PI POINT OF INTERSECTION 72 REC RECESSED 13 PIV POST INDICATOR VALVE 73 RECD RECEIVED 14 PL PLATE 74 RECPT RECEPTACLE 15 PPL PROPERTY LINE 75 RECT RECTANGULAR 16 PLAM PLASTIC LAMINATE ' 76 REF REFERENCE/REFER TO 17 PLAS PLASTER 77 REFR REFRIGERATION * 18 PLAT PLATFORM ' 78 REG REGISTER * 19 PLBG PLUMBING ' 79 REINF REINFORCE(D)(ING)(MENT) 20 PLF POUNDS PER LINEAR FOOT * 80 REM REMOVABLE 21 PLYWD PLYWOOD 81 REPRO REPRODUCE 22 PNEU PNEUMATIC 82 REQD REQUIRED 23 PNL PANEL 83 RESIL RESILIENT 24 PNT PAINT 84 RET RETURN * 25 POL POLISHED 85 RF RAISED FACE 26 POLY POLYETHYLENE * 86 RFG ROOFING 27 PORT PORTABLE 87 RH RIGHT HAND 28 POS POSITIVE 88 RHB RECESSED HOSE BIBB * 29 PP POWER PANEL * 89 RHMS ROUND HEAD MACHINE SCREW * 30 PR PAIR 90 RHR RIGHT HAND REVERSE ' 31 PRCST PRECAST 91 RHWS ROUND HEAD WOOD SCREW * 32 PREFAB PREFABRICATED 92 RLF RELIEF 33 PREFIN PREFINISHED * 93 RLG RAILING 34 PRELIM PRELIMINARY 94 RM ROOM 35 PREP PREPARATION 95 RND ROUND 36 PRI PRIMARY 96 RO ROUGH OPENING 37 PRKG PARKING * 97 ROD ROOF OVERFLOW DRAIN 38 PROJ PROJECT 98 ROW RIGHT OF WAY * 39 PROP PROPERTY 99 RPM REVOLUTIONS PER MINUTE 40 PRTR PRESERVATIVE TREATED * 100 RPS REVOLUTIONS PER SECOND 41 PS CONC PRESTRESSED CONCRETE * 101 RR RAILROAD 42 PSF POUNDS PER SQUARE FOOT 102 RV RELIEF VALVE 43 PSH PURSE SHELF * 103 RV ROOF VENT * 44 PSI POUNDS PER SQUARE INCH 104 RV ROOF VENTILATOR * 45 PTD PAINTED/PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER /* 105 RVS REVERSE 46 PTN PARTITION 106 RVT RIVETED 47 PTR PAPER TOWEL RECEPTACLE * 107 RWC RAIN WATER CONDUCTOR 48 PVD PAVED * 108 RWL RAIN WATER LEADER * 49 PVC POLYVINYL CHLORIDE 109 S SOUTH 50 PVF POLYVINYLIDINE FLUORIDE * 110 SA SUPPLY AIR * 51 PVG PAVING * 111 SAG SUPPLY AIR GRILLE * 52 PVMT PAVEMENT * 112 SALV SALVAGE 53 PWR POWER 113 SAN SANITARY 54 QT QUARRY TILE * 114 SB SPLASH BLOCK 55 QTR QUARTER 115 SC SOLID CORE ' 56 QTY QUANTITY 116 SCHED SCHEDULE 57 QUAL QUALITY 117 SCMU SOLID CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT ' 58 R RISER 118 SCRN SCREEN 59 R THERMAL RESISTANCE * 119 SCT STRUCTURAL CLAY TILE 60 RA RETURN AIR * 120 SD SOAP DISPENSER * Note: An asterisk (*) indicates the term is not in ANSI Y1.1 or that the abbreviation shown is not in compliance with the one shown in ANSI Y1.1. The absence of an asterisk(*)indicates the abbreviation agrees with ANSI Y1.1. ABBREVIATIONS GDA 01092-7 GDA#12018.00 December 14,2012 Issue for Permit 1 SD STORM DRAIN * 61 STR STRAIGHT 2 SD SUPPLY DIFFUSER * 62 STRUCT STRUCTURAL * 3 SDL SADDLE 63 STRUCT STL STRUCTURAL STEEL * 4 SDMH STORM DRAIN MANHOLE * 64 SUH SUSPENDED UNIT HEATER * 5 SMDPR SMOKE DAMPER * 65 SUPPL SUPPLEMENT 6 SEC SECOND 66 SURF SURFACE 7 SECT SECTION 67 SURV SURVEY 8 SEG SEGMENT 68 SUSP SUSPENDED 9 SFT STRUCTURAL FACING TILE * 69 SUSP CLG SUSPENDED CEILING * 10 SGL SINGLE 70 SVCE SERVICE 11 SHLDR SHOULDER 71 SW SIDEWALK * 12 SHR SHOWER * 72 SWBD SWITCHBOARD 13 SHT SHEET(ING) * 73 SWGR SWITCHGEAR 14 SHTHG SHEATHING 74 SWR SEWER * 15 SHV SHELVES(ING) * 75 SYM SYMBOL 16 SIG SIGNAL 76 SYMM SYMMETRICAL 17 SIM SIMILAR 77 SYNTH SYNTHETIC 18 SJ SCORED JOINT * 78 SYS SYSTEM 19 SJ SLIP JOINT 79 T TEE * 20 SK SINK 80 T THERMOSTAT * 21 SL SLIDE(ING) 81 T TREAD * 22 SLP SLOPE 82 T&B TOP AND BOTTOM 23 SLV SLEEVE 83 T&G TONGUE AND GROOVE 24 SM SHEET METAL * 84 TAN TANGENT 25 SM SMOOTH * 85 TB TOP OF BEAM * 26 SMLS SEAMLESS 86 TB TOWEL BAR * 27 SND SANITARY NAPKIN DISPENSER * 87 TB-xx TEST BORING-xx(e.g.TB-1) * 28 SNR SANITARY NAPKIN RECEPTACLE * 88 TBE THREADED BOTH ENDS 29 SP SINGLE POLE/SOIL PIPE 89 TBM TEMPORARY BENCH MARK * 30 SP SPACE(ING)/STANDPIPE 90 TC TOP OF CONCRETE * 31 SP GR SPECIFIC GRAVITY 91 TD TOWEL DISPENSER * 32 SPCL SPECIAL 92 TD TRENCH DRAIN * 33 SPEC SPECIFICATION 93 TDR TOWEL DISPENSER/RECEPTACLE * 34 SPKLR SPRINKLER * 94 TE TOP ELEVATION * 35 SPKR SPEAKER 95 TEL TELEPHONE 36 SPLY SUPPLY 96 TEMP TEMPORARY/TEMPERED 37 SPRT SUPPORT 97 TER TERRAZZO 38 SQ SQUARE 98 TERM TERMINAL 39 SQ FT SQUARE FOOT 99 TF TOP OF FOOTING * 40 SQ IN SQUARE INCH 100 TFA TO FLOOR ABOVE * 41 SQ KM SQUARE KILOMETER 101 TFB TO FLOOR BELOW * 42 SQ M SQUARE METER * 102 TFF TOP OF FINISH FLOOR * 43 SQ MM SQUARE MILLIMETER * 103 TH THICK 44 SQ YD SQUARE YARD * 104 THD THREAD(ED) 45 SS SANITARY SEWER * 105 THERM THERMAL 46 SSD SUB-SOIL DRAIN 106 THK THICKNESS * 47 SSK SERVICE SINK * 107 THRES THRESHOLD * 48 SST STAINLESS STEEL 108 THRU THROUGH 49 ST STREET 109 TJ TOP OF JOIST * 50 STA STATION 110 TMPD TEMPERED 51 STAG STAGGERED * 111 TMPD GL TEMPERED GLASS * 52 STC SOUND TRANSMISSION CLASS * 112 TO TOP OF 53 STD STANDARD 113 TOE THREADED ONE END 54 STIF STIFFENER 114 TOL TOLERANCE 55 STIR STIRRUP 115 TOT TOTAL 56 STK STAKE * 116 TP TOP OF PAVEMENT * 57 STL STEEL 117 TPH TOILET PAPER HOLDER * 58 STL JST STEEL JOIST * 118 TR TOP OF RIM * 59 STL PL STEEL PLATE * 119 TRANS TRANSPARENT 60 STOR STORAGE 120 TRNBKL TURNBUCKLE Note: An asterisk (*) indicates the term is not in ANSI Y1.1 or that the abbreviation shown is not in compliance with the one shown in ANSI Y1.1. The absence of an asterisk(*)indicates the abbreviation agrees with ANSI Y1.1. ABBREVIATIONS GDA 01092-8 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 TS TUBE STEEL/TENSILE STRENGTH 61 WH WALL HUNG 2 TSL TOP OF SLAB • 62 WH WALL HYDRANT 3 TST TOP OF STEEL . 63 WHSE WAREHOUSE 4 TTB TELEPHONE TERMINAL BOARD * 64 WTHR WATER HEATER * 5 TV TELEVISION 65 WI WROUGHT IRON 6 TW TOP OF WALL • 66 WL WIND LOAD 7 TYP TYPICAL 67 WLD WELDED 8 U HEAT TRANSFER COEFFICIENT 68 WLS WALL LOUVER AND SCREEN 9 UBC UNIFORM BUILDING CODE 69 WOLM WOLMANIZED/SEE PRTR 10 UFC UNIFORM FIRE CODE 70 W/O WITH OUT 11 UFD UNDER FLOOR DUCT * 71 WR WASTE RECEPTACLE 12 UGND UNDERGROUND 72 WR WATER RESISTANT 13 UH UNIT HEATER 73 WS WEATHERSTRIPPING 14 UMC UNIFORM MECHANICAL CODE 74 WSCT WAINSCOT 15 UN UNION 75 WSP WET STAND PIPE 16 UNEX UNEXCAVATED * 76 WT WEIGHT 17 UNFIN UNFINISHED 77 WTR WATER 18 UNIF UNIFORM 78 WTRPRF WATERPROOFING 19 UNO UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE 79 WW WASTEWATER 20 UON UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED * 80 WWF WELDED WIRE FABRIC 21 UPC UNIFORM PLUMBING CODE 81 XFMR TRANSFORMER 22 UR URINAL 82 YB YARD BOX 23 UTIL UTILITY 83 YCO YARD CLEANOUT 24 UV ULTRAVIOLET 84 YD YARD DRAIN * 25 V SANITARY VENT * 85 YH YARD HYDRANT * 26 V VALVE 86 ZCS ZINC COATED STEEL * 27 V VOLT 87 ZCSS ZINC COATED SHEET STEEL • 28 VA VOLT AMPERE • 88 29 VAC VACUUM 89 30 VAP VAPOR * 90 PART 2- PRODUCTS Not Applicable 31 VAP PRF VAPOR PROOF 91 32 VAV VARIABLE AIR VOLUME * 92 33 VB VACUUM BREAKER * 93 PART 3- EXECUTION Not Applicable 34 VB VALVE BOX 94 35 VB VINYL BASE • 95 36 VCT VINYL COMPOSITION TILE 96 END OF SECTION 01092 37 VEL VELOCITY 38 VENT VENTILATOR 39 VERT VERTICAL 40 VEST VESTIBULE 41 VFAT VINYL FACED ACOUSTIC TILE 42 VIB VIBRATION 43 VIN VINYL 44 VNR VENEER 45 VOL VOLUME 46 VR VAPOR RETARDER * 47 VT VINYL TILE 48 VTR VENT THROUGH ROOF 49 VWC VINYL WALL COVERING * 50 W WASTE/WATT/WEST/WIDE,WIDTH 51 W/ WITH 52 W/O WITHOUT 53 W/W WALL TO WALL 54 WC WATER CLOSET 55 WD WIDTH 56 WD WOOD 57 WDSP WASTE DISPOSER * 58 WDW WINDOW * 59 WF WIDE FLANGE • 60 WGL WIRE GLASS Note: An asterisk (*) indicates the term is not in ANSI Y1.1 or that the abbreviation shown is not in compliance with the one shown in ANSI Y1.1. The absence of an asterisk(*)indicates the abbreviation agrees with ANSI Y1.1. ABBREVIATIONS GDA 01092-9 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 SECTION 01095- REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 2 3 PART 1 -GENERAL 4 5 6 RELATED DOCUMENTS 7 8 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and 9 other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 10 11 DEFINITIONS 12 13 General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the General Conditions. 14 15 Indicated: The term "indicated" refers to graphic representations, notes, or schedules on the 16 Drawings, other paragraphs or schedules in the Specifications, and similar requirements in the 17 Contract Documents. Where terms such as"shown,""noted," "scheduled,"and"specified"are used, it 18 is to help the reader locate the reference; no limitation on location is intended. 19 20 Directed: Terms such as "directed," "requested," "authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," and 21 "permitted" mean "directed by the Architect,""requested by the Architect,"and similar phrases. 22 23 Approve: The term "approved," where used in conjunction with the Architect's action on the 24 Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, is limited to the Architect's duties and 25 responsibilities as stated in General and Supplementary Conditions. 26 27 Regulation: The term "Regulations" includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by 28 authorities having jurisdiction, as well as rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction 29 industry that control performance of the Work. 30 Furnish: The term "furnish" is used to mean "supply and deliver to the Project site, ready for 31 unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations." 32 33 Install: The term "install" is used to describe operations at project site including the actual "unloading, 34 unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, 35 protecting, cleaning, and similar operations." 36 37 Provide: The term "provide" means"to furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use." 38 39 Installer: An "Installer" is the Contractor or an entity engaged by the Contractor, either as an 40 employee, subcontractor, or sub-subcontractor, for performance of a particular construction activity, 41 including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. Installers are required to be 42 experienced in the operations they are engaged to perform. 43 The term "experienced" when used with the term "Installer" means having a minimum of 5 44 previous Projects similar in size and scope to this Project, being familiar with the precautions 45 required, and having complied with requirements of the authority having jurisdiction. 46 47 Trades: Use of titles such as "carpentry" is not intended to imply that certain construction activities 48 must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as 49 "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespersons of 50 the corresponding generic name. 51 52 Protect Site is the space available to the Contractor for performance of construction activities, either 53 exclusively or in conjunction with others performing other work as part of the Project. The extent of 54 the Project Site is shown on the Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the 55 land upon which the Project is to be built. 56 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS GDA 01095- 1 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Testing Laboratories: A "testing laboratory" is an independent entity engaged to perform specific 2 inspections or tests, either at the Project Site or elsewhere, and to report on and, if required, to 3 interpret results of those inspections or tests. 4 5 ORGANIZATION AND SOCIETY ABBREVIATIONS 6 7 Publications of organizations and societies are referred in Contract Documents by following 8 abbreviated designations: 9 10 American Concrete Institute ACI 11 American Institute of Steel Construction AISC 12 American Iron and Steel Institute AISI 13 American National Standards Institute ANSI 14 American Plywood Association APA 15 American Society for Testing and Materials ASTM 16 American Society of Civil Engineers ASCE 17 American Welding Society AWS 18 American Wood Preserver's Association AWPA 19 Anti-Friction Bearing ManufacturersAssociation, Inc. AFBMA 20 Brick Institute of America BIA 21 California Redwood Association CRA 22 Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute CRSI 23 Factory Mutual FM 24 Federal Specifications FS 25 International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council IMIAWC 26 National Ready-Mixed Concrete Association NRMCA 27 Portland Cement Association PCA 28 Prestressed Concrete Institute PCI 29 Southern Pine Inspection Bureau SPIB 30 Steel Deck Institute SDI 31 Steel Joist Institute SJI 32 Steel Structures Painting Council SSPC 33 Underwriters Laboratories UL 34 Uniform Building Code UBC 35 36 SPECIFICATION FORMAT AND CONTENT EXPLANATION 37 38 Specification Format: These Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections based on the 39 Construction Specifications Institute's 16-Division format and MASTERFORMAT numbering system. 40 41 Specification Content: This Specification uses certain conventions in the use of language and the 42 intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations or 43 circumstances. These conventions are explained as follows: 44 45 Abbreviated Language: Language used in Specifications and other Contract Documents is 46 the abbreviated type. Implied words and meanings will be appropriately interpreted. Singular 47 words will be interpreted as plural and plural words interpreted as singular where applicable 48 and the full context of the Contract Documents so indicates. 49 50 Imperative and streamlined language is used generally in the Specifications. Requirements 51 expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by the Contractor. At certain locations 52 in the text, for clarity, subjective language is used to describe responsibilities that must be 53 fulfilled indirectly by the Contractor, or by others when so noted. 54 55 The words"shall be"shall be included by inference wherever a colon (:) is used within 56 a sentence or phrase. 57 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS GDA 01095-2 GDA#12018.00 December 14,2012 Issue for Permit 1 INDUSTRY/REFERENCE STANDARDS 2 3 Applicability of Standards: Except where the Contract Documents include more stringent 4 requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound 5 or copied directly into the Contract Documents. Such standards are made a part of the Contract 6 Documents by reference. 7 8 Publication Dates: Where the date of issue of a referenced standard is not specified, comply with the 9 standard in effect as of date of Contract Documents. 10 11 Conflicting Requirements: Where compliance with two or more standards is specified, and the 12 standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, refer 13 requirements that are different, but apparently equal, and uncertainties to the Architect for a decision 14 before proceeding. 15 16 Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on the Project is required to be familiar with 17 industry standards applicable to that entity's construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are 18 not bound with the Contract Documents. 19 20 Where copies of standards are needed for performance of a required construction activity, the 21 Contractor shall obtain copies directly from the publication source. 22 23 Following listings include full title and applicable revision date: 24 25 American Concrete Institute (ACI): 26 27 211.1-91 Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight and 28 Mass Concrete. 29 211.2-91 Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Structural Lightweight 30 Concrete. 31 211.3-(87)(92) Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for No-Slump Concrete. 32 301-89 Specification for Structural Concrete for Buildings. 33 304R-89 Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete. 34 305R-91 Hot Weather Concreting. 35 306R-88 Cold Weather Concreting. 36 308-92 Standard Practice for Curing Concrete. 37 309R-87 Guide for Consolidation of Concrete. 38 315-80(86) Details and Detailing of Reinforced Concrete(included in SP-66). 39 318-89 (Rev.1992) Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. 40 347R-94 Guide to Formwork for Concrete. 41 SP-66 (94) ACI Detailing Manual (1994 Edition). 42 43 American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC): 44 45 Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges(with Commentary), June 10, 1992. 46 Manual of Steel Construction-Allowable Stress Design, Ninth Edition. 47 Specification for Structural Steel Buildings - Allowable Stress Design (with Commentary), June 1, 48 1989. 49 Manual of Steel Construction -Load and Resistance Factor Design, Second Edition. 50 Load and Resistance Factor Design Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings, December 1, 1994. 51 Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts, November 13, 1985. 52 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS GDA 01095-3 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 3 4 A 36/A 36M-93a Specification for Structural Steel. 5 A 47-90 Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings. 6 A 53-90b Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and 7 Seamless. 8 A 82-90a Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement. 9 A 108-90a Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold-Finished, Standard Quality. 10 A 123-89a Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip-Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel 11 Products. 12 A 153-82 (1987) Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip)on Iron and Steel Hardware. 13 A 185-90a Specification for Steel Welded Wire, Fabric, Plain, for Concrete 14 Reinforcement. 15 A 242/A 242M-93 Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel. 16 A 307-93a Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000tpsi Tensile Strength. 17 A 325-93 Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat-Treated, 120/105 KSI Minimum 18 Tensile Strength. 19 A 325M-93 Specification for High-Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints (Metric). 20 A 370-92 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products. 21 A 416-93 Specification for Steel Strand, Uncoated Seven-Wire for Prestressed 22 Concrete. 23 A 421-91 Specification for Uncoated Stress-Relieved Steel Wire for Prestressed 24 Concrete. 25 A 446/A 446M-93 Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip 26 Process, Structural (Physical)Quality. 27 A 475-89 Specification for Zinc-Coated Steel Wire Strand. 28 A 490-93 Specification for Heat-Treated Steel Structural Bolts, 150 KSI Minimum 29 Tensile Strength. 30 A 490M-93 Specification for High-Strength Steel Bolts, Classes 10.9 and 10.9.3, for 31 Structural Steel Joints(Metric). 32 A 500-93 Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural 33 Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. 34 A 501-93 Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural 35 Tubing. 36 A 514/A 514M-93a Specification for High-Yield Strength, Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel 37 Plate, Suitable for Welding. 38 A 525-93 Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated 39 (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process. 40 A 525M-91b Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated 41 (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process(Metric). 42 A 572-92a tSpecification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Steel of 43 Structural Quality. 44 A 576-90b Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought, Special Quality. 45 A 588-91a Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel with 50,000 psi 46 Minimum Yield Point to 4 in. Thick. 47 A 611-92 Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon,Cold-Rolled Structural Quality. 48 A 615-92b Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete 49 Reinforcement. 50 A 706-92b Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 51 A 775-92 Specification for Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Steel Bars. 52 B 633-85, Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel. 53 C 31-91, Method for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. 54 C 33-92a Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 55 C 39-86 Test for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. 56 C 42-90 Methods for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of 57 Concrete. REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS GDA 01095-4 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 C 90-92b Specification for Hollow Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units. 2 C 91-93 Specification for Masonry Cement. 3 C 94-92a Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. 4 C 109-92 Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars. 5 C 138-92 Test Method for Unit Weight, Yield and Air Content(Gravimetric)of Concrete. 6 C 140-91 Method of Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units. 7 C 143-90a Test Method for Slump of Portland Cement Concrete. 8 C 144-91 Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. 9 C 150-92 Specification for Portland Cement. 10 C 171-92 Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete. 11 C 172-90 Method of Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete. 12 C 173-78 Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric 13 Method. 14 C 207-91 (1992) Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. 15 C 231-91b Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure 16 Method. 17 C 260-86 tSpecification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. 18 C 270-92a Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry. 19 C 309-93 Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. 20 C 311-93 Method for Sampling and Testing Fly Ash or Natural Pozzolans for Use as a 21 Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete. 22 C 330-89 Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Structural Concrete. 23 C 404-93 Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout. 24 C 476-91 tSpecification for Grout and Masonry. 25 C 494-90 Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. 26 C 567-91 Test Method for Unit Weight of Structural Lightweight Concrete. 27 C 595-93 Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements. 28 C 618-93 Specification for Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as a 29 Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement. 30 C 780-91 Method for Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain 31 and Reinforced Unit Masonry. 32 C 827-87 Test Method for Early Volume Change of Cementitious Mixtures. 33 C 938-80 (1991) Practice for Proportioning Grout Mixtures for Preplaced-Aggregate Concrete. 34 C 942-86 (1991) Test Method for Compresssive Strength of Grouts for Preplaced-Aggregate 35 Concrete in the Laboratory. 36 C 989-89 Specification for Ground Iron Blast-Furnace Slag for Use in Concrete and 37 Mortars. 38 D 98-87 Specification for Calcium Chloride. 39 D 994-71(Reaf1982) Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete 40 (Bituminous Type). 41 D 1751-83 (1991) Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and 42 Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types). 43 D 1752-84 (1992) Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers 44 for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction. 45 D 2092-86 Recommended Practices for Preparation of Zinc-Coated Galvanized Steel 46 Surfaces for Painting. 47 D 2240-91 Test for Rubber Property-Durometer Hardness. 48 E 164-92a Practice for Ultrasonic Contact Examination of Weldments. 49 E 329-93b Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete, 50 Steel, and Bituminous Materials as Used in Construction. 51 E 447-92b Test Methods for Compressive Strength of Masonry Prisms. 52 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS GDA 01095-5 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 American Welding Society (AWS): 3 4 A5.1-91 Specification for Carbon Steel Covered Arc-Welding Electrodes. 5 A5.5-81 Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Covered Arc-Welding Electrodes. 6 A5.17-89 Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes and Fluxes for Submerged Arc- 7 Welding. 8 A5.20-79 Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes for Flux Cored Arc-Welding. 9 B2.1-84 Welding Procedure and Performance Qualification. 10 D1.1-94 Structural Welding Code- Steel. 11 D1.3-89 Specification for Welding of Sheet Metal in Structures. 12 D1.4-92 Structural Welding Code- Reinforcing Steel. 13 QC-1-88 Standard for Qualification and Certification of Welding Inspectors. 14 15 Prestressed Concrete Institute (PCI): 16 17 MNL 116-85 Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Precast Prestressed 18 Concrete Products. 19 MNL 117-77 Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Architectural Precast 20 Concrete Products. 21 22 Steel Deck Institute (SDI): 23 24 Specification for Composite Steel Floor Deck, 1992. 25 Specification for Non-Composite Steel Form Deck, 1992. 26 Specification for Steel Roof Deck, 1992. 27 28 Steel Joist Institute (SJI): 29 30 Recommended Code of Standard Practice for Steel Joists and Joist Girders, November, 1994. 31 Standard Specification for Joist Girders, November, 1994. 32 Standard Specification for Longspan Steel Joists, LH-Series and Deep Longspan Steel Joists, DLH- 33 Series, November, 1994. 34 Standard Specification for Open Web Steel Joists, K-Series, November, 1994. 35 36 TRADE ASSOCIATIONS 37 38 Abbreviations and Names: Trade association names and titles of general standards are frequently 39 abbreviated. The following acronyms or abbreviations as referenced in Contract Documents are 40 defined to mean the associated names. Names and addresses are subject to change and are 41 believed to be but are not assured to be accurate and up to date as of date of Contract Documents. 42 AA Aluminum Association 43 900 19th St., NW, Suite 300 44 Washington, DC 20006 (202)862-5100 45 46 AABC Associated Air Balance Council 47 1518 K St., NW, Suite 503 48 Washington, DC 20005 (202) 737-0202 49 50 AAMA American Architectural Manufacturer's Association 51 2700 River Rd., Suite 118 52 Des Plaines, IL 60018 (312)699-7310 53 54 AAN American Association of Nurserymen 55 1250 Eye St., NW, Suite 500 56 Washington, DC 20005 202) 789-2900 57 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS GDA 01095-6 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 AASHTO American Association of State Highway 2 and Transportation Officials 3 444 North Capitol St., Suite 225 4 Washington, DC 20001 (202)624-5800 5 6 AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists 7 and Colorists 8 P.O. Box 12215 9 Research Triangle Park, NC 27709 (919) 549-8141 10 11 ACI American Concrete Institute 12 P.O. Box 19150 13 Detroit, MI 48219 (313)532-2600 14 15 ACIL American Council of Independent Laboratories 16 1725 K St., NW 17 Washington, DC 20006 (202) 887-5872 18 19 ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association 20 8320 Old Courthouse Rd. 21 Vienna, VA 22180 (703)821-1990 22 23 ADC Air Diffusion Council 24 230 N. Michigan Ave., Suite 1200 25 Chicago, IL 60601 (312)372-9800 26 27 AFBMA Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturers Association 28 1101 Connecticut Ave., NW, Suite 700 29 Washington, DC 20036 (202)429-5155 30 31 AGA American Gas Association 32 1515 Wilson Blvd. 33 Arlington, VA 22209 (703)841-8400 34 35 AHA American Hardboard Association 36 520 N. Hicks Rd. 37 Palatine, IL 60067 (312) 934-8800 38 39 AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers 40 20 N. Wacker Drive 41 Chicago, IL 60606 (312) 984-5800 42 43 Al Asphalt Institute 44 Research Park Drive 45 P.O. Box 14052 46 Lexington, KY 40512-4052 (606)288-4960 47 48 AIA American Institute of Architects 49 1735 New York Ave., NW 50 Washington, DC 20006 (202)626-7300 51 52 A.I.A. American Insurance Association 53 1130 Connecticut Avenue, NW 54 Washington, DC 20036 (202)828-7100 55 56 Al HA American Industrial Hygiene Association 57 475 Wolf Ledges Parkway REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS GDA 01095 - 7 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Akron, OH 44311 (216)762-7294 2 3 AISC American Institute of Steel Construction 4 400 N. Michigan Ave., 8th Floor 5 Chicago, IL 60611 (312)670-2400 6 7 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute 8 1133 Fifteenth St., NW 9 Washington, DC 20005 (202)452-7100 10 11 AITC American Institute of Timber Construction 12 11818 SE Mill Plain Blvd., Suite 415 13 Vancouver,WA 98684 (206)254-9132 14 15 ALI Associated Laboratories 16 641 S. Vermont St. 17 Palatine, IL 60067 (312)358-7400 18 19 ALSC American Lumber Standards Committee 20 P.O. Box 210 21 Germantown, MD 20874 (301)972-1700 22 23 AMCA Air Movement and Control Association 24 30 W. University Drive 25 Arlington Heights, IL 60004 (312)394-0150 26 27 ANSI American National Standards Institute 28 1430 Broadway 29 New York, NY 10018 (212)354-3300 30 31 AOAC Association of Official Analytical Chemists 32 1111 19th Street North, Suite 210 33 Arlington, VA 22209 (703)522-3032 34 35 AOSA Association of Official Seed Analysts 36 do Jim Lair 37 Illinois Department of Agriculture Seed Lab. 38 Box 19281 39 Springfield, IL 62794 (217)782-7655 40 41 APA American Plywood Association 42 P.O. Box 11700 43 Tacoma, WA 98411 (206)565-6600 44 45 A.P.A. American Parquet Association 46 2900 First Commercial Building 47 Little Rock,AR 72201 (501)375-5561 48 49 API American Petroleum Institute 50 1220 L St., NW 51 Washington, DC 20005 (202)682-8000 52 53 ARI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute 54 1501 Wilson Blvd., 6th Floor 55 Arlington,VA 22209 (703)524-8800 56 57 ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS GDA 01095-8 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 6288 Montrose Rd. 2 Rockville, MD 20852 (301) 231-9050 3 4 ASA Acoustical Society of America 5 500 Sunnyside Blvd. 6 Woodbury, NY 1 1797 (516)349-7800 7 8 ASC Adhesive and Sealant Council 9 1627 K Street, NW., Suite 1000 10 Washington, DC 20006 (202)452-1500 11 12 ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating 13 and Air-Conditioning Engineers 14 1791 Tullie Circle, NE 15 Atlanta, GA 30329 (404) 636-8400 16 17 ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers 18 345 East 47th St. 19 New York, NY 10017 (212)705-7722 20 21 ASPE American Society of Plumbing Engineers 22 3617 Thousand Oaks Blvd., Suite 210 23 Westlake, CA 91362 (805)495-7120 24 25 ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering 26 P.O. Box 40362 27 Bay Village, OH 44140 (216)835-3040 28 29 ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials 30 1916 Race St. 31 Philadelphia, PA 19103 (215)299-5400 32 33 AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute 34 2310 S. Walter Reed Drive 35 Arlington, VA 22206 (703)671-9100 36 37 AWPA American Wood Preservers Association 38 P.O. Box 849 39 Stevensville, MD 21666 (301)643-4163 40 41 AWPB American Wood Preservers Bureau 42 P.O. Box 5283 43 Springfield, VA 22150 (703) 339-6660 44 45 AWS American Welding Society 46 P.O. Box 351040 47 550 LeJeune Road, NW 48 Miami, FL 33135 (305)443-9353 49 50 AWWA American Water Works Association 51 6666 W. Quincy Ave. . 52 Denver, CO 80235 (303) 794-7711 53 54 BANC Brick Association of North Carolina 55 P.O. Box 13290 56 Greensboro, NC 27415 (919)273-5566 57 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS GDA 01095 -9 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association 2 355 Lexington Ave., 17th Floor 3 New York, NY 10017 (212)661-4261 4 5 BIA Brick Institute of America 6 11490 Commerce Park Drive, Suite 300 7 Reston, VA 22091 (703)620-0010 8 9 BIFMA Business and Institutional Furniture 10 Manufacturers Association 11 2335 Burton St., SE 12 Grand Rapids, MI 49506 (616)243-1681 13 14 CAUS Color Association of the United States 15 343 Lexington Ave. 16 New York, NY 10016 (212)683-9531 17 18 CAGI Compressed Air and Gas Institute 19 c/o Thomas Associates, Inc. 20 1230 Keith Building 21 Cleveland, OH 44115 (216)241-7333 22 23 CBM Certified Ballast Manufacturers Association 24 1422 Euclid Ave. 25 Hanna Building, Suite 772 26 Cleveland, OH 44115 (216)241-0711 27 28 CDA Copper Development Association 29 Box 1840, Greenwich Office Park 2 30 Greenwich, CT 06836 (203)625-8210 31 32 CGA Compressed Gas Association 33 Crystal Gateway#1, Suite 501 34 1235 Jefferson Davis Highway 35 Arlington, VA 22202 (703)979-0900 36 37 CISCA Ceiling and Interior Systems 38 Construction Association 39 104 Wilmot Road, Suite 201 40 Deerfield, IL 60015 (312)940-8800 41 42 CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute 43 5959 Shallowford Road, Suite 419 44 Chattanooga, TN 37421 (615)892-0137 45 46 CRI Carpet and Rug Institute 47 Box 2048 48 Dalton, GA 30722 (404)278-3176 49 50 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute 51 933 Plum Grove Rd. 52 Schaumburg, IL 60195 (312) 517-1200 53 54 CTI Ceramic Tile Institute of America 55 700 N. Virgil Ave. 56 Los Angeles, CA 90029 (213)660-1911 57 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS GDA 01095 - 10 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 DHI Door and Hardware Institute 2 7711 Old Springhouse Rd. 3 McLean, VA 22102 (703)556-3990 4 5 DLPA Decorative Laminate Products Association 6 600 S. Federal St., Suite 400 7 Chicago, IL 60605 (312)922-6222 8 9 ECSA Exchange Carriers Standards Association 10 5430 Grosvenor Lane, Suite 200 11 Bethesda, MD 20814 (301)564-4505 12 13 EIA Electronic Industries Association 14 1722 Eye Street, NW, Suite 300 15 Washington, DC 20006 (202)457-4900 16 17 EIMA Exterior Insulation Manufacturers Association 18 30 Holley St. 19 Wakefield, RI 02879 (401) 782-3687 20 21 EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association 22 25 N. Broadway 23 Tarrytown, NY 10591 (914) 332-0040 24 25 ETL ETLTesting Laboratories, Inc. 26 P.O. Box 2040 27 Route 11, Industrial Park 28 Cortland, NY 13045 (607) 753-6711 29 30 FCI Fluid Controls Institute 31 P.O. Box 9036 32 Morristown, NJ 07960 (201)829-0990 33 34 FGMA Flat Glass Marketing Association 35 White Lakes Professional Bldg. 36 3310 Harrison 37 Topeka, KS 66611 (913)266-7013 38 39 FM Factory Mutual Engineering and Research Organization 40 1151 Boston -Providence Turnpike 41 Norwood, MA 02062 (617) 762-4300 42 43 FTI Facing Tile Institute 44 P.O. Box 8880 45 Canton, OH 44711 (216)488-1211 46 47 GA Gypsum Association 48 1603 Orrington Ave. 49 Evanston, IL 60201 (312)491-1744 50 51 HEI Heat Exchange Institute 52 do Thomas Associates, Inc. 53 1230 Keith Building 54 Cleveland, OH 44115 (216)241-7333 55 56 HI Hydronics Institute 57 P.O. Box 218 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS GDA 01095 - 11 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 35 Russo Place 2 Berkeley Heights, NJ 07922 (201)464-8200 3 4 H.I. Hydraulic Institute 5 712 Lakewood Center North 6 14600 Detroit Avenue 7 Cleveland, OH 44107 (216)226-7700 8 9 HMA Hardwood Manufacturers Association 10 2831 Airways Blvd., Suite 205, Bldg. B 11 Memphis, TN 38132 (901)346-2222 12 13 HPMA Hardwood Plywood Manufacturers Association 14 1825 Michael Farraday Drive 15 P.O. Box 2789 16 Reston, VA 22090 (703)435-2900 17 18 IBD Institute of Business Designers 19 341 Merchandise Mart 20 Chicago, IL 60654 (312)647-1950 21 22 ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association Inc. 23 P.O. Box 440 24 South Yarmouth, MA 02664 (617)394-4424 25 26 IEC International Electrotechnical Commission 27 (Available from ANSI) 28 1430 Broadway 29 New York, NY 10018 (212)354-3300 30 31 IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic 32 Engineers 33 345 E. 47th St. 34 New York, NY 10017 (212)705-7900 35 36 IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America 37 345 E.47th St. 38 New York, NY 10017 (212)705-7926 39 40 IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council 41 Route 11, Industrial Park 42 Cortland, NY 13045 (607)753-6711 43 44 ILI Indiana Limestone Institute of America 45 Stone City Bank Building, Suite 400 46 Bedford, IN 47421 (812)275-4426 47 48 IMSA International Municipal Signal Association 49 P.O. Box 539 50 1115 N. Main St. 51 Newark, NY 14513 (315)331-2182 52 53 IRI Industrial Risk Insurers 54 85 Woodland St. 55 Hartford, CT 06102 (203)520-7300 56 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS GDA 01095- 12 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 ISA Instrument Society of America 3 67 Alexander Drive 4 P.O. Box 12277 5 Research Triangle Park, NC 27709 (919) 549-8411 6 7 LIA Lead Industries Association, Inc. 8 292 Madison Avenue 9 New York, NY 10017 (212) 578-4750 10 11 LPI Lightning Protection Institute 12 P.O. Box 1029 13 Woodstock, IL 60098 (815) 337-0277 14 15 MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association 16 1230 Keith Building 17 Cleveland, OH 44115 (216)241-7333 18 19 MCAA Mechanical Contractors Association of America 20 5410 Grosvenor Lane, Suite 120 21 Bethesda, MD 20814 (301)897-0770 22 23 MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association 24 60 Revere Dr., Suite 500 25 Northbrook, IL 60062 (312)480-9138 26 27 MIA Marble Institute of America 28 33505 State St. 29 Farmington, MI 48024 (313)476-5558 30 31 MUSFA Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association 32 (A Division of the National Association 33 of Architectural Metal Manufacturers) 34 600 S. Federal St.,Suite 400 35 Chicago, IL 60605 (312)922-6222 36 37 MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of 38 the Valve and Fittings Industry 39 127 Park St., NE 40 Vienna, VA 22180 (703)281-6613 41 42 NAAMM National Association of Architectural 43 Metal Manufacturers 44 600 S. Federal St.,Suite 400 45 Chicago, IL 60605 (312) 922-6222 46 47 NAPA National Asphalt Pavement Association 48 Calvert Building, Suite 620 49 6811 Kenilworth Ave. 50 Riverdale, MD 20737 (301)779-4880 51 52 NAPF National Association of Plastic 53 Fabricators (Now DLPA) 54 55 NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association 56 P.O. Box 482 57 Barre, VT 05641 (802)476-3115 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS GDA 01095 - 13 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 NBHA National Builders Hardware Association 3 (Now DHI) 4 5 NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association 6 P.O. Box 781 7 Herndon, VA 22070 (703)435-4900 8 9 NCRPM National Council on Radiation Protection 10 and Measurement 11 7910 Woodmont Ave., Suite 800 12 Bethesda, MD 20814 (301)657-2652 13 14 NEC National Electric Code (Now NFPA) 15 16 NECA National Electrical Contractors Association 17 7315 Wisconsin Ave. 18 Bethesda, MD 20814 (301)657-3110 19 20 NEII National Elevator Industry, Inc. 21 630 Third Ave. 22 New York, NY 10017 (212)986-1545 23 24 NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association 25 2101 L St., NW, Suite 300 26 Washington, DC 20037 (202)457-8400 27 28 NFPA National Fire Protection Association 29 Batterymarch Park 30 Quincy, MA 02169 (617)770-3000 31 32 N.F.P.A. National Forest Products Association 33 1250 Connecticut Ave., NW, Suite 200 34 Washington, DC 20036 (202)463-2700 35 36 NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association 37 P.O. Box 34518 38 Memphis,TN 38184 (901)377-1818 39 40 NKCA National Kitchen Cabinet Association 41 P.O. Box 6830 42 Falls Church,VA 22046 (703)237-7580 43 44 NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority 45 1055 W. Hastings St., Suite 260 46 Vancouver, British Columbia 47 Canada V6E 2H1 (604)687-2171 48 49 NOFMA National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association 50 P.O. Box 3009 51 Memphis,TN 38173 (901)526-5016 52 53 NPA National Particleboard Association 54 18928 Premiere Court 55 Gaithersburg, MD 20879 (301)670-0604 56 57 NPCA National Paint and Coatings Association REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS GDA01095-14 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 1500 Rhode Island Ave., NW 2 Washington, DC 20005 (202)462-6272 3 4 NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association 5 6250 River Rd. 6 Rosemont, IL 60018 (312)318-6722 7 8 NSF National Sanitation Foundation 9 P.O. Box 1468 10 3475 Plymouth Rd. 11 Ann Arbor, MI 48106 (313) 769-8010 12 13 NSSEA National School Supply and Equipment Association 14 2020 Fourteenth St. North, Suite 400 15 Arlington, VA 22201 (703)524-8819 16 17 NTMA National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association 18 3166 Des Plaines Ave., Suite 132 19 Des Plaines, IL 60018 (312)635-7744 20 21 NWMA National Woodwork Manufacturers 22 Association (Now NWWDA) 23 24 NWWDA National Wood Window and Door Association 25 (Formerly NWMA) 26 1400 E. Touhy Ave., #G54 27 Des Plaines, IL 60018 (312)299-5200 28 29 PCA Portland Cement Association 30 5420 Old Orchard Road 31 Skokie, IL 60077 (312) 966-6200 32 33 PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute 34 175 W. Jackson Blvd. 35 Chicago, IL 60604 (312) 786-0300 36 37 PDI Plumbing and Drainage Institute 38 (c/o Saul Baker) 39 1106 W. 77th St., South Dr. 40 Indianapolis, IN 46260 (317)251-6970 41 42 PEI Porcelain Enamel Institute 43 1101 Connecticut Ave., NW, Suite 700 44 Washington, DC 20036 (202)857-1134 45 46 RFC! Resilient Floor Covering Institute 47 966 Hungerford Drive, Suite 12-B 48 Rockville, MD 20805 (301)340-8580 49 50 RIS Redwood Inspection Service 51 405 Enfrente Drive, Suite 300 52 Novato, CA 94949 (415) 382-0662 53 54 RMA Rubber Manufacturers Association 55 1400 K St., NW 56 Washington, DC 20005 (202)682-4800 57 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS GDA 01095- 15 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 SAMA Scientific Apparatus Makers Association 2 1101 Sixteenth St., NW 3 Washington, DC 20036 (202)223-1360 4 5 SDI Steel Deck Institute 6 P.O. Box 9506 7 Canton, OH 44711 (216)493-7886 8 9 S.D.I. Steel Door Institute 10 (do A.P. Wherry and Associates, Inc.) 11 712 Lakewood Center North 12 14600 Detroit Ave. 13 Cleveland, OH 44107 (216)226-7700 14 15 SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council 16 (do ETL Testing Laboratories) 17 Route 11, Industrial Park 18 Cortland, NY 13045 (607)753-6711 19 20 SHLMA Southern Hardwood Lumber Manufacturers 21 Association (Now HMA) 22 23 SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association 24 111 E. Wacker Drive 25 Chicago, IL 60601 (312)644-6610 26 27 SJI Steel Joist Institute 28 1205 48th Street North 29 Suite A 30 Myrtle Beach, SC 29577 (803)449-0487 31 32 SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning 33 Contractors National Association 34 P.O. Box 70 35 Merrifield, VA 22116 (703)790-9890 36 37 SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau 38 4709 Scenic Highway 39 Pensacola, FL 32504 (904)434-2611 40 41 SPRI Single Ply Roofing Institute 42 104 Wilmot Rd., Suite 201 43 Deerfield, IL 60015 (312)940-8800 44 45 SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council 46 4400 Fifth Ave. 47 Pittsburgh, PA 15213 (412)268-3327 48 49 SSPMASump and Sewage Pump Manufacturers 50 Association 51 560 W. Washington Street, Suite 301 52 Chicago, IL 60606 (312)332-4146 53 54 SWI Steel Window Institute 55 (do Thomas Associates, Inc.) 56 1230 Keith Building 57 Cleveland, OH 44115 (216)241-7333 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS GDA 01095-16 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 SWPA Submersible Wastewater Pump Association 3 600 S. Federal Street, Suite 400 4 Chicago, IL 60605 (312)922-6222 5 6 TCA Tile Council of America 7 P.O. Box 326 8 Princeton, NJ 08542 (609) 921-7050 9 10 TIMA Thermal Insulation Manufacturers Association 11 29 Bank Street 12 Stamford, CT 06901 (203)324-7533 13 14 TPI Truss Plate Institute 15 583 D'Onofrio Drive, Suite 200 16 Madison, WI 53719 (608)833-5900 17 18 UL Underwriters Laboratories 19 333 Pfingsten Rd. 20 Northbrook, IL 60062 (312)272-8800 21 22 WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau 23 P.O. Box 23145 24 Portland, OR 97223 (503)639-0651 25 26 WCMA Wallcovering Manufacturers Association 27 355 Lexington Ave. 28 New York, NY 10017 (212)661-4261 29 30 WIC Woodwork Institute of California 31 P.O. Box 11428 32 Fresno, CA 93773 (209)233-9035 33 34 WLPDIA Western Lath Plaster Drywall Industries Association 35 (Formerly California Lath & Plaster Association) 36 8635 Navajo Road 37 San Diego, CA 92119 (619)466-9070 38 39 WRI Wire Reinforcement Institute 40 8361-A Greensboro Drive 41 McLean, VA 22102 (703) 790-9790 42 43 WSC Water Systems Council 44 600 S. Federal St., Suite 400 45 Chicago, IL 60605 (312)922-6222 46 47 WSFI Wood and Synthetic Flooring Institute 48 4415 W. Harrison St., Suite 242 C 49 Hillside, IL 60162 (312)449-2933 50 51 WWPA Western Wood Products Association 52 522 SW. 5th Avenue, Yeon Building 53 Portland, OR 97204-2122 (503)224-3930 54 55 W.W.P.A. Woven Wire Products Association 56 2515 N. Nordica Ave. 57 Chicago, IL 60635 (312)637-1359 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS GDA01095- 17 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 GOVERNING REGULATIONS/AUTHORITIES 3 4 The Architect has contacted authorities having jurisdiction where necessary to obtain information 5 necessary for preparation of Contract Documents; that information may or may not be of significance 6 to the Contractor. Contact authorities having jurisdiction directly for information and decisions having 7 a bearing on the Work. 8 9 SUBMITTALS 10 11 Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For the Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, 12 certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee 13 payments, judgments, and similar documents, correspondence, and records established in 14 conjunction with compliance with standards and regulations bearing upon performance of the Work. 15 16 17 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) 18 19 20 PART 3- EXECUTION (Not Applicable) 21 22 23 END OF SECTION 01095 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS GDA 01095- 18 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 SECTION 01310-SCHEDULES, REPORTS, PAYMENTS 2 3 4 PART 1 -GENERAL: 5 6 RELATED DOCUMENTS_: 7 8 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and 9 other Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 10 11 COORDINATION: 12 13 Coordinate both the listing and timing of reports and other activities required by provisions of section 14 and other sections, so as to provide consistency and logical coordination between the reports. 15 Maintain coordination and correlation between separate reports by updating at monthly or shorter time 16 intervals. Make appropriate distribution of each report and updated report to all parties involved in the 17 work including the Architect/Engineer and Owner. In particular provide close coordination of the 18 progress schedule, schedule of values, listing of subcontracts, schedule of submittals, progress 19 reports, and payment requests. 20 21 FULLY-DEVELOPED PROGRESS SCHEDULE: 22 23 Bar-Chart Schedule: Based on preliminary development of the progress schedule if any, and on 24 whatever updating and feedback may have occurred during project start-up, secure critical time 25 commitments for performing major elements of the work. Within 30 days of the date of execution of 26 the Owner/Contractor Agreement, submit a comprehensive bar-chart type progress schedule 27 indicating, by stage-coded symbols,a time bar for each major category or unit of work to be performed 28 at site; include minor elements of work which are, nevertheless, involved in overall sequencing of the 29 work. Arrange schedule to show graphically the major sequences of work necessary for the 30 completion of related elements of work. Arrange the schedule to show how substantial completion is 31 scheduled to allow for Architect's/Engineer's procedure for certification of substantial completion. 32 Prepare and maintain the schedule on either a sheet of sufficient width (or else a series of sheets)to 33 show the required data clearly for the entire Construction Time. Prepare the schedule on sheets of 34 stable transparency, or other reproducible material, to permit reproduction for the required distribution. 35 36 Phasing: Arrange schedule with notations to show how sequence of work is affected by 37 requirements for phased completion, work by separate contractors, work by Owner, pre- 38 purchased materials, coordination with existing work, limitations of continued occupancies, 39 non-interruptable services, partial occupancy prior to substantial completion, site restrictions, 40 provisions for future work, seasonal variations, environmental control, and similar provisions 41 of total project. Refer to other sections of Division 1 and other contract documents for 42 requirements. 43 44 Area Separations: Arrange the schedule with an individual time bar for each major area of 45 construction of each major category or unit of work. Show where each major category or unit 46 of work must be sequenced or integrated with other work as necessary for structural 47 completion, permanent space enclosure, completion of mechanical/electrical work or 48 completion of some other recognized stage of completion for overall work in that area. Except 49 as otherwise indicated, or subsequently agreed upon with Architect/Engineer, a "major area" 50 is defined for the purpose of this article to mean a story of construction or similar major 51 separation. 52 53 Cost Correlation: Immediately below the date line at the heading of the bar-chart, provide a 54 two-item cost correlation line, indicating both "precalculated" and "actual" costs. This cost 55 correlation line shall show dollar-volume of work performed as of same dates used for 56 preparation of payment requests. Refer to subsequent article for cost reporting and payment 57 procedures. In so far as it is practical to do so, use the same units of work in progress SCHEDULES, REPORTS, PAYMENTS GDA 01310- 1 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 schedule as indicated in the "schedule of values" required by General Conditions and further 2 specified herein. 3 4 Superimpose an S-curve on the schedule (only first sheet for multiple-sheet schedule) 5 to show the "precalculated dollar-volume against time at any point during Contract 6 Time. Provide a double column of figures in left hand margin; one column shall 7 indicate a range from zero dollars to the Contract Sum, the other column shall indicate 8 a percentage from zero to 100 percent. As the work progresses and on each date 9 used in payment requests, plot a second S-curve showing actual dollar-volume of 10 work performed. 11 12 Distribution: Following the initial submittal to and response by the Architect/Engineer, print 13 and distribute progress schedules to Architect/Engineer (3 copies), Owner, separate 14 contractors, the principal subcontractors and suppliers or fabricators, and others with a need- 15 to-know schedule-compliance requirement. Post copies in the project meeting room and 16 temporary field office. When revisions are made, distribute updated issues to the same 17 entities and post updated issues in the same locations. Delete entities from distribution when 18 they have completed their assigned work and are no longer involved in performance of 19 scheduled work. 20 21 PROGRESS MEETINGS, REPORTING: 22 23 General: In addition to specific coordination and pre-installation meetings for each element of work, 24 and other regular project meetings held for other purposes, hold general progress meeting each 25 month with time coordinated with preparation of payment request. Require each entity then involved 26 in planning, coordination or performance of work to be properly represented at each meeting. Review 27 each entity's present and future needs including interface requirements, time, sequences, deliveries, 28 access, site utilization, temporary facilities and services, hours of work, hazards and risks, 29 housekeeping, change orders, and documentation of information for payment requests. Discuss 30 whether each element of current work is ahead of schedule, on time, or behind schedule in relation 31 with updated progress schedule. Determine how behind-schedule work will be expedited, and secure 32 commitments from entities involved in doing so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to 33 ensure that current work and subsequent work will be completed within Contract Time. Review 34 everything of significance which could affect progress of the work. 35 36 Initial Progress Meeting: Schedule initial progress meeting, recognized as "Pre-Construction 37 Meeting", for a date not more than 15 days after date of commencement of the work. Use it as 38 an organizational meeting, and review reponsibilities and personnel assignments. 39 40 Reporting: Within 3 days after each progress meeting date, distribute copies of minutes-of- 41 the-meeting to each entity present and to others who should have been present. Include a 42 brief summary(in narrative form)of progress of the work since previous meeting and report. 43 44 Schedule Updating: Immediately following each progress meeting, where revisions to 45 progress schedule have been made or recognized, revise progress schedule. Reissue 46 revised schedule concurrently with report of each meeting. 47 48 SCHEDULE OF VALUES: 49 50 General: Prepare the schedule of values, as required by the General Conditions, in conjunction with 51 the preparation of the progress schedule. Correlate preparation of schedule of values and progress 52 schedule. Correlate line items with other administrative schedules and forms required for the work, 53 including the progress schedule, payment request form, listing of subcontractors, schedule of 54 allowances, schedule of alternates, listing of products and principal suppliers and fabricators, and 55 schedule of submittals. Provide breakdown of the Contract Sum in sufficient detail to facilitate 56 continued evaluation of payment requests and progress reports. Break down principal subcontract 57 amounts into several line items. Round off to nearest whole dollar, but with the total equal to Contract SCHEDULES, REPORTS, PAYMENTS GDA 01310-2 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Sum. 2 3 4 Material/Fabrication Values: For each unit of work where payment requests will be made on 5 account of materials or equipment purchased, fabricated, delivered, but not yet installed, 6 show "initial value" for payment request and "value added" for subsequent stage or stages of 7 completion on that unit of work. 8 9 Unit Cost Allowances: Show the line item value as a product of the unit cost x measured 10 quantity as estimated from the best indication in the contract documents. 11 12 Time Coordination: In coordination of initial submittals and other administrative "start-up" 13 activities, submit the schedule of values to the Architect/Engineer at the earliest feasible date, 14 but in no case later than 7 days before initial payment request is to be submitted. 15 16 Listing: Arrange the schedule with columns to indicate the generic name of item, related 17 specification sections, the subcontractor, the supplier, manufacturer or fabricator, change 18 orders (numbers) which have affected the value, the dollar value of the item, and the 19 percentage of the Contract Sum to the nearest one-hundredth percent and adjusted to total 20 100 percent. 21 22 Margins of Cost: Show line items of indirect costs, and margins on actual costs, only to extent 23 such items will be individually listed in payment requests. In general, each item in the 24 schedule of values and in payment requests shall be established to be complete with its total 25 expenses and proportionate share of the general overhead and profit margin. Except as 26 otherwise indicated, those major cost items that are not directly the cost of actual work-in- 27 place, such as distinct temporary facilities, may be either shown as line items in the schedule 28 of values or may be distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option. 29 30 Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit schedule of values when change orders affect 31 listing and when actual performance of the the work involves necessary changes of substance 32 to the values previously listed. 33 34 PAYMENT REQUESTS: 35 36 General: Except as otherwise indicated, the progress payment cycle is to be regular. Each 37 application must be consistent with previous applications and payments. Certain applications for 38 payment, such as the initial application, the application at substantial completion, and the final 39 payment application involve additional requirements. 40 41 Payment Application Times: The "date" for each progress payment is as indicated in Owner- 42 Contractor Agreement or, if none is indicated therein, it is the 1st day of each month. The period of 43 construction work covered by each payment request is period indicated in Owner-Contractor 44 Agreement or, if none is indicated therein, it is period ending 15 days prior to date for each progress 45 payment, and starting day following end of preceding period. 46 47 Payment Application Forms: Use Owner prepared forms. Copies of these forms may be obtained 48 from the Owner. 49 50 Application Preparation: Except as otherwise indicated, complete every entry provided for on the 51 form, including notarization and execution by authorized persons. Incomplete applications will be 52 returned by Architect/Engineer without action. Entries must match current data of schedule of values 53 and progress schedule and report. Listing must include amounts of change orders issued prior to last 54 day of the"period of construction" covered by application. 55 56 Waivers of Mechanics Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanics lien 57 from every entity who is lawfully entitled to file a mechanics lien arising out of the Contract and related SCHEDULES, REPORTS, PAYMENTS GDA 01310-3 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 to the Work covered by the payment. 2 3 Initial Payment Application: The principal administrative actions and submittals which must precede or 4 coincide with submittal of Contractor's first payment application can be summarized as follows, but not 5 necessarily by way of limitation: 6 7 List of subcontractors. 8 9 List of principal suppliers and fabricators. 10 11 Schedule of Values. 12 13 Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final). 14 15 Schedule of principal products. 16 17 Schedule of unit prices. 18 19 Submittal Schedule (preliminary if not final). 20 21 List of Contractor's staff assignments. 22 23 List of Contractor's principal consultants. 24 25 Copies of building permits. 26 27 Copies of authorizations and licenses from governing authorities for performance of the Work. 28 29 Initial progress report. 30 31 Report of pre-construction meeting. 32 33 Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 34 35 Performance and/or payment bonds (if required). 36 37 Payment will not be released until items listed above are accomplished. 38 39 Application at Time of Substantial Completion: Following issuance of Architect's or Engineer's final 40 "certificate of substantial completion," and also in part as applicable to prior certificates on portions of 41 completed work as designated, a "special" payment application may be prepared and submitted by 42 Contractor. The principal administrative actions and submittals which must proceed or coincide with 43 such special applications can be summarized as follows, but not necessarily by way of limitation: 44 45 Occupancy permits and similar approvals or certifications by governing authoby governing 46 authorities and franchised services, assuring Owners's full access and use of completed work. 47 48 Warranties (guarantees), maintenance agreements and similar provisions of contract 49 documents. 50 51 Test/adjust/balance records, maintenance instructions, meter readings, start-up performance 52 reports, and similar change-over information germane to Owner's occupancy, use, operation 53 and maintenance of completed work. 54 55 Final cleaning of the work. 56 57 Application for reduction (if any)of retainage, and consent of surety. SCHEDULES, REPORTS, PAYMENTS GDA 01310- 4 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 Advice to Owner on coordination of shifting insurance coverages, including proof of extended 3 coverages as required. 4 5 Listing of Contractor's incomplete work, recognized as exceptions to Architect's/Engineer's 6 certificate of substantial completion. 7 8 Final Payment Application: The administrative actions and submittals which must precede or coincide 9 with submittal of contractor's final payment application can be summarized as follows, but not 10 necessarily by way of limitation. 11 12 Completion of project closeout requirements. 13 14 Completion of items specified for completion beyond time of substantial completion 15 (regardless of whether special payment application was previously made). 16 17 Assurance, satisfactory to Owner, that unsettled claims will be settled and that work not 18 actually completed and accepted will be completed without undue delay. 19 Transmittal of required project construction records to Owner. 20 21 Certified property survey. 22 23 Proof, satisfactory to Owner, that taxes, fees and similar obligations of Contractor have been 24 paid. 25 26 Removal of temporary facilities, services, surplus materials, rubbish and similar elements. 27 28 Change over of door locks and other Contractor's access provisions to Owner's property. 29 30 Consent of surety for final payment. 31 32 Payment will not be released until items listed above are accomplished. 33 34 Application Transmittal: Submit 5 executed copies of each payment application, one copy of which is 35 completed with waivers of lien and similar attachments. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form 36 listing those attachments, and recording appropriate information related to application in a manner 37 acceptable to Owner. Transmit to Owner by means ensuring receipt within 24 hours. 38 39 40 PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) 41 42 43 PART 3- EXECUTION (Not Applicable) 44 45 46 END OF SECTION 01310 SCHEDULES, REPORTS, PAYMENTS GDA 01310-5 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 SECTION 01340- SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES 2 3 4 PART 1 - GENERAL 5 6 RELATED DOCUMENTS 7 8 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and 9 other Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 10 11 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS: 12 13 General: This section specifies procedural requirements for non-administrative submittals including 14 shop drawings, product data, samples and other miscellaneous work-related submittals. Shop 15 drawings, product data, samples and other work-related submittals are required to amplify, expand 16 and coordinate the information contained in the Contract Documents. 17 18 Refer to other Division-1 sections and other contract documents for specifications on 19 administrative, non-work-related submittals. Such submittals include, but are not limited to the 20 following items: 21 22 Permits. 23 Payment applications. 24 Performance and payment bonds. 25 Insurance certificates. 26 Inspection and test reports. 27 Schedule of values. 28 Progress reports. 29 Listing of subcontractors. 30 31 Shop drawings are technical drawings and data that have been specially prepared for this project, 32 including but not limited to the following items: 33 34 Fabrication and installation drawings. 35 Setting diagrams. 36 Shopwork manufacturing instructions. 37 Templates. 38 Patterns. 39 Coordination drawings(for use on-site). 40 Schedules. 41 Design mix formulas. 42 Contractor's engineering calculations. 43 44 Standard information prepared without specific reference to a project is not considered to be 45 shop drawings. 46 47 Product data includes standard printed information on manufactured products that has not been 48 specially-prepared for this project, including but not limited to the following items: 49 50 Manufacturer's product specifications and installation instructions. 51 Standard color charts. 52 Catalog cuts. 53 Roughing-in diagram and templates. 54 Standard wiring diagrams. 55 Printed performance curves. 56 Operational range diagrams. 57 Mill reports. SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES GDA 01340- 1 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Standard product operating and maintenance manuals. 2 3 Samples are physical examples of work, including but not limited to the following items: 4 5 Partial sections of manufactured or fabricated work. 6 Small cuts or containers of materials. 7 Complete units of repetitively-used materials. 8 Swatches showing color, texture and pattern. 9 Color range sets. 10 Units of work to be used for independent inspection and testing. 11 12 Mock-ups are special forms of samples, which are too large or otherwise inconvenient for 13 handling in the manner specified for transmittal of sample submittals. 14 15 Miscellaneous submittals are work-related, non-administrative submittals that do not fit in the three 16 previous categories, including, but not limited to the following: 17 18 Specially-prepared and standard printed warranties. 19 Maintenance agreements. 20 Workmanship bonds. 21 Survey data and reports. 22 Project photographs. 23 Testing and certification reports. 24 Record drawings. 25 Field measurement data. 26 Operating and maintenance manuals. 27 Keys and other security protection devices. 28 Maintenance tools and spare parts. 29 Overrun stock. 30 31 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: 32 33 General: Refer to the General Conditions for basic procedures for submittal handling: 34 35 Coordination: Coordinate the preparation and processing of submittals with the performance of the 36 work. Coordinate each separate submittal with other submittals and related activities such as testing, 37 purchasing, fabrication, delivery and similar activities that require sequential activity. 38 39 Coordinate the submittal of different units of interrelated work so that one submittal will not be 40 delayed by the Architect/Engineer's need to review a related submittal. The 41 Architect/Engineer reserves the right to withhold action on any submittal requiring coordination 42 with other submittals until related submittals are forthcoming. 43 44 Scheduling: In each appropriate administrative submittal, such as the progress schedule, show the 45 principal work-related submittals and time requirements for coordination of submittal activity with 46 related work. 47 48 Listing: Prepare a separate listing showing principal work-related submittals and their initial 49 submittal dates as required for coordination of the work. Organize the listing by the related 50 specification number sequence. Submit the listing within 45 days of the date of 51 commencement of the work. 52 53 Coordination of Submittal Times: Prepare and transmit each submittal to the Architect/Engineer 54 sufficiently in advance of the scheduled performance of related work and other applicable activities. 55 Transmit different kinds of submittals for the same unit of work so that processing will not be delayed 56 by the Architect/Engineer's need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. 57 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES GDA 01340- 2 GDA#12018.00 December 14,2012 Issue for Permit 1 Review Time: Allow sufficient time so that the installation will not be delayed as a result of the 2 time required to properly process submittals, including time for resubmittal, if necessary. 3 Advise the Architect/Engineer on each submittal, as to whether processing time is critical to 4 the progress of the work, and if the work would be expedited if processing time could be 5 shortened. 6 7 Allow two weeks for the Architect/Engineer's initial processing of each submittal. 8 Allow a longer time period where processing must be delayed for coordination with 9 subsequent submittals. The Architect/Engineer will advise the Contractor promptly 10 when it is determined that a submittal being processed must be delayed for 11 coordination. 12 13 Allow one week for reprocessing each submittal. 14 15 No extension of time will be authorized because of the Contractor's failure to transmit 16 submittals to the Architect/Engineer sufficiently in advance of the work. 17 18 Submittal Preparation: Mark each submittal with a permanent label for identification. Provide the 19 following information on the label for proper processing and recording of action taken. 20 21 Project name. 22 Date. 23 Name and address of Architect/Engineer. 24 Name and address of Contractor. 25 Name and address of subcontractor. 26 Name and address of supplier. 27 Name of manufacturer. 28 Number and title of appropriate specification section. 29 Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 30 Similar definitive information as necessary. 31 32 Provide a space on the label for the Contractor review and approval markings, and a space 33 for the Architect/Engineer's"Action" marking. 34 35 Submittal Transmittal: Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit 36 each submittal from the Contractor to the Architect/Engineer, and to other destinations as indicated, 37 by use of a transmittal form. Submittals received from sources other than the Contractor will be 38 returned to the sender"without action". 39 40 Transmittal Form Prepare a draft of a transmittal form and submit it to the Architect/Engineer 41 for acceptance. Provide on the form places for the following information: 42 43 Project name. 44 Date. 45 To: 46 From: 47 Names of subcontractor, manufacturer and supplier. 48 References. 49 Category and type of submittal. 50 Submittal purpose and description. 51 Submittal and transmittal distribution records. 52 Signature of transmitter. 53 Contractor's certification stating that the information submitted complies with the 54 requirements of the Contract Documents,with a place for the Contractor's signature. 55 Record relevant information and requests for data on the transmittal form. On the 56 transmittal form, or on a separate sheet attached to the form, record deviations from 57 the requirements of the Contract Documents, if any, including minor variations and SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES GDA 01340- 3 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 limitations. 2 3 SPECIFIC SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS: 4 5 General: Specific submittal requirements for individual units of work are specified in the applicable 6 specification section. Except as otherwise indicated in the individual specification sections, comply 7 with the requirements specified herein for each type of submittal. 8 9 Where it is necessary to provide intermediate submittals between the initial and final 10 submittals, provide and process intermediate submittals in the same manner as for initial 11 submittals. 12 13 Shop Drawings: Information required on shop drawings includes, dimensions, identification of specific 14 products and materials which are included in the work, compliance with specified standards and 15 notations of coordination requirements with other work. Provide special notation of dimensions that 16 have been established by field measurement. Highlight, encircle or otherwise indicate deviations from 17 the contract documents on the shop drawings. 18 19 Coordination Drawings: Provide continuous drawings where required for the integration of the 20 work, including work first shown in detail on shop drawings or product data. Show sequencing 21 and relationship of separate units of work which must interface in a restricted manner to fitin 22 the space provided, or function as indicated. Coordination drawings are considered shop 23 drawings and must be definitive in nature. 24 25 Refer to Division-15 and Division-16 sections for additional general requirements 26 applicable to shop drawings for mechanical and electrical work, respectively. 27 28 Do not permit shop drawings copies without an appropriate final "Action" marking by the 29 Architect/Engineer to be used in connection with the work. 30 31 Preparation: Submit newly prepared information, drawn to accurate scale on sheets not 32 less than 8-1/2" x 11"; except for actual pattern or template type drawings, the maximum 33 sheet size shall not exceed 30" x 42". Indicate the name of the firm that prepared each shop 34 drawing and provide appropriate project identification in the title block. Provide a space not 35 less than 20 sq. in. beside the title block for marking the record of the review process and the 36 Architect/Engineer's "Action" marking. 37 38 Do not reproduce contract documents or copy standard printed information as 39 the basis of shop drawings. 40 41 Submittal: Except as otherwise indicated in individual sections of these specifications, provide 42 5 prints plus 2 additional prints where they are required for maintenance manuals. 2 prints will 43 be retained; the remainder will be returned. One of the prints returned will be marked-up and 44 maintained by the Contractor as a "Record Document". 45 46 Product Data: General information required specifically as product data includes manufacturer's 47 standard printed recommendations for application and use, compliance with recognized standards of 48 trade associations and testing agencies, and the application of their labels and seals (if any), special 49 notation of dimensions which have been verified by way of field measurement, and special 50 coordination requirements for interfacing the material, product or system with other work. 51 52 In semiproprietary specifications (see Section 01600 for definition), where Architect has indicated 53 products by specific model number designation, but allowed various manufacturers to provide 54 equivalent products by inclusion in Part 2 of the individual specification, provide product data for 55 products intended to be included in the Work, as well as the products indicated by model number in 56 that same individual specification. Clearly mark each product that is to be included in the Work. 57 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES GDA 01340- 4 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Refer to Division-15 and Division-16 sections for additional general requirements applicable to product 2 data for mechanical and electrical work respectively. 3 4 Preparation: Collect required product data into a single submittal for each units of work or system. 5 Mark each copy to show which choices and options are applicable to the project. Where project data 6 has been printed to include information on several similar products, some of which are not required for 7 use on the project, or are not included on this submittal, mark the copies to show clearly that such 8 information is not applicable. 9 10 Where product data must be specially prepared for required products, materials or systems, 11 because standard printed data is not suitable for use, submit data as "shop drawings" and not 12 as "product data". 13 14 Submittals: Product data submittal is required for information and record and to determine that the 15 products, materials and systems comply with the provisions of the contract documents. Therefore,the 16 initial submittal is also the final submittal, except where the Architect/Engineer observes that there is 17 non-compliance with the provisions of the contract documents and returns the submittal promptly to 18 the Contractor marked with the appropriate "Action". 19 20 Provide a preliminary single-copy submittal where required, for selection of options by the 21 Architect/Engineer. 22 23 Submittal: Except as otherwise indicated in individual sections of these specifications, submit 24 3 copies of each required product data submittal, plus 2 additional copies where required for 25 maintenance manuals. The Architect/Engineer will retain one copy, and will return the other 26 marked with"Action"and corrections or modifications as required. 27 28 Do not submit product data or allow its use on the project, until compliance with the 29 requirements of the contract documents has been confirmed by the Contractor. 30 31 Final Distribution: Furnish copies of product data to subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, 32 manufacturers, installers, governing authorities and others as required for proper performance 33 of the work. Show distribution on transmittal form. 34 35 Installation Copy: Do not proceed with installation of materials, products and systems until a 36 copy of product data applicable to the installation is in the possession of the installer. Do not 37 permit the use of unmarked copies of product data in connection with the performance of the 38 work. 39 40 Samples: Submit samples for the Architect/Engineer's visual review of general generic kind, color, 41 pattern, and texture, and for a final check of the coordination of these characteristics with other related 42 elements of the work. Samples are also submitted for quality control comparison of these 43 characteristics between the final sample submittal and the actual work as it is delivered and installed. 44 45 Refer to individual work sections of these specifications for additional sample requirements, 46 which may be intended for examination or testing of additional characteristics. Compliance 47 with other required characteristics is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor; such 48 compliance is not considered in the Architect/Engineer's review and "Action" indication on 49 sample submittals. 50 51 Documentation required specifically for sample submittals includes a generic description of 52 the sample, the sample source or the product name or manufacturer, compliance with 53 governing regulations and recognized standards. In addition, indicate limitations in terms of 54 availability, sizes, delivery time, and similar limiting characteristics. 55 56 Refer to Division-15 and Division-16 sections for additional general reqirements applicable to 57 samples for mechanical and electrical work, respectively. SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES GDA 01340-5 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 Preparation: Where possible provide samples that are physically identical with the proposed 3 material or product to be incorporated in the work; provide full scale, fully fabricated samples 4 cured and finished in the manner specified. Where variations in color, pattern, or texture are 5 inherent in the material or product represented by the sample, submit multiple units of the 6 sample (not less than 3 units), which show the approximate limits of variations. Where 7 samples are specified in the Architect/Engineer's selection of color, texture or pattern, submit 8 a full set of available choices for the material or product. Mount, display, or package samples 9 in the manner specified to facilitate the review of indicated quantities. Prepare samples to 10 match the Architect/Engineer's sample where so indicated. 11 12 Submittal: At the Contractor's option, and depending upon the nature of the anticipated response from 13 the Architect/Engineer, the initial submittal of samples may be either a preliminary submittal or a final 14 submittal. 15 16 Preliminary submittal,of a single set of samples, is required where requirements 17 indicate the Architect/Engineer's selection of color, pattern, texture or similar 18 characteristics from a manufacturer's range of standard choices is necessary. 19 Preliminary submittals will be reviewed and returned with the Architect/Engineer's 20 "Action" marking. 21 22 Final Submittals: Submit 3 sets of samples in the final submittal, one set will be 23 returned. 24 25 Distribution of Samples: Maintain the final submittal sets of samples, as returned by 26 the Architect/Engineer, at the project site, available for quality control comparisons 27 throughout the course of performing the work. In addition, throughout the final 28 submittal sets may be used to obtain final acceptance of the work associated with 29 each set. Prepare and distribute additional sets of samples to subcontractors, 30 suppliers, fabricators, manufacturers, installers, governing authorities, and others as 31 required for proper performance of the work. Show final distribution on transmittal 32 forms. 33 34 Mock-Ups are similar samples specified in individual work sections are special types of 35 samples. Comply with sample submittal requirements to the fullest extent possible. Process 36 transmittal forms to provide a record of activity. 37 38 Miscellaneous Submittals: 39 40 Inspection and Test Reports: Classify each inspection and test report as being either "shop 41 drawings" or "product data" depending on whether the report is specially prepared for the 42 project, or a standard publication of workmanship control testing at the point of production. 43 Process inspection and test reports accordingly. 44 45 Warranties: Refer to section "Products and Substitutions" for specific general requirements 46 on warranties, product bonds, workmanship bonds and maintenance agreement. In addition 47 to copies desired for the Contractor's use, furnish 2 executed copies of such warranties, 48 bonds or agreements. Provide 2 additional copies where required for maintenance manuals. 49 50 Survey Data: Refer to section "Project Coordination" for specific general requirements on 51 property surveys, field measurements, quantitative records of actual work, damage surveys 52 and similar data required by the individual sections of these specifications. None of the 53 specified copies will be returned. 54 55 Survey Copies: Furnish 2 copies of general survey data. Provide 10 copies of the 56 final property survey. 57 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES GDA 01340-6 GDA#12018.00 December 14,2012 Issue for Permit 1 Records of Actual Work: Furnish 4 copies of records of actual work, one of which will 2 be returned for inclusion in the record documents as specified in section "Project 3 Closeout". 4 5 Standards: Where submittal of a copy of standards is indicated, and except where copies of 6 standards are specified as an integral part of a "Product Data" submittal, submit a single copy 7 of standards for the Architect/Engineer's use. Where workmanship,whether at the project site 8 or elsewhere is governed by a standard, furnish additional copies of the standard to 9 fabricators, installers and others involved in the performance of the work. 10 11 Closeout Submittals: Refer to section "Project Closeout" and to individual sections of these 12 specifications for specific submittal requirements of project closeout information, materials, 13 tools, and similar items. 14 15 Record Documents: Furnish set of original documents as maintained on the project 16 site. 17 18 Operating and Maintenance Data: Furnish 2 bound copies of operating data and 19 maintenance manuals. 20 21 Materials and Tools: Refer to individual sections of these specifications for required 22 quantities of spare parts, extra and overrun stock, maintenance tools and devices, 23 keys, and similar physical units to be submitted. 24 25 General Distribution: Provide additional distribution of submittals to contractors, suppliers, 26 fabricators, installers, governing authorities, and others as necessary for the proper 27 performance of the work. Include such additional copies of submittals in the transmittal to the 28 Architect/Engineer where the submittals are required to receive "Action" marking before final 29 distribution. Record distributions on transmittal forms. 30 31 ARCHITECT/ENGINEER'S ACTION: 32 33 General: Except for submittals for the record and similar purposes, where action and return on 34 submittals is required or requested, the Architect/Engineer will review each submittal, mark with 35 appropriate "Action", and here possible return within 2 weeks of receipt. Where the submittal must be 36 held for coordination the Architect/Engineer will so advise the Contractor without delay. 37 38 Action Stamp: The Architect/Engineer will stamp each submittal to be returned with a uniform, 39 self explanatory action stamp, appropriately marked and executed to indicate whether the 40 submittal returned is for unrestricted use, final-but-restricted use (as marked), must be revised 41 and resubmitted(use not permitted)or without action (as explained on the transmittal form). 42 43 No action will be taken by Architect/Engineer on any submittal without Contractor's review/approval 44 stamp accompanied by signature of Contractor's disignated individual. 45 46 47 PART 2- PRODUCTS(Not Applicable), 48 49 50 PART 3-EXECUTION(Not Applicable). 51 52 53 END OF SECTION 01340 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES GDA 01340-7 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 SECTION 01400-QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES 2 3 PART 1 - GENERAL 4 5 RELATED DOCUMENTS: 6 7 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and 8 other Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 9 10 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS: 11 12 General: Required inspection and testing services are intended to assist in the determination of 13 probable compliance of the work with requirements specified or indicated. These required services do 14 not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for compliance with these requirements or for compliance 15 with requirements of the contract documents. 16 17 Definitions: The requirements of this section relate primarily to customized fabrication and installation 18 procedures, not to the production of standard products. Quality control services include inspections 19 and tests and related actions including reports, performed by independent agencies and governing 20 authorities, as well as directly by the Contractor. These services do not include Contract enforcement 21 activities performed directly by the Architect or Engineer. 22 23 Specific quality control requirements for individual units of work are specified in the section of 24 these specifications that specify the individual element of the work. These requirements, 25 including inspections and tests, cover both production of standard products, and fabrication of 26 customized work. These requirements also cover quality control of the installation 27 procedures. 28 29 Inspections, tests and related actions specified in this section and elsewhere in the contract 30 documents are not intended to limit the Contractor's own quality control procedures which 31 facilitate overall compliance with requirements of the contract documents. 32 33 Requirements for the Contractor to provide quality control services as required by the 34 Architect/Engineer, the Owner, governing authorities or other authorized entities are not 35 limited by the provisions of this section. 36 37 Geotchnical Consultant and Consultant: Where used shall mean and refer to Owner's officially 38 designated and accredited geotechnical consultant. 39 40 Inspector, Testing Laboratory or Inspection Laboratory: Where used shall mean and refer to Owner's 41 officially designated and accredited testing laboratory. 42 43 RESPONSIBILITIES: 44 45 Contractor Responsibilities: Except where they are specifically indicated as being the Owner's 46 responsibility, or where they are to be provided by another identified entity, inspections, tests and 47 similar quality control services are the Contractor's responsibility; these services also include those 48 specified to be performed by an independent agency and not directly by the Contractor. Costs for 49 these services shall be included in the Contract Sum. The Contractor shall employ and pay an 50 independent agency, testing laboratory or other qualified firm to perform quality control services 51 specified, including but not limited to the services indicated below: 52 53 Provide design preliminary mix for use for portland cement concrete and other material mixes 54 which require control by a testing laboratory. 55 56 Retest Responsibility: Where results of required inspections, tests or similar services prove 57 unsatisfactory and do not indicate compliance of related work with the requirements of the contract QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES GDA 01400- 1 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 documents, then cost for retests are the responsibility of the Contractor, regardless of whether the 2 original test was the Owner's responsibility. Payment for retest of work revised or replaced by the 3 Contractor is the Contractor's responsibility,where required tests were performed on original work. 4 5 Responsibility for Associated Services: The Contractor is required to cooperate with the independent 6 agencies performing required inspections, tests and similar services. Provide such auxiliary services 7 as are reasonably requested. Notify the testing agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit 8 assignment of personnel. These auxiliary services include but are not necessarily limited to the 9 following: 10 11 Providing access to the work. 12 Taking samples or assistance with taking samples. 13 Delivery of samples to test laboratories. 14 Security and protection of samples and test equipment at the project site. 15 Furnish copies of product tests or mill test reports as required. 16 Furnish incidental labor and facilities to: 17 18 Provide access to work to be tested. 19 Obtain and handle samples at Project site or at source of product to be tested. 20 Facilitate inspections and tests. 21 Store and cure test samples. 22 23 Owner Responsibilities: The Owner will provide inspections, tests and similar quality control services 24 specified to be performed by independent agencies and not by the Contractor, except where they are 25 specifically indicated as the Contractor's responsibility or are provided by another identified entity. 26 Costs for these services are not included in the Contract Sum. 27 28 The Owner will engage and pay for the services of an independent agency to perform 29 inspections and tests that are specified as the Owner's responsibility. Costs for these 30 services shall not be included in the Contract Sum. 31 32 Duties of the Testing Agency: The independent testing agency engaged to perform inspections, 33 sampling and testing of materials and construction specified in individual Specification Sections shall 34 cooperate with the Architect and Contractor in performance of its duties, and shall provide qualified 35 personnel to perform required inspections and tests. 36 37 The agency shall notify the Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies 38 observed in the Work during performance of its services. 39 40 The agency is not authorized to release, revoke, alter or enlarge requirements of the Contract 41 Documents, or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 42 43 The agency shall not perform any duties of the Contractor. 44 45 Coordination: The Contractor and each independent agency engaged to perform inspections, tests 46 and similar services for the project shall coordinate the sequence of their activities so as to 47 accommodate required services with a minimum of delay in the progress of the work. In addition to 48 Contractor and each independent testing agency shall coordinate their work so as to avoid the 49 necessity of removing the replacing work to accommodate inspections and tests. The Contractor is 50 responsible for scheduling times for inspections,tests, taking of samples and similar activities. 51 52 QUALITY ASSURANCE: 53 54 Qualification for Service Agencies: Except as otherwise indicated, engage inspection and test service 55 agencies, including independent testing laboratories, which are prequalified as complying with 56 "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification" by the American Council of 57 Independent Laboratories, and which are recognized in the industry as specialized in the types of QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES GDA 01400-2 GDA#12018.00 December 14,2012 Issue for Permit 1 inspections and tests to be performed. 2 3 Testing laboratories shall meet basic requirements of ASTM E 329. 4 5 Testing laboratories shall be authorized in the state in which the Project is located. 6 7 Testing equipment shall be calibrated at mximum twelve (12) month intervals by devices of accuracy 8 traceable to either National Bureau of Standards or accepted values of natural physical constants. 9 10 SUBMITTALS: 11 12 General: Refer to Division-1 section on "Submittals" for the general requirements on submittals. 13 Submit six copies of certified written report of each inspection, test or similar service, directly to the 14 Architect/Engineer, in duplicate, unless the Contractor is responsible for the service. If the Contractor 15 is responsible for the service, submit six copies of certified written report of each inspection, test or 16 similar service through the Contractor. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to the 17 governing authority,when the authority so directs. 18 19 Report Data: Written reports of each inspection, test or similar service shall include, but not 20 be limited to the following: 21 22 Date report issued. 23 Project title, location, and number. 24 Name of testing agency or test laboratory, address, and telephone number. 25 Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 26 Location of sample or test in Project. 27 Names of individuals making the inspection or test. 28 Designation of the work and test method. 29 Identification of product and specification section. 30 Complete inspection or test data. 31 Test results. 32 Interpretations of test results. 33 Notation of significant ambient conditions at the time of sample-taking and testing. 34 Comments or professional opinion as to whether inspected or tested work complies 35 with requirements of the contract documents. 36 Recommendations on retesting, if applicable. 37 38 Testing Laboratory: Submit report of inspection of facilities made by Materials Reference Laboratory of 39 Nationl Bureau of Standards during most recent tour. Submit memorandum of remedies of any 40 deficiencies reported by inspection. 41 42 PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not Applicable). 43 44 PART 3- EXECUTION 45 46 REPAIR AND PROTECTION: 47 48 General: Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample-taking and similar services performed on the 49 work, repair damaged work and restore substrates and finishes to eliminate deficiencies, including 50 deficiencies in the visual qualities of exposed finishes. Comply with the contract document 51 requirements for "Cutting and Patching". Protect work exposed by or for quality control service 52 activities, and protect repaired work. Repair and protection is the Contractor's responsibility, 53 regardless of the assignment of responsibility for inspection,testing or similar services. 54 55 END OF SECTION 01400 QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES GDA 01400-3 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 SECTION 01505-TEMPORARY FACILITIES 2 3 4 PART 1 -GENERAL 5 6 RELATED DOCUMENTS: 7 8 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and 9 other Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 10 11 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS: 12 13 Definitions: Specific administrative and procedural minimum actions are specified in this section, as 14 extensions of provisions in General Conditions and other contract documents. These requirements 15 have been included for special purposes as indicated. Nothing in this section is intended to limit types 16 and amounts of temporary work required, and no omission from this section will be recognized as an 17 indication by Architect or Engineer that such temporary activity is not required for successful 18 completion of the work and compliance with requirements of contract documents. Provisions of this 19 section are applicable to, but not by way of limitation, utility services, construction facilities, 20 security/protection provisions, and supprt facilities. 21 22 QUALITY ASSURANCE: 23 24 General: In addition to compliance with governing regulations and rules/recommendations of 25 franchised utility companies, comply with specific requirements indicated and with applicable local 26 industry standards for construction work (published recommendations by local consensus "building 27 councils"). 28 29 ANSI Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of ANSI A10- Series standards on construction 30 safety, including A10.3, A10.4, A10.5, A10.6, A10.7, A10.8, A10.9, A10.10, A10.11, A10.12, A10.13, 31 A10.14, A10.15,A10.17,A10.18,A10.20, and A10.22. 32 33 NFPA Code: Comply with NFPA Code 241 "Building Construction and Demolition Operations." 34 35 Conservation: In compliance with Owner's policy on energy/ materials conservation, install and 36 operate temporary facilities and perform construction activities in manner which reasonably will be 37 conservative and avoid waste of energy and materials including water. 38 39 JOB CONDITIONS: 40 41 General: Establish and initiate use of each temporary facility at time first reasonably required for 42 proper performance of the work. Terminate use and remove facilities at earliest reasonable time, 43 when no longer needed or when permanent facilities have, with authorized use, replaced the need. 44 45 Conditions of Use: Install, operate, maintain and protect temporary facilities in a manner and at 46 locations which will be safe, non-hazardous, sanitary and protective of persons and property, and free 47 of deleterious effects. 48 49 50 PARTS 2 and 3- PRODUCTS AND EXECUTION 51 52 TEMPORARY UTILITY SERVICES: 53 54 The types of services required include, but not by way of limitation, water, sewerage, surface 55 drainage, electrical power and telephones. Where possible and reasonable, connect to existing 56 franchised utilities for required services; and comply with service companies' recommendations on 57 materials and methods, or engage service companies to install services. Locate and relocate services TEMPORARY FACILITIES GDA 01505- 1 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 (as necessary)to minimize interference with construction operations. 2 3 Non-potable Water: Where nonpotable water is used, mark each outlet with adequate health-hazard 4 warning signs. 5 6 Temporary Power: Provide service with ground-fault circuit interrupter features, activated from each 7 circuit of 20-amp or less rating. 8 9 Metering: Provide meters for water and electrical power services. 10 11 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES: 12 13 The types of temporary construction facilities required include, but not by way of limitation, water 14 distribution, drainage, dewatering equipment, enclosure of work, heat, ventilation, electrical power 15 distribution, lighting, hoisting facilities, stairs, ladders, and roads. Provide facilities reasonably 16 required to perform construction operations properly and adequately. 17 18 Lighting: Provide sufficent temporary lighting to ensure proper workmanship everywhere; by 19 combined use of daylight, general lighting, and portable plug-in task lighting. Provide general lighting 20 with local switching which will enable energy conservation during periods of varying activity (work-in- 21 progress, traffic only, security check, lock-up, etc.). 22 23 Access Provisions: Provide ramps, stairs, ladders and similar temporary access elements as 24 reasonably required to perform the work and facilitate its inspection during installation. Comply with 25 reasonable requests of governing authorities performing inspections. When permanent stairs are 26 available for access during construction, cover finished surfaces with sufficient protection to ensure 27 freedom from damage and deterioriation at time of substantial completion. 28 29 Roads: Except as otherwise indicated, develop subgrade and subbase of permanent roadways at 30 earliest possible date, and provide temporary surfacing to serve as temporary roads during 31 construction. Surface sufficiently to provide all-weather, uninterrupted access to construction area, for 32 every form of transportation which can be reasonably expected. Maintain temporary roads during 33 construction. Extend temporary roadway development and surfacing in and around construction site 34 as reasonably required to accommodate construction activities. When no longer needed as temporary 35 roadways, remove temporary surfacing and restore subbases to conditions required by contract 36 documents for permanent development. 37 38 SECURITY/PROTECTION PROVISIONS: 39 40 The types of temporary security and protection provisons required include, but not by way of limitation, 41 fire protection, barricades, warning signs/lights, sidewalk bridges, building enclosure/lockup, 42 watchman service, personnel secuity program (theft prevention), environmental protection, and similar 43 provisions intended to minimize property losses, personal injuries and claims for damages at project 44 site. 45 46 Building Enclosure and Lockup: At earliest possible date, secure building against unauthorized 47 entrance at times when personnel are not working. Provide secure temporary enclosures at ground 48 floor and other locations of possible entry, with locked entrances. 49 50 Environmental Protection Procedures: Provide facilities, establish procedures, and conduct 51 construction activities in a manner which will ensure compliance with regulations controlling 52 construction activities at project site. Designate one person, the Construction Superintendent or other, 53 to enforce strict discipline on activities related to generation of wastes, pollution of air/water/soil, 54 erosion control, generation of noise, and similar harmful or deleterious effects which might violate 55 regulations or reasonably irritate persons at or in vicinity of project site. 56 57 Collection and Disposal of Waste: Collect waste from construction areas, entrances and off-site TEMPORARY FACILITIES GDA 01505- 2 GDA#12018.00 December 14,2012 Issue for Permit 1 streets and elsewhere daily. Comply with requirements of NFPA 241 for removal of combustible 2 waste material and debris. Enforce requirements strictly. Do not hold materials more than 7 days 3 during normal weather or 3 days when the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F(27 deg C). 4 Handle hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste by 5 containerizing properly. Dispose of material in a lawful manner. 6 7 TEMPORARY SUPPORT FACILITIES: 8 9 The types of temporary support facilities required include, but not by way of limitation, field offices, 10 storage sheds, fabrication sheds, sanitary facilities, drinking water, first aid facilities, bulletin board, 11 private and public telephones, clocks, thermometer, project identification signs, clean-up facilities, 12 waste disposal service, rodent/pest control and similar miscellaneous general services, all as may be 13 reasonably required for proficient performance of the work and accommodation of personnel at the 14 site. Discontinue and remove temporary support facilities, and make incidental similar use of 15 permanent work of the project, only when and in manner authorized by Architect/ Engineer; and, if not 16 otherwise indicated, immediately before time of substantial completion. Locate temporary support 17 facilities for convenience of users, and for minimum interference with construction activities. 18 19 Contractor's Field Office: Provide adequate office space for field office personnel plus one spare work 20 station for incidental use by subcontractor's personnel, suitably finished, furnished, equipped and 21 conditioned. 22 23 Sanitary Facilities: At Contractor's option, provide either piped (wet) toilet facilities or self-contained 24 toilet units of type acceptable to governing authorities, adequate (at all stages of construction)for use 25 of personnel at project site. Provide separate facilities for male and female personnel when both 26 sexes are working (in any capacity) at project site. Provide wash facilities; except, during time when 27 only earthwork and foundation work are in progress. 28 29 Drinking Water: Provide dispenser-type, electrical-power-cooled drinking water units, either piped with 30 potable water or supplied with bottled water, or portable water containers, adequate in number and 31 locations for personnel at project site. Furnish paper cups and waste receptacles. 32 33 END OF SECTION 01505 TEMPORARY FACILITIES GDA 01505-3 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 SECTION 01600- MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 2 3 4 PART 1 -GENERAL 5 6 RELATED DOCUMENTS 7 8 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and 9 other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 10 11 SUMMARY 12 13 This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements governing the Contractor's 14 selection of products for use in the Project. 15 16 The Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Schedule of Submittals are included under Section 17 "Submittals." 18 19 Standards: Refer to Section "Definitions and Standards" for applicability of industry standards to 20 products specified. 21 22 Administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after award of the Contract are 23 included under Section "Product Substitutions." 24 25 DEFINITIONS 26 27 Definitions used in this Article are not intended to change the meaning of other terms used in the 28 Contract Documents, such as "specialties," "systems," "structure," "finishes," "accessories," and 29 similar terms. Such terms such are self-explanatory and have well recognized meanings in the 30 construction industry. 31 32 "Products" are items purchased for incorporation in the Work, whether purchased for the 33 Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms 34 "material,""equipment,""system,"and terms of similar intent. 35 36 "Named Products" are items identified by manufacturer's product name, including 37 make or model designation, indicated in the manufacturer's published product 38 literature, that is current as of the date of the Contract Documents. 39 40 "Foreign Products", as distinguished from"domestic products," are items substantially 41 manufactured (50 percent or more of value) outside of the United States and its 42 possessions; or produced or supplied by entities substantially owned (more than 50 43 percent) by persons who are not citizens of nor living within the United States and its 44 possessions. 45 46 "Materials" are products that are substantially shaped, cut, worked, mixed, finished, refined or 47 otherwise fabricated, processed, or installed to form a part of the Work. 48 49 "Equipment", is a product with operational parts, whether motorized or manually operated, that 50 requires service connections such as wiring or piping. 51 52 SUBMITTALS 53 54 Product List Schedule: Prepare a schedule showing products specified in a tabular form acceptable to 55 the Architect. Include generic names of products required. Include the manufacturer's name and 56 proprietary product names for each item listed. 57 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT GDA 01600- 1 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Coordinate the product list schedule with the Contractor's Construction Schedule and the 2 Schedule of Submittals. 3 4 Form: Prepare the product listing schedule with information on each item tabulated under the 5 following column headings: 6 7 Related Specification Section number. 8 Generic name used in Contract Documents. 9 Proprietary name, model number and similar designations. 10 Manufacturer's name and address. 11 Supplier's name and address. 12 Installer's name and address. 13 Projected delivery date, or time span of delivery period. 14 15 Initial Submittal: Within 30 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3 copies of 16 an initial product list schedule. Provide a written explanation for omissions of data, and for 17 known variations from Contract requirements. 18 19 Completed Schedule: Within 60 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3 20 copies of the completed product list schedule. Provide a written explanation for omissions of 21 data, and for known variations from Contract requirements. 22 23 Architect's Action: The Architect will respond in writing to the Contractor within 2 weeks of 24 receipt of the completed product list schedule. No response within this time period constitutes 25 no objection to listed manufacturers or products, but does not constitute a waiver of the 26 requirement that products comply with Contract Documents. The Architect's response will 27 include the following: 28 29 A list of unacceptable product selections, containig a brief explanation of reasons for 30 this action. 31 32 QUALITY ASSURANCE 33 34 Source Limitations: To the fullest extent possible, provide products of the same kind, from a single 35 source. 36 37 Foreign Product Limitations: Except under one or more of the following conditions, provide domestic 38 products, not foreign products, for inclusion in the Work: 39 40 No available domestic product complies with the Contract Documents. 41 42 Domestic products that comply with the Contract Documents are available only at prices or terms 43 substantially higher than foreign products that comply with the Contract Documents. 44 45 Nameplates: Except for required labels and operating data, do not attach or imprint manufacturer's or 46 producer's nameplates or trademarks on exposed surfaces of products which will be exposed to view 47 in occupied spaces or on the exterior. 48 49 Labels: Locate required product labels and stamps on a concealed surface or, where 50 required for observation after installation, on an accessible surface that is not conspicuous. 51 52 Equipment Nameplates: Provide a permanent nameplate on each item of service-connected 53 or power-operated equipment. Locate on an easily accessible surface which is inconspicuous 54 in occupied spaces. The nameplate shall contain the following information and other essential 55 operating data: 56 57 Name of product and manufacturer. MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT GDA 01600- 2 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Model and serial number. 2 Capacity. 3 Speed. 4 Ratings. 5 6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 7 8 Deliver, store and handle products in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, using 9 means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration and loss, including theft. 10 11 Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at the site and to prevent overcrowding of 12 construction spaces. 13 14 Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are 15 flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft and other losses. 16 17 Deliver products to the site in the manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging 18 system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting and 19 installing. 20 21 Inspect products upon delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents, and to 22 ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected. 23 24 Store products at the site in a manner that will facilitate inspection and measurement of 25 quantity or counting of units. 26 27 Store heavy materials away from the Project structure in a manner that will not endanger the 28 supporting construction. 29 30 Store products subject to damage by the elements above ground, under cover in a 31 weathertight enclosure, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Maintain 32 temperature and humidity within range required by manufacturer's instructions. 33 34 35 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 36 37 38 PRODUCT SELECTION 39 40 General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are 41 undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, unused at the time of installation. 42 43 Provide products complete with all accessories, trim, finish, safety guards and other devices 44 and details needed for a complete installation and for the intended use and effect. 45 46 Standard Products: Where available, provide standard products of types that have been 47 produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 48 49 Product Selection Procedures: Product selection is governed by the Contract Documents and 50 governing regulations, not by previous Project experience. Procedures governing product selection 51 include the following: 52 53 Proprietary Specification Requirements: Where only a single product or manufacturer is 54 named, provide the product indicated. No substitutions will be permitted. 55 56 Semiproprietary Specification Requirements: Where two or more products or manufacturers 57 are named, provide one of the products indicated. No substitutions will be permitted. MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT GDA 01600- 3 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 Where products or manufacturers are specified by name, accompanied by the term 3 "or equal," or "or approved equal" comply with the Contract Document provisions 4 - concerning "substitutions"to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. 5 6 Descriptive Specification Requirements: Where Specifications describe a product or 7 assembly, listing exact characteristics required, with or without use of a brand or trade name, 8 provide a product or assembly that provides the characteristics and otherwise complies with 9 Contract requirements. 10 11 Performance Specification Requirements: Where Specifications require compliance with 12 performance requirements, provide products that comply with these requirements, and are 13 recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. General overall performance 14 of a product is implied where the product is specified for a specific application. 15 16 Manufacturer's recommendations may be contained in published product literature, or 17 by the manufacturer's certification of performance. 18 19 Compliance with Standards, Codes and Regulations: Where the Specifications only require 20 compliance with an imposed code, standard or regulation, select a product that complies with 21 the standards, codes or regulations specified. 22 23 Visual Matching: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, the 24 Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches satisfactorily. 25 26 Where no product available within the specified category matches satisfactorily and 27 also complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions of the 28 Contract Documents concerning "substitutions" for selection of a matching product in 29 another product category, or for noncompliance with specified requirements. 30 31 Visual Selection: Where specified product requirements include the phrase "...as selected 32 from manufacturer's standard colors, patterns, textures..."or a similar phrase, select a product 33 and manufacturer that complies with other specified requirements. The Architect will select 34 the color, pattern and texture from the product line selected. 35 36 Allowances: Refer to individual Specification Sections and "Allowance" provisions in Division- 37 1 for allowances that control product selection, and for procedures required for processing 38 such selections. 39 40 41 PART 3-EXECUTION 42 43 44 INSTALLATION OF PRODUCTS 45 46 Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation of products in the 47 applications indicated. Anchor each product securely in place, accurately located and aligned with 48 other Work. 49 50 Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and 51 deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 52 53 END OF SECTION 01600 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT GDA 01600-4 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM 2 Project: Substitution Request Number: 3 From: 4 To: Date: 5 NE Project Number: 6 RE: Contract For: 7 8 Specification Title: 9 Section Number _ Page: Article/Line Number: 10 11 Proposed Substitution: 12 Manufacturer: Address: Phone#: 13 Trade Name: Model#: 14 Installer: Address: Phone#: 15 History: H] New Product [ ]2-5 years old [ ] 5-10 years old [ ] More than 10 years old 16 Differences between proposed substitutions and specified product: 17 18 19 20 21 [ ] Point-by-point comparison data attached- REQUIRED BY NE 22 23 Reason for Not Providing Specified Item: 24 25 Similar Installation: 26 Project: Architect: 27 Address: Owner: 28 Date Installed: 29 Proposed substitution affects other parts of Work: [ ] No [ ]Yes; explain 30 31 32 33 34 Savings to Owner for accepting substitution: ($ 35 Proposed substitution changes Contract Time: [ ] No [ ]Yes;Add/Deduct days. 36 37 Supporting Data Attached 38 [ ] Product Data [ ] Drawings [ ]Tests [ ] Reports [ ] Samples [ ] 39 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 Undersigned certifies: 3 • Proposed substitution has been fully investigated and determined to be equal or 4 superior in all respects to specified product. 5 • Same warranty will be furnished for proposed substitution as for specified product. 6 • Same maintenance service and source of replacement parts, as applicable is available. 7 • Proposed substitution will not affect or delay Progress Schedule. 8 • Cost data as stated above is complete. Claims for additional costs related to accepted substitution 9 which may subsequently become apparent are to be waived. 10 • Proposed substitution does not affect dimensions and functional clearances. 11 • Payment will be made for changes to building design, including architectural or engineering 12 design, detailing, and construction costs caused by the requested substitution. 13 • Coordination, installation, and changes in the Work as necessary for accepted substitution will be 14 complete in all respects. 15 16 Submitted by: 17 Signature: 18 Firm: 19 Address: 20 21 22 Telephone: 23 Attachments: 24 25 26 27 28 ARCHITECT'S REVIEW AND ACTION 29 [ ] Substitution approved - Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 01300 30 [ ] Substitution approved as noted- Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 01300 31 [ ] Substitution rejected - Use specified materials 32 [ ] Substitution Request received too late - Use specified materials 33 Signed by: Date: 34 35 36 Additional Comments: [ ] Contractor [ ] Subcontractor [ ] Supplier [ ] Manufacturer [ ] A/E [ ] _ 37 38 39 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 SECTION 01631 -PRODUCTS AND SUBSTITUTIONS 2 3 4 PART 1 -GENERAL 5 6 RELATED DOCUMENTS: 7 8 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and 9 other Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 10 11 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS: 12 13 Definitions: Definitions used in this paragraph are not intended to negate the meaning of other terms 14 used in the contract documents, including such terms as, "specialties", "systems", "structure", 15 "finishes", "accessories", "furnishings", "special construction" and similar terms. Such terms are self- 16 explanatory and have recognized meanings in the construction industry. 17 18 "Products" are items purchased for incorporation in the Work, regardless of whether they were 19 specifically purchased for the project or taken from the Contractor's previously purchased 20 stock. The term "product" as used herein includes the terms"material", "equipment", "system" 21 and other terms of similar intent. 22 23 "Named Products" are products identified by use of the manufacturer's name for a 24 product, including such items as a make or model designation, as recorded in 25 published product literature, of the latest issue as of the date of the contract 26 documents. 27 28 "Materials" are products that must be substantially cut, shaped, worked, mixed, finished, 29 refined or otherwise fabricated, processed, or installed to form units of work. 30 31 "Equipment"is defined as a product with operational parts, regardless of whether motorized or 32 manually operated, and in particular, a product that requires service connections such as 33 wiring or piping. 34 35 "Commencement of the Work" for the purposes of this Section only shall be defined as the 36 date of signing of the Owner/Contractor Agreement. 37 38 Substitutions: The Contractor's requests for changes in the products, materials, equipment and 39 methods of construction required by the contract documents are considered requests for 40 "substitutions", and are subject to the requirements specified herein. The following are not considered 41 as substitutions: 42 43 Revisions to the contract documents, where requested by the Owner, Architect or Engineer 44 are considered as"changes" not substitutions. 45 46 Substitutions requested during the bidding period, which have been accepted prior to the 47 Contract Date,are included in the contract documents and are not subject to the requirements 48 for substitutions as herein specified. 49 50 Specified Contractor options on products and construction methods included in the contract 51 documents are choices available to the Contractor and are not subject to the requirements for 52 substitutions as herein specified. 53 54 Except as otherwise provided in the contract documents, the Contractor's determination of 55 and compliance with governing regulations and orders as issued by governing authorities do 56 not constitute "substitutions"and do not constitute a basis for change orders. 57 PRODUCTS AND SUBSTITUTIONS GDA 01631 - 1 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Standards: Refer to Division-1 section "Definitions and Standards" for the applicability of industry 2 standards to the products specified for the project, and for the acronyms used in the text of the 3 specification sections 4 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE: 6 7 Source Limitations: To the fullest extent possible, provide products of the same generic kind, from a 8 single source, for each unit of work. 9 10 When it is discovered that specified products are available only from sources that do not or 11 cannot produce an adequate quantity to complete project requirements in a timely manner, 12 consult with the Architect/Engineer for a determination of what product qualities are most 13 important before proceeding. The Architect/Engineer will designate those qualities, such as 14 visual, structural, durability, or compatibility, that are most important. When the 15 Architect/Engineer's determination has been made, select products from those sources that 16 produce products that possess the most important qualities, to the fullest extent possible. 17 18 Compatibility of Options: Compatibility of products is a basic requirement of product selection. When 19 the Contractor is given the option of selecting between two or more products for use on the project, 20 the product selected must be compatible with other products previously selected, even if the products 21 previously selected were also Contractor options. The complete compatibility between the various 22 choices available to the Contractor is not assured by the various requirements of the Contract 23 documents, but must be provided by the Contractor. 24 25 SUBMITTAL S: 26 27 Product Listing Submittal: 28 29 General: Prepare a product-listing schedule in a form acceptable to the Architect/Engineer. 30 Show names of the principal products required for the work, by generic name. Show 31 proprietary product names and the name of the manufacturer for each item listed that is to be 32 purchased and incorporated into the Work. 33 34 Form: Prepare the product-listing schedule with information on each item tabulated under 35 the following scheduled column headings: 36 37 Generic name as used in contract documents. 38 39 Proprietary name, model number and similar product designation. 40 41 Manufacturer's and supplier's name and city/state addresses. 42 43 Related unit-of-work specification section number. 44 45 Installer's name and primary trade of workmen. 46 47 Projected delivery date, or time span of delivery period. 48 49 Submittal: Submit 3 copies of the product-listing schedule within 30 days after the date of 50 commencement of the Work. Provide a written explanation for omissions of data, and for 51 known variations from contract requirements. 52 53 54 At the Contractor's option, the initial submittal of the product-listing schedule may be 55 limited to product selections and product designations that must be established early 56 in the Contract Time. Submit the completed product-listing schedule within 60 days 57 after commencement of the Work. PRODUCTS AND SUBSTITUTIONS GDA 01631 - 2 GDA#12018.00 December 14,2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 Architect/Engineer's Action: The Architect/Engineer will respond to the Contractor in writing within 2 3 weeks of receipt of the product-listing schedule. No response by the Architect/Engineer within the 2 4 week time period constitutes no objection to the listed products or manufacturers, but does not 5 constitute a waiver of the requirement that products comply with the requirements of the contract 6 documents. The Architect/Engineer's response will include the following: 7 8 The Architect/Engineer's listing of unacceptable product selection, if any, containing 9 an explanation of the reasons for this action. 10 11 A request for additional data necessary for the review and possible acceptance of the 12 products and manufacturer's listed. 13 14 SUBMITTALS 15 16 Substitution Request Submittal: The Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 17 60 days after commencement of the Work. Requests received more than 60 days after 18 commencement of the Work may be considered or rejected at the discretion of the Architect. 19 20 Submit 3 copies of each request for substitution for consideration. Submit requests in the 21 form at the end of this Section and according to procedures required for change-order 22 proposals. Include a change order Proposal Request Form with each substitution request. 23 24 Identify the product or the fabrication or installation method to be replaced in each request. 25 Include related Specification Section and Drawing numbers. 26 27 Provide complete documentation showing compliance with the requirements for substitutions, 28 and the following information, as appropriate: 29 30 Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other 31 parts of the Work and to construction performed by the Owner and separate contractors, 32 that will be necessary to accommodate the proposed substitution. 33 34 A detailed comparison of significant qualities of the proposed substitution with those of the 35 Work specified. Significant qualities may include elements, such as performance, weight, 36 size, durability, and visual effect. 37 38 Product Data, including Drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and 39 installation procedures. 40 41 Samples,where applicable or requested. 42 43 A statement indicating the substitution's effect on the Contractor's Construction Schedule 44 compared to the schedule without approval of the substitution. Indicate the effect of the 45 proposed substitution on overall Contract Time. 46 47 Cost information, including a proposal of the net change, if any in the Contract Sum. 48 49 The Contractor's certification that the proposed substitution conforms to requirements in 50 the Contract Documents in every respect and is appropriate for the applications indicated. 51 52 The Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently 53 become necessary because of the failure of the substitution to perform adequately. 54 55 Architect's Action: If necessary, the Architect will request additional information or 56 documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a request for substitution. The 57 Architect will notify the Contractor of acceptance or rejection of the substitution within 2 weeks PRODUCTS AND SUBSTITUTIONS GDA 01631 -3 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 of receipt of the request, or one week of receipt of additional information or documentation, 2 whichever is later. Acceptance will be in the form of a change order. 3 4 Acceptance will be in the form of a change order. 5 6 Rejection will include a statement giving reasons for the rejection. 7 8 Use the product specified if the Architect cannot make a decision on the use of a 9 proposed substitute within the time allocated. 10 11 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: 12 13 General: Deliver, store, and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, 14 using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration and loss, including theft. Control to 15 prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. In particular coordinate delivery and installation to 16 ensure minimum holding or storage times for items known or recognized to be flammable, hazardous, 17 easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft and other sources of loss. 18 19 Deliver products to the site in the manufacturer's sealed container or other packaging system, 20 complete with labels and instructions for handling, storage, unpacking, protecting and 21 installing. 22 23 Store products at the site in a manner that will facilitate inspection and measurement of 24 quantity or counting of units. 25 26 Store heavy materials away from the project structure in a manner that will not endanger the 27 supporting construction. 28 29 30 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 31 32 GENERAL PRODUCT COMPLIANCE: 33 34 General: Requirements for individual products are indicated in the contract documents; compliance 35 with these requirements is in itself a contract requirement. These requirements may be specified in 36 any one of several different specifying methods, or in any combination of these methods. These 37 methods include the following: 38 39 Proprietary. 40 Descriptive. 41 Performance. 42 Compliance with Reference Standards. 43 44 Compliance with codes, compliance with graphic details, allowances, and similar provisions of 45 the contract documents also have a bearing on the selection process. 46 47 Procedures for Selecting Products: The Contractor's options in selecting products are limited by 48 requirements of the contract documents and governing regulations. They are not controlled by 49 industry traditions or procedures experienced by the Contractor on previous construction projects. 50 Required procedures include but are mot limited to the following for the various indicated methods of 51 specifying: 52 53 Proprietary and Semiproprietary Specification Requirements: 54 55 Single Product Name: Where only a single product or manufacturer is named, 56 provide the product indicated, unless the specification indicates the possible 57 consideration of other products. Advise the Architect/Engineer before proceeding, PRODUCTS AND SUBSTITUTIONS GDA 01631 -4 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 when it is discovered that the named product is not a reasonable or a feasible 2 solution. 3 4 Two or More Product Names: Where two or more products or manufacturers are 5 named, provide one of the products named, at the Contractor's option. Exclude 6 products that do not comply with specification requirements. Do not provide or offer 7 to provide an unnamed product, unless the specification indicates possible 8 consideration of other products. Advise the Architect/Engineer before proceeding 9 where none of the named products comply with specification requirements. or are 10 feasible for use. 11 12 Where products or manufacturers are specified by name, accompanied by the term 13 "or-equal" or similar language, comply with the contract document provisions 14 concerning "substitutions" to obtain approval from the Architect/Engineer for the use 15 of an unnamed product. 16 17 Non-Proprietary Specification Requirements: Where the specifications name products or 18 manufacturers that are available and may be incorporated in the Work, but do not restrict the 19 Contractor to the use of these products only,the Contractor may, at his option, use any 20 available product that complies with contract requirements. 21 22 Descriptive Specification Requirements: Where the specifications describe a product or 23 assembly generically, in detail, listing the exact characteristics required, but without use of a 24 brand or trade name, provide products or assemblies that provide the characteristics indicated 25 and otherwise comply with contract requirements. 26 27 Performance Specification Requirements: Where the specifications require compliance with 28 indicated performance requirements, provide products that comply with the specific 29 performance requirements indicated, and that are recommended by the manufacturer for the 30 application indicated. The manufacturer's recommendations may be contained in published 31 product literature, or by the manufacturer's individual certification of performance. General 32 overall performance of a product is implied where the product is specified for specific 33 performances. 34 35 Compliance with Standards, Codes, and Regulations: Where the specifications require only 36 compliance with an imposed standard, code or regulation, the Contractor has the option of 37 selecting a product that complies with specification requirements, including standards, codes, 38 and regulations. 39 40 Visual Matching: Where matching an established sample is required, the final judgement of 41 whether a product proposed by the Contractor matches the sample satisfactorily will be 42 determined by the Architect. Where there is no product available within the specified product 43 category that matches the sample satisfactorily and also complies with other specified 44 requirements, comply with the provisions of the contract documents concerning "substitutions" 45 and "change orders"for the selection of a matching product in another product category, or for 46 non-compliance with specified requirements. 47 48 Visual Selection: Except as otherwise indicated, where specified product requirements 49 include the phrase "++.as selected from the manufacturer's standard colors, patterns, 50 textures++." or similar phrases, the Contractor has the option of selecting the product and 51 manufacturer, provided the selection complies with other specified requirements. The 52 Architect is subsequently responsible for selecting the color, pattern and texture from the 53 product line selected by the Contractor. 54 55 Allowances: Refer to individual sections of the specifications and "Allowances" provisions in 56 Division-1 sections for an indication of product selections that are controlled by established 57 allowances, and for the procedures required for processing such selections. PRODUCTS AND SUBSTITUTIONS GDA 01631 -5 ■ GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 Producer's Statement of Applicability: Where individual specification sections indicate products that 3 require a "Statement of Applicability" from the manufacturer or other producer, submit a written- 4 certified statement from the producer stating that the producer has reviewed the proposed application 5 of the product on the project. This statement shall state that the producer agrees with or does not 6 object to the Architect/Engineer's specification and the Contractor's selection of the product for use in 7 the Work. The statement shall also state that the proposed application of the product on the project is 8 suitable and proper. 9 10 SUBSTITUTIONS: 11 12 Conditions: The Contractor's request for a substitution will be received and considered when 13 extensive revisions to the contract documents are not required, when the proposed changes are in 14 keeping with the general intent of the contract documents, when the requests are timely,fully 15 documented and properly submitted, and when one or more of the following conditions is satisfied, all 16 as judged by the Architect/Engineer ; otherwise the requests will be returned without action except to 17 record non-compliance with these requirements. 18 19 The Architect/Engineer will consider a request for substitution where the request is directly 20 related to an "or equal"clause or similar language in the contract documents. 21 22 The Architect/Engineer will consider a request for substitution where the specified product or 23 method cannot be provided within the Contract Time. However, the request will not be 24 considered if the product or method cannot be provided as a result of the Contractor's failure 25 to pursue the work promptly or to coordinate the various activities properly. 26 27 The Architect/Engineer will consider a request for substitution where the specified product or 28 method cannot receive necessary approval by a governing authority, and the requested 29 substitution can be approved. 30 31 The Architect/Engineer will consider a request for a substitution where a substantial 32 advantage is offered the Owner, in terms of cost, time, energy conservation or other 33 considerations of merit, after deducting of offsetting responsibilities the Owner may be 34 required to bear. These additional responsibilities may include such considerations as 35 additional compensation to the Architect/Engineer for redesign and evaluation services, the 36 increased cost of other work by the Owner or separate contractors, and similar 37 considerations. 38 39 The Architect/Engineer will consider a request for substitution when the specified product or 40 method cannot be provided in a manner which is compatible with other materials of the work, 41 and where the Contractor certifies that the 42 the substitution will overcome the incompatibility. 43 44 The Architect/Engineer will consider a request for substitution when the specified product or 45 method cannot be properly coordinated with other materials in the work, and where the 46 Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution can be properly coordinated. 47 48 The Architect/Engineer will consider a request for substitution when the specified product or 49 method cannot receive a warranty as required by the contract documents and where the 50 contractor certifies that the proposed substitution receive the required warranty. 51 52 53 Work-Related Submittals: The Contractor's submittal of and the Architect/Engineer's acceptance of 54 shop drawings, product data or samples which related to work not complying with requirements of the 55 contract documents, does not constitute an acceptable or valid request for a substitution, nor approval 56 thereof. 57 PRODUCTS AND SUBSTITUTIONS GDA 01631 - 6 A GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 GENERAL PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS: 2 3 General: Provide products that comply with the requirements of the contract documents that are 4 undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, unused at the time of installation. Provide products that 5 are complete with all accessories, trim, finish, safety guards and other devices and details needed for 6 a complete installation and for the intended use and effect. 7 8 Standard Products: Where they are available, provide standard products of types that have 9 been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 10 11 Continued Availability: Where, because of the nature of its application, the Owner is likely to 12 need replacement parts or additional amounts of a product at a later date, either for 13 maintenance and repair or replacement, provide standard, domestically produced products for 14 which the manufacturer has published assurances that the products and its parts are likely to 15 be available to the Owner at a later date. 16 17 Nameplates: Except as otherwise indicated for required labels and operating data, do not 18 permanently attach or imprint manufacturer's or producer's nameplates or trademarks on exposed 19 surfaces of products which will be exposed to view either in occupied spaces or on the exterior of the 20 completed project. 21 22 Labels: Locate required product labels and stamps on a concealed surface or, where 23 required for observation after installation, on an accessible surface which, in occupied spaces, 24 is not conspicuous. 25 26 Equipment Nameplates: Provide a permanent nameplate on each item of service-connected 27 or power-operated equipment. Locate the nameplate on an easily accessible surface which is 28 inconspicuous in occupied spaces. The nameplate shall contain the following information and 29 other essential operating data. 30 31 Name of manufacturer 32 Name of product 33 Model number 34 Serial number 35 Capacity 36 Speed 37 Ratings 38 39 40 PART 3- EXECUTION 41 42 INSTALLATION OF PRODUCTS: 43 44 45 General: Except as otherwise indicated in individual sections of these specifications, comply with the 46 manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation of the products in the applications 47 indicated. Anchor each product securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other work. 48 Clean exposed surfaces and protect surfaces as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and 49 deterioration at time of acceptance. 50 51 END OF SECTION 01631 PRODUCTS AND SUBSTITUTIONS GDA 01631 - 7 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 SECTION 01700- PROJECT CLOSEOUT 2 3 4 PART 1 -GENERAL 5 6 RELATED DOCUMENTS: 7 8 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and 9 other Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 10 11 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS: 12 13 Definitions: Project closeout is the term used to describe certain collective project requirements, 14 indicating completion of the Work that are to be fulfilled near the end of the Contract time in 15 preparation for final acceptance and occupancy of the Work by the Owner, as well as final payment to 16 the Contractor and the normal termination of the Contract. 17 18 Specific requirements for individual units of work are included in the appropriate sections in Divisions 19 2 through 16. 20 21 Time of closeout is directly related to "Substantial Completion"; therefore, the time of closeout may be 22 either a single time period for the entire Work or a series of time periods for individual elements of the 23 Work that have been certified as substantially complete at different dates. This time variation, if any, 24 shall be applicable to the other provisions of this section. 25 26 PREREQUISITES TO SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION: 27 28 General: Complete the following before requesting the Architect/Engineer's inspection for certification 29 of substantial completion, either for the entire Work or for portions of the Work. List known exceptions 30 in the request. 31 32 In the progress payment request that coincides with, or is the first request following, the date 33 substantial completion is claimed, show either 100% completion for the portion of the Work claimed as 34 "substantially complete", or list incomplete items, the value of incomplete work, and reasons for the 35 Work being incomplete. 36 37 Include supporting documentation for completion as indicated in these contract documents. 38 39 Submit a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 40 41 Advise Owner of pending insurance change-over requirements. 42 43 Submit specific warranties, workmanship/maintenance bonds, maintenance agreements, final 44 certifications and similar documents. 45 46 Obtain and submit releases enabling Owner's full, unrestricted use of the Work and access to services 47 and utilities. Where required, include occupancy permits, operating certificates and similar releases. 48 49 Deliver tools, spare parts,extra stocks of material and similar physical items to the Owner. 50 51 Make the final change-over of locks and transmit the keys to the Owner. Advise the Owner's 52 personnel of the change-over in security provisions. 53 54 Complete start-up testing of systems, and instruction of the Owner's operating and maintenance 55 personnel. Discontinue or change over and remove temporary facilities and services from the project 56 site, along with construction tools and facilities, mock-ups, and similar elements. 57 PROJECT CLOSEOUT GDA 01700- 1 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Complete final cleaning up requirements, including touch-up painting of marred surfaces. 2 3 Touch-up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes. 4 5 Inspection Procedures: Upon receipt of Contractor's request for inspection, the Architect/Engineer will 6 either proceed with inspection or advise Contractor of unfulfilled prerequisites. 7 8 Following the initial inspection, the Architect/Engineer will either prepare the certificate of substantial 9 completion, or will advise Contractor of work which must be performed before the certificate will be 10 issued. The Architect/Engineer will repeat the inspection when requested and when assured that the 11 Work has been substantially completed. 12 13 Results of the completed inspection will form the initial "punch-list"for final acceptance. 14 15 PREREQUISITES TO FINAL ACCEPTANCE: 16 17 General: Complete the following before requesting the Architect/Engineer's final inspection for 18 certification of final acceptance, and final payment as required by the General Conditions. List known 19 exceptions, if any, in request: 20 21 Submit the final payment request with final releases and supporting documentation not previously 22 submitted and accepted. Include certificates of insurance for products and completed operations 23 where required. 24 25 Submit an updated final statement, accounting for final additional changes to the Contract Sum. 26 27 Submit a certified copy of the Architect/Engineer's final punch-list of itemized work to be completed or 28 corrected, stating that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance and has 29 been endorsed and dated by the Architect/Engineer. 30 31 Submit final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of the 32 date of substantial completion, or else when the Owner took possession of and responsibility for 33 corresponding elements of the Work. 34 35 Submit consent of surety. 36 37 Submita final liquidated damages settlement statement,acceptable to Owner. 38 39 Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 40 41 Reinspection Procedure: The Architect/Engineer will reinspect the Work upon receipt of the 42 Contractor's notice that the work, including punch-list items resulting from earlier inspections, has 43 been completed, except for these items whose completion has been delayed because of 44 circumstances that are acceptable to the Architect/Engineer. 45 46 Upon completion of reinspection, the Architect/Engineer will either prepare a certificate of final 47 acceptance, or will advise the Contractor of work that is incomplete or of obligations that have not 48 been fulfilled, but are required for final acceptance. 49 50 If necessary, the reinspection procedure will be repeated. 51 52 RECORD DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS: 53 54 General: Specific requirements for record documents are indicated in the individual sections of these 55 specifications. Other requirements are indicated in the General Conditions. General submittal 56 requirements are indicated in "submittals"sections. 57 PROJECT CLOSEOUT GDA 01700-2 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Do not use record documents for construction purposes; protect from deterioration and loss in a 2 secure, fire-resistive location; provide access to record documents for the Architect/Engineer's 3 reference during normal working hours. 4 5 Record Drawings: Maintain a record set of blue or black line white-prints of contract drawings and 6 shop drawings in a clean, undamaged condition. Mark-up the set of record documents to show the 7 actual installation where the installed work varies substantially from the work as originally shown. 8 Mark whichever drawing is most capable of showing the actual "field" condition fully and accurately; 9 however, where shop drawings are used for mark-up, record a cross-reference at the corresponding 10 location on the working drawings. Give particular attention to concealed work that would be difficult to 11 measure and record at a later date. 12 13 Mark record sets with red erasable pencil and, where feasible, use other colors to distinguish between 14 variations in separate categories of work. 15 16 Mark-up new information which is known to be important to the Owner, but for some reason was not 17 shown on either contract drawings or shop drawings. 18 19 Note related change-order number where applicable. 20 21 Organize record drawing sheets into manageable sets, bind with durable paper cover sheets, and 22 print suitable titles, dates and other identification on cover of each set. 23 24 Record Specifications: Maintain one complete copy of the Project Manual, including specifications 25 and addenda, and one copy of other written construction documents such as change orders and 26 similar modifications issued in printed form during construction. Mark these documents to show 27 substantial variations in the actual work performed in comparison with the text of the specifications 28 and modifications as issued. Give particular attention to substitutions, selection of options and similar 29 information on work where it is concealed or cannot otherwise be readily discerned at a later date by 30 direct observation. Note related record drawing information and product data,where applicable. 31 32 Upon completion of the Work, submit record specifications to the Architect/Engineer for the Owner's 33 records. 34 35 Record Product Data: Maintain one copy of each product data submittal. Mark these documents to 36 show significant variations in the actual Work performed in comparison with the submitted information. 37 Include both variations in the products as delivered to the site, and variations from the manufacturer's 38 instructions and recommendations for installation. Give particular attention to concealed products and 39 portions of the Work which cannot otherwise be readily discerned at a later date by direct observation. 40 Note related change orders and mark-up of record drawings and specifications. 41 42 Upon Completion of mark-up, submit complete set of record product data to the Architect/Engineer for 43 the Owner's records. 44 45 Record Sample Submittal: Immediately prior to date or dates of substantial completion,the Contractor 46 will meet at the site with the Architect/Engineer and the Owner's personnel, if desired, to determine 47 which, if any, of the submitted samples that have been maintained by the Contractor during progress 48 of the Work, are to be transmitted to the Owner for record purposes. Comply with delivery to the 49 Owner's sample storage space. 50 51 Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Refer to other sections of these specifications for requirements of 52 miscellaneous record-keeping and submittals in connection with the actual performance of the Work. 53 Immediately prior to the date or dates of substantial completion, complete miscellaneous records and 54 place in good order, properly identified and bound or filed, ready for continued use and reference. 55 Submit to the Architect/Engineer for the Owner's records. 56 57 Maintenance Manuals: Organize operating and maintenance data into suitable sets of manageable PROJECT CLOSEOUT GDA 01700- 3 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 size. Bind data into individual binders properly identified and indexed. Bind each set of data in a 2 heavy-duty 2-inch, 3-ring vinyl-covered binder, with pocket folders for folded sheet information. Mark 3 the appropriate identification on both front and spine of each binder. 4 5 Include the following types of information in operation and maintenance manuals: 6 7 Emergency instructions. 8 Spare parts listing. 9 Copies of warranties. 10 Wiring diagrams. 11 Recommended "turn-around"cycles. 12 Inspection procedures. 13 Shop drawings and product data. 14 15 16 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) 17 18 PART 3- EXECUTION 19 20 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES: 21 22 General Operating and Maintenance Instructions: Arrange for each installer of operating equipment 23 and other work that requires regular or continuing maintenance, to meet at the site with the Owners 24 personnel to provide necessary basic instruction in the proper operation and maintenance of the entire 25 Work. Where installers are not experienced in the required procedures, include instruction by the 26 manufacturer's representatives. 27 28 As part of this instruction provide a detailed review of the following items: 29 30 Maintenance manuals 31 Record documents 32 Spare parts and materials 33 Tools 34 Lubricants 35 Fuels 36 Identification systems 37 Control sequences 38 Hazards 39 Cleaning 40 Warranties, bonds, maintenance agreements and similar continuing committments. 41 42 As part of this instruction for operating equipment demonstrate the following procedures: 43 44 Start-up 45 Shut-down 46 Emergency operations 47 Noise and vibration adjustments 48 Safety procedures 49 Economy and efficiency adjustments 50 Effective and energy utilization 51 52 FINAL CLEANING: 53 54 General: Special cleaning requirements for specific units of Work are included in the appropriate 55 sections of Divisions 2 through 16. General Cleaning during the regular progress of the Work is 56 required by the General Conditions and is included under section "Temporary Facilities". 57 PROJECT CLOSEOUT GDA 01700-4 GDA#12018.00 December 14,2012 Issue for Permit 1 Cleaning: Provide final cleaning of the Work at the time indicated. Employ experienced workers or 2 professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit of work to the condition expected 3 from a normal, commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with the 4 manufacturer's instructions for operations. 5 6 Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting the Architect/Engineer's inspection for 7 certification of substantial completion. 8 9 Remove labels which are not required as permanent labels. 10 11 Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows, to a polished 12 condition. Remove putty and other substances which are noticeable as vision-obscuring materials. 13 Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. 14 15 Clean exposed exterior and interim hard-surfaced finishes to a dust-free condition, free of dust, stains, 16 films and similar noticeable distracting substances. Restore reflective surfaces to their original 17 reflective condition. Leave concrete floors broom clean. Vacuum carpeted surfaces. 18 19 Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment clean. Remove excess lubrication and other 20 substances. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition. Clean light fixtures and lamps. 21 22 Clean the project site, including landscape development areas and adjacent off-site public streets, of 23 rubbish, litter and foreign substances. Sweep paved areas to a broom-clean condition; remove stains, 24 spills, and other foreign deposits. Rake grounds that are neither paved not planted, to a smooth, 25 even-textured surface. 26 27 Removal of Protection: Except as otherwise indicated or requested by the Architect/Engineer, remove 28 temporary protection devices and facilities which were installed during the course of the work to 29 protect previously completed work during the remainder of the construction period. 30 31 Compliances: Comply with safety standards and governing regulations for cleaning operations. Do 32 not burn waste materials at the site. Do not bury debris or excess materials on the Owner's property. 33 Do not discharge volatile or other harmful or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove 34 waste materials from the site and dispose of in a lawful manner. 35 36 Where extra materials of value remaining after completion of associated work have become the 37 Owner's property, dispose of these to the Owner's best advantage as directed. 38 39 END OF SECTION 01700 PROJECT CLOSEOUT GDA 01700-5 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 SECTION 01740-WARRANTIES 2 3 4 PART 1 -GENERAL 5 6 7 RELATED DOCUMENTS 8 9 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and 10 other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 11 12 SUMMARY 13 This Section specifies general administrative and procedural requirements for warranties required by 14 the Contract Documents, including manufacturer's standard warranties on products and special 15 warranties. 16 17 Refer to the General Conditions for terms of the Contractor's special warranty of workmanship 18 and materials. 19 20 General closeout requirements are included in "Supplementary Conditions." 21 22 Specific requirements for warranties for the Work and products and installation that are 23 specified to be warranted, are included in the individual Sections of Divisions-2 through-16. 24 25 Certifications and other commitments and agreements for continuing services to Owner are 26 specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 27 28 Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not 29 relieve the Contractor of the warranty on the Work that incorporates the products, nor does it relieve 30 suppliers, manufacturers, and subcontractors required to countersign special warranties with the 31 Contractor. 32 33 Separate Prime Contracts: Each prime Contractor is responsible for warranties related to its own 34 Contract. 35 36 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS 37 38 Related Damages and Losses: When correcting warranted Work that has failed, remove and replace 39 other Work that has been damaged as a result of such failure or that must be removed and replaced 40 to provide access for correction of warranted Work. 41 42 Reinstatement of Warranty: When Work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected by 43 replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated warranty 44 shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation. 45 46 Replacement Cost: Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or 47 rebuild the Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of Contract Documents. The 48 Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective Work regardless of whether 49 the Owner has benefited from use of the Work through a portion of its anticipated useful service life. 50 51 Owner's Recourse: Written warranties made to the Owner Developer are in addition to implied 52 warranties, and shall not limit the duties, obligations, right and remedies otherwise available under the 53 law, nor shall warranty periods be interpreted as limitations on time in which the Owner can enforce 54 such other duties, obligations, rights,or remedies. 55 56 Rejection of Warranties: The Developer reserves the right to reject warranties and to limit 57 selections to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract WARRANTIES GDA 01740- 1 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Documents. 2 3 The Developer reserves the right to refuse to accept Work for the Project where a special warranty, 4 certification, or similar commitment is required on such Work or part of the Work, until evidence is 5 presented that entities required to countersign such commitments are willing to do so. 6 7 SUBMITTALS 8 9 Submit written warranties to the Architect thirty working days prior to the date certified for Substantial 10 Completion. If the Architect's Certificate of Substantial Completion designates a commencement date 11 for warranties other than the date of Substantial Completion for the Work, or a designated portion of 12 the Work, submit written warranties upon request of the Architect. 13 14 When a designated portion of the Work is completed and occupied or used by the Owner, by 15 separate agreement with the Contractor during the construction period, submit properly 16 executed warranties to the Architect within fifteen days of completion of that designated 17 portion of the Work. 18 19 When a special warranty is required to be executed by the Contractor, or the Contractor and a 20 subcontractor, supplier or manufacturer, prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms 21 and identification, ready for execution by the required parties. Submit a draft to the Developer through 22 the Architect for approval prior to final execution. 23 24 Refer to individual Sections of Divisions-2 through -16 for specific content requirements, and 25 particular requirements for submittal of special warranties. 26 27 Form of Submittal: At Final Completion compile two copies of each required warranty and bond 28 properly executed by the Contractor, or by the Contractor, subcontractor, supplier, or manufacturer. 29 Organize the warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the 30 Project Manual. 31 32 Bind warranties in heavy-duty, commercial quality, durable 3-ring vinyl covered loose-leaf binders, 33 thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2" by 11" paper. 34 35 Provide heavy paper dividers with celluloid covered tabs for each separate warranty. 36 Mark the tab to identify the product or installation. Provide an index and a typed 37 description of the product or installation, including the name of the product, and the 38 name, address and telephone number of the installer. 39 40 Identify each binder on the front and the spine with the typed or printed title 41 "WARRANTIES,"the Project title or name, and the name of the Contractor. 42 43 When operating and maintenance manuals are required for warranted construction, provide 44 additional copies of each required warranty, as necessary, for inclusion in each required 45 manual. 46 47 48 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not applicable). 49 50 51 PART 3- EXECUTION (not applicable). 52 53 54 SCHEDULE OF WARRANTIES 55 56 Schedule: Provide warranties and bonds on products and installations as specified in, but not limited 57 to the following Sections: WARRANTIES GDA 01740- 2 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 Hollow Metal Doors: Section 08110 3 4 Flush Wood Doors: Section 08211 5 6 Counter Shutters Section 08360 7 8 Aluminum Storefront: Section 08410 9 10 Finish Hardware Section 08710 11 12 Glass: Section 08800 13 14 Mirrors: Section 08830 15 16 Carpet Tile Section 09681 17 18 Toilet Accessories Section 10800 19 20 HVAC Units: Division 16 21 22 23 END OF SECTION 01740 WARRANTIES GDA 01740-3 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 SECTION 02070-SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 2 3 4 PART 1 -GENERAL 5 6 RELATED DOCUMENTS 7 8 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions 9 and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 10 11 SUMMARY 12 13 This Section includes the following: 14 15 Demolition and removal of selected building and site elements where applicable. 16 Patching and repairs. 17 18 Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 19 20 Division 1 Section "Summary of Work"for use of the building and phasing requirements. 21 Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" for cutting and patching procedures for selective 22 demolition operations. 23 Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout"for record document requirements. 24 Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for material and construction requirements for 25 temporary enclosures. 26 27 DEFINITIONS 28 29 Remove: Remove and legally dispose of items except those indicated to be reinstalled, salvaged, 30 or to remain the Owner's property. 31 32 Remove and Salvage: Items indicated to be removed and salvaged remain the Owner's property. 33 Remove, clean, and pack or crate items to protect against damage. Identify contents of containers 34 and deliver to Owner's designated storage area. 35 36 Remove and Reinstall: Remove items indicated; clean, service, and otherwise prepare them for 37 reuse; store and protect against damage. Reinstall items in the same locations or in locations 38 indicated. 39 40 Existing to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during 41 selective demolition. When permitted by the Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, 42 protected storage location during selective demolition and then cleaned and reinstalled in their 43 original locations. 44 45 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP 46 47 Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated 48 to remain the Owner's property, demolished materials shall become the Contractor's property and 49 shall be removed from the site with further disposition at the Contractor's option. 50 51 SUBMITTALS 52 53 General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and 54 Division 1 Specification Sections,for information only, unless otherwise indicated. 55 56 Schedule of selective demolition activities indicating the following: 57 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION GDA 02070- 1 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates 2 for each activity. 3 Interruption of utility services. 4 Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. 5 Use of elevator and stairs. 6 7 Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of adjoining construction and 8 site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by selective demolition 9 operations. 10 11 Record drawings at Project closeout according to Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout." 12 13 Identify and accurately locate capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, or 14 mechanical conditions. 15 16 QUALITY ASSURANCE 17 18 Demolition Firm Qualifications: Engage an experienced firm that has successfully completed 19 selective demolition Work similar to that indicated for this Project. 20 21 Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before starting 22 selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having 23 jurisdiction. 24 25 Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with preinstallation 26 conference requirements of Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." 27 28 PROJECT CONDITIONS 29 30 Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of buildings to be selectively demolished. 31 32 Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as 33 far as practical. 34 35 Asbestos: It is not expected that asbestos will be encountered in the Work. If any materials 36 suspected of containing asbestos are encountered, do not disturb the materials. Immediately 37 notify the Architect and the Owner. 38 39 Asbestos will be removed by Owner before start of Work. 40 41 Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site will not be permitted. 42 43 SCHEDULING 44 45 Arrange selective demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's on-site operations. 46 47 WARRANTY 48 49 Existing Special Warranty: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or 50 damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing 51 warranties. 52 53 54 PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) 55 56 57 REPAIR MATERIALS SELECTIVE DEMOLITION GDA 02070-2 GDA#12018.00 December 14,2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 Use repair materials identical to existing materials. 3 4 Where identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used for exposed surfaces, use 5 materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 6 Use materials whose installed performance equals or surpasses that of existing materials. 7 8 9 PART 3-EXECUTION 10 11 12 EXAMINATION 13 14 Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped. 15 16 Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of 17 selective demolition required. 18 19 Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed 20 and salvaged. 21 22 When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with the intended 23 function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of the conflict. 24 Promptly submit a written report to the Architect. 25 26 Survey the condition of the building to determine whether removing any element might result in 27 structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of the structure or adjacent structures 28 during selective demolition. 29 30 Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition 31 activities. 32 33 UTILITY SERVICES 34 35 Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during 36 selective demolition operations. 37 38 Utility Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services 39 serving building to be selectively demolished. 40 41 Owner will arrange to shut off indicated utilities when requested by Contractor. 42 Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 43 Where utility services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide bypass 44 connections to maintain continuity of service to other parts of the building before proceeding 45 with selective demolition. 46 Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal the 47 remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing. 48 49 Utility Requirements: Refer to Division 15 and 16 Sections for shutting off, disconnecting, 50 removing, and sealing or capping utility services. Do not start selective demolition work until utility 51 disconnecting and sealing have been completed and verified in writing. 52 53 PREPARATION 54 55 Drain, purge, or otherwise remove, collect, and dispose of chemicals, gases, explosives, acids, 56 flammables, or other dangerous materials before proceeding with selective demolition operations. 57 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION GDA 02070-3 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Employ a certified, licensed exterminator to treat building and to control rodents and vermin before 2 and during selective demolition operations. 3 4 Conduct demolition operations and remove debris to ensure minimum interference with roads, 5 streets,walks, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 6 7 Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without 8 permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around 9 closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing regulations. 10 11 Conduct demolition operations to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and 12 facilities to remain. Ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area. 13 14 Erect temporary protection, such as walks, fences, railings, canopies, and covered 15 passageways,where required by authorities having jurisdiction. 16 Protect existing site improvements, appurtenances, and landscaping to remain. 17 Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between demolition and removal of 18 existing construction, on exterior surfaces and new construction to ensure that no water 19 leakage or damage occurs to structure or interior areas. 20 Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain and are 21 exposed during selective demolition operations. 22 23 Provide and maintain interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or structural support to preserve 24 stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of building to be selectively demolished. 25 26 Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition. 27 28 POLLUTION CONTROLS 29 30 Use water mist, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit the spread of dust and 31 dirt. Comply with governing environmental protection regulations. 32 33 Do not use water when it may damage existing construction or create hazardous or 34 objectionable conditions, such as ice,flooding, and pollution. 35 36 Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and 37 areas. 38 39 Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will 40 convey debris to grade level. 41 42 Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective 43 demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before start of selective 44 demolition. 45 46 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 47 48 Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as 49 indicated. Use methods required to complete Work within limitations of governing regulations and 50 as follows: 51 52 Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete 53 selective demolition work above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on 54 lower levels. 55 Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting 56 methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. To SELECTIVE DEMOLITION GDA 02070-4 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces, use hand or small power tools designed for 2 sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 3 4 Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring 5 existing finished surfaces. 6 7 Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed 8 spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space 9 before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during 10 flame-cutting operations. 11 12 Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 13 14 Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and 15 promptly dispose of off-site. 16 17 Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free 18 fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 19 20 Locate selective demolition equipment throughout the structure and remove debris and 21 materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 22 23 Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. On-site storage or sale of removed 24 items is prohibited. 25 26 Return elements of construction and surfaces to remain to condition existing before start of 27 selective demolition operations. 28 29 Demolish concrete and masonry in small sections. Cut concrete and masonry at junctures with 30 construction to remain, using power-driven masonry saw or hand tools; do not use power-driven 31 impact tools. 32 33 Remove no more existing roofing than can be covered in one day by new roofing work. See 34 applicable Division 7 Section for new roofing requirements. 35 36 Remove existing walls as indicated on the Drawings. 37 38 Cut and trench existing concrete floor as indicated on the Drawings or as required for new 39 electrical wiring and communication cabling. 40 41 PATCHING AND REPAIRS 42 43 Promptly patch and repair holes and damaged surfaces caused to adjacent construction by 44 selective demolition operations. 45 46 Patching is specified in Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching." 47 48 Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable for new 49 materials. 50 51 Completely fill holes and depressions in existing masonry walls to remain with an approved 52 masonry patching material, applied according to manufacturer's printed recommendations. 53 54 Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into adjoining construction 55 to remain in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching and refinishing. 56 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION GDA 02070-5 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space where demolished walls or partitions 2 extend one finished area into another. Provide a flush and even surface of uniform color and 3 appearance. 4 5 Closely match texture and finish of existing adjacent surface. 6 Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with specified 7 tolerances. 8 Where patching smooth painted surfaces, extend final paint coat over entire unbroken 9 surface containing the patch after the surface has received primer and second coat. 10 Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to 11 achieve uniform color and appearance. 12 Inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the installation, where feasible. 13 14 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS 15 16 General: Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials to 17 accumulate on-site. 18 19 Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. 20 21 Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. 22 23 CLEANING 24 25 Sweep the building broom clean on completion of selective demolition operation. 26 27 Change filters on air-handling equipment on completion of selective demolition operations. 28 29 30 END OF SECTION 02070 31 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION GDA 02070- 6 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 SECTION 02580-TRAFFIC MARKING PAINT 2 3 4 PART 1 -GENERAL 5 6 WORK INCLUDED: 7 8 Pavement marking over exterior pavement. 9 10 RELATED WORK: 11 12 Concrete- Division 3 13 14 SUBMITTALS: 15 16 Submit manufacturer's product specification and installation instructions for marking paint in 17 accordance with Section 01300. 18 19 JOB CONDITIONS: 20 21 Do not apply marking paint when weather is foggy or rainy, or ambient or pavement temperatures are 22 below 40 degrees F., nor when such conditions are anticipated during eight hours after application. 23 24 25 PART 2- PRODUCTS 26 27 28 MARKING PAINT: 29 30 Non-bleeding pigmented copolymer latex emulsion traffic marking paint with non-volatiles by weight of 31 not less than: 49%-White, 50%-Yellow, 42%- Red. 32 33 Fire Lanes Red 34 Parking Spaces White 35 Handicapped Parking Symbol White 36 37 EQUIPMENT: 38 39 Exterior Pavements: 40 41 Pressurized, self-contained paint machine capable of applying a straight line from 2 in. to 6 in. wide, 42 with consistent coverage of a minimum of 150 sq. ft. per gallon. 43 44 45 PART 3- EXECUTION 46 47 48 INSPECTION AND PREPARTION: 49 50 Locate markings as shown on Drawings. Provide qualified technician to supervise equipment and 51 application of markings. Lay out markings using guide lines, templates, and forms. 52 53 Thoroughly clean surfaces free of dirt, sand, gravel, oil and other foreign materials. 54 55 Allow concrete to cure before painting as recommended by manufacturer of marking paint. 56 57 APPLICATION: TRAFFIC MARKING PAINT GDA 02580- 1 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 Apply marking paint at rate of one gallon per 200 sq. ft. (equivalent to approximately one gallon for 3 450 lineal feet of 4 in. wide stripe). 4 5 Apply marking paint straight and uniform. 6 7 END OF SECTION 02580 TRAFFIC MARKING PAINT GDA 02580-2 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 SECTION 02820 - CHAIN-LINK FENCES AND GATES 2 3 4 PART 1 -GENERAL 5 6 RELATED DOCUMENTS 7 8 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions 9 and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 10 11 SUMMARY 12 13 This Section includes the following: 14 15 Galvanized steel chain-link fabric. 16 Galvanized steel framework and accessories. 17 Gates: Manual swing gate. 18 Motor operated, horizontal cantilever slide. 19 20 RELATED SECTIONS 21 22 Section 02825- Gate Operator 23 Section 02515 - Portland Cement Concrete Pavement 24 Section 03300 -Cast-in-Place Concrete 25 26 DEFINITIONS 27 28 CLFMI: Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute. 29 30 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 31 32 Structural Performance: Provide chain-link fences and gates capable of withstanding the effects of 33 gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 34 35 Minimum Post Size and Maximum Spacing for Wind Velocity Pressure: Determine based on 36 mesh size and pattern specified, and on the following minimum design wind pressures and 37 according to CLFMI WLG 2445: 38 39 Wind Speed: a0 mpn. 40 41 Fence Height: 8-feet. 42 43 Line Post Group: IA, ASTM F 1043, Schedule 40 steel pipe. 44 45 Wind Exposure Category: C. 46 47 Post spacing not to exceed 10 feet(3 m). 48 49 Lightning Protection System: Maximum grounding-resistance value of 25 ohms under normal dry 50 conditions, unless local power utility company requirements specify differently. 51 52 All local power utility requirements must be performed. 53 54 SUBMITTALS 55 56 Product Data: Material descriptions, construction details, dimensions of individual components and 57 profiles, and finishes for the following: CHAIN-LINK FENCES AND GATES GDA 02820 - 1 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 Fence and gate posts, rails, and fittings. 3 Chain-link fabric, reinforcements, and attachments. 4 Gates and hardware. 5 6 Shop Drawings: Show locations of fence, each gate, posts, rails, and tension wires and details of 7 extended posts, extension arms, gate swing, or other operation, hardware, and accessories. Include 8 plans, elevations. Indicate materials, dimensions, sizes, weights, and finishes of components, 9 sections, gate swing and other required installation and operational clearances, and details of post 10 anchorage and attachment and bracing. 11 12 Lightning Protection System: Include all grounding rod locations, bonding details and all related 13 conditions. 14 15 Include local power utility grounding requirements. 16 17 Samples for Verification: For the following products, in sizes indicated, showing the full range of 18 color, texture, and pattern variations expected. Prepare Samples from the same material to be used 19 for the Work. 20 21 Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of chain-link fences and gates certifying that products 22 furnished comply with requirements. 23 24 Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate 25 their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and 26 addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. 27 28 Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance of chain-link fence and gate 29 grounding and bonding with performance requirements. 30 31 QUALITY ASSURANCE 32 33 Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed chain-link fences and gates 34 similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted 35 in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. 36 37 Source Limitations for Chain-Link Fences and Gates: Obtain each color, grade, finish, type, and 38 variety of component for chain-link fences and gates from one source with resources to provide 39 chain-link fences and gates of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties. 40 41 PROJECT CONDITIONS 42 43 Field Measurements: Verify layout information for chain-link fences and gates shown on Drawings in 44 relation to property survey and existing structures. Verify dimensions by field measurements. 45 46 47 PART 2-PRODUCTS 48 49 MANUFACTURERS 50 51 Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 52 53 Master Halco 54 Merchant Metals 55 Security Fence Mfg. 56 CHAIN-LINK FENCES AND GATES GDA 02820-2 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 CHAIN-LINK FENCE FABRIC 2 3 Steel Chain-Link Fence Fabric: Provide fabric fabricated in one-piece widths for fencing in height to 4 underside of structure above at location shown on Architectural Plans and height indicated for site 5 fencing. Comply with CLFMI's "Product Manual" and with requirements indicated below: 6 7 Mesh and Wire Size: 2-inch (50-mm) mesh, 0 192-inch (4.88-mm) diameter. 8 9 Zinc-Coated Fabric: ASTM A 392, with zinc coating applied to steel wire before weaving 10 according to ASTM A 817, Type II, zinc coated (galvanized) with the following minimum 11 coating weight: 12 13 Class 1: Not less than 1 2 oz./sq. ft. (366 g/sq. of uncoated wire surface. 14 15 Selvage: Twisted top and knuckled bottom. 16 17 FENCE FRAMING 18 19 Round Steel Pipe: Standard weight, Schedule 40, galvanized steel pipe complying with 20 ASTM F 1083. Comply with ASTM F 1043, Material Design Group IA, external and internal coating 21 Type A, consisting of not less than 1.8-oz./sq. ft. zinc; and the following strength and stiffness 22 requirements: 23 24 Line, End, Corner, and Pull Posts and Top Rail: Per requirements for Light Industrial Fence. 25 26 Coatings: Type A, consisting of not less than minimum 2.0-oz./sq. ft. (0.61-kg/sq. m) 27 average zinc coating per ASTM A 123/A 123M or 4.0-oz./sq. ft. (1.22-kg/sq. m) zinc coating 28 per ASTM A 653/A 653M. 29 30 Post Brace Rails: Match top rail for coating and strength and stiffness requirements. Provide brace 31 rail with truss rod assembly for each gate, end, and pull post. Provide two brace rails extending in 32 opposing directions, each with truss rod assembly, for each corner post and for pull posts. Provide 33 rail ends and clamps for attaching rails to posts. 34 35 Top Rails: Fabricate top rail from lengths 21 feet or longer, with swedged-end or fabricated for 36 expansion-type coupling, forming a continuous rail along top of chain-link fabric. Match top rail for 37 coating and strength and stiffness requirements 38 39 Intermediate Rails: Match top rail for coating and strength and stiffness requirements. 40 41 Bottom Rails: Match top rail for coating and strength and stiffness requirements. 42 43 TENSION WIRE 44 45 Metallic-Coated Steel Wire: 0.177-inch- (4.5-mm-) diameter, marcelled tension wire complying with 46 ASTM A 817 and ASTM A 824, with the following metallic coating: 47 48 Type II, zinc coated (galvanized) by [hot-dip] [electrolytic] process, with the following 49 minimum coating weight: 50 51 Matching chain-link fabric coating weight. 52 53 SWING GATES 54 55 General: Comply with ASTM F 900 for the following swing-gate types: 56 57 Single gate. CHAIN-LINK FENCES AND GATES GDA 02820- 3 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 Double gate 3 4 Metal Pipe and Tubing: Galvanized steel. Comply with ASTM F 1083 and ASTM F 1043 for 5 materials and protective coatings. 6 7 Frames and Bracing: Fabricate members from round, galvanized steel tubing with outside 8 dimension and weight according to ASTM F 900 for the following gate fabric height: 9 10 Gate Fabric Height: 8-feet. 11 12 Frame Corner Construction: As follows: 13 14 Welded or assembled with corner fittings and 5/16-inch- diameter, adjustable truss rods for 15 panels 5 feet wide or wider. 16 17 Gate Posts: Fabricate members from round galvanized steel pipe with outside dimension and 18 weight according to ASTM F 900 for the following gate fabric heights and leaf widths: 19 20 Gate Fabric Height by Leaf Width: 6 feet by not over 15 feet. 21 22 Extended Gate Frame Members: Extend gate frame end members above top of chain-link fabric at 23 both ends of gate frame 12 inches(300 mm)as required to attach barbed wire assemblies. 24 25 Hardware: Latches permitting operation from both sides of gate, and hinges. Fabricate latches with 26 integral eye openings for padlocking; padlock accessible from both sides of gate. Cane bolts for 27 double gates. 28 29 HORIZONTAL—CANTILEVER SLIDE GATE S 30 31 General: Comply with ASTM F 1184 for gate posts and single sliding gate types. Provide automated 32 vehicular gates that comply with ASTM F 2200. 33 34 Classification: Type II Cantilever Slide, Class 1 with external roller assemblies. 35 36 Gate Frame Width and Height: As indicated on the Drawings 37 38 Pipe and Tubing: 39 40 Zinc-Coated Steel: Protective coating and finish to match fence framing. 41 42 Gate Posts: Comply with ASTM F 1184. Provide round tubular steel posts. 43 44 Gate Frames and Bracing: Round tubular steel. 45 46 Frame Corner Construction: Welded. 47 48 Hardware: 49 50 Hangers, roller assemblies, and stops fabricated from galvanized steel. 51 52 HORIZONTAL—OVERHEAD RAIL SLIDE GATES 53 54 General: Comply with ASTM F 1184 for gate posts and single sliding gate types. 55 56 Classification: Type I Overhead Slide. 57 CHAIN-LINK FENCES AND GATES GDA 02820-4 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Gate Leaf Width: As indicated. 2 3 Gate Frame Width and Height: As indicated on the Drawings 4 5 Pipe and Tubing: 6 7 Zinc-Coated Steel: Protective coating and finish to match fence framing. 8 9 Gate Posts: Comply with ASTM F 1184. Provide round tubular steel posts. 10 11 Gate Frames and Bracing: Round tubular steel. 12 13 Frame Corner Construction: Welded. 14 15 Hardware: 16 17 Hangers, roller assemblies, and stops fabricated from galvanized steel. 18 19 FITTINGS 20 21 General: Provide fittings for a complete fence installation, including special fittings for corners. 22 Comply with ASTM F 626. 23 24 Galvanized coating. 25 26 Post and Line Caps: Hot-dip galvanized pressed steel. Provide weathertight closure cap for each 27 post. 28 29 Rail and Brace Ends: Hot-dip galvanized pressed steel. Provide rail ends or other means for 30 attaching rails securely to each gate, corner, pull, and end post. 31 32 Rail Fittings: Provide the following: 33 34 Top Rail Sleeves: Hot-dip galvanized pressed steel. Not less than 6 inches long. 35 36 Rail Clamps: Hot-dip galvanized pressed steel. Provide line and corner boulevard clamps 37 for connecting intermediate and bottom rails in the fence line to line posts. 38 39 Tie Wires, Clips, and Fasteners: According to ASTM F 626. 40 41 Standard Round Wire Ties: For attaching chain-link fabric to posts, rails, and frames, 42 complying with the following: 43 44 Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel: 148-inch- (3 76-mm-) diameter wire; galvanized 45 coating thickness matching coating thickness of chain-link fence fabric. 46 47 FENCE GROUNDING 48 49 Conductors: Bare, solid wire for No. 6 AWG and smaller; stranded wire for No. 4 AWG and larger. 50 51 Material above Finished Grade: Copper. 52 53 Material on or below Finished Grade: Copper. 54 55 Bonding Jumpers: Braided copper tape, 1 inch (25 mm) wide, woven of No. 30 AWG bare copper 56 wire, terminated with copper ferrules. 57 CHAIN-LINK FENCES AND GATES GDA 02820- 5 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Connectors and Grounding Rods: Comply with UL 467. 2 3 Connectors for Below-Grade Use: Exothermic welded type. 4 5 Grounding Rods: Copper-clad steel. 6 7 Size: `='8 by 96 inches (16 by 2440 mm). 8 9 GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT 10 11 Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous 12 grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout, recommended in writing by manufacturer, for 13 exterior applications. 14 15 16 PART 3 - EXECUTION 17 18 EXAMINATION 19 20 Examine areas and conditions and other conditions affecting performance. 21 22 Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 23 24 PREPARATION 25 26 Stake locations of fence lines, gates, and terminal posts. 27 28 INSTALLATION, GENERAL 29 30 General: Install chain-link fencing to comply with ASTM F 567 and more stringent requirements 31 specified. 32 33 Interior Posts Set into Concrete in Voids: Form or core drill holes not less than 5 deep and 34 3/4 inch larger than OD of post. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular 35 space between post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout mixed and placed to 36 comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions, and finished sloped to 37 drain water away from post. 38 39 Exterior Post Setting: Set posts in concrete at indicated spacing into firm, undisturbed soil. 40 41 Verify that posts are set plumb, aligned, and at correct height and spacing, and hold 42 in position during setting with concrete. 43 44 Concrete Fill: Place concrete around posts to dimensions indicated and vibrate or 45 tamp for consolidation. Protect aboveground portion of posts from concrete splatter. 46 47 Exposed Concrete: Extend 2 inches (50 mm) above grade; shape and 48 smooth to shed water. 49 50 CHAIN-LINK FENCE INSTALLATION 51 52 Post Excavation: Drill or hand-excavate holes for posts to diameters and spacings indicated, in firm, 53 undisturbed soil. 54 55 Terminal Posts: Locate terminal end, corner, and gate posts per ASTM F 567 and terminal pull 56 posts at changes in horizontal or vertical alignment. 57 CHAIN-LINK FENCES AND GATES GDA 02820-6 GDA#12018.00 December 14,2012 Issue for Permit 1 Line Posts: Space line posts uniformly per manufactures recommendations. 2 3 Post Bracing Assemblies: Install according to ASTM F 567, maintaining plumb position and 4 alignment of fencing. Install braces at end and gate posts and at both sides of corner and pull posts. 5 Locate horizontal braces at mid-height of fabric on fences with top rail and at two-thirds fabric height 6 on fences without top rail. Install so posts are plumb when diagonal rod is under proper tension. 7 8 Top Rail: Install according to ASTM F 567, maintaining plumb position and alignment of fencing. 9 Run rail continuously through line post caps, bending to radius for curved runs and terminating into 10 rail end attached to posts or post caps fabricated to receive rail at terminal posts. Provide expansion 11 couplings as recommended by fencing manufacturer. 12 13 Intermediate Rails: Install in one piece at post-height center span, spanning between posts, using 14 fittings, special offset fittings, and accessories. 15 16 Bottom Rails(Base Bid): Install, spanning between posts, using fittings and accessories. 17 18 Tension Wire (Alternate Bid): Install according to ASTM F 567, maintaining plumb position and 19 alignment of fencing. Pull wire taut, without sags. Fasten fabric to tension wire with 0.120-inch- 20 (3.05-mm-) diameter hog rings of same material and finish as fabric wire, spaced a maximum of 24 21 inches (610 mm) o.c. Install tension wire in locations indicated before stretching fabric. Provide 22 horizontal tension wire at the following locations: 23 24 Extended along bottom of fence fabric. Install bottom tension wire within 6 inches (152 mm) 25 of bottom of fabric and tie to each post with not less than same diameter and type of wire. 26 27 Chain-Link Fabric: Apply fabric to outside of enclosing framework. Leave 1 inch between finish 28 grade or surface and bottom selvage, unless otherwise indicated. Pull fabric taut and tie to posts, 29 rails, and tension wires. Anchor to framework so fabric remains under tension after pulling force is 30 released. 31 32 Tension or Stretcher Bars: Thread through fabric and secure to end, corner, pull, and gate posts 33 with tension bands spaced not more than 15 inches(380 mm)o.c. 34 35 Fasteners: Install nuts for tension bands and carriage bolts on the side of the fence opposite the 36 fabric side. Peen ends of bolts or score threads to prevent removal of nuts. 37 38 GATE INSTALLATION 39 40 General: Install gates according to manufacturer's written instructions, level, plumb, and secure for 41 full opening without interference. Attach fabric as for fencing. Attach hardware using tamper- 42 resistant or concealed means. Install ground-set items in concrete for anchorage. Adjust hardware 43 for smooth operation and lubricate where necessary. 44 45 GATE OPERATORS 46 47 General: Provide factory-assembled automatic operating system designed for gate size, type, 48 weight, and operation frequency. Provide operation control system with characteristics suitable for 49 Project conditions, with remote-control stations, safety devices, and weatherproof enclosures; 50 coordinate electrical requirements with building electrical system. 51 52 Refer to Division 2 Section "Gate Operators." 53 54 GROUNDING AND BONDING 55 56 Fence Grounding: Install at maximum intervals of 1500 feet(450 m)except as follows: 57 CHAIN-LINK FENCES AND GATES GDA 02820-7 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Fences within 100 Feet (30 m) of Buildings, Structures, Walkways, and Roadways: Ground 2 at maximum intervals of 750 feet(225 m). 3 4 Gates and Other Fence Openings: Ground fence on each side of opening. 5 6 Bond metal gates to gate posts. 7 8 Bond across openings, with and without gates, except openings indicated 9 as intentional fence discontinuities. Use No. 2 AWG wire and bury it at least 10 18 inches (460 mm) below finished grade. 11 12 Protection at Crossings of Overhead Electrical Power Lines: Ground fence at location of crossing 13 and at a maximum distance of 150 feet (45 m)on each side of crossing. 14 15 All local power utility requirements must be performed. 16 17 Fences Enclosing Electrical Power Distribution Equipment: Ground as required by IEEE C2, unless 18 otherwise indicated. 19 20 All local power utility requirements must be performed. 21 22 Grounding Method: At each grounding location, drive a grounding rod vertically until the top is 6 23 inches (150 mm) below finished grade. Connect rod to fence with No. 6 AWG conductor. Connect 24 conductor to each fence component at the grounding location, including the following: 25 26 Bonding Method for Gates: Connect bonding jumper between gate post and gate frame. 27 28 Connections: Make connections so possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis is minimized. Select 29 connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact 30 will be galvanically compatible. 31 32 Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make 33 contact points closer in order of galvanic series. 34 35 Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact. 36 37 Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future 38 penetration of moisture to contact surfaces. 39 40 Bonding to Lightning Protection System: If fence terminates at lightning-protected building or 41 structure, ground the fence and bond the fence grounding conductor to lightning protection down 42 conductor or lightning protection grounding conductor complying with NFPA 780. 43 44 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 45 46 Grounding-Resistance Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting 47 agency to perform field quality-control testing. 48 49 Grounding-Resistance Tests: Subject completed grounding system to a megger test at each 50 grounding location. Measure grounding resistance not less than two full days after last trace 51 of precipitation, without soil having been moistened by any means other than natural drainage 52 or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural 53 grounding resistance. Perform tests by two-point method according to IEEE 81. 54 55 Excessive Grounding Resistance: If resistance to grounding exceeds specified value, notify 56 Architect promptly. Include recommendations for reducing grounding resistance and a 57 proposal to accomplish recommended work. CHAIN-LINK FENCES AND GATES GDA 02820 -8 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 Report: Prepare test reports certified by a testing agency of grounding resistance at each test 3 location. Include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. 4 5 ADJUSTING 6 7 Gate: Adjust gate to operate smoothly, easily, and quietly, free from binding, warp, excessive 8 deflection, distortion, nonalignment, misplacement, disruption, or malfunction, throughout entire 9 operational range. Confirm that latches and locks engage accurately and securely without forcing or 10 binding. 11 12 13 END OF SECTION 02820 CHAIN-LINK FENCES AND GATES GDA 02820-9 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 SECTION 02825—GATE OPERATOR 2 3 4 PART 1 -GENERAL 5 6 7 INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION 8 9 Electric gate operator for gates, including all selected attachments and accessory equipment. 10 11 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 12 13 Section 02751 -Concrete Paving 14 Section 02821 -Ornamental Metal Fencing System 15 Section 02822-Ornamental Metal Fencing Gate 16 Section 03300-Cast-in-Place Concrete 17 Section 10990- Miscellaneous Specialties for access control device pedestals 18 Electrical service and connections: See Division 16 19 20 SUBMITTALS 21 22 Shop drawings: Submit shop drawings under the provisions of Section 01300. Submit drawings 23 showing connections to adjacent construction, range of travel, and all electrical and mechanical 24 connections to the operator. Drawings shall also show the size and location of the concrete 25 mounting pad. 26 27 Installation instructions: Submit two copies of manufacturer's installation instructions for this specific 28 project. 29 30 QUALITY ASSURANCE 31 32 Manufacturer: A company specializing in the manufacture of security gate operators of the type 33 specified, with a minimum of 10 years experience. 34 35 Installer: A minimum of three years experience installing similar equipment. 36 37 CODES AND REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 38 39 Operators shall be built to standards of the Electronic Testing Laboratory and shall bear the "ETL 40 listed" label. Complete all electrical work according to local codes and National Electrical code. All 41 field work shall be performed in a neat and professional manner, completed to journeyman 42 standards. 43 44 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE 45 46 Comply with 01600 47 48 Store products upright in the original shipping containers, covered, ventilated and protected from all 49 weather conditions. 50 51 WARRANTY 52 53 There shall be a warranty of 1 year after installation. The warranty does not limit the number of gate 54 cycles per hour. 55 56 GATE OPERATOR GDA 02825- 1 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 3 4 GATE OPERATORS 5 6 Basis of Design: Door King 9150 or equal. 7 8 Gate Operators: Equipment base/pad and Pedestal post mounted and as follows: 9 10 FEATURES 11 12 • Self-adjusting, no maintenance magnetic limits. 13 • Partial-open feature. 14 • Anti-tailgating feature. 15 • Gate tracker reporting output. 16 • Ports for plug-in loop detectors. 17 • Two convenience outlets. 18 • Fail-safe release. 19 • Programming switches. 20 • Built-in reset switch. 21 • Built-in power On/Off switch. 22 • Nickel plated chain. 23 • Plug-in loop detectors. 24 • Surge suppressors. 25 26 SPECIFICATIONS 27 28 • Maximum gate length 45-feet. 29 • Maximum gate weight 1500 pounds*. 30 • 1 HP continuous-duty motor. 31 • 230*VAC 32 • Operator is shipped with chain brackets and required length of#40 chain. 33 • Class I, II, Ill and IV applications. 34 • Compliant with UL 325 and 991. ETL listed. 35 • Dimensions: 15"W x 24"H x 16.5"D 36 37 Control Devices: Provide interface with card reader (by Owner's Contractor) for entry, vehicle 38 detectors (induction loops) for exiting and closing gates at entering and exiting. Operation shall be 39 coordinated into security system. Provide remote open/close push button switches where indicated 40 41 Safety Devices: For reversing the gate travel, provide photo-cell beams. Shall be coordinated into 42 security system. 43 44 OPERATION 45 46 Provide complete gate system to match with site fencing system. 47 48 Each type electric operator shall be built into a compact unit consisting of an instantly reversing 49 motor. 50 51 NEMA rated starter. 52 53 An emergency release. 54 55 A weather resistant cover. 56 GATE OPERATOR GDA 02825-2 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Minimum standard electrical components: 2 3 Motor: Shall be a catalog standard 1 (or 1/2 hp, if gate weight does not exceed 1000 pounds) horse 4 power. 5 6 All components shall have overload protection. 7 8 Controls: Industrial grade relays and, hard-wired. Shall be coordinated into security system. 9 10 Control devices: Provide interface with card reader/intercom (by Owner's Contractor) for entry, 11 vehicle detectors (induction loops) for exiting and closing gates at entering and exiting. Operation 12 shall be coordinated into security system. 13 14 Remote Controls: Electric controls separated from gate and motor and drive mechanism, 15 with NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure for recessed or flush mounting and with space for 16 additional optional equipment. Provide the following remote-control device(s): 17 18 Control Station: Momentary-contact, three-button-operated; located remotely from 19 gate. Key switch to lock out open and close buttons. 20 21 Function: Open, stop, and close. 22 23 Card Reader: Functions only when authorized card is presented. 24 25 Reader and Box Hood: By Others. 26 27 Vehicle Loop Detector: System including automatic closing timer with adjustable 28 time delay before closing and loop detector designed to close gate. Provide 29 electronic detector with adjustable detection patterns, adjustable sensitivity and 30 frequency settings,and panel indicator light designed to detect presence or transit of 31 a vehicle over an embedded loop of wire and to emit a signal activating the gate 32 operator. Provide number of loops consisting of multiple strands of wire, number of 33 turns, loop size, and method of placement as recommended in writing by detection 34 system manufacturer for function indicated. 35 36 Loop: Wire, in size indicated for field assembly, for pave-over or saw-cut 37 with epoxy-grouted installation. 38 39 Safety Devices: for reversing the gate travel, provide photo-cell beams. Shall be coordinated into 40 security system. 41 42 Power: 43 44 208/230/460 VAC three phase for 1 HP. (50 or 60 Hertz) 45 115/208/230 VAC single phase for 1/2 HP, if provided 46 47 Accessories: 48 Instructional, Safety, and Warning Labels and Skins: According to UL 325. 49 50 Equipment Bases/Pads: Cast-in-place or precast concrete, depth not less than 12 inches (300 mm) 51 dimensioned and reinforced according to gate-operator component manufacturer's written 52 instructions and as indicated on Drawings. 53 54 Equipment Posts: Steel, either pad mounted or embedded in concrete footing according to gate- 55 operator component manufacturer's written instructions and as indicated on Drawings. 56 GATE OPERATOR GDA 02825-3 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Card Reader Posts: Steel, mounted to concrete pad as indicated on Drawings. 2 3 Manufacturer: Model 72-9C-D, The Pedestal Company 4 Color: Powdercoat finish, black. 5 6 FACTORY TESTING 7 8 The electric gate operator is supplied with the internal wiring of the electrical components completed 9 at the factory. Terminal strip provision is supplied for site wiring of the operator to external power 10 supply and control system. 11 12 Check all mechanical connections for tightness and alignment. Check all welds for completeness 13 and continuity. Check welded corners and edges to assure they are square and straight. 14 15 Inspect painted finish for completeness and gloss. Touch up any imperfections prior to shipment. 16 17 18 PART 3-EXECUTION 19 20 21 SITE EXAMINATION 22 23 Locate concrete mounting pad in accordance with approved shop drawings. 24 25 Make sure that gate is operating smoothly under manual conditions before installation of gate 26 operators. Do not proceed until gate panel is aligned and operates without binding 27 28 INSTALLATION 29 30 Excavation for Support Posts, Pedestals and Equipment Bases/Pads: Hand-excavate holes for 31 bases/pads, in firm, undisturbed soil to dimensions and depths and at locations as required by gate- 32 operator component manufacturer's written instructions and as indicated. 33 34 Install gate operator in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions, current at the time of 35 installation. Coordinate locations of operators with contract drawings, other trades and shop 36 drawings. 37 38 Vehicle Loop Detector System: Cut grooves in pavement and bury or Bury and seal wire loop 39 according to manufacturer's written instructions. Connect to equipment operated by detector. 40 41 Comply with NFPA 70 and manufacturer's written instructions for grounding of electric-powered 42 motors, controls, and other devices. 43 44 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 45 46 Test gate operator through ten full cycles and adjust for operation without binding, scraping or 47 uneven motion. Test limit switches for proper at rest gate position. 48 49 CONTINUED SERVICE AND DOCUMENTATION 50 51 Provide one copy of installation, operation, maintenance, and parts manual for Gate Model for 52 owner's use. Manuals will identify parts of the equipment for future procurement. 53 54 55 END OF SECTION GATE OPERATOR GDA 02825-4 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 SECTION 02848-CONCRETE PARKING BUMPERS 2 3 4 PART 1 - GENERAL 5 6 7 RELATED DOCUMENTS 8 9 Provisions established within the General Conditions of the Contract, Division 1 - General 10 Requirements, and the Drawings are collectively applicable to this Section. 11 12 SECTION INCLUDES 13 14 Precast concrete parking bumpers. 15 16 QUALITY ASSURANCE 17 18 Verify that concrete paving and pavement marking is completed and ready for installation of wheel 19 stops. 20 21 Coordinate installation of concrete wheel stops with pavement marking layout. 22 23 24 PART 2-PRODUCTS 25 26 27 PRECAST CONCRETE PARKING BUMPERS (WHEEL STOPS1 28 29 Qualities: Reinforced precast concrete, with pre-drilled holes and anchor pins. 30 31 Concrete: Normal weight, minimum 4000-psi 28-day compressive strength. 32 33 Reinforcing: 2 continuous No. 3 deformed reinforcement bars. 34 35 Size: 8-1/2 inch wide x 6 inch high x 72-inch length. 36 37 Anchor Pins: 5/8 inch deformed bar, 2 for each wheel stop, extending a minimum of 6 inches 38 below bottom of wheel stop. 39 40 Standards 41 42 Concrete: ASTM C94. 43 44 Reinforcing: ASTM A615, Grade 40. 45 46 47 PART 3- EXECUTION 48 49 50 INSTALLATION 51 52 Verify layout of wheel stop locations with pavement marking layout. 53 54 Thoroughly clean surfaces to receive wheel stops free of dirt, sand, oil, grease or other foreign matter. 55 56 Install a precast wheel stop at each parking space where wheel stops are indicated on drawings. 57 CONCRETE PARKING BUMPERS GDA 02848- 1 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Install wheel stops with anchors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2 3 Leave wheel stops securely anchored and in proper alignment. 4 5 6 END OF SECTION 02848 CONCRETE PARKING BUMPERS GDA 02848-2 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 SECTION 03301 -CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE (LIMITED APPLICATIONS) 2 PART 1 -GENERAL 3 RELATED DOCUMENTS 4 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions 5 and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 6 SUMMARY 7 This Section specifies cast-in-place concrete, including reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture 8 design, placement procedures, and finishes, for noncritical applications of concrete and for projects 9 using small quantities of concrete. The Work includes, but is not limited to: 10 Concrete ramps and stairs. 11 Concrete pavement in Trash Container Area. 12 Exterior concrete patio, sidewalks, and curb ramps. 13 Slab-on-grade infill after utility trenching operations. 14 Other areas as indicated on the Drawings 15 SUBMITTALS 16 General: In addition to the following, comply with submittal requirements in ACI 301. 17 Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 18 Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. 19 QUALITY ASSURANCE 20 Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and 21 that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. 22 Source Limitations: Obtain each type of cement of the same brand from the same manufacturer's 23 plant, obtain aggregate from one source, and obtain admixtures through one source from a single 24 manufacturer. 25 Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," including the following sections, unless 26 modified by requirements in the Contract Documents: 27 "General Requirements." 28 "Formwork and Formwork Accessories." 29 "Reinforcement and Reinforcement Supports." 30 "Concrete Mixtures." 31 "Handling, Placing, and Constructing." 32 "Lightweight Concrete." 33 Comply with ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." 34 PART 2- PRODUCTS 35 FORMWORK 36 Furnish formwork and formwork accessories according to ACI 301. 37 STEEL REINFORCEMENT 38 Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE (LIMITED APPLICATIONS1 GDA 03301 - 1 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 CONCRETE MATERIALS 2 Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source 3 throughout Project: 4 Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I/II. 5 Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, graded, 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) nominal maximum aggregate 6 size. 7 Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M; potable. 8 ADMIXTURES 9 Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. 10 RELATED MATERIALS 11 Vapor Retarder: Polyethylene sheet,ASTM E 1745, Class A, not less than 10 mils (0.25 mm)thick. 12 CURING MATERIALS 13 Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309,Type 1, Class B. 14 CONCRETE MIXTURES 15 Comply with ACI 301 requirements for concrete mixtures. 16 Normal-Weight Concrete: Prepare design mixes, proportioned according to ACI 301, as follows: 17 Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi (20.7 MPa)at 28 days. 18 Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50. 19 Slump Limit: inches (125 mm), plus or minus ' inch (25 mm). 20 Air Content: Maintain within range permitted by ACI 301. 21 CONCRETE MIXING 22 Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M, 23 and furnish batch ticket information. 24 When air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 25 minutes. 26 PART 3-EXECUTION 27 FORMWORK 28 Design, construct, erect, brace, and maintain formwork according to ACI 301. 29 VAPOR RETARDERS 30 Install, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to ASTM E 1643; place sheets in position with 31 longest dimension parallel with direction of pour. 32 STEEL REINFORCEMENT 33 Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting 34 reinforcement. 35 Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before 36 placing concrete. 37 CONCRETE PLACEMENT 38 Comply with ACI 301 for measuring, batching, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE (LIMITED APPLICATIONS) GDA 03301 -2 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Before test sampling and placing concrete,water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of 2 ACI 301. 3 Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site,or during placement. 4 Consolidate concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment. 5 FINISHING UNFORMED SURFACES 6 General: Comply with ACI 302.1R for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete 7 surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. 8 Screed surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to 9 form a uniform and open-textured surface plane before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on 10 surface. 11 Do not further disturb surfaces before starting finishing operations. 12 Trowel Finish: Apply a hard trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to floor and slab surfaces exposed 13 to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage 14 membrane, paint, or another thin film-finish coating system. 15 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING 16 General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot 17 temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with ACI 301 for hot-weather 18 protection during curing. 19 Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface. 20 Curing Methods: Cure formed and unformed concrete for at least seven days by one or a combination 21 of the following methods: 22 23 Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according 24 to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three 25 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing 26 period. 27 REPAIRS 28 Remove and replace concrete that does not comply with requirements in this Section. 29 END OF SECTION 03301 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE (LIMITED APPLICATIONS) GDA 03301 -3 GDA#12018.00 December 14,2012 Issue for Permit 1 SECTION 03355-CONCRETE SEALER 2 3 4 PART 1 - GENERAL 5 6 7 RELATED DOCUMENTS: 8 9 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and 10 Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 11 12 SUMMARY: 13 14 Extent of concrete sealer work is on schedule at the end of this Section or as shown on drawings. 15 16 Concrete work is specified in Division 3. 17 18 QUALITY ASSURANCE 19 20 General: Comply with provisions of the manufacturer's application instructions, except where more 21 stringent requirements are shown or specified. 22 23 SUBMITTALS: 24 25 Product Data: Submit data for proprietary materials and items. 26 27 Material Certificates: Provide materials certificates in lieu of materials laboratory test reports when 28 permitted by Architect. Material certificates shall be signed by manufacturer and Contractor, certifying 29 that each material item complies with, or exceeds, specified requirements. 30 31 PROJECT CONDITIONS: 32 33 Apply when temperatures are 40 degrees and rising. 34 35 Protect adjacent finish materials against spatter during placement. 36 37 38 PART 2-PRODUCTS 39 40 41 MATERIALS: 42 43 Sealer: Clear, non-yellowing 100 percent silicate based solution. 44 45 Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 46 47 Diamond Hard; Euclid Chemical Company. 48 Seal Hard; L& M Construction Chemicals. 49 Day-Chem Sure Hard (J-17); Dayton Superior Corp. 50 51 Alternate products and methods will be considered. All proposals shall be submitted at time 52 of bid for written acceptance of the Architect and Owner. 53 54 PART 3- EXECUTION 55 56 57 APPLICATION CONCRETE SEALER GDA 03355-1 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 Apply specified sealer to scheduled floor surfaces. Follow application procedures of sealer 3 manufacturer for existing concrete. Flush surface with water and squeegee the surface totally dry. 4 5 Proceed with application of curing compound when surface is sufficiently dry to receive materials. 6 7 8 END OF SECTION 03310 CONCRETE SEALER GDA 03355-2 GDA#12018.00 December 14,2012 Issue for Permit 1 SECTION 05500- METAL FABRICATIONS 2 3 4 PART 1 -GENERAL 5 6 7 RELATED DOCUMENTS: 8 9 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and 10 Division-1 Specification sections,apply to work of this section. 11 12 Division 3—Concrete 13 14 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 15 16 Definition: Metal fabrications include items made from iron and steel shapes, plates, bars, strips, 17 tubes, pipes and castings which are not a part of structural steel or other metal systems specified 18 elsewhere. 19 20 Extent of metal fabrications is indicated on drawings and schedules. 21 22 Types of work in this section include metal fabrications for: 23 24 Rough hardware. 25 26 Miscellaneous framing and supports. 27 28 Miscellaneous steel trim. 29 30 Concrete filled pipe bollards 31 32 QUALITY ASSURANCE: 33 34 Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and 35 assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark 36 units for reassembly and coordinated installation. 37 38 SUBMITTALS: 39 40 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, anchor details and installation instructions for 41 products used in miscellaneous metal fabrications, including paint products and grout. 42 43 Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection of miscellaneous metal 44 fabrications. Include plans, elevations and details of sections and connections. Show anchorage and 45 accessory items. Provide templates for anchor and bolt installation by others. 46 47 Where materials or fabrications are indicated to comply with certain requirements for design 48 loadings include structural computations, material properties and other information needed 49 for structural analysis. 50 51 52 PART 2- PRODUCTS: 53 54 55 MATERIALS: 56 57 FERROUS METALS: METAL FABRICATIONS GDA 05500- 1 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 Metal Surfaces, General: For fabrication of miscellaneous metal work which will be exposed to view, 3 use only materials which are smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting, seam marks, 4 roller marks, rolled trade names and roughness. 5 6 Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A 36. 7 8 Steel Tubing: Cold formed, ASTM A 500; or hot rolled, ASTM A 501. 9 10 Structural Steel Sheet: Hot-rolled, ASTM A 570; or cold-rolled ASTM A 611, Class 1; of grade 11 required for design loading. 12 13 Galvanized Structural Steel Sheet: ASTM A 446, of grade required for design loading. Coating 14 designation as indicated, or if not indicated, G90. 15 16 Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53; Type and grade (if applicable) as selected by fabricator and as required for 17 design loading; black finish unless for exterior use: galvanize where indicated and at all exterior uses; 18 standard weight (schedule 40), unless otherwise indicated. 19 20 Brackets, Flanges and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of the same type material and finish as 21 supported rails, unless otherwise indicated. 22 23 Concrete Inserts: Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either malleable iron, ASTM A 24 47, or cast steel, ASTM A 27. Provide bolts, washers and shims as required, hot-dip galvanized, 25 ASTM A 153. 26 27 Grout: 28 29 Non-Shrink Non-Metallic Grout: Pre-mixed, factory-packaged, non-staining, non-corrosive, non- 30 gaseous grout complying with CE CRD-C621. Provide grout specifically recommended by 31 manufacturer for interior and exterior applications of type specified in this section. 32 33 FASTENERS: 34 35 General: Provide zinc-coated fasteners for exterior use or where built into exterior walls. Select 36 fasteners for the type, grade and class required. 37 38 Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon head type, ASTM A 307, Grade A. 39 40 Machine Screws: Cadmium plated steel, FS FF-S-92. 41 42 Wood Screw s: Flat head carbon steel, FS FF-S-111. 43 44 Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, FS FF-W-92. 45 46 Masonry Anchorage Devices: Expansion shields, FS FF-S-325. 47 48 Toggle Bolts: Tumble-wing type, FS FF-B-588, type, class and style as required. 49 50 Lock Washers: Helical spring type carbon steel, FS FF-W-84. 51 52 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS 53 54 General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete 55 the Work. 56 57 FINISHES, GENERAL METAL FABRICATIONS GDA 05500- 2 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to applying and 3 designating finishes. 4 5 Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary 6 protective covering prior to shipment. 7 8 Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable 9 if they are within one half of the range of approved samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece 10 are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within 11 the range of approved samples and they are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 12 13 Paint: 14 15 Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: 16 17 Manufacturer's or Fabricator's standard, gray, fast-curing, lead-free, "universal" primer; selected for 18 good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, for compatibility with finish paint systems indicated 19 and for compatibility to provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged 20 exposure; complying with performance requirements of FS TT-P-645. 21 22 FABRICATION, GENERAL: 23 24 Workmanship: Use materials of size and thickness indicated or, if not indicated, as required to 25 produce strength and durability in finished product for use intended. Work to dimensions indicated or 26 accepted on shop drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support. Use type of materials 27 indicated or specified for various components of work. 28 29 Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges. 30 Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32" unless otherwise indicated. Form bent-metal 31 corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. 32 33 Weld corners and seams continuously, complying with AWS recommendations. At exposed 34 connections, grind exposed welds smooth and flush to match and blend with adjoining surfaces. 35 36 Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners wherever 37 possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flat-head (countersunk) 38 screws or bolts. 39 40 Provide for anchorage of type indicated, coordinated with supporting structure. Fabricate and space 41 anchoring devices to provide adequate support for intended use. 42 43 Cut, reinforce, drill and tap miscellaneous metal work as indicated to receive finish hardware and 44 similar items. 45 46 Galvanizing: Galvanize all ferrous metals which are exposed to view on the exterior of the building, all 47 steel lintels and shelf angles and where otherwise indicated. Provide a zinc coating for those items 48 indicated or specified to be galvanized, as follows: 49 50 ASTM A 153 for galvanizing iron and steel hardware. 51 52 ASTM A 123 for galvanizing rolled, pressed and forged steel shapes, plates, bars and strip 53 1/8"thick and heavier. 54 55 ASTM A 386 for galvanizing assembled steel products. 56 57 Fabricate joints which will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water or provide weep holes METAL FABRICATIONS GDA 05500-3 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 where water may accumulate. 2 3 Shop Painting: 4 5 Apply shop primer to surfaces of metal fabrications except those which are galvanized or as indicated 6 to be embedded in concrete or masonry, unless otherwise indicated, and in compliance with 7 requirements of SSPC-PA1 "Paint Application Specification No. 1"for shop painting. 8 9 Surface Preparation: Prepare ferrous metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated 10 below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed 11 metal fabrications: 12 13 Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B): SSPC-SP6"Commercial Blast Cleaning". 14 15 Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP3 "Power Tool Cleaning". 16 17 ROUGH HARDWARE: 18 19 Furnish bent or otherwise custom fabricated bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels and other 20 miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as required for framing and supporting woodwork, and for 21 anchoring or securing woodwork to concrete or other structures. Straight bolts and other stock rough 22 hardware items are specified in Division-6 sections. 23 24 Fabricate items to sizes, shapes and dimensions required. Furnish malleable iron washers for heads 25 and nuts which bear on wood structural connections; elsewhere, furnish steel washers. 26 27 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS: 28 29 Provide miscellaneous steel framing and supports which are not a part of structural steel framework, 30 as required to complete work. 31 32 Fabricate miscellaneous units to sizes, shapes and profiles indicated or, if not indicated, of required 33 dimensions to receive adjacent other work to be retained by framing. Except as otherwise indicated, 34 fabricate from structural steel shapes, plates and steel bars, of welded construction using mitered 35 joints for field connection. Cut, drill and tap units to receive hardware and similar items. 36 37 Equip units with integrally welded anchors for casting into concrete or building into masonry. Furnish 38 inserts if units must be installed after concrete is placed. 39 40 Except as otherwise indicated, space anchors 24" o.c. and provide minimum anchor units of 41 1-1/4"x 1/4" x 8"steel straps. 42 43 Galvanize exterior miscellaneous frames and supports. 44 45 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM: 46 47 Provide shapes and sizes for profiles shown. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from 48 structural steel shapes, plates and steel bars, with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed 49 edges. Use concealed field splices wherever possible. Provide cutouts, fittings and anchorages as 50 required for coordination of assembly and installation with other work. 51 52 Galvanize exterior miscellaneous steel trim. 53 54 55 Galvanize exterior steel railings, including pipe, fittings, brackets, fasteners, and other ferrous 56 components. Provide black steel pipe for interior railings. 57 METAL FABRICATIONS GDA 05500- 4 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 METAL BOLLARDS 2 3 Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe. 4 5 Prime bollards with zinc-rich primer. 6 7 8 PART 3 - EXECUTION 9 10 11 PREPARATION: 12 13 Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication, 14 where possible. Do not delay job progress; allow for trimming and fitting where taking field 15 measurements before fabrication might delay work. 16 17 Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and 18 directions for installation of anchorages, such as concrete inserts, sleeves, anchor bolts and 19 miscellaneous items having integral anchors, which are to be embedded in concrete or masonry 20 construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to project site. 21 22 INSTALLATION: 23 24 General: 25 26 Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for 27 securing miscellaneous metal fabrications to in-place construction; including threaded fasteners for 28 concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts, wood screws and other 29 connectors as required. 30 31 Cutting, Fitting and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling and fitting required for installation of 32 miscellaneous metal fabrications. Set work accurately in location, alignment and elevation, plumb, 33 level, true and free of rack, measured from established lines and levels. Provide temporary bracing or 34 anchors in formwork for items which are to be built into concrete, masonry or similar construction. 35 36 Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight hairline joints. Weld connections which are 37 not to be left as exposed joints, but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Grind 38 exposed joints smooth and touch-up shop paint coat. Do not weld, cut or abrade the surfaces of 39 exterior units which have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, and are intended for bolted or 40 screwed field connections. 41 42 Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded metal-arc welding, 43 appearance and quality of welds made, and methods used in correcting welding work. 44 45 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS 46 47 General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including 48 manufacturers'written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings. 49 50 Anchor supports for operable partitions securely to and rigidly brace from building structure. 51 52 INSTALLING METAL BOLLARDS 53 54 Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings. Center and align bollards in holes 3 inches (75 mm) 55 above bottom of excavation. Place concrete and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Support and brace 56 bollards in position until concrete has cured. 57 METAL FABRICATIONS GDA 05500- 5 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water. 2 3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING 4 5 Touch-Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded 6 areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting. 7 8 Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. 9 10 For galvanized surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections and abraded areas and apply 11 galvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. 12 13 14 END OF SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS GDA 05500- 6 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 SECTION 05521 - PIPE RAILINGS 2 PART 1 -GENERAL 3 RELATED DOCUMENTS 4 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions 5 and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 6 SUMMARY 7 Section Includes: 8 Steel pipe railings. 9 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 10 General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable design 11 working stresses of railing materials based on the following: 12 Steel: 72 percent of minimum yield strength. 13 Structural Performance: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads 14 and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 15 Handrails and Top Rails of Guards: 16 Uniform load of 5" of/ft. (0.73 kN/m)applied in any direction. 17 Concentrated load of 200 .;;^s(0.89 kN)applied in any direction. 18 Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 19 Infill of Guards: 20 Concentrated load of J I;; (0.22 kN) applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft. (0.093 21 sq. m). 22 Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 23 Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes 24 acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of 25 components, failure of connections,and other detrimental effects. 26 Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material 27 surfaces. 28 Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and 29 other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. 30 SUBMITTALS 31 Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. PIPE RAILINGS GDA 05521 - 1 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 PROJECT CONDITIONS 2 Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal 3 fabrications by field measurements before fabrication. 4 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING 5 Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and 6 coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are 7 compatible with one another. 8 Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions 9 for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral 10 anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time 11 for installation. 12 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 13 METALS, GENERAL 14 Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks, 15 rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes. 16 STEEL AND IRON 17 Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless another 18 grade and weight are required by structural loads. 19 Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 20 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS 21 Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. 22 Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer 23 complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. 24 Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer. 25 Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout 26 complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior 27 and exterior applications. 28 FABRICATION 29 General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member 30 sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural 31 loads. 32 Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. 33 Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for 34 reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined 35 pieces. PIPE RAILINGS GDA 05521 - 2 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of 2 approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on 3 exposed surfaces. 4 Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces. 5 Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep 6 holes where water may accumulate. 7 Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. 8 Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections. 9 Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed 10 for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. 11 Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion 12 resistance of base metals. 13 Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 14 Remove flux immediately. 15 At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows 16 after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces. 17 Form changes in direction as follows: 18 As detailed. 19 By bending. 20 Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each configuration required; maintain cross 21 section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming 22 exposed surfaces of components. 23 Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings. 24 FINISHES, GENERAL 25 Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for 26 recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 27 Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary 28 protective covering before shipping. 29 Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable 30 if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece 31 are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within 32 the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 33 Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture, of railings. PIPE RAILINGS GDA 05521 -3 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES 2 For nongalvanized steel railings, provide nongalvanized ferrous-metal fittings, brackets, fasteners, and 3 sleeves, except galvanize anchors to be embedded in exterior concrete or masonry. 4 Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPC- SSPC- 5 SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." 6 Primer Application: Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings unless otherwise indicated. 7 Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and 8 Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Primer need not be applied to surfaces to be 9 embedded in concrete or masonry. 10 Shop prime uncoated railings with universal shop primer indicated. 11 PART 3 - EXECUTION 12 EXAMINATION 13 Examine plaster and gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors, to verify that 14 locations of concealed reinforcements have been clearly marked for Installer. Locate reinforcements 15 and mark locations if not already done. 16 INSTALLATION, GENERAL 17 Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints. 18 Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location, 19 alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. 20 Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or finished 21 after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means 22 without further cutting or fitting. 23 Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet(2 mm in 1 m). 24 Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with 25 rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet (5 mm in 3 m). 26 Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with grout, 27 concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. 28 Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. 29 Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for 30 securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction. 31 ANCHORING POSTS 32 Form or core-drill holes not less than 5 inches (125 mm) deep and 3/4 inch (20 mm) larger 33 than OD of post for installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, 34 and fill annular space between post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and 35 placed PIPE RAILINGS GDA 05521 -4 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING 2 Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded 3 areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting to 4 comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 5 Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil (0.05-mm)dry film thickness. 6 PROTECTION 7 Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings 8 approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion. 9 END OF SECTION 05521 PIPE RAILINGS GDA 05521 -5 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 SECTION 06100- ROUGH CARPENTRY 2 3 4 PART 1 -GENERAL 5 6 RELATED DOCUMENTS: 7 8 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and 9 Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 10 11 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 12 13 Definition: Rough carpentry includes carpentry work not specified as part of other sections and which 14 is generally not exposed, except as otherwise indicated. 15 16 Types of work in this section include rough carpentry for: 17 18 Wood grounds, nailers, blocking and sleepers 19 20 Backing panels 21 22 SUBMITTALS: 23 24 Wood Treatment Data: Submit chemical treatment manufacturer's instructions for proper use of each 25 type of treated material. 26 27 Preservative Treatment: For each type specified, include certification by treating plant stating 28 type of preservative retained and conformance with applicable standards. 29 30 PRODUCT HANDLING: 31 32 Delivery and Storage: Keep materials dry at all times. Protect against exposure to weather and 33 contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber as well as plywood and other panels; provide for air 34 circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings including polyethylene and similar 35 material stacks. 36 37 PROJECT CONDITIONS: 38 39 Coordination: Fit carpentry work to other work; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate 40 location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds and similar supports to allow attachment of other work. 41 42 43 PART 2- PRODUCTS 44 45 LUMBER, GENERAL: 46 47 Lumber Standards: Manufacture lumber to comply with PS 20 "American Softwood Lumber Standard" 48 and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards 49 Committee's (ALSC) Board of Review. 50 51 Inspection Agencies: Inspection agencies and the abbreviations used to reference with lumber grades 52 and species include the following: 53 54 NLGA -National Lumber Grades Authority. 55 SPIB -Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 56 WCLIB-West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 57 WWPA -Western Wood Products Association. ROUGH CARPENTRY GDA 06100- 1 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 Grade Stamps: Factory-mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency evidencing 3 compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency, grade, species, moisture 4 content at time of surfacing, and mill. 5 6 Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detail dimensions. Provide actual sizes as required 7 by PS 20, for moisture content specified for each use. 8 9 Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 10 11 Provide seasoned lumber with 15% maximum moisture content at time of dressing shipment 12 for sizes 2"or less in nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated. 13 14 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER: 15 16 Provide wood for support or attachment of other work including cant strips, flashing, coping, bucks, 17 nailers, blocking, furring, grounds, stripping and similar members. Provide lumber of sizes indicated, 18 worked into shapes shown, and as follows: 19 20 Moisture content: 15% maximum for lumber items specified to receive wood preservative 21 treatment. 22 23 Grade: Construction Grade light framing size lumber of any species or board size lumber as required. 24 No. 3 Common or Standard grade boards per WCLIB or WWPA rules or No. 3 boards per SPIB rules. 25 26 WOOD-BASED STRUCTURAL-USE PANELS, GENERAL 27 28 Construction Panel Standards: Comply with PS 1 "U.S. Product Standard for Construction and 29 Industrial Plywood" for plywood panels and, for products not manufactured under PS 1 provisions, 30 with American Plywood Associates (APA) "Performance Standard and Policies for Structural-Use 31 Panels", Form No. E445. 32 33 Trademark: Factory mark structural-use panels with APA trademark evidencing compliance with 34 grade requirements. 35 36 STRUCTURAL-USE PANELS FOR BACKING 37 38 Plywood Backing Panels: For mounting electrical or telephone equipment, provide fire-retardant 39 treated plywood panels with grade designation, APA C-D PLUGGED INT with exterior glue, in 40 thickness indicated, or, if not otherwise indicated, not less than 15/32". 41 42 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS: 43 44 Fasteners and Anchorages: Provide size, type, material and finish as indicated and as recommended 45 by applicable standards, complying with applicable Federal Specifications for nails, staples, screws, 46 bolts, nuts, washers and anchoring devices. Provide metal hangers and framing anchors of the size 47 and type recommended by the manufacturer for each use including recommended nails. 48 49 Where rough carpentry work is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high 50 relative humidity, provide fasteners and anchorages with a hot-dip zinc coating (ASTM A 51 153). 52 53 WOOD TREATMENT BY PRESSURE PROCESS: 54 55 Preservative Treatment: All lumber and plywood shall comply with applicable requirements of AWPA 56 Standards C2 (Lumber) and C9 (Plywood) and of AWPB Standards listed below. Mark each treated 57 item with the AWPB Quality Mark Requirements. ROUGH CARPENTRY GDA 06100-2 GDA#12018.00 December 14,2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 Pressure-treat above-ground items with water-borne preservatives complying with AWPB LP- 3 2. After treatment, kiln-dry lumber to a maximum moisture content of 19%. Treat indicated 4 items and the following: 5 6 Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping and similar concealed members in 7 contact with masonry or concrete. 8 9 Complete fabrication of treated items prior to treatment, where possible. If cut after treatment, 10 coat cut surfaces with heavy brush coat of same chemical used for treatment and to comply 11 with AWPA M4. Inspect each piece of lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or 12 defective pieces. 13 14 15 PART 3- EXECUTION 16 17 INSTALLATION, GENERAL: 18 19 Discard units of material with defects which might impair quality of work, and units which are too small 20 to use in fabricating work with minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement. 21 22 Set carpentry work to required levels and lines, with members plumb and true to line and cut and 23 fitted. 24 25 Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as shown and as required by 26 recognized standards. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes. 27 28 Use common wire nails, except as otherwise indicated. Use finishing nails for finish work. Select 29 fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will 30 receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting 31 of wood; predrill as required. 32 33 WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS, BLOCKING AND SLEEPERS: 34 35 Provide wherever shown and where required for screeding or attachment of other work. Form to 36 shapes as shown and cut as required for true line and level of work to be attached. Coordinate 37 location with other work involved. 38 39 Provide wood blocking in the following areas, but not limited to these areas: 40 41 Board paneling 42 Toilet accessories. 43 Wall mounted finish hardware (wall stops). 44 Cabinetry. 45 Grab Bars 46 Areas indicated to have equipment installed by Owner or"others." 47 48 Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nuts flush with 49 surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Build into masonry during installation of masonry work. Where 50 possible, anchor to formwork before concrete placement. 51 52 Provide permanent grounds of dressed, preservative treated, key-bevelled lumber not less than 1-1/2" 53 wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material involved. 54 Remove temporary grounds when no longer required. 55 56 57 END OF SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY GDA 06100-3 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 SECTION 06402- INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 2 3 4 PART 1 -GENERAL 5 6 RELATED DOCUMENTS 7 8 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and 9 Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 10 11 SUMMARY 12 13 This Section includes the following: 14 15 Standing and running trim 16 Laminate clad cabinets(plastic-covered casework) 17 Cabinet and vanity tops(countertops) 18 Board paneling 19 Glass 20 21 Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 22 23 Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry"for furring, blocking, and other carpentry work that is not 24 exposed to view. 25 26 Division 8 Section "Flush Wood Doors" for doors specified by reference to architectural 27 woodwork standards. 28 29 SUBMITTALS 30 31 General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification 32 Sections. 33 34 Product data for each type of product and process specified in this section and incorporated into items 35 of architectural woodwork during fabrication, finishing, and installation. 36 37 Shop drawings showing location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, 38 attachment devices, and other components. 39 40 Samples for initial selection purposes of the following in form of manufacturer's color charts consisting 41 of actual units or sections of units showing full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for 42 each type of material indicated. 43 44 Samples for verification purposes of the following: 45 46 Laminate clad panel products, 8-1/2 inches, by 11 inches for each type, color, pattern, and 47 surface finish,with separate samples of unfaced panel product used for core. 48 49 Exposed hardware, one unit of each type and finish. 50 51 Thermoset decorative-overlay surfaced panel products, 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), for 52 each type, color, pattern, and surface finish, with separate samples of unfaced panel product 53 used for core. 54 55 For each type of board paneling and accessory, with finish required, 5 pieces, approximately 56 2 iriches (300 mm) long and of same thickness and material indicated for the Work and 57 showing the full range of normal color and texture variations expected. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK GDA 06402-1 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 Product certificates signed by woodwork manufacturer certifying that products comply with specified 3 requirements. 4 5 Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" article to demonstrate their 6 capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with project names, addresses, names 7 of Architects and Owners, and other information specified. 8 9 QUALITY ASSURANCE 10 11 Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm experienced in successfully producing architectural woodwork 12 similar to that indicated for this Project, with sufficient production capacity to produce required units 13 without causing delay in the Work. 14 15 Single-Source Manufacturing and Installation Responsibility: Engage a qualified Manufacturer to 16 assume undivided responsibility for woodwork specified in this section, including fabrication, finishing, 17 and installation. 18 19 AWI Quality Standard: Comply with applicable requirements of "Architectural Woodwork Quality 20 Standards"published by the Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI)except as otherwise indicated. 21 22 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING 23 24 Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soilage, and 25 deterioration. 26 27 Do not deliver woodwork until painting, wet work, grinding, and similar operations that could damage, 28 soil, or deteriorate woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored 29 in other than installation areas, store only in areas whose environmental conditions meet requirements 30 specified in "Project Conditions." 31 32 PROJECT CONDITIONS 33 34 Environmental Conditions: Obtain and comply with Woodwork Manufacturer's and Installer's 35 coordinated advice for optimum temperature and humidity conditions for woodwork during its storage 36 and installation. Do not install woodwork until these conditions have been attained and stabilized so 37 that woodwork is within plus or minus 1.0 percent of optimum moisture content from date of 38 installation through remainder of construction period. 39 40 Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to be fitted to other construction, check actual 41 dimensions of other construction by accurate field measurements before manufacturing woodwork; 42 show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate manufacturing schedule with 43 construction progress to avoid delay of Work. 44 Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guarantee dimensions 45 and proceed with manufacture of woodwork without field measurements. Coordinate other 46 construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to guarantee dimensions. 47 48 49 PART 2-PRODUCTS 50 51 52 MATERIALS 53 54 General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI woodworking standard for each 55 type of woodwork and quality grade indicated and,where the following products are part of woodwork, 56 with requirements of the referenced product standards, that apply to product characteristics indicated: 57 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK GDA 06402-2 GDA#12018.00 December 14,2012 Issue for Permit 1 Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2. 2 3 Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2. 4 5 Formaldehyde Emission Levels: Comply with formaldehyde emission requirements of each voluntary 6 standard referenced below: 7 8 Particleboard: NPA 8. 9 10 Medium Density Fiberboard: NPA 9. 11 12 High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated, or if not indicated, as required 13 by woodwork quality standard. 14 15 Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide high-pressure decorative 16 laminates by one of the following: 17 18 As indicated on the Drawings 19 20 Thermoset Decorative Overlay: Decorative surface of thermally fused polyester or melamine- 21 impregnated web, bonded to specified substrate and complying with ALA 1992. 22 Substrate: Medium-density particleboard, or medium-density fiberboard. 23 24 Tempered Float Glass for Countertop: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Class 1 (clear), 25 Quality-Q3; with exposed edges seamed before tempering, 26 27 Thickness: %", 12 mm thick. 28 29 Edge: Pencil Polish 30 31 FABRICATION, GENERAL 32 33 Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for moisture 34 content of lumber in relation to relative humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication and in 35 installation areas. 36 37 Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for 38 the following: 39 40 Corners of cabinets and edges of solid wood (lumber) members less than 1 inch in nominal 41 thickness: 1/16 inch. 42 43 Edges of rails and similar members more than 1 inch in nominal thickness: 1/8 inch. 44 45 Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, before shipment to 46 project site to maximum extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment 47 and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, 48 and fitting. 49 50 Factory-cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and 51 similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce 52 accurately sized and shaped openings. Smooth edges of cutouts and, where located in countertops 53 and similar exposures, seal edges of cutouts with a water-resistant coating. 54 55 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH 56 57 Grade: Premium, clear. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK GDA 06402-3 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 Wood Species and Cut: Douglas Fir. 3 4 For trim items wider than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for width. 5 6 For rails wider or thicker than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for width or 7 thickness. 8 9 Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members, except for 10 members with ends exposed in finished work. 11 12 LAMINATE CLAD CABINETS (PLASTIC-COVERED CASEWORK) 13 14 Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 and its Division 400B "Laminate Clad Cabinets." 15 16 Grade: Custom. 17 18 AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay. 19 20 Laminate Cladding: High pressure decorative laminate complying with the following requirements: 21 22 Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and 23 textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 24 25 Provide selections made by Architect from laminate manufacturer's full range of 26 standard colors and finishes. 27 28 Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with the 29 following requirements: 30 31 Horizontal Surfaces Other than Tops: GP-50, 0.050-inch (1.270-mm) nominal thickness. 32 33 Vertical Surfaces: GP-50, 0.050-inch (1.270-mm)nominal thickness. 34 35 Provide for front sides, top, bottom and back surfaces of cabinet doors. 36 37 Edges: GP-50, 0.050-inch (1.270-mm)nominal thickness. 38 39 Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces: Provide surface materials indicated below: 40 41 Converter Storage Cabinet and Equipment Lockers 42 43 All Surfaces: GP-50, 0.050-inch (1.270-mm)nominal thickness. 44 45 Color: As indicated on Drawings and Schedules. 46 47 All other cabinets 48 49 Surfaces Other than Drawer Bodies: Thermoset decorative overlay. 50 51 Drawer Sides and Backs: Thermoset decorative overlay. 52 53 Drawer Bottoms: Thermoset decorative overlay. 54 55 Color: White. 56 57 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORY MATERIALS INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK GDA 06402-4 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 General: Provide hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural woodwork, except 3 for items specified in Division 8 Section"Finish Hardware." 4 5 Cabinet Hardware Schedule: Refer to schedule at end of this section for cabinet hardware required 6 for architectural cabinets. 7 8 Hardware Standard: Comply with ANSI/BHMA A156.9 "American National Standard for Cabinet 9 Hardware"for items indicated by reference to BHMA numbers or referenced to this standard. 10 11 Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish indicated. 12 13 US 26D 14 15 For concealed hardware provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class 16 requirements of ANSI/BHMA A156.9. 17 18 ARCHITECTURAL CABINET TOPS(COUNTERTOP 19 20 Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 and its Division 400C. 21 22 Type of Top: High pressure decorative laminate complying with the following: 23 24 Grade: Custom. 25 26 Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and 27 textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 28 29 Provide Architect's selections from manufacturer's full range of colors and finishes in the 30 following categories: 31 32 Solid colors, wood grains, or patterns. 33 34 Grain Direction: Parallel to cabinet fronts. 35 36 Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces. 37 38 Core Material: Medium-density particleboard, phenolic resin, medium-density particleboard. 39 40 PANELING 41 42 Board Paneling: 43 44 Source: 45 46 TerraMai 47 8400 Agate Road 48 White City, OR 97503 49 Tel: 541.973.2301 50 Tel: 800.220.9062 51 Fax: 541.973.2308 52 53 Board Paneling No. 1 (indicated as BP-1 on the Drawings): 54 55 Application: Paneling. 56 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK GDA 06402-5 GDA#12018.00 December 14,2012 Issue for Permit 1 Species and Grade: Pseudotsuga menziesii, 100% Clear Douglas Fir — Mixed grain. 2 Reclaimed from gymnasium bleachers. 3 4 Bolt holes plugged with matching Douglas Fir plugs. 5 6 Maximum Moisture Content: 6-9 percent. 7 8 Pattern: Tongue&groove, back-relieved, solid length. 9 10 Thickness: 5/8-inch 11 12 Net Coverage Width: Not less than 6-inches(140 mm), actual. 13 14 Lengths: Random, 4'to 12'long. 15 16 Finish: Water-based polyurethane. 17 18 MISCELLANEOUS: 19 20 Closet Rod Supports: For supporting closet rods where rod does not terminate into wall, provide 3/4" 21 particleboard or medium density fiberboard overlaid with thermoset decorative overlay (melamine) on 22 all exposed edges. 23 24 FASTENERS AND ANCHORS 25 26 Screws: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each use. Comply with FS FF-S-111 for 27 applicable requirements. 28 29 For metal framing supports, provide screws as recommended by metal framing manufacturer. 30 31 Nails: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each use. Comply with FS FF-N-105 for 32 applicable requirements. 33 34 Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required by each substrate for secure anchorage. 35 Provide nonferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls 36 and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed steel or lead expansion bolt 37 devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts and anchors, as required, to be set into concrete 38 or masonry work for subsequent woodwork anchorage. 39 40 PART 3- EXECUTION 41 42 43 PREPARATION 44 45 Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installing. 46 47 Deliver concrete inserts and similar anchoring devices to be built into substrates well in advance of 48 time substrates are to be built. 49 50 Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete 51 work as required, including back priming and removal of packing. 52 53 INSTALLATION 54 55 Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for it grade specified in Part 2 of 56 this section for type of woodwork involved. 57 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK GDA 06402-6 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Install woodwork plumb, level, true, and straight with no distortions. Shim as required with concealed 2 shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8'-0" for plumb and level (including tops) and with no 3 variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces. 4 5 Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish at 6 cuts. 7 8 Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to grounds, 9 stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a 10 complete installation. Except where prefinished matching fastener heads are required, use fine 11 finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish 12 where transparent finish is indicated. 13 14 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM: 15 16 Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces 17 (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use pieces less than 18 60 inches (1500 mm) long, except where shorter single-length pieces are necessary. Scarf running 19 joints and stagger in adjacent and related members. 20 21 Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8 inch in 96 22 inches(3 mm in 2400 mm). 23 24 CABINETS: 25 26 Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately 27 aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered 28 operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 29 30 Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or other 31 variation from a straight line. 32 33 Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16 inches 34 (400 mm) o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for 1-inch (25-mm) penetration into wood 35 framing, blocking, or hanging strips. 36 37 COUNTERTOPS: 38 39 Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports 40 into underside of countertop. 41 42 Align adjacent solid-surfacing-material countertops and form seams to comply with 43 manufacturer's written recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop. 44 Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface. 45 46 Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or 47 other variation from a straight line. 48 49 Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches(400 mm)o.c. and to 50 walls with adhesive. 51 52 Caulk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 7 Section "Joint 53 Sealants." 54 55 PANELING INSTALLATION 56 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK GDA 06402-7 GDA#12018.00 December 14,2012 Issue for Permit 1 Board Paneling: Arrange in random-width pattern suggested by manufacturer unless boards or planks 2 are of uniform width. 3 4 Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions, but not less than applicable 5 recommendations in NWFA's"Installation Guidelines: Wood Flooring." 6 7 Wood Sleepers: Install according to requirements in Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry." 8 9 Board Paneling: Blind nail or staple paneling to substrate. 10 11 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING 12 13 Repair damaged and defective woodwork where possible to eliminate defects functionally and 14 visually;where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. 15 16 Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. 17 18 Clean woodwork on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up factory-applied finishes to 19 restore damaged or soiled areas. 20 21 PROTECTION 22 23 Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, 24 that ensures that woodwork is being without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial 25 Completion. 26 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK GDA 06402-8 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 HARDWARE SCHEDULE 2 3 1. Shelf Supports: K&V No. 80 standards with NO. 180 brackets, depths to fit shelf size 4 indicated. 5 6 2. Closet Rods: K&V No. KV-2 with bright nickel finish, lengths as required on Drawings. 7 8 3. Cabinet Wire Pull/per each door and drawer: Stanley 4483-1/2 Alum. 9 10 4. Concealed Casework Hinges: Stanley, Blum or equal. (Provide continuous piano 11 hinges at wood lockers) 12 13 5. Door Locks: C8053 lock with C7014 cam; National Cabinet Lock. Keyed alike. 14 15 Equipment Lockers and Converter Storage 16 17 Hardware Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.9 for items indicated by referencing BHMA numbers or 18 items referenced to this standard. 19 20 1. Cabinet Door Hinges: Cabinet hinge for 3/4" overlay doors. Provide #1592; Stanley 21 Hardware. Provide 2 hinges for doors up to 40"tall, 3 hinges for doors over 40"tall. 22 23 2. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, 7•' arches (89 mm) long, . !I-2 (33.4 mm)deep, 24 and 5,18 inches (8 mm) in diameter. Provide#4483-1/2; Stanley Hardware. 25 26 3. Door Locks: C8053 lock with C7014 cam; National Cabinet Lock. Keyed differently. 27 28 4. Shelf Standards: KV 255 shelf standards, adjustable at 1/2" centers. Provide 4 No 29 256 shelf supports for each shelf. 30 31 Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 32 for BHMA finish number indicated. 33 34 Aluminum: 628 for pulls. 35 36 Plated Brass: 626 for locks and hinges. 37 38 Shelf Standards: Zinc. 39 40 41 END OF SECTION 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK GDA 06402-9 GDA#12018.00 December 14,2012 Issue for Permit 1 SECTION 06640- FIBERGLASS REINFORCED POLYESTER PANELS 2 3 4 PART 1 -GENERAL 5 6 RELATED DOCUMENTS: 7 8 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and 9 Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 10 11 SCOPE 12 13 Furnish and install: 14 15 Fiberglass wall panel. 16 17 Miscellaneous specialties scheduled. 18 19 Supplemental items necessary to complete work indicated. 20 21 SHOP DRAWINGS 22 23 Show dimensions, materials, construction details, assembly methods and other pertinent information. 24 25 26 PART TWO-PRODUCTS 27 28 29 GENERAL 30 31 As per approved Shop Drawings 32 33 Provide materials in colors, and finishes as scheduled or shown on Drawings. 34 35 Acceptable Manufacturer 36 37 Product: Subject to compliance with requirements provide FRP by Panolam. 38 39 Sizes: Provide size of panels for walls as indicated on the Drawings. 40 41 Colors: Silver, typical, White in Janitor's Room. 42 43 Texture: Embossed. 44 45 Surface Burning: Class C,ASTM E84. 46 47 Moldings: PVC cap, corner, and edges, color to match panel. 48 49 Adhesive: 50 51 Per manufacturers recommendations. 52 53 54 PART THREE -EXECUTION 55 56 General 57 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED POLYESTER PANELS GDA 06640- 1 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 At locations indicated on the drawings and schedules, provide fiber reinforced polyester panels. Set 2 items level, plumb, square, and at proper elevations. 3 4 Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for installation. 5 6 Installation 7 8 Use all necessary moldings and sealants for proper installation according to manufacturer's 9 recommendations. Colors shall match panel color. 10 11 Laminate fiberglass panels to gypsum board with adhesive as per manufacturer's recommendations. 12 13 There are to be no horizontal joints in the FRP panels. 14 15 16 END OF SECTION 09985 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED POLYESTER PANELS GDA 06640- 2 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 SECTION 06651 -SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS 2 3 4 PART 1 —GENERAL 5 6 7 RELATED DOCUMENTS 8 9 Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including general and supplementary conditions and 10 Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 11 12 SUMMARY 13 14 This Section includes the following horizontal and trim solid surface product types: 15 16 Countertops, skirts and splashes. 17 18 Related Sections include the following: 19 20 DEFINITION 21 22 Solid surface (quartz) is defined as nonporous, homogeneous material maintaining the same 23 composition throughout the part with a composition of approximately 93% crystalline silica which is 24 bound in polymer. 25 26 SUBMITTALS 27 28 Product data: 29 30 For each type of product indicated. 31 32 Shop drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, 33 attachment devices and other components. 34 35 Show full-size details, edge details,thermoforming requirements, attachments, etc. 36 Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, including concealed blocking and reinforcement 37 specified in other Sections. 38 Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, faucets, soap dispensers, 39 waste receptacle and other items installed in solid surface. 40 41 Samples: For each type of product indicated. 42 43 Submit minimum 6-inch by 6-inch sample in specified gloss. 44 Cut sample and seam together for representation of inconspicuous seam. 45 Indicate full range of color and pattern variation. 46 47 Approved samples will be retained as a standard for work. 48 49 Product data: Indicate product description, fabrication information and compliance with specified 50 performance requirements. 51 52 Product certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer. 53 54 Manufacturer certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that they comply with requirements. 55 SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS GDA 06651 - 1 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Maintenance data: Submit manufacturer's care and maintenance data, including repair and cleaning 2 instructions. 3 4 Maintenance kit for finishes shall be submitted. 5 6 Include in project closeout documents. 7 8 QUALITY ASSURANCE 9 10 Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those 11 required for this project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. 12 13 Fabricator/installer qualifications: Work of this section shall be by a certified fabricator/installer, 14 certified in writing by the manufacturer. 15 16 Applicable standards: Standards of the following, as referenced herein: 17 18 American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 19 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 20 National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 21 22 Fire test response characteristics: Provide with the following Class A (Class I) surface burning 23 characteristics as determined by testing identical products per UL 723 (ASTM E84) or another testing 24 and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 25 26 Flame Spread Index: 25 or less. 27 Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less. 28 29 Job mock-up: Prior to fabrication of architectural millwork, erect sample unit to further verify selections 30 made under sample submittals and to demonstrate the quality of materials and execution. 31 32 Mock-up shall be full scale by 5-feet long. 33 34 Build the mock-up to comply with the contract documents and install in a location as directed 35 by the architect. 36 37 Notify the architect two weeks in advance of the date of when the mock-up will be delivered. 38 39 Should mock-up not be approved, re-fabricate and reinstall until approval is secured. 40 41 Remove rejected units from project site. 42 43 After approval, the mock-up may become a part of the project. 44 45 This mock-up, once approved, shall serve as a standard for judging quality of all completed 46 units of work. 47 48 Pre-installation conference: Conduct conference at project site to comply with requirements in Division 49 1. 50 51 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 52 53 Deliver no components to project site until areas are ready for installation. 54 55 Store components indoors prior to installation. 56 SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS GDA 06651 - 2 GDA#12018.00 December 14,2012 Issue for Permit 1 Handle materials to prevent damage to finished surfaces. 2 3 Provide protective coverings to prevent physical damage or staining following installation for 4 duration of project. 5 6 WARRANTY 7 8 Provide manufacturer's warranty against defects in materials. 9 10 Warranty shall provide material and labor to repair or replace defective materials. 11 12 Damage caused by physical or chemical abuse or damage from excessive heat will not be 13 warranted. 14 15 Installed Warranty: To qualify for the optional Installed Warranty, fabrication and installation must be 16 performed by a DuPont Certified Fabrication/Installation source who will provide a brand plate for the 17 application. 18 19 This warranty covers all fabrication and installation performed by the certified/approved source subject 20 to the specific wording contained in the Installed Warranty Card. 21 22 Manufacturer's warranty period: Ten years from date of substantial completion. 23 24 MAINTENANCE 25 26 Provide maintenance instructions as specified by the manufacturer. 27 28 29 PART 2—PRODUCTS 30 31 32 ACRYLIC SOLID SURFACE MATERIAL 33 34 Product: Studio Class I 35 36 Description: Non-porous, homogeneous material maintaining the same composition throughout the 37 part with a composition of polyester or acrylic polymer, aluminum trihydrate filler and pigment. 38 39 Thickness: As indicated on the Drawings. 40 41 Color: Silver Comet, K3-8585 42 43 Gloss: 05/08 44 45 Sheet Size: As required for fabrication of units indicated. 46 47 Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 48 49 Avonite Surfaces® by Aristech Acrylics LLC 50 7350 Empire Drive 51 Florence, KY 41042, USA 52 Phone 1.800.354.9858 or 859.283.1501 53 Fax 859.283.7378 54 Website www.avonitesurfaces.com. 55 56 SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS GDA 06651 -3 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 3 QUARTZ SOLID SURFACE MATERIAL 4 5 MATERIALS 6 7 Natural Quartz and Resin Composite Countertops and Splashes: Non-porous blend of natural quartz, 8 93 percent, and polyester resin, 7 percent, formed into flat slabs over continuous substrate. 9 10 Flat Sheet Thickness: 13/16 inch (20mm). 11 12 Edge Detail: Flat, eased edge. 13 14 Surface Finish: Polished (Standard). 15 16 Color: 1625 Bianco Regina. 17 18 Seam width: <1/8"unless otherwise specified. 19 20 Backsplash: Applied. 21 22 Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by the following: 23 24 OKITE 25 12227 FM 529, Suite K 26 Houston, TX 77041. 27 Phone: (713)849-3800, Toll Free: (866)654-8397. 28 Fax: (713)849-3835. 29 Website: www.okite.us. 30 Email: info @okite.us. 31 32 ACCESSORIES 33 34 Joint adhesive: Manufacturer's standard one- or two-part adhesive kit to create inconspicuous, 35 nonporous joints. 36 37 Sealant: Manufacturer's standard mildew-resistant, FDA-compliant, NSF 51-compliant (food zone — 38 any type), UL-listed silicone sealant in colors matching components. 39 40 FACTORY FABRICATION 41 42 Shop assembly: Fabricate components to greatest extent practical to sizes and shapes indicated, in 43 accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer's printed instructions and technical 44 bulletins. 45 46 Form joints between components using manufacturer's standard joint adhesive without conspicuous 47 joints. 48 49 Reinforce with strip of solid polymer material, 2"wide. 50 51 Provide factory cutouts for plumbing fittings and bath accessories as indicated on the 52 drawings. 53 54 Rout and finish component edges with clean, sharp returns. 55 56 Rout cutouts, radii and contours to template. SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS GDA 06651 -4 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Smooth edges. 2 Repair or reject defective and inaccurate work. 3 4 FINISHES 5 6 Color: As indicated on the Drawings. 7 8 Finish: Provide surfaces with a uniform finish. 9 10 As indicated on the Drawings. 11 12 13 PART 3—EXECUTION 14 15 16 EXAMINATION 17 18 Examine substrates and conditions, with fabricator present for compliance with requirements for 19 installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. 20 21 Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 22 23 INSTALLATION 24 25 Install components plumb, level and rigid, scribed to adjacent finishes, in accordance with approved 26 shop drawings and product data. 27 28 Provide product in the largest pieces available. 29 30 Form field joints using manufacturer's recommended adhesive, with joints inconspicuous in 31 finished work. 32 33 Cut and finish component edges with clean, sharp returns. 34 35 Rout radii and contours to template. 36 37 Anchor securely to partition or other supports. 38 39 Align adjacent copings and form seams to comply with manufacturer's written 40 recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop. 41 42 Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches and clean entire surface. 43 44 Install copings with no more than 1/8-inch (3 mm)in 10-feet sag, or bow from a straight line. 45 46 47 REPAIR 48 49 Repair or replace damaged work which cannot be repaired to architect's satisfaction. 50 51 CLEANING AND PROTECTION 52 53 Keep components clean during installation. 54 55 Remove adhesives, sealants and other stains. 56 SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS GDA 06651 -5 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 End of Section SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS GDA 06651 -6 GDA#12018.00 December 14,2012 Issue for Permit 1 SECTION 07270- FIRESTOPS AND SMOKESEALS 2 3 4 PART 1 -GENERAL 5 6 SCOPE 7 8 The work of this Section consists of furnishing and installing firestops and smokeseals, and related 9 items, as indicated on the Drawings and/or specified herein, and includes, but is not limited to, the 10 following: 11 12 Single component, non-combustible, silicone firestop sealant or putty for the following uses: 13 14 At penetrations subject to movement, including conduit, cable, bundles, bus duct, and 15 non-combustible pipe. 16 17 At control joints of fire-rated floor assemblies, at tops of fire-rated walls (to overhead 18 construction), at voids between slab edges and curtain wall construction, etc. 19 20 As a sealant for smoke barrier construction, at fire and smoke dampers, at fire door 21 frames in fire-rated walls, etc. 22 23 Cementitious firestopping mortars for the following uses: 24 25 At non-moving penetrations such as cable trays, electrical and communication cable 26 bundles, conduit, and non-combustible sleeves and pipers. 27 28 At cavities (flute spaces) between upper beam flanges, masonry wall tops, partition track, 29 etc., and metal decks directly above. 30 31 Firestop collars for use with through penetrations involving combustible PVC/ABS pipe or 32 conduit. 33 34 Firestop pillows for use for temporary sealing of openings and penetrations of any kind which 35 need to be re-opened and re-sealed in a fast and safe manner. 36 37 Mineral fiber/ceramic fiber, non--combustible, safing insulation for use as damming material 38 for tested and rated firestop system per manufacturer's requirements. 39 40 Clips and closures as required for support and containment of dams and insulation materials. 41 42 Carefully review the Drawings to determine the many and varied conditions where fire-stopping 43 and smoke-sealing are required. 44 45 Related work: 46 47 Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General 48 Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. 49 50 Examine all Drawings and all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements therein 51 affecting the work of this trade. 52 53 Section 09260, Gypsum Wallboard System. 54 55 Section 07200, Insulation, for fire safing at the edge of elevated slabs and exterior walls. 56 57 Divisions 15 and 16. FIRESTOPS AND SMOKESEALS GDA 07270-1 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 QUALITY ASSURANCE 3 4 Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the 5 necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods 6 needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. 7 8 Work of this Section shall comply with all applicable provisions of all codes, regulations and 9 ordinances having jurisdiction. 10 11 SUBMITTALS 12 13 Product Data: Submit complete manufacturer's product data covering each type of firestop and 14 smokeseal material proposed for use. Product data shall show product characteristics, typical 15 uses, performance and limitation criteria, and test data. Include also: 16 17 Manufacturer's installation procedures for each type of product, construction,and fire 18 resistance required for the project. 19 20 Fire test reports from recognized, independent testing agent(s)indicating the following: 21 22 Fire test report of firestop material applied to substrate and penetration materials similar to 23 project conditions. Test to indicate both Flame (F)and Temperature(T) Ratings. 24 25 Test reports of products to be used shall indicate conformance to ASTM E-814. 26 27 SITE SAMPLES 28 29 Install at the site, on the work, a sample of appropriate firestopping of each different type and for 30 each different penetration and fire rating required for the work. Sample installations shall comply 31 with thickness, fire resistance ratings, and finished appearance requirements of the project and 32 the governing laws and codes. Replace as necessary until Architect's approval has been 33 obtained. Upon Architect's approval, the sample installations shall thereupon become the 34 standard of acceptance for method of application, thickness, and finished appearance of 35 subsequent firestopping and smokesealing applications, and shall remain visible at the site during 36 and until completion of the work. 37 38 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA 39 40 All materials and work shall conform to requirements of the governing laws and codes with 41 respect to fire resistant wall and floor assemblies. 42 43 Testing Requirements: All firestopping and smokesealing materials shall be tested by a 44 recognized, independent testing agency and shall conform to both Flame (F)and Temperature (T) 45 requirements of ASTM E-814, and shall: 46 47 Conform to U.L. Fire hazard Classification Requirements. 48 49 Classified non-combustible in accordance with ASTM E84. 50 51 Firestopping and smokesealing in place shall be of sufficient thickness, width, and density to 52 provide a fire resistance rating at least equal to the floor,wall, or partition construction into which it 53 is installed. 54 55 Non-combustible dams shall be constructed: 56 57 As necessary to achieve fire rating as tested and rated. FIRESTOPS AND SMOKESEALS GDA 07270-2 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 In conformance with installation requirements for type of floor, wall, and partition construction. 3 4 As recommended by firestop manufacturer. 5 6 Combustible damming material,if used, must be removed after proper curing. 7 8 COORDINATION 9 10 The work of this Section shall be coordinated with that of other trades affecting, or affected by,this 11 work, as necessary to assure the steady progress of all work under the contract. 12 13 Closely coordinate the delivery and installation of this work with the Contractor's schedule. 14 15 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 16 17 Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01640. 18 19 Deliver firestopping materials to project site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers 20 bearing proper U.L. labeling. 21 22 Store materials off the ground in an area protected from weather, moisture, an freezing, and as 23 recommended by the manufacturer. 24 25 Assure that all firestopping materials are installed prior to the expiration of shelf life. 26 27 28 PART 2- PRODUCTS 29 30 31 FIRESTOP SEALANT AND PUTTY: 32 33 Shall be single component, non-combustible, silicone elastomer firestop sealant equal to "Fire 34 Barrier Caulk CP 25N/S" and Fire Barrier Caulk CP 25S/L" (as applicable), as manufactured by 35 3M Contractor Products, , or equivalent products from Rectorseal, STI, and Hilti. 36 37 or 38 39 Shall be single component, non-combustible, water-based elastomer firestop sealant equal to 40 "Fire Barrier Caulk CP 25WB" as manufactured by 3M Contractor Products, or equivalent 41 products from Rectorseal, STI, and Hilti. 42 43 Sealant shall have U.L. Classification as a "Fill, Void, or Cavity Material" for through penetration 44 firestop system when tested in accordance with ASTM E814 and UL1479. 45 46 CEMENTITIOUS FIRESTOP MORTAR 47 48 Shall be cementitious firestop mortar equal to "Bio K-10 Mortar" as manufactured by 49 Rectorseal/Bio Fireshield Inc., or equivalent by Hilti, STI, Tremco, Rectorseal, or 3M Contractor 50 Products. 51 52 Firestop mortar shall have U.L. Classification as a "Fill, Void, or Cavity Material" for through 53 penetration firestop system when tested in accordance with ASTM E814 and UL1479. 54 55 Cementitious mortar shall be asbestos free. 56 57 FIRESTOP COLLARS (FOR USE WITH PLASTIC PIPE) FIRESTOPS AND SMOKESEALS GDA 07270-3 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 Shall be pre-manufactured fire protective pipe sleeve equal to "Bio Stop Collar" as manufactured 3 by Rectorseal/Bio Fireshield Inc., or equivalent by Hilti, STI, Tremco or 3M Contractor Products. 4 5 Provide separated, two-piece, firestop collar for application when plastic pipe system is already in 6 place. Provide non-separated firestop collar for application prior to installation of plastic pipe 7 system. 8 9 Firestop Collars shall have U.L. Classification as "Fill, Void, or Cavity Material" for through 10 penetration firestop system when tested in accordance with ASTM E814 and UL1479. 11 12 FIRESTOP PILLOWS 13 14 Shall be "Firestop Pillows", equal to "Bio Fireshield Firestop Pillows" as manufactured by 15 Rectorseal/Bio Fireshield Inc., or equivalent by Hilti, STI, Tremco or 3M Contractor Products. 16 17 Firestop pillows shall have U.L. Classification as "Fill, Void, or Cavity Material" for through 18 penetration firestop system when tested in accordance with ASTM E-814 and UL1479. 19 20 FIRE SAFING AND ACCESSORIES 21 22 Slag-Wool-Fiber Board Safinq Insulation: Semirigid boards designed for use as fire stop at openings 23 between edge of slab and exterior wall panels, produced by combining slag-wool fibers with 24 thermosetting resin binders to comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA and IB; nominal density of 4 lb/cu. ft. 25 (64 kg/cu. m); passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics; thermal resistivity of 4 deg F x h x 26 sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F (27.7 K x m/W at 24 deg C). 27 28 Material shall be classified non-combustible per ASTM E-814. 29 30 Calking Compound: Material approved by manufacturer of safing insulation for sealing joint between 31 foil backing of safing insulation and edge of concrete floor slab against penetration of smoke. 32 33 Safing Clips: Galvanized steel safing clips approved by manufacturer of safing insulation for holding 34 safing insulation in place. 35 36 Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fire safing products of one of the 37 following: 38 39 Slag-Wool-/Rock-Wool-Fiber Insulation: 40 41 FBX Safing Insulation; Fibrex Inc. 42 Partek Insulations, Inc. 43 Thermafiber; USG Interiors, Inc. 44 Firemaster Blanket; Thermal Ceramics 45 46 47 PART 3 - EXECUTION 48 49 50 INSPECTION 51 52 Examine the areas and conditions where firestops and smokeseals are to be installed and notify 53 the Architect of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not 54 proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected by the Contractor in an 55 acceptable manner. 56 57 PREPARATION FIRESTOPS AND SMOKESEALS GDA 07270-4 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 Surfaces to receive firestops and smokeseals shall be free of dirt, dust, grease, oil, form release 3 agents, or other matter that would impair the bond of the firestop or smokeseal material to the 4 substrate or penetrating items. 5 6 Voids and cracks in substrate shall be filled and unnecessary projections removed prior to 7 installation of firestops and smokeseals. 8 9 All penetrating items shall be permanently installed prior to firestop and smokeseal installation. 10 11 Substrate shall be front free and, when applicable, dry. 12 13 INSTALLATION 14 15 General: 16 17 Installation of firestops and smokeseals shall be performed by applicators/installers qualified 18 and trained by the manufacturer. Installation shall be performed in strict accordance with 19 manufacturer's detailed installation procedures and Code requirements. 20 21 Apply firestops and smokeseals in accordance with fire test reports, fire resistance 22 requirements, acceptable sample installation, and manufacturer's recommendations. 23 24 Coordinate with plumbing, mechanical, electrical, and other trades to assure that all pipe, 25 conduit, cable and other items which penetrate fire rated construction have been permanently 26 installed prior to installation of firestops and smokeseals. Schedule an sequence the work to 27 assure that partitions and other construction which would conceal penetrations are not 28 erected prior to the installation of firestops and smokeseals. 29 30 Dam Construction: 31 32 Install dams when required to properly contain firestop and smokeseal materials within 33 openings and as required to achieve required fire resistance rating. Combustible damming 34 material must be removed after appropriate curing. Incombustible damming material may be 35 left as a permanent component of the firestop and smokeseal system. 36 37 Placement of dams shall not interfere with function or adversely affect the appearance of 38 adjacent construction. 39 40 Installation of Single Component Silicone Firestop: 41 42 Apply with manual or powered caulking gun. 43 44 Apply to total thickness required for the respective hour rating involved. Apply to both sides of 45 wall penetrations; one side only in floor penetrations, as per manufacturer's instructions. 46 47 Use incombustible insulation as required to achieve fire resistance rating. 48 49 Surface of gun grade silicone firestop may be tooled using clean, potable water(as allowed by 50 manufacturer's instructions). 51 52 Clean excess material off of adjacent surfaces and tools within 10 minutes using either water 53 or XYLOL, as per manufacturer's instructions. 54 55 Installation of Cementitious Firestop Mortar: 56 FIRESTOPS AND SMOKESEALS GDA 07270-5 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Add dry powder to water and mix with mechanical mixer or hand mixing tools. All mixing 2 operations shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions, using clean, potable 3 water. Average wet density to be per manufacturer's specifications. 4 5 Do not apply if ambient or substrate temperature is less than 35 degrees F. during 24 hours 6 after application. 7 8 Wet all surfaces prior to application of firestop mortar, as required. 9 10 Mortar may be hand applied or pumped into the opening. 11 12 Exposed surfaces shall be finished using conventional plastering tools prior to curing. 13 14 When installing around layered cables, increase the fluidity of the firestop mortar per 15 manufacturer's instructions to provide a better fill around the cables. Vibrate or hand trowel at 16 the cables slightly to prevent voids from forming between the cables. 17 18 Allow 48 hours for initial cure prior to form removal. For full cure allow 28 days. 19 20 Wet material shall be cleaned per manufacturer's instructions. Dry material may require 21 scraping or chipping. 22 23 Installation of Firestop Collars (Plastic Pipe Only): 24 25 Firestop collars shall be mounted at slab or wall per manufacturer's instructions. 26 27 For wall penetrations with ABS pipe, firestop collars must be installed on both sides of the 28 penetration to provide the necessary F and T Rating. All other applications may require 29 installation on one side only to provide the necessary F and T Rating. Verify all such 30 installation requirements with collar manufacturer, to make sure results achieve the required 31 firestop rating. 32 33 FIRE STOPPING JOINT SEALERS SCHEDULE: 34 35 (FSS1) Foamed-in-place fire-stopping sealant Through penetrations in fire-resistance- 36 rated floor and wall assemblies involving 37 multiple pipes, conduits and other items. 38 39 (FSS2) One-part fire-stopping sealant Through penetrations in fire-resistance- 40 rated floor and wall assemblies involving 41 single pipes, conduits where joints widths 42 are narrow and of uniforms width. 43 44 END OF SECTION 07270 FIRESTOPS AND SMOKESEALS GDA 07270-6 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 SECTION 07901 -JOINT SEALANTS 2 3 PART 1 - GENERAL 4 5 RELATED DOCUMENTS 6 7 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and 8 Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 9 10 SUMMARY 11 12 This Section includes joint sealants for the following locations: 13 14 Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces as indicated below: 15 16 Tile control and expansion joints. 17 18 Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, windows. 19 20 Perimeter joints of toilet fixtures. 21 22 Other joints as indicated. 23 24 Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces as indicated below: 25 26 Control joints in tile flooring. 27 28 Other joints as indicated. 29 30 Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 31 32 Division 7 Section "Firestops and Smokeseals"for through-penetration firestopping systems. 33 34 Division 8"Glass and Glazing"for sealants used in glazing. 35 36 Division 9 Section "Gypsum Drywall" for sealing concealed perimeter joints of gypsum board 37 partitions to reduce sound transmission. 38 39 Division 9 Section "Acoustical Tile Ceilings" for sealing edge moldings at perimeter of acoustical 40 ceilings. 41 42 Division 9 Section "Tile"for sealing tile joints. 43 44 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 45 46 Provide elastomeric joint sealants that have been produced and installed to establish and to maintain 47 watertight and airtight continuous seals without causing staining or deterioration of joint substrates. 48 49 SUBMITTALS 50 51 General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification 52 Sections. 53 54 Product data from manufacturers for each joint sealant product required. 55 JOINT SEALANTS GDA 07901 - 1 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Certification by joint sealant manufacturer that sealants plus the primers and cleaners required 2 for sealant installation comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic 3 compounds. 4 5 Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's standard bead samples, consisting of 6 strips of actual products showing full range of colors available, for each product exposed to view. 7 8 Samples for verification purposes of each type and color of joint sealant required. Install joint sealant 9 samples in 1/2-inch-wide joints formed between two 6-inch-long strips of material matching the 10 appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. 11 12 Certificates from manufacturers of joint sealants attesting that their products comply with specification 13 requirements and are suitable for the use indicated. 14 15 Qualification data complying with requirements specified in "Quality Assurance" article. Include list of 16 completed projects with project names addresses, names of Architects and Owners, plus other 17 information specified. 18 19 Compatibility and adhesion test reports from elastomeric sealant manufacturer indicating that 20 materials forming joint substrates and joint sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and 21 adhesion with joint sealants. Include sealant manufacturer's interpretation of test results relative to 22 sealant performance and recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed to obtain 23 adhesion. 24 25 Product test reports for each type of joint sealants indicated, evidencing compliance with requirements 26 specified. 27 28 Preconstruction field test reports indicating which products and joint preparation methods demonstrate 29 acceptable adhesion to joint substrates. 30 31 QUALITY ASSURANCE 32 33 Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed joint sealant applications 34 similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project that have resulted in construction 35 with a record of successful in-service performance. 36 37 Testing Laboratory Qualifications: To qualify for acceptance, an independent testing laboratory must 38 demonstrate to Architect's satisfaction, based on evaluation of laboratory-submitted criteria 39 conforming to ASTM E 699, that it has the experience and capability to conduct satisfactorily the 40 testing indicated without delaying progress of the Work. 41 42 Single Source Responsibility for Joint Sealant Materials: Obtain joint sealant materials from a single 43 manufacturer for each different product required. 44 45 Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint sealant manufacturers samples 46 of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants for compatibility and adhesion testing as indicated 47 below: 48 49 Use test methods standard with manufacturer to determine if priming and other specific joint 50 preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint 51 substrates. 52 53 Perform tests under normal environmental conditions that will exist during actual installation. 54 55 Submit not less than 9 pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates, shims, joint 56 sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials. 57 JOINT SEALANTS GDA 07901 - 2 GDA#12018.00 December 14,2012 Issue for Permit 1 Schedule sufficient time for testing and analysis of results to prevent delay in the progress of the 2 Work. 3 4 Investigate materials failing compatibility or adhesion tests and obtain joint sealant 5 manufacturer's written recommendations for corrective measures, including use of specially 6 formulated primers. 7 8 Testing will not be required when joint sealant manufacturer is able to submit joint preparation 9 data required above that are acceptable to Architect and are based on previous testing of current 10 sealant products for adhesion to, and compatibility with, joint substrates and other materials 11 matching those submitted. 12 13 Product Testing: Provide comprehensive test data for each type of joint sealant based on tests 14 conducted by a qualified independent testing laboratory on current product formulations within a 24- 15 month period preceding date of Contractor's submittal of test results to Architect. 16 17 Test elastomeric sealants for compliance with requirements specified by reference to 18 ASTM C 920. Include test results for hardness, stain resistance, adhesion and cohesion under 19 cyclic movement (per ASTM C 719), low-temperature flexibility, modulus of elasticity at 100 20 percent strain, effects of heat aging, and effects of accelerated weathering. 21 22 Include test results performed on joint sealants after they have cured for 1 year. 23 24 Preconstruction Field Testing: Prior to installation of joint sealants, field-test their adhesion to joint 25 substrates as follows: 26 27 Locate test joints where indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 28 29 Conduct field tests for each application indicated below: 30 31 Each type of elastomeric sealant and joint substrate indicated. 32 33 Each type of non-elastomeric sealant and joint substrate indicated. 34 35 Notify Architect one week in advance of the dates and times when mock-ups will be erected. 36 37 Arrange for tests to take place with joint sealant manufacturer's technical representative present. 38 39 Test Method: Test joint sealants by hand pull method described below: 40 41 Install joint sealants in 5-feet joint lengths using same materials and methods for joint 42 preparation and joint sealant installation required for completed Work. Allow sealants to 43 cure fully before testing. 44 45 Make knife cuts horizontally from one side of joint to the other followed by 2 vertical cuts 46 approximately 2 inches long at side of joint and meeting horizontal cut at top of 2-inch cuts. 47 Place a mark 1 inch from top of 2-inch piece. 48 49 Use fingers to grasp 2-inch piece of sealant just above 1-inch mark; pull firmly down at a 90- 50 degree angle or more while holding a ruler along side of sealant. Pull sealant out of joint to 51 the distance recommended by sealant manufacturer for testing adhesive capability, but not 52 less than that equaling specified maximum movement capability in extension; hold this 53 position for 10 seconds. 54 55 Report whether or not sealant in joint connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint 56 substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of product and 57 joint substrate. JOINT SEALANTS GDA 07901 -3 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 Evaluation of Field Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing, in 3 absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, will be considered satisfactory. 4 Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing. 5 6 Field-Constructed Mock-Ups: Prior to installation of joint sealants, apply elastomeric sealants as 7 follows to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well 8 as qualities of materials and execution: 9 10 Joints in field-constructed mock-ups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated 11 to receive elastomeric joint sealants specified in this Section. 12 13 Pre-Installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of the 14 Division 1 Section covering this activity. 15 16 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING 17 18 Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating 19 manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time, and 20 mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. 21 22 Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations to prevent their 23 deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes. 24 25 PROJECT CONDITIONS 26 27 Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following 28 conditions: 29 30 When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by joint 31 sealant manufacturer. 32 33 When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by joint 34 sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C). 35 36 When joint substrates are wet. 37 38 Joint Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less 39 than allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for application indicated. 40 41 Joint Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants 42 capable of interfering with their adhesion are removed from joint substrates. 43 44 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING 45 46 Sequence installation of joint sealants to occur not less than 21 nor more than 30 days after 47 completion of waterproofing, unless otherwise indicated. 48 49 50 PART 2-PRODUCTS 51 52 MATERIALS, GENERAL 53 54 Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that are compatible with 55 one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by 56 sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 57 JOINT SEALANTS GDA 07901 -4 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealants to comply with the following: 2 3 Provide custom colors to match Architect's samples. 4 5 Match colors indicated by reference to manufacturer's standard designations. 6 7 Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors for 8 products of type indicated. 9 10 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS 11 12 Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing elastomeric 13 sealants that comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated on each Elastomeric Joint 14 Sealant Data Sheet at end of this Section, including those requirements referencing ASTM C 920 15 classifications for Type, Grade, Class, and Uses. 16 17 Additional Movement Capability: Where additional movement capability is specified in 18 Elastomeric Joint Sealant Data Sheet, provide products with the capability, when tested for 19 adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719, to withstand the 20 specified percentage change in the joint width existing at time of installation and remain in 21 compliance with other requirements of ASTM C 920 for Uses indicated. 22 23 Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified in each 24 Elastomeric Joint Sealant Data Sheet. 25 26 SOLVENT-RELEASE-CURING JOINT SEALANTS 27 28 Acrylic Sealant: Manufacturer's standard one-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing acrylic terpolymer 29 sealant complying with AAMA 808.3 or FS TT-S-00230 or both, with capability when tested for 30 adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719, to withstand the following 31 percentage change in joint width existing at time of application and remain adhered to joint substrates 32 indicated for Project without failing cohesively: 33 34 12-1/2 percent movement in both extension and compression for a total of 25 percent. 35 36 Butyl Sealant: Manufacturer's standard one-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing, polymerized butyl 37 sealant complying with ASTM C 1085 and formulated with minimum of 75 percent solids to be 38 nonstaining, paintable, and have a tack-free time of 24 hours or less. 39 40 Pigmented Narrow Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard, solvent-release-curing, pigmented 41 synthetic rubber sealant complying with AAMA 803.3 and formulated for sealing joints 3/16 inch or 42 smaller in width. 43 44 Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 45 46 Acrylic Sealant: 47 48 "60+Unicrylic," Pecora Corp. 49 "PTI 738," Protective Treatments, Inc. 50 "PTI 767," Protective Treatments, Inc. 51 "Mono,"Tremco, Inc. 52 53 Butyl Sealant: 54 55 "BC-158," Pecora Corp. 56 "PTI 757," Protective Treatments, Inc. 57 "Sonneborn Multi-Purpose Sealant," Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex, Inc. JOINT SEALANTS GDA 07901 -5 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 "Tremco Butyl Sealant,"Tremco, Inc. 2 3 Pigmented Narrow Joint Sealant: 4 5 "PTI 200," Protective Treatments, Inc. 6 7 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS 8 9 General: Provide manufacturer's standard one-part, nonsag, mildew-resistant, paintable latex sealant 10 of formulation indicated that is recommended for exposed applications on interior and protected 11 exterior locations and that accommodates indicated percentage change in joint width existing at time 12 of installation without failing either adhesively or cohesively. 13 14 Acrylic-Emulsion Sealant: Provide product complying with ASTM C 834 that accommodates joint 15 movement of not more than 5 percent in both extension and compression for a total of 10 percent. 16 17 Silicone Emulsion Sealant: Provide product complying with ASTM C 834 and, except for weight loss 18 measured per ASTM C 792, with ASTM C 920 that accommodates joint movement of not more than 19 25 percent in both extension and compression for a total of 50 percent. 20 21 Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 22 23 Acrylic-Emulsion Sealant: 24 25 "AC-20," Pecora Corp. 26 "Sonolac," Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex, Inc. 27 "Tremco Acrylic Latex 834," Tremco, Inc. 28 29 Silicone-Emulsion Sealant: 30 31 "Trade Mate Paintable Glazing Sealant," Dow Corning Corp. 32 33 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS 34 35 Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying 36 with ASTM C 834 and the following requirements: 37 38 Product is effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and 39 openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies per 40 ASTM E 90. 41 42 Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard, nondrying, nonhardening, 43 nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior 44 concealed joints to reduce transmission of airborne sound. 45 46 Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 47 48 Acoustical Sealant: 49 50 "SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant," United States Gypsum Co. 51 "AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant," Pecora Corp. 52 53 Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: 54 55 "BA-98," Pecora Corp. 56 "Tremco Acoustical Sealant,"Tremco, Inc. 57 JOINT SEALANTS GDA 07901 -6 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 TAPE SEALANTS 2 3 Tape Sealant: Manufacturer's standard, solvent-free, butyl-based tape sealant with a solids content of 4 100 percent formulated to be nonstaining, paintable, and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous 5 surfaces with or without reinforcement thread to prevent stretch and packaged on rolls with a release 6 paper on one side. 7 8 Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 9 10 "Extru-Seal Tape,"Pecora Corp. 11 "Shim-Seal Tape," Pecora Corp. 12 "PTI 606," Protective Treatments, Inc. 13 "Tremco 440 Tape,"Tremco, Inc. 14 "MBT-35,"Tremco, Inc. 15 16 PREFORMED FOAM SEALANTS 17 18 Preformed Foam Sealants: Manufacturer's standard preformed, precompressed, impregnated open- 19 cell foam sealant manufactured from high-density urethane foam impregnated with a nondrying, water 20 repellent agent; factory-produced in precompressed sizes and in roll or stick form to fit joint widths 21 indicated and to develop a watertight and airtight seal when compressed to the degree specified by 22 manufacturer; and complying with the following requirements: 23 24 Properties: Permanently elastic, mildew-resistant, nonmigratory, nonstaining, and compatible 25 with joint substrates and other joint sealants. 26 27 Impregnating Agent: Manufacturer's standard. 28 29 Density: Manufacturer's standard. 30 31 Backing: Pressure-sensitive adhesive factory applied to one side with protective wrapping. 32 33 Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 34 35 "Emseal," Emseal Corp. 36 "Emseal Greyflex," Emseal Corp. 37 "Wil-Seal 150,"Wil-Seal Construction Foams Div., Illbruck. 38 "Wil-Seal 250,"Wil-Seal Construction Foams Div., Illbruck. 39 40 JOINT SEALANT BACKING 41 42 General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint 43 substrates, sealants, primers and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by 44 sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. 45 46 Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Preformed, compressible, resilient, nonstaining, nonwaxing, nonextruding 47 strips of flexible plastic foam of material indicated below and of size, shape, and density to control 48 sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance: 49 50 Open-cell polyurethane foam. 51 52 Closed-cell polyethylene foam, nonabsorbent to liquid water and gas, nonoutgassing in 53 unruptured state. 54 55 Proprietary, reticulated, closed-cell polymeric foam, nonoutgassing, with a density of 2.5 pcf and 56 tensile strength of 35 psi per ASTM D 1623, and with water absorption less than 0.02 gms/cc per 57 ASTM C 1083. JOINT SEALANTS GDA 07901 -7 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 Any material indicated above. 3 4 Elastomeric Tubing Joint Fillers: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with 5 ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down to 6 -26 deg F (-32 deg C). Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to provide a 7 secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance. 8 9 Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by sealant 10 manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint filler materials or joint 11 surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive 12 tape where applicable. 13 14 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS 15 16 Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant 17 to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint sealant-substrate tests and field 18 tests. 19 20 Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and 21 sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming in 22 any way joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces, and formulated to promote optimum 23 adhesion of sealants with joint substrates. 24 25 Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces 26 adjacent to joints. 27 28 29 PART 3 - EXECUTION 30 31 32 EXAMINATION 33 34 Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with 35 requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint sealant 36 performance. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until unsatisfactory conditions have 37 been corrected. 38 39 PREPARATION 40 41 Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with 42 recommendations of joint sealant manufacturer and the following requirements: 43 44 Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint 45 sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for 46 sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, 47 waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt,and frost. 48 49 Clean concrete, masonry, unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile, and similar porous joint substrate 50 surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these 51 methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint 52 sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or 53 blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. 54 55 Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete. 56 JOINT SEALANTS GDA 07901 -8 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Clean metal, glass, porcelain enamel, glazed surfaces of ceramic tile, and other nonporous 2 surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave 3 residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. 4 5 Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended by joint sealant 6 manufacturer based on preconstruction joint sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer 7 to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's recommendations. Confine primers to areas of joint 8 sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. 9 Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining 10 surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning 11 methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without 12 disturbing joint seal. 13 14 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS 15 16 General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's printed installation instructions applicable to 17 products and applications indicated,except where more stringent requirements apply. 18 19 Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint 20 sealants as applicable to materials,applications, and conditions indicated. 21 22 Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 919 for use of 23 joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions 24 indicated. 25 26 Installation of Sealant Backings: Install sealant backings to comply with the following requirements: 27 Install joint fillers of type indicated to provide support of sealants during application and at 28 position required to produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative 29 to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 30 31 Do not leave gaps between ends of joint fillers. 32 33 Do not stretch,twist, puncture, or tear joint fillers. 34 35 Remove absorbent joint fillers that have become wet prior to sealant application and replace 36 with dry material. 37 Install bond breaker tape between sealants where backer rods are not used between sealants 38 and joint fillers or back of joints. 39 40 Installation of Sealants: Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly 41 contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint 42 configuration, and providing uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that 43 allow optimum sealant movement capability. Install sealants at the same time sealant backings are 44 installed. 45 46 Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time skinning or curing 47 begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated, to eliminate air 48 pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants 49 from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces 50 or are not approved by sealant manufacturer. 51 52 Provide concave ioint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. 53 Provide flush ioint configuration, per Figure 5B in ASTM C 1193, where indicated. 54 55 Use masking tape to protect adjacent surfaces of recessed tooled joints. 56 JOINT SEALANTS GDA 07901 -9 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Installation of Preformed Foam Sealants: Install each length of sealant immediately after removing 2 protective wrapping, taking care not to pull or stretch material, and to comply with sealant 3 manufacturer's directions for installation methods, materials, and tools that produce seal continuity at 4 ends, turns, and intersections of joints. For applications at low ambient temperatures where 5 expansion of sealant requires acceleration to produce seal, apply heat to sealant in conformance with 6 sealant manufacturer's recommendations. 7 8 CLEANING 9 10 Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as work progresses by methods and 11 with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints 12 occur. 13 14 PROTECTION 15 16 Protect Joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or 17 from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without 18 deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or 19 deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so that 20 and installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. JOINT SEALANTS GDA 07901 - 10 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 JOINT SEALERS SCHEDULE: 2 3 Mark Description Location 4 5 6 (ES-2) Multi-part nonsag urethane sealant. Interior joints in vertical surfaces; 7 between metal and concrete, or mortar; 8 interior and exterior perimeter joints of 9 metal frames in exterior walls; and 10 exterior overhead joints. 11 12 (LS) Acrylic-emulsion sealant Interior joints in field-painted vertical and 13 overhead surfaces at perimeter of hollow 14 metal door frames; in gypsum drywall, 15 plaster and concrete or concrete 16 masonry; and all other interior joints not 17 indicated otherwise. 18 19 NOTE: Install joint sealer indicated in joints fitting descriptions and locations listed as well as in 20 locations identified on Drawings by Drawing designations indicated above. 21 JOINT SEALANTS GDA 07901 - 11 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANT DATA SHEET 2 3 Elastomeric Joint Sealant Designation: ES-1 4 5 Base Polymer: Neutral-curing silicone. 6 7 Type: S (single component). 8 9 Grade: NS (nonsag). 10 11 Class: 25. 12 13 Use(sI Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 14 15 Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. 16 17 Use 0 Joint Substrates: Coated glass, anodized aluminum, galvanized steel, and ceramic tile. 18 Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 19 20 One-Part Nonacid-Curing Silicone Sealant: 21 22 "Silpruf SCS 2000"; General Electric Co. 23 "864"; Pecora Corp. 24 "Spectrum 2"; Tremco, Inc. 25 "Dow Corning 795'; Dow Corning Corp. 26 "Omniseal"; Sonneborn Building Products Div., Rexnord Chemical Products Inc. 27 28 Elastomeric Joint Sealant Designation: ES-2. 29 30 Base Polymer: Urethane. 31 32 Type: M (multicomponent). 33 34 Grade: NS (nonsag). 35 36 Class: 25. 37 38 Usefsl Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 39 40 Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. 41 42 Use 0 Joint Substrates: Anodized aluminum, and galvanized steel. 43 44 Multi-Part Nonsaq Urethane Sealant: 45 46 "Vulkem 227"; Mameco International, Inc. 47 "Dualthane"; W.R. Meadows. 48 "Dynatrol II"; Pecora Corp. 49 "Sikaflex-2c NS"; Sika Corp. 50 "Sonolastic NP 2"; Sonneborn Building Products Div., Rexnord Chemical Products Inc. 51 "Dymeric"; Tremco Inc. 52 JOINT SEALANTS GDA 07901 - 12 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Elastomeric Joint Sealant Designation: ES-3. 2 3 Base Polymer: Urethane. 4 5 Type: M (multicomponent). 6 7 Grade: P (pourable). 8 9 Class: 25. 10 11 Use[s] Related to Exposure: T(traffic). 12 13 Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M. 14 15 Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 16 17 Multi-Part, Pourable, Urethane Sealant: 18 19 "Vulkem 245"; Mameco International, Inc. 20 "Pourthane"; W.R. Meadows, Inc. 21 "NR-200 Urexpan"; Pecora Corp. 22 "Sikaflex 2c Sr; Sika Corp. 23 "Sonolastic SL 2"; Sonneborn Building Products Div., Rexnord Chemical Products Inc. 24 "THC-900"; Tremco Inc. 25 26 27 END OF SECTION 07901 JOINT SEALANTS GDA 07901 - 13 GDA#12018.00 December 14,2012 Issue for Permit 1 SECTION 08110-STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 2 3 4 PART 1 -GENERAL 5 6 7 RELATED DOCUMENTS: 8 9 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and 10 Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 11 12 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 13 14 Extent of standard steel doors and frames is indicated and scheduled on drawings. 15 16 All exterior wall locations 17 Some interior locations, doors only 18 19 Extent of standard steel window frames is indicated and scheduled on drawings. 20 21 Related Work: 22 23 Knock-down steel frames for interior applications are specified elsewhere in Division-8. 24 25 Builder's hardware is specified elsewhere in Division-8. 26 27 QUALITY ASSURANCE: 28 29 Provide doors and frames complying with Steel Door Institute "Recommended Specifications: 30 Standard Steel Doors and Frames" (SDI-100)and as herein specified. 31 32 SUBMITTALS: 33 34 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data substantiating that products comply with 35 requirements. 36 37 Shop Drawings: Submit for fabrication and installation of steel doors and frames. Include details of 38 each frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at openings, details of construction, 39 location and installation requirements of finish hardware and reinforcements, and details of joints and 40 connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. 41 42 Provide schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and 43 openings as those on contract drawings. 44 45 Indicate coordinate of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements. 46 47 Provide schedule of window frames using same reference numbers for details and openings 48 as those on contract drawings. 49 50 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: 51 52 Deliver hollow metal work cartoned or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. 53 Provide additional sealed plastic wrapping for factory-finished doors. 54 55 Inspect metal work upon delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished 56 items are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to Architect; otherwise, remove and 57 replace damaged items as directed. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES GDA 08110- 1 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4" high wood blocking. 3 Avoid use of non-vented plastic or canvas shelters which could create humidity chamber. If cardboard 4 wrapper on door becomes wet, remove carton immediately. Provide 1/4" spaces between stacked 5 doors to promote air circulation. 6 7 WARRANTY: 8 9 Provide manufacturers standard warranty. 10 11 12 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 13 14 15 Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 16 Steel Doors and Frames: 17 18 Amweld Building Products, LLC. 19 Ceco Door Products; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company. 20 CURRIES Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company. 21 Deansteel Manufacturing, Inc. 22 Republic Builders Products Company. 23 Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand Company. 24 25 MATERIALS: 26 27 Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: Commercial quality carbon steel, complying with ASTM A 366 and ASTM A 28 568. 29 30 Galvanized Steel Sheets: Zinc-coated carbon steel sheets of commercial quality, complying with 31 ASTM A 526, with ASTM A 525, G60 zinc coating, mill phosphatized. 32 33 Supports and Anchors: Fabricate of not less than 18-gage galvanized sheet steel. 34 35 Inserts, Bolts and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units, except hot-dip galvanize items to be built 36 into exterior walls, complying with ASTM A 153, Class C or D as applicable. 37 38 Shop Applied Paint: 39 40 Primer: Rust-inhibitive enamel or paint, either air-drying or baking, suitable as a base for specified 41 finish paints. 42 43 DOORS 44 45 Steel Doors: Provide 1-3/4-inch- (44-mm- thick doors of materials and ANSI/SDI 100 grades 46 and models specified below, and as indicated on Drawings or schedules: 47 48 Interior Doors: Grade II, heavy-duty, Model 2, seamless design, minimum 0.0478-inch- (1.2-mm- 49 thick cold-rolled steel sheet faces. 50 51 Exterior Doors: Grade III, extra heavy-duty, Model 2, seamless design, minimum 0.0635-inch- 52 thick galvanized steel sheet faces, insulated core. 53 54 Fabricate joints at edges of doors continuously welded automatically by the gas shielded method 55 arc process.Arc welding and filling seams is not acceptable. 56 57 FRAMES STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES GDA 08110 - 2 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 Provide metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other openings, 3 according to ANSI/SDI 100, and of types and styles as shown on Drawings and schedules. 4 Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated. 5 6 Fabricate frames with mitered corners, full throat welded construction for exterior applications 7 and where indicated by Schedule for some interior doors. 8 9 Fabricate frames with mitered corners, and knocked-down for field assembly at interior 10 applications. 11 12 Form exterior frames from 0.0635-inch- (1.6-mm-)thick galvanized steel sheet. 13 14 STANDARD STEEL FRAMES: 15 16 Provide metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, windows and other openings, of 17 types and styles as shown on drawings and schedules. Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise 18 indicated. 19 20 FABRICATION, GENERAL: 21 22 Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects, warp or 23 buckle. Wherever practicable, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work 24 that cannot be permanently factory-assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at project 25 site. Comply with SDI-100 requirements as follows. 26 27 Internal Construction: One of the following manufacturer's standard core materials according to 28 SDI standards: 29 30 Rigid polyurethane conforming to ASTM C 591, at exterior door locations. 31 32 Clearances: Not more than 118 inch (3.2 mm) at jambs and heads, except not more than "11 nc` 33 (6.4 mm) between non-fire-rated pairs of doors. Not more than 3/4 inch (19 mm)at bottom. 34 35 Fire Doors: Provide clearances according to NFPA 80. 36 37 Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and rails of nonflush units, from only 38 cold-rolled steel. 39 40 Fabricate frames, concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, and moldings from either cold- 41 rolled or hot-rolled steel (at fabricator's option). 42 43 Fabricate exterior doors, panels, and frames from galvanized sheet steel. Close top and bottom 44 edges of exterior doors as integral part of door construction or by addition of minumum 16-gage 45 inverted steel channels. 46 47 Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat Phillips heads for exposed 48 screws and bolts. 49 50 Finish Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed finish 51 hardware in accordance with final Finish Hardware Schedule and templates provided by hardware 52 supplier. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI A115 series specifications for door and frame 53 preparation for hardware. 54 55 Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface- 56 applied finish hardware may be done at project site. 57 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES GDA08110-3 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Locate finish hardware as shown on final shop drawings or, if not indicated, in accordance with 2 "Recommended Locations for Builder's Hardware," published by Door and Hardware Institute. 3 4 Shop Painting: 5 6 Clean, treat, and paint exposed surfaces of steel door and frame units, including galvanized surfaces. 7 8 Clean steel surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil, grease, dirt, and other foreign materials before application 9 of paint. 10 11 Apply shop coat of prime paint of even consistency to provide a uniformly finished surface ready to 12 receive finish paint. 13 14 15 PART 3- EXECUTION 16 17 18 INSTALLATION: 19 20 General: Install standard steel doors, frames, and accessories in accordance with final shop 21 drawings, manufacturer's data, and as herein specified. 22 23 Placing Frames: Comply with provisions of SDI-105 "Recommended Erection Instructions For Steel 24 Frames", unless otherwise indicated. 25 26 Except for frames located at in-place concrete or masonry and at drywall installations, place 27 frames prior to construction of enclosing walls and ceilings. Set frames accurately in position, 28 plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall 29 construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders leaving surfaces smooth 30 and undamaged. 31 32 In masonry construction, install at least 3 wall anchors per jamb adjacent to hinge location on 33 hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Acceptable anchors include 34 masonry wire anchors and masonry T-shaped anchors. Fill jamb with grout. Coat inside of 35 metal frames with biuminous paint if mortar antifreeze is used. 36 37 At in-place concrete or masonry construction, set frames and secure to adjacent construction 38 with machine screws and masonry anchorage devices. 39 40 Install fire-rated frames in accordance with NFPA Std. No. 80. 41 42 In metal stud partitions, install at least 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels. In 43 open steel stud partitions, place studs in wall anchor notches and wire tie. In closed steel 44 stud partitions, attach wall anchors to studs with tapping screws. 45 46 Door Installation: 47 48 Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames,within clearances specified in SDI-100. 49 50 Place fire-rated doors with clearances as specified in NFPA Standard No. 80. 51 52 ADJUST AND CLEAN: 53 54 Prime Coat Touch-up: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of 55 prime coat and apply touch-up of compatible air-drying primer. 56 57 Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating finish hardware items, leaving steel doors and STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES GDA 08110 -4 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 frames undamaged and in complete and proper operating condition. 2 3 4 END OF SECTION 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES GDA08110-5 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 SECTION 08120 - INTERIOR ALUMINUM DOOR AND WINDOW FRAMES AND TRIM 2 3 PART 1 - GENERAL 4 5 6 DESCRIPTION OF WORK 7 8 Work included: 9 10 As Base Bid, provide all work required for complete prefinished, prefabricated, extruded 11 aluminum door and window frames for interior use. 12 13 RELATED SECTIONS: 14 15 Section 01030—Alternates 16 17 Hollow metal doors and frames are specified in another Division 8 Section. 18 19 Aluminum doors are specified in another Division 8 Section. 20 21 Aluminum storefront and entrance doors are specified in another Division 8 Section. 22 23 Wood doors are specified in another Division 8 Section. 24 25 Door hardware is specified in another Division 8 Section. 26 27 Glass and Glazing are specified in another Division 8 Section. 28 29 SUBMITTALS: 30 31 Shop Drawings: Supplier shall submit drawings showing all standard installation details as they may 32 apply to typical architectural details furnished in the contract documents by the owner's 33 representative for this project. Details for special conditions or custom building construction and 34 associated with the work of other contractors shall be submitted for record purposes as the approved 35 method of installation. 36 37 Manufacturer's Data: Submit copies of manufacturer's data for fabrication and installation of 38 aluminum door and window frames. 39 40 QUALITY ASSURANCE: 41 42 General: Provide aluminum door and window frames fabricated by a single firm specializing in the 43 production of this type of work for a minimum of five years. 44 45 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: 46 47 Deliver frames in cartons to provide protection during transit and job storage. 48 49 Inspect frames upon delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided the finish 50 items are equal in all respects to new units. 51 52 Store frames at the building site under cover. Avoid the use of coverings that would contribute 53 to discoloration of the finish. 54 55 PROJECT CONDITIONS: 56 57 Environmental Conditions: Temperature and humidity conditions within the building shall be INTERIOR ALUMINUM DOOR AND WINDOW FRAMES AND TRIM 08120 -1 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 maintained as close as possible to final occupancy standards. When required, heat and ventilation 2 shall be furnished by the general contractor at no expense to the installation contractor. Installation 3 will not begin until the building's exterior provides complete protection from weather elements that 4 may be damaging to the finished product. Storage areas shall be provided as near as possible to 5 the point of installation by the general contractor. The general contractor shall furnish hoisting 6 facilities and an equipment operator at no expense to the installation contractor. 7 8 9 PART 2-PRODUCTS 10 11 12 MANUFACTURER 13 14 Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide interior aluminum door and window 15 frames by the following: 16 17 Aluminum Frames, (General): 18 19 ConceptWall 20 Frameworks Manufacturing 21 Wilson Partitions 22 Or Architect approved equivalent. 23 24 MATERIALS: 25 26 Aluminum Extrusions: All component shapes shall be extruded from controlled alloy billets of 6063- 27 T5 to assure compliance with tight dimensional tolerances and maintain color uniformity. 28 29 Sightline: 2-inch. 30 31 Electrified Door Frames: 32 33 At Contractor's option, all frames receiving electrified hardware with factory-installed 34 common quick connect connectors on each end of wiring harness to accommodate up to 35 twelve wires. 36 37 Coordinate common quick connect on each end of the wiring harness to plug directly into 38 the electrified hardware and the electric hinge. 39 40 Basis of Design: ElectroLynx, a factory-installed quick connect system manufactured by 41 Ceco&Curries. 42 43 FINISHES 44 45 General: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual"for recommendations relative to application 46 and designations of finishes. 47 48 Finish designations prefixed by "AA" conform to the system established by the Aluminum 49 Association for designating aluminum finishes. 50 51 Class II, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A31 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated; 52 Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class II, clear coating 0.010 53 mm or thicker)complying with AAMA 611. 54 55 56 PART 3-EXECUTION 57 INTERIOR ALUMINUM DOOR AND WINDOW FRAMES AND TRIM 08120-2 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 INSTALLATION: 3 4 All products shall be furnished and installed by installers employing skilled craftsmen supervised by 5 personnel familiar with commercial applications and building codes. 6 7 The installer shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and misc. accessories necessary to 8 complete the installation of door and window frames, aluminum framing components, and glass 9 framing members. 10 11 The design of the framing members shall provide for direct attachments to standard commercial 12 drywall partitions. Door and window frames combined with additional components provide for the 13 acceptance of wood and glass doors, window units and various other architectural abutments to 14 base building construction. These components will maintain design and physically integrity 15 throughout the entire building. 16 17 Door and window frames shall be installed plumb and square. Jambs are pre-machined and 18 factory prepared for hardware as specified with concealed reinforcement plates, drilled and 19 tapped as required and fastened within the frame with concealed screws. Corner reinforcement 20 and alignment clips are furnished for precise installation in either butt joints or mitered 21 connections. Frames shall be anchored in accordance with manufacturer's standard installation 22 instructions. 23 24 Fasteners: shall be of basic metal and alloy, matching finished color and texture as the metal 25 being fastened, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use exposed fasteners, except where 26 indicated on approved shop drawings. 27 28 Cleaning 29 30 Clean exposed surfaces promptly after installation. Protect frames through the remainder of the 31 construction period, to ensure that they will be without damage or deterioration at the time of 32 acceptance. 33 34 35 END OF SECTION 08120 INTERIOR ALUMINUM DOOR AND WINDOW FRAMES AND TRIM 08120-3 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 SECTION 08121 — INTERIOR ALUMINUM DOORS 2 3 PART 1 —GENERAL 4 5 6 SUMMARY 7 8 Section includes: 9 10 Aluminum Doors for interior installation 11 12 Re lated Sections: 13 14 Hollow metal doors and frames are specified in another Division 8 Section. 15 Aluminum door frames and sidelight frames are specified in another Division 8 Section. 16 Wood doors are specified in another Division 8 Section. 17 Door hardware is specified in another Division 8 Section. 18 Glass and Glazing are specified in another Division 8 Section. 19 20 REFERENCES 21 22 American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA) 23 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 24 Aluminum Association(AA) 25 26 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 27 28 General: In addition to requirements shown or specified, comply with: 29 30 Applicable provisions of AAMA Aluminum Storefront and Entrance Manual for design, 31 materials, fabrication and installation of component parts. 32 33 Desiqn Requirements: Wilson MS362 Series Medium Stile door is a single source package of door, 34 doorframe and hardware that is engineered for moderate to high traffic. 35 36 Performance Requirements: Each assembly tested by a recognized testing laboratory or agency in 37 accordance with specified test methods. 38 39 Tested by the dual moment corner joint strength test. 40 41 Air infiltration tested in accordance with ASTM E283 (offset pivot or butt hung entrances). 42 43 Water penetration tested in accordance with ASTM E 331 (offset pivot or butt hung entrances). 44 45 Structural uniform load tested in accordance with ASTM E 330. 46 47 QUALITY ASSURANCE 48 49 Single Source Responsibility: INTERIOR ALUMINUM DOORS GDA 08121 - 1 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 Obtain entrances, office fronts, window walls, windows and finish through one source from a 3 single manufacturer. 4 5 Provide test reports from AAMA accredited laboratories certifying the performances as specified in 6 "System Description." 7 8 WARRANTY 9 10 Door warranted against failure and/or deterioration of metals due to manufacturing process for a 11 period of two (2)years. 12 13 14 PART 2 — PRODUCTS 15 16 17 MANUFACTURERS 18 19 Acceptable Manufacturers: 20 21 Wilson Partitions, 2301 East Vernon Avenue, Vernon, CA. 22 Telephone 323-908-5430, Fax 323-908-5451 23 60 Bonner Street Stamford, CT 24 Telephone 203-316-8033, Fax 203-316-0019 25 26 Or acceptable equivalent from the following: 27 28 ConceptWall 29 Frameworks Manufacturing 30 Or Architect approved equivalent. 31 32 Acceptable Products Basis of Design: 33 34 Wilson Partitions MS362 Series, Medium Stile Door 1-3/4". 35 36 Vertical Stiles: 3-1/2 inches. 37 Top Rail: 3-5/8 inches. 38 Bottom Rail: 6 11/16 inches. 39 Glazing Stops: Square snap-in type for 1/4"glass infill. 40 41 Major portions of the door stiles a nominal .125 inches and glass stops .050 inches thick. 42 43 MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES 44 45 Door Members: Extruded 6063-T5 aluminum alloy (ASTM B221-Alloy G.S. 10a T5). 46 47 Screws, Fastening Devices, and Internal Components: Aluminum, stainless steel, or zinc plated steel 48 in accordance with ASTM A-164. Shall be aluminum or steel, providing the steel is properly isolated 49 from aluminum. INTERIOR ALUMINUM DOORS GDA 08121 - 2 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 Glazing Gasket(compression-type design). 3 4 HARDWARE 5 6 Hardware fabrication by the door manufacturer, and include the following standard hardware (as 7 selected). 8 9 Typical Door Hardware 10 11 Weather Stripping: Hard-backed poly pile in door and/or frame. Meeting stile of all pair of 12 doors has a double line hard-backed poly-pile astragal. 13 14 Pivots: Offset. 15 16 Pivots on non-fire rated doors: Where indicated as"Pivots", provide the following: 17 18 Product/Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide 19 products by one of the following: 20 21 Top Pivot: 22 23 P1; Glynn-Johnson Corp. 24 OP440/75120; Dorma Door Controls Inc. 25 0875/280AC; Dor-O-Matic 26 117/180; Rixson 27 28 Intermediate Pivot: Provide for doors over 7'-6"high. 29 30 P3; Glynn-Johnson Corp. 31 OP440/75220; Dorma Door Controls Inc. 32 0875/019AC; Dor-O-Matic 33 117/M19; Rixson 34 35 Bottom Pivot: 36 37 P2; Glynn-Johnson Corp. 38 OP440/75320; Dorma Door Controls Inc. 39 0875/220A/870; Dor-O-Matic 40 117; Rixson 41 42 Closers: Concealed in door. 43 44 Product/Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the 45 following: 46 47 Concealed Overhead Closers: 48 49 2030; LCN, Div. Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware Group. 50 51 Push Bar/Pull Set: 52 INTERIOR ALUMINUM DOORS GDA 08121 -3 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Product/Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by 2 one of the following: 3 4 Push Bar/Pull Sets: 5 6 2923 x 33" Builders Brass Works Corp. 7 536B x 1081 LBP 33"; Hiawatha, Inc. 8 No.482 x 33"; Quality Hardware Mfg. Co., Inc.; Div. Newman Tonks, Inc. 9 1731 x 33"; Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company(Trimco). 10 11 Access Controlled Door: In addition to the typical door hardware indicated above, provide the following 12 where indicated: 13 14 Electric Release: Electric strike. 15 16 Automatic Activation—Inside Approach (Egress): 17 18 Motion Sensors: Shall be the a self-contained, K-band-frequency, microwave-scanner 19 unit; achieving both a narrow or wide sensing pattern, adjustable to provide detection 20 field sizes and functions required by ANSI/BHMA A156.10. 21 22 Motion Sensors to offer three motion detection actions; bi-directional, uni- 23 directional, and uni-MTF detection. 24 25 Push Plate: Hard wired, 4-1/2 inch square stainless steel push plate switches 26 engraved with "Push to Open"with a blue handicap logo. 27 28 Knowing Act Activation—Outside Approach (Ingress): 29 30 Card Reader: Card Reader: Ingress opening function shall be operated by Owner 31 provided card reader device. Strike manufacturer shall provide all required interface 32 controllers. 33 34 FINISH 35 36 Finish all exposed areas of aluminum and components as indicated. 37 38 An Architectural Class I anodic coating conforming to AA-M12C22A31/AA-M12C22A41. 39 40 Anodize finish color shall be#11 Clear 41 42 DOOR FABRICATION 43 44 Stiles and rails shall be tubular sections accurately joined, flush and hairline at corners with heavy 45 concealed reinforcement brackets secured with machine bolts, with optional MIG weld. Exposed 46 screws not permitted. 47 48 Each door leaf equipped with an adjusting mechanism, located in the top rail near the lock stile. 49 50 Prepare internal reinforcement for door hardware. 51 52 Custom hardware templates and physical hardware must be submitted prior to any fabrication. INTERIOR ALUMINUM DOORS GDA 08121 -4 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 3 PART 3—EXECUTION 4 5 6 EXAMINATIONS 7 8 Examine conditions and verify substrate conditions are acceptable for product installation. 9 10 INSTALLATION 11 12 Install in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturers installation instructions. 13 14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 15 16 Make all necessary final adjustments to attain normal operation of each door and its mechanical 17 hardware. 18 19 20 END OF SECTION INTERIOR ALUMINUM DOORS GDA 08121 -5 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 SECTION 08125- PREFINISHED STEEL DOOR FRAMES 2 3 PART 1 -GENERAL 4 Work Included 5 The work under this section shall include the furnishing of all items shown on the drawings and as 6 specified, including but not limited to, the following: 7 Knocked down, site assembled pre-finished steel door frames 8 Knocked down, site assembled sidelight, borrowed light, transom, and fullbound access door 9 frames 10 Related Sections 11 Section 01030—Alternates 12 Section 01040— Project Coordination 13 Section 01600—Materials and Equipment 14 Section 08110—Steel Doors and Frames 15 Section 08212 — Flush Wood Doors 16 Section 08410—Aluminum Storefronts and Entrances 17 Section 08710— Finish Hardware 18 Section 08800—Glass and Glazing 19 References 20 ASTM A1008M —Standard for cold rolled steel material 21 UBC 7-2-97, UBC 7-4-97 Positive Pressure Fire Test Certification. 22 UL 10B Fire test of Door Assemblies and UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door 23 Assemblies 24 NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows(Latest Edition) 25 NFPA-101 - Life Safety Codes (Latest Edition) 26 ASTM D2197-Standard Test Method for Adhesion of Organic Coatings by Scrape Adhesion. 27 ASTM D2247- Practice for Testing Water Resistance of Coatings in 100% Relative Humidity. 28 ASTM D2794 -Standard Test Method for Resistance of Organic Coatings to the Effects of Rapid 29 Deformation (Impact). 30 ASTM D3361 -Standard Practice for Unfiltered Open-Flame Carbon-Arc exposures of Paint and 31 Related Coatings. 32 ASTM B117—Standard test for salt spray testing 33 Submittals 34 Section 01340: Submittal procedures. 35 Product Data: Indicate frame material, gage, configuration and finishes. 36 Shop Drawings: Indicate frame elevations, details of frame anchorage, reinforcements required, rough 37 opening requirements, location of hardware embosses, and finishes. Detail each floor of the building 38 separately. 39 Samples: Submit one 12"long standard frame sample, illustrating factory finished frame color. PREFINISHED STEEL DOOR FRAMES GDA 08125- 1 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Provide installation instructions for all products under this 2 section. 3 Manufacturer's Certificate of Warranty: Provide manufacturer's standard warranty certificate stating 4 material is warranted for a period of one year from date of building occupancy 5 Quality Assurance 6 Quality Standards 7 Material free from defects in material and according to project specifications for pre- 8 engineered opening systems 9 Proven durability of factory finishes allowing for bending and shaping of material after finish is 10 applied 11 Fire Rated Frame Construction 12 Conform to ASTM E152, NFPA 252, UL 10B and 10C. 13 Installed Frame Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 14 Use only installers familiar with installation of pre-finished opening systems and applied casing 15 frame installation 16 Delivery, Storage and Handling 17 Section 01600: Transport, handle, store, and protect products in a dry area off the ground. 18 Accept frames on site in manufacturer's box packaging with identification labels intact. Inspect for 19 damage. 20 Do not open individual boxes until installation is to begin. 21 22 PART 2—PRODUCTS 23 24 Acceptable Manufacturers 25 Timely Industries, A Division of SDS Industries, Inc., 10241 Norris Avenue, Pacoima, CA, 26 91331-2292; 27 Phone toll free: 800-247-6242; 28 Fax: 818-492-3530. 29 Web site:www.timelyframes.com. 30 Frames: Provide all interior frames for project from same manufacturer. Provide exterior frames as 31 shown on plans 32 Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 33 Frames 34 Frame Material: Cold rolled steel, typical. Electro galvanized steel for all frames used in the following 35 locations: 36 Public and Private Restrooms 37 Frame Throat Opening: As shown on plan details to suit finished wall thickness. 38 Fire rated frames and Office Entry frames to be CK series with kerf formed into frame profile with 39 factory installed, pre-mitered smoke/sound control gasket. 40 Frame Profile- Unequal Rabbet profile, standard with manufacturer. PREFINISHED STEEL DOOR FRAMES GDA 08125-2 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 "C"Series, 1.2 mm (18 gage)thick, other areas, non standard jamb depths. 2 "CK"Series, 1.2 mm (18 gage)thick, with kerf for door seal/gasket. 3 Side Light/Borrowed Light Frames: 1.2 mm (18 gage)thick. 4 Casings 5 Provide aluminum casings formed to be applied to heat treated clips on frame face after frame 6 is anchored to wall 7 Aluminum no reveal —TA-28M full 2" face profile with manufacturer's standard TA-24 corner 8 alignment clips 9 Frame Reinforcement and Accessories 10 Provide reinforcements shipped loose to project site for hardware application. 11 TA-10 - Regular arm closers, casing mounted coordinators. 12 TA-12-Parallel arm closers, Rim Exit device strikes, other stop mounted surface hardware. 13 TA-47 — For CK frame, Parallel arm closers, Rim Exit device strikes, other stop mounted 14 surface hardware. 15 Provide hinge reinforcement (TA-11) of 14 gage steel pierced to create depth of thread for 16 hinge screws equal to or exceeding 7 gage steel. 17 Weatherstrip/Smoke Gasket: TA-46 (QDS500) 90 minute rated gasket for kerfed frames. All pieces 18 factory mitered to assure perfect corner alignment. 19 Color: Grey 20 Silencers: TA-5 vinyl, 2 per frame, clear stick-on type. Silencers not required on Kerfed frames or 21 frames scheduled to receive stop mounted gasket or weatherstrip. 22 Glass Stops: TA-14 removable rolled steel, shape, butted ends. Pre-punch and countersink for flat 23 head TEK screws. 24 Adjustable strikes: Emboss frames for TA-1 strike for cylindrical lock. Provide TA-1 strike in finish 25 compatible with hardware finish. 26 Prepare frames for ASA 4-7/8"strikes where required. Provide minimum '/4" depth of threads in factory 27 tapped screw holes. 28 Installation fasteners: 29 Interior Frames: #6 Drywall type, length sufficient to penetrate studs or structure at least 1/2". 30 Fabrication 31 Openings for single swing, pair, borrowed light and sidelight frames to be pre-cut, notched and 32 fabricated at the manufacturer's facility. For fire rated and exterior openings, provide kerf at stop for 33 installation of smoke gasket or weatherstrip 34 Provide minimum 14 gage hinge reinforcement plate tapped for machine screws supplied with hinges. 35 Hinge plate to be mechanically attached to hinge emboss on frame 36 Casing Clips: Fabricate frames with factory applied, heat treated clips to ensure no deflection in the 37 clip upon application or removal of casing. Attachment clips may not be of same material as 38 frame 39 Provide notches,tabs and/or stops for positive alignment of frame parts at all corners. 40 Mullions to be notched as required to provide tight joints. 41 Provide manufacturer's standard mullion brackets for positive connection of frame and mullion parts. PREFINISHED STEEL DOOR FRAMES GDA 08125-3 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Provide manufacturer's standard steel glass stop pre-cut to exact length. Fire rated glazed openings 2 to have hole for installation screw within 2"of each end of stop piece. 3 Provide insert channel full width of borrowed lights installed on finish floor. Provide full width head 4 channel for ceiling height units. 5 Provide adequate structural support(by others)for ceiling insert channel for ceiling height frames. 6 Transom bars to be fixed type with compatible profiles to jamb and head. 7 Attach approved mylar label to each fire-rated frame indicating fire rating details. 8 Factory install TA-46 smoke gasket on all pre-finished, CK series frames. Install with factory mitered 9 corners to ensure adequate seal and pleasing appearance. 10 Finishing 11 Frame Units: Pre-finished with factory applied impact resistant, polyester baked enamel finish or 12 optional electrostatic applied water based paint system. 13 Casing Finishes 14 Steel: Prefinished with factory applied impact resistant, polyester baked enamel finish. 15 16 Colors:Alumatone (SC108). 17 18 Aluminum: Clear anodized for matching with Alumatone(SC108)paint finished frames 19 20 PART 3—EXECUTION 21 22 Examination 23 Verify acceptability of existing conditions before starting work. 24 Verify that opening sizes and wall thicknesses are within specified tolerances. Verify that all finished 25 walls are in plane to ensure proper door alignment. 26 Installation 27 Install frames in accordance with manufacturer's requirements. 28 Anchor frames with screws located at every casing clip or every 11" as shown on manufacturer's 29 instructions. Field verify quantity and location of fasteners prior to installing casing. 30 Install Pre-finished frames near end of the project after wall painting and wall coverings are applied. 31 Install frames using qualified installers familiar with installation of pre-finished drywall frames. 32 Coordinate installation of glass and glazing in glazed units. 33 Coordinate installation of frames with installation of hardware specified in Section 08710 and doors in 34 Section 08212. 35 Touch-up blemishes on finished frames with factory prepared touch up paint. 36 37 END OF SECTION PREFINISHED STEEL DOOR FRAMES GDA 08125-4 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 SECTION 08212 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS 2 3 4 PART 1 - GENERAL 5 6 7 RELATED DOCUMENTS: 8 9 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and 10 Division-1 Specification sections, apply to of this section. 11 12 SUMMARY: 13 14 Extent and location of each type of flush wood door is indicated on drawings and in schedules. 15 16 Types of doors required include the following: 17 18 Solid core flush wood doors with wood veneer faces. 19 20 Factory-finishing of flush wood doors is included in this section. 21 22 Factory-prefittinq to frames and factory-pre-machining for hardware for wood doors is included in this 23 section. 24 25 Metal door frames for flush wood doors are specified in a Division-8 section. 26 27 SUBMITTALS: 28 29 Product Data: Door manufacturer's technical data for each type of door, including details of core and 30 edge construction, trim for openings and louvers, and factory-finishing specifications. 31 32 Testing Data: 33 34 Interior Doors: 35 36 Water resistant bond for Type II doors. 37 38 Warp: NWMA I.S. 1-69. 39 40 Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating location and size of each door, elevation of each 41 kind of door, details of construction, location and extent of hardware blocking, fire ratings, 42 requirements for factory finishing and other pertinent data. 43 44 For factory-pre-machined doors, indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts for locksets and 45 other cutouts adjacent to light and louver openings. 46 47 Samples for Initial Selection: Color charts consisting of actual materials in small sections for the 48 following: 49 50 Faces of factory-finished doors with transparent finish. Show the full range of colors available 51 for stained and no stain finishes. 52 53 Samples for Verification: As follows: 54 55 Corner sections of doors approximately 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm) with door faces and 56 edgings representing the typical range of color and grain for each species of veneer and solid 57 lumber required. Finish sample with same materials proposed for factory-finished doors. FLUSH WOOD DOORS GDA 08212-1 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 QUALITY ASSURANCE: 3 4 Quality Standards: Comply with the following standards: 5 6 NWWDA Quality Standard: I.S.1 "Industry Standard for Wood Flush Doors", of National 7 Wood Window and Door Association (NWWDA). 8 9 AWI Quality Standards: "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards", including Section 1300 10 "Architectural Flush Doors", of Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) for grade of door, core 11 construction, finish and other requirements exceeding those of NWWDS quality standard. 12 13 NWWDA Quality Marking: Mark each wood door with NWWDA Wood Flush Door Certification 14 Hallmark certifying compliance with applicable requirements of NWWDA I.S. 1 Series. 15 16 Identify each door with a label or mark for construction and manufacturer. Place label in an 17 non visible location. 18 19 Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Provide wood doors which are identical in materials and construction to units 20 tested in door and frame assemblies per ASTM E 152 and which are labeled and listed for ratings 21 indicated by UL, Warnock Hersey or other testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities 22 having jurisdiction. 23 24 Manufacturer: Obtain doors from a single manufacturer. 25 26 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: 27 28 Protect doors during transit, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration. 29 Comply with requirements of referenced standards and recommendations of NWWDA pamphlet "How 30 to Store, Handle, Finish, Install, and Maintain Wood Doors", as well as with manufacturer's 31 instructions. 32 33 Identify each door with individual opening numbers which correlate with designation system used on 34 shop drawings for door, frames and hardware, using temporary, removable or concealed markings. 35 36 PROJECT CONDITIONS: 37 38 Conditioning: Do not deliver or install doors until conditions for temperature and relative humidity have 39 been stabilized and will be maintained in storage and installation areas during remainder of 40 construction period to comply with the following requirements applicable to project's geographical 41 location: 42 43 Referenced AWI quality standard including Section 100-S-3 "Moisture Content". 44 45 WARRANTY: 46 47 General: Warranties shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights the Owner may have 48 under the Contract Documents. 49 50 Door Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit written agreement on door manufacturer's standard form 51 signed by Manufacturer, Installer and Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace defective doors which 52 have warped (bow, cup or twist) or that show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers, or do 53 not conform to tolerance limitations of referenced quality standards. 54 55 Warranty shall be in effect during following period of time after date of Substantial Completion. 56 57 Solid Core Interior Doors: FLUSH WOOD DOORS GDA 08212-2 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 Life of installation. 3 4 Contractor's Responsibilities: Replace or refinish doors where Contractor's work contributed to 5 rejection or to voiding of manufacturer's warranty. 6 7 8 PART 2-PRODUCTS 9 10 11 MANUFACTURERS: 12 13 Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following. 14 15 Solid Core Doors with Wood Veneer Faces: 16 17 Eggers Industries,Architectural Door Division. 18 Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc. 19 Weyerhauser Company. 20 Marshfield 21 22 INTERIOR FLUSH WOOD DOORS: 23 24 Solid Core Doors for Transparent Finish: Comply with the following requirements: 25 26 Faces: Quarter Cut Douglas Fir 27 28 AWI Grade: Custom. 29 30 Construction: PC-5 (Particleboard core, 5-ply). 31 32 Fire-Rated Solid Core Doors: Comply with the following requirements: 33 34 Faces and AWI Grade: Provide faces and grade to match non-rated doors in same area of 35 building, unless otherwise indicated. 36 37 Construction: Manufacturer's standard core construction as required to provide fire-resistance 38 rating indicated. 39 40 Edge Construction: Provide manufacturer's standard laminated edge construction for 41 improved screw-holding capability and split resistance as compared to edges composed of a 42 single layer of treated lumber. 43 44 Particleboard Cores: Comply with the following requirements: 45 46 Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-1. 47 Blocking: Provide wood blocking at particleboard-core doors as follows: 48 49 6-inch (150-mm)top-rail blocking, at doors indicated to have closers. 50 51 FABRICATION: 52 53 Fabricate flush wood doors to produce doors complying with following requirements: 54 55 Factory-prefit and premachine doors to fit frame opening sizes indicated with the following 56 uniform clearances and bevels: 57 Comply with tolerance requirements of AWI for prefitting. Comply with final hardware FLUSH WOOD DOORS GDA 08212-3 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 schedules and door frame shop drawings and with hardware templates. 2 3 Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions 4 and alignment before proceeding with factory premachining. 5 6 FACTORY FINISHING: 7 8 General: Comply with referenced AWI quality standard including Section 1500 "Factory Finishing". 9 10 Prefinished wood doors at factory. 11 12 Transparent Finish: Comply with requirements indicated for grade, finish system, staining effect and 13 sheen. 14 AWI Grade: Custom. 15 16 Finish: 17 18 AWI Finish System TR-6: Catalyzed polyurethane 19 20 Staining: Match Architect's sample. 21 22 Effect: Unfilled finish. 23 24 Sheen: Satin-medium rubbed effect (40 Satin 30°-50°). 25 26 Provide sealant coat (varnish) to any sanded or trimmed door edges (top, bottom, and sides) prior to 27 door installation. 28 29 30 PART 3- EXECUTION 31 32 33 EXAMINATION: 34 35 Examine installed door frames prior to hanging door: 36 37 Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing 38 characteristics and have been installed with plumb jambs and level heads. 39 40 Reject doors or door frames with defects. 41 42 Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 43 44 INSTALLATION: 45 46 Hardware: For installation see Division-8 "Finish Hardware"section of these specifications. 47 48 Manufacturer's Instructions: Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer's instructions and of 49 referenced AWI standard and as indicated. Maintain protective wrapping on doors until installation. 50 51 Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames in accordance with requirements of 52 NFPA No. 80. 53 54 Prefit Doors: Fit to frames for uniform clearance at each edge. 55 56 Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation, if fitting or machining is required at the job 57 site. FLUSH WOOD DOORS GDA 08212-4 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTION: 3 4 Operation: Rehang or replace doors which do not swing or operate freely. 5 6 Finished Doors: Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation. 7 8 Protect doors as recommended by door manufacturer to assure that wood doors will be without 9 damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 10 11 Recover door with protective wrapping to protect it from soil and similar damage. 12 13 CLEANING 14 15 Remove all protective coverings, smudges, fingerprints, unwanted and unintended stain and similar 16 foreign matter to leave doors in perfect condition. 17 18 19 END OF SECTION 08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS GDA 08212-5 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 SECTION 08360—SERVICE COUNTER DOORS 2 3 4 PART 1 -GENERAL 5 6 7 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 8 9 Provide all materials, labor, equipment and services necessary to furnish, deliver and install all work 10 under this section as shown on the contract documents, specified herein, and as specified by the job 11 conditions 12 13 DESCRIPTION 14 15 Stainless steel service counter door with integral frame and countertop. 16 17 Related work specified elsewhere 18 19 Finish Hardware: Section 08710 20 Gypsum Dry Wall: Section 09250 21 22 SUBMITTALS 23 24 Procedures: Furnish submittals in accordance with the general requirements specified in Section 25 01300. 26 27 Shop Drawing: Furnish shop drawings for architect's approval. Include elevations, sections, and 28 details indicating dimensions, materials, finishes, conditions for anchorage and support of each door. 29 30 Product Literature: Submit manufacturer's technical literature describing the product to be used under 31 this section. 32 33 Maintenance and Operating Manuals: Furnish complete manuals describing the materials, devices 34 and procedures to be followed in operating and maintaining all doors under this section. Include 35 manufacturer's brochures and parts lists describing the actual materials used in the product. 36 37 QUALITY ASSURANCE 38 39 Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable requirements of the laws, codes, ordinances and 40 regulations of federal, state and municipal authorities having jurisdiction. 41 42 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 43 44 General: Deliver and store materials in manufacturer's original packaging, labeled to show name, 45 brand and type. Store materials in a protected dry location off the ground in accordance with 46 manufacturer's instructions. 47 48 WARRANTY 49 50 Shutter Warranty: Furnish One(1) year written warranty signed by the manufacturer and installer 51 agreeing to repair or replace work which has failed as a result of defects in materials or workmanship. 52 Upon notification within the warranty period, such defects shall be repaired at no cost to the owner. 53 54 55 PART 2- MATERIALS 56 57 SERVICE COUNTER DOORS GDA 08360-1 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 COILING ALUMINUM COUNTER SHUTTERS 2 3 Manufacturers: Stainless Steel Counter Shutters shall be 651 Series as manufactured by Overhead 4 Door Corp., Dallas, TX. 5 6 MATERIALS 7 8 Curtain: Shall be assembled of .030 interlocking, stainless steel slats. Slats shall have endlocks 9 attached to each end of alternate slats to act as a wearing surface, maintain slat alignment and retain 10 the curtain in guides. 11 12 Bottom Bar: Shall consist of a one angle, not less than 1-1/2" x 1/8" stainless steel, furnished with 13 conceacled slide bolts for locking and forming a flat front surface. 14 15 Guides: Each guide shall be fabricated of stainless steel angles and channels forming uniform box- 16 type configuration. 17 18 Brackets: Mounting brackets of square design fabricated of hot rolled 1/4" steel plate, shall be 19 provided to house ends of the counterbalance assembly. 20 21 Frame/Countertop: Provide integral frame with countertop. Reference drawings for all dimensional 22 requirements. 23 24 Sill Configuration for Counter Door: Stainless steel counter. 25 26 Counterbalance Assembly: Doors shall be counterbalanced by means of adjustable steel helical 27 torsion springs. Spring mechanism will be designed for a minimum 20,000 cycles. 28 29 Hoods: Hoods shall be constructed of 24 gauge stainless steel sheet. 30 31 Locking Devices: Equip door with slide bolt for padlock. 32 33 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES 34 35 Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish. 36 37 Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches. 38 39 Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece. 40 41 When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign 42 matter and leave surfaces chemically clean. 43 44 Directional Satin Finish: No. 4. 45 46 MANUAL DOOR OPERATORS 47 48 Equip door with manufacturer's recommended manual door operator unless another type of door 49 operator is indicated. 50 51 Push-up Door Operation: Design counterbalance mechanism so required lift or pull for door operation 52 does not exceed 25 lbf(111 N). 53 54 55 PART 3- EXECUTION 56 57 SERVICE COUNTER DOORS GDA 08360-2 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 EXAMINATION 2 3 Examine surfaces and field conditions to which this work is to be performed and notify architect if 4 conditions of surfaces exist which are detrimental to proper installation and timely completion of work. 5 6 Verify all dimensions taken at job site affecting the work. Notify the architect in any instance where 7 dimensions vary. 8 9 Coordinate and schedule work under this section with work of other sections so as not to delay job 10 progress. 11 12 INSTALLATION 13 14 Perform installation using only factory approved and certified representatives of the door 15 manufacturer. 16 17 Install door assemblies at locations shown in perfect alignment and elevation, plumb, level, straight 18 and true. 19 20 Adjust shutter installation to provide uniform clearances and smooth non-binding operation. 21 22 Test doors opening and closing operational sequence. 23 24 PROTECTION AND CLEANING 25 26 Protect installed work using adequate and suitable means during and after installation until accepted 27 by owner. 28 29 Remove, repair or replace materials which have been damaged in any way. 30 31 Clean surfaces of grime and dirt using acceptable and recommended means and methods. 32 33 34 END OF SECTION 08360 SERVICE COUNTER DOORS GDA 08360-3 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 SECTION 08386-SAFETY ALL GLASS SIDELIGHTS 2 3 4 PART 1 - GENERAL 5 6 RELATED DOCUMENTS: 7 8 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions 9 and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work specified in this section. 10 11 SUMMARY: 12 13 Extent and configuration of safety glass is indicated on drawings and in schedules. 14 15 Units shall be complete, including, but not limited to the following: 16 17 Glass in 2 or 3-sided captured framing system. 18 19 Glass and glazing, not included in safety glass units, is specified elsewhere in Division-8. 20 21 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION: 22 23 Performance Requirements: Provide assemblies that have been designed and fabricated to comply 24 with performance requirements specified. Each system shall be tested by a recognized testing 25 laboratory or agency in accordance with specified test methods. 26 27 Thermal Movement: Design, fabricate, and install component parts to provide for noiseless 28 expansion and contraction of safety glass sidelight frames over a temperature range for 29 material of 150 degrees fahrenheit, without buckling, sealed joint failure, glass breakage, 30 undue stress on members or anchors, and other detrimental effects. 31 32 Wind Loading Properties: The system will be designed to withstand a 5 mph inward and 5 33 mph outward wind load acting normal to the plane of the wall when tested in accordance 34 with ASTM E 330. 35 36 Building Movement: Design, fabricate and install safety glass sidelight frames to withstand 37 building movements including loading deflections, shrinkage, creep and similar movements. 38 39 SUBMITTALS: 40 41 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, standard details, and installation 42 recommendations for safety glass doors, including the following: 43 44 Fabrication methods. 45 Finishing. 46 Hardware. 47 Accessories and other components. 48 49 Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and installation of safety glass sidelights and 50 associated components. Include the following: 51 52 Elevations at 1/2"scale. 53 Full size detail sections. 54 Anchors,joint details and reinforcements. 55 Glazing details. 56 SAFETY ALL GLASS SIDELIGHTS GDA 08386-1 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Templates and Diagrams: Furnish installation templates, diagrams, and other data to fabricators 2 and installers of related work as necessary for coordination of the installation. 3 4 Samples: Submit samples of each required metal finish, on 6" long extrusions, and each type of 5 glass, 12" square. 6 7 The Architect reserves the right to require samples of typical fabricated sections, indicating 8 joints, exposed fastenings, quality of workmanship, and finish, and including hardware and 9 accessory items, before proceeding with fabrication. 10 11 Certification: Provide certified test results showing that safety glass units have been tested by a 12 recognized testing laboratory or agency and comply with specified performance characteristics. 13 14 QUALITY ASSURANCE: 15 16 Safety Glazing Standard: Provide the type of products indicated that comply with ANSI Z97.1 and 17 testing requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201 for category II materials. 18 19 Manufacturer's Qualifications: Provide safety glass produced by a single manufacturer with not less 20 than 5 years successful experience in fabrication of safety glass of the type and quality required. 21 22 Installer's Qualifications: Engage as installer an authorized representative of the manufacturer for 23 both installation and maintenance of the type of safety glass units required. 24 25 Experience: The installer shall have a minimum of 3 years experience in installation and 26 service of safety glass assemblies manufactured for the project. 27 28 Maintenance Proximity: The installer shall maintain offices and repair or service facilities 29 within 2 hours normal travel time from the project site. 30 31 Design Criteria: Drawings are based on one manufacturer's standard safety glass system. Another 32 manufacturer's system of a similar and equivalent nature from list provided below will be acceptable 33 when, in the Architect's sole judgement, differences do not materially detract from the design 34 concept or intended performance. 35 36 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: 37 38 Deliver safety glass and related components to the project in manufacturer's original, unopened 39 protective packaging. Use padded blankets or other approved protective wrapping for glass, 40 decorative metal work and other exposed elements. 41 42 Do not deliver units until work is ready for their installation. 43 44 Inspect components for damage upon delivery. Unless minor defects can be repaired to the 45 Architect's satisfaction, remove and replace damaged components at no additional cost. 46 47 Storage: If temporary storage is necessary, store units and related components inside the building 48 in a dry protected area apart from construction traffic, in their original shipping containers with 49 protective wrapping or packaging securely in place. 50 51 Protect finish surfaces from damage during handling and installation. 52 53 PROJECT CONDITIONS: 54 55 Field Measurement: Where possible, field measure openings before fabrication to ensure proper fit 56 of work; show measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication with construction SAFETY ALL GLASS SIDELIGHTS GDA 08386-2 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 progress to avoid delay. If necessary, proceed with fabrication without measurements, and 2 coordinate tolerances to ensure proper fit. 3 4 WARRANTY: 5 6 General: Warranties shall be in addition to and not a limitation of other rights the Owner may have 7 under the Contract Documents. 8 9 Special Project Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the Contractor, Installer, and 10 Manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace components or entire units which fail in materials or 11 workmanship within the specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not necessarily limited 12 to, structural failure including excessive deflection, excessive leakage or air infiltration, , deterioration 13 of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. This warranty shall be in 14 addition to and not a limitation of other rights the Owner may have against the Contractor under the 15 Contract Documents. 16 17 Warranty period for safety glass units shall be 3 years after the date of substantial 18 completion. 19 20 21 PART 2-PRODUCTS 22 23 PRODUCT/MANUFACTURERS: 24 25 Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: 26 27 ACI Distribution;a Division of Vitro America, Inc. 28 Arch Aluminum &Glass Co., Inc. 29 Blumcraft of Pittsburgh. 30 Oldcastle Glass, Inc. 31 Vistawall Architectural Products;The Vistawall Group; a Bluescope Steel company. 32 33 MATERIALS: 34 35 Glass for interior walls: Horizontally tempered safety glass complying with ASTM Standard C 1048- 36 90, Kind FT(fully tempered), Condition A(uncoated surfaces), Type I, of thickness indicated. 37 38 Clear Glass: Provide Class 1 (clear)glass. 39 40 Thickness: 1/2". 41 42 Anchorages and Fastenings: Provide manufacturer's standard, concealed anchors and fasteners. 43 Finish heads of exposed fasteners to match adjacent metal surfaces. 44 45 Furnish inserts and anchorage devices in ample time to avoid delays in other work. 46 47 Do not use exposed fasteners except where unavoidable for assembly of units and for 48 application of hardware. 49 50 Sealants: Tremco Proglaze, clear. 51 52 FABRICATION: 53 54 General: Sizes of glaass and frame units, and profile requirements, are indicated on the drawings. 55 Variable dimensions are indicated with maximum and minimum dimensions required to achieve 56 design requirements and coordination with other work. 57 SAFETY ALL GLASS SIDELIGHTS GDA 08386-3 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Fabricate safety glass units to sizes and configurations indicated, with members closely fitted to 2 hairline joints, reinforced and mechanically joined or welded. Dress welds flush and finish to match 3 adjacent surfaces. 4 5 Dissimilar Metals: Separate dissimilar metals with zinc chromate primer, bituminous paint, or other 6 separator that will prevent corrosion. 7 8 Fasteners: Conceal fasteners wherever possible. Countersink heads of exposed fasteners. 9 10 11 PART 3- EXECUTION 12 13 INSPECTION: 14 15 Examine substrate and adjoining construction, and conditions under which work is to be installed. Do 16 not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of 17 work have been corrected. 18 19 INSTALLATION: 20 21 Install safety glass in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and recommendations. 22 23 Do not install members that are warped, bowed, deformed, or otherwise damaged or 24 defaced to such extent as to impair strength or appearance. Remove and replace members 25 as directed which have been damaged during installation. 26 27 Set units level, plumb, and true to line, with uniform hairline joints. Support on metal shim and 28 secure in place by bolting to clip angles and supports anchored to supporting structure. 29 30 Set sill members and other members in a bed of compound as shown, or with joint fillers or 31 gaskets to provide a weather tight construction. 32 33 Paint concealed contact surfaces of dissimilar materials, including metal in contact with masonry or 34 concrete work, with a heavy coating of bituminous paint, or provide other separation as 35 recommended by manufacturer. 36 37 Seal joints. 38 39 ADJUSTING: 40 41 Adjust to provide a tight fit at contact points,for weathertight closure. 42 43 CLEANING: 44 45 Clean metal surfaces promptly after installation, exercising care to avoid damage to coatings. 46 47 Clean glass surfaces after installation, complying with requirements contained in the "Glass and 48 Glazing" section for cleaning and maintenance. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, 49 dirt, and other substances. 50 51 PROTECTION: 52 53 Institute protective measures required throughout the remainder of the construction period to ensure 54 that safety glass units will be without damage or deterioration, other than normal weathering, at time 55 of acceptance. 56 57 SAFETY ALL GLASS SIDELIGHTS GDA 08386-4 GDA#12018.00 December 14,2012 Issue for Permit 1 END OF SECTION 08385 SAFETY ALL GLASS SIDELIGHTS GDA 08386-5 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 SECTION 08415-ALUMINUM STOREFRONTS AND ENTRANCES FOR INTERIOR APPLICATION 2 3 4 PART 1 -GENERAL 5 6 7 RELATED DOCUMENTS: 8 9 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and 10 Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 11 12 SUMMARY: 13 14 Extent of aluminum storefronts is indicated on drawings 15 and schedules. 16 17 Aluminum storefront types required for the project include: 18 19 Interior wall storefront type framing system to match existing system. 20 21 Glazed aluminum entrances. 22 23 Coordinate operation with access control hardware. 24 25 Related Sections: 26 27 Glazing: Refer to "Glass and Glazing" section of Division 8 for glazing requirements for 28 aluminum storefronts. 29 30 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 31 32 General Performance: Aluminum-framed systems shall withstand the effects of the following 33 performance requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure due to defective 34 manufacture,fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction: 35 36 Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to, story 37 drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads. 38 39 Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction. 40 41 Failure includes the following: 42 43 Deflection exceeding specified limits. 44 Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. 45 Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and 46 structural movements to glazing. 47 Noise or vibration created by wind and by thermal and structural movements. 48 Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. 49 Sealant failure. 50 Failure of operating units. 51 52 Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum-framed systems with maximum air leakage through fixed glazing 53 and framing areas of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.03 Us per sq. m) of fixed wall area when tested according to 54 ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa). 55 56 SUBMITTALS: 57 ALUMINUM STOREFRONTS AND ENTRANCES FOR INTERIOR APPLICATION GDA 08415- 1 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, standard details, and installation 2 recommendations for components of aluminum storefronts required for project, including test reports 3 certifying that products have been tested and comply with performance requirements. 4 5 Submit wind loading calculations at shop drawing submittal. Shop drawings will not be 6 returned without wind load calculations. 7 8 Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings based on field verified dimensions for fabrication and 9 installation of aluminum storefronts, including elevations, detail sections of typical composite 10 members, hardware mounting heights, anchorages, reinforcement, expansion provisions, and glazing. 11 12 Samples: Submit samples of each type and color of aluminum finish, on 12" long sections of 13 extrusions or formed shapes and on 6" square sheets. Where normal color and texture variations are 14 to be expected, include 2 or more units in each set of samples showing limits of such variations 15 16 Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing 17 agency, for aluminum-framed systems, indicating compliance with performance requirements. 18 19 Product Approval Certificates: Notice of Acceptance (NOA) for aluminum-framed systems, 20 accessories, and components,from manufacturer. 21 22 QUALITY ASSURANCE 23 24 Installer Qualifications: Engage a single Installer who has successfully completed installation of 25 glazed curtain wall systems similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for the Project. 26 27 Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for 28 systems' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by 29 dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to 30 sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by 31 criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, 32 and in-service performance. 33 34 Do not revise intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's 35 approval. If revisions are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for 36 review. 37 38 COORDINATION 39 40 Coordinate size and location of recesses in walls floors for the following door hardware components. 41 Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in- 42 Place Concrete." 43 44 Coordinate operation with access control hardware. 45 46 WARRANTY: 47 48 Special Product Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the Contractor, Installer and 49 Manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace units (including reglazing) which fail in materials or 50 workmanship within the specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not necessarily limited to 51 structural failures including excessive deflection, excessive leakage or air infiltration, faulty operation, 52 and deterioration of metals, metal finishes and other materials beyond normal weathering. This 53 warranty shall be in addition to and not a limitation of other rights the Owner may have against the 54 Contractor under the Contract Documents. 55 56 Warranty period for aluminum storefront is 3 years after the date of substantial completion. 57 ALUMINUM STOREFRONTS AND ENTRANCES FOR INTERIOR APPLICATION GDA08415-2 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 3 4 5 MANUFACTURERS: 6 7 Entrance Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products to match the 8 existing aluminum entrance doors. 9 10 System to accommodate 1/4"tempered glass clear glass. 11 12 Interior Wall Storefront Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide medium stile 13 and rail products. 14 15 System to accommodate 1/4"tempered glass clear glass. 16 17 MATERIALS: 18 19 Aluminum Members: Provide alloy and temper recommended by the manufacturer for strength, 20 corrosion resistance, and application of required finish; comply with ASTM B 221 for extrusions and 21 ASTM B 209 for sheet or plate. 22 23 Fasteners: Provide fasteners of aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or other materials warranted 24 by the manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible with aluminum components, hardware, 25 anchors and other components. 26 27 Reinforcement: Where fasteners screw-anchor into aluminum less than 0.125"thick, reinforce 28 the interior with aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless steel to receive screw threads, or provide 29 standard noncorrosive pressed-in splined grommet nuts. 30 31 Exposed Fasteners: Except where unavoidable for application for hardware, do not use 32 exposed fasteners. For the application of hardware, use fasteners that match the finish of 33 member or hardware being fastened. 34 35 Provide Phillips flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners. 36 37 Concealed Flashing: Provide 26 gage minimum dead-soft stainless steel, or 0.026" minimum 38 extruded aluminum of alloy and type selected by manufacturer for compatibility with other 39 components. 40 41 Brackets and Reinforcements: Where feasible, provide high-strength aluminum brackets and 42 reinforcements; otherwise provide nonmagnetic stainless steel or hot-dip galvanized steel complying 43 with ASTM A 386. 44 45 Stile-and-Rail Type Aluminum Doors: 46 47 Frame: Provide tubular frame members, fabricated with mechanical joints using heavy 48 inserted reinforcing plates and concealed tie-rods or j-bolts. 49 50 Design: Provide 1-3/4"thick doors of design indicated. 51 52 Medium stiles, and top rails (3-1/2" nominal width). 53 Bottom rail -±10". 54 55 Glazing: Fabricate doors to facilitate replacement of glass or panels, without disassembly of 56 stiles and rails. Provide snap-on extruded aluminum glazing stops, with exterior stops 57 anchored for non-removal. ALUMINUM STOREFRONTS AND ENTRANCES FOR INTERIOR APPLICATION GDA 08415- 3 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 HARDWARE: 3 4 General: Refer to hardware section in Division-8 for requirements for hardware items other than those 5 indicated to be provided by the aluminum entrance manufacturer. 6 7 Provide manufacturer's heavy-duty hardware units as indicated, scheduled, or required for operation 8 of each door, including the following items of sizes, number, and type recommended by manufacturer 9 for service required; finish to match door. 10 11 Butts: Provide 4-1/2"x 4-1/2" butts in accordance with tested system. 12 13 Overhead Closers: Units complying with ANSI A156.4, of the following type and 14 requirements: 15 16 Provide only institutional grade heavy duty cast iron door closers with double heat treated 17 steel piston/shaft design. All closers shall be factory handed, sized and shipped with 18 cardboard template to insure correct installation by contractor. Units shall be independently 19 certified to a minimum of 10,000,000 cycles in compliance with ANSI testing requirements. 20 Hydraulic fluid shall be o-ring compatible with constant viscosity for a temperature range of - 21 20 deg. F to 100 deg. F. At push side mounted locations provide extra duty arms and 22 knuckles similar to LCN 4110 EDA. 23 24 Provide parallel arms for all overhead closers, except where closer will be mounted on 25 exterior/public side of door; in this case provide regular arm mounting. Avoid use of 26 brackets wherever possible. 27 28 Adjust all closers in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations at the building 29 site. 30 31 Type: Overhead, exposed, modern type with cover. 32 33 Delayed action closing. 34 35 Keyed Cylinders: Install cylinder provided per Section 08710"Finish hardware." 36 37 Compression Weatherstripping: Provide the manufacturer's standard replaceable compressible 38 weatherstripping gaskets of molded neoprene complying with ASTM D 2000 or molded PVC 39 complying with ASTM D 2287. 40 41 Sliding Weatherstripping: Provide the manufacturer's standard replaceable weatherstripping of wool, 42 polypropylene, or nylon woven pile, with nylon fabric or aluminum strip backing, complying with AAMA 43 701.2. 44 45 Additional Hardware For Single Leaf Doors Only: 46 47 Push Bar/Pull Sets: Concealed fasteners. 48 49 2923 x 33" Builders Brass Works Corp. 50 536B x 1081 LBP 33"; Hiawatha, Inc. 51 No. 482 x 33"; Quality Hardware Mfg. Co., Inc.; Div. Newman Tonks, Inc. 52 1731 x 33"; Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company (Trimco). 53 54 Exit Devices: 55 56 Provide modern touchbar design overlapping "T" style touchpad to prevent pinching of fingers. 57 Touchpad shall incorporate fluid dampers to quiet operation and absorb shock. Unless ALUMINUM STOREFRONTS AND ENTRANCES FOR INTERIOR APPLICATION GDA 08415-4 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 otherwise specified, touchpad shall be of stainless steel. For safety, touchpad shall not 2 extend full length of device. Provide only low friction fire rated roller strikes at all applicable 3 applications. Latchbolts shall be protected by anti-theft/pic proof device. Endcaps shall be 4 metallic with two point attachment to door and three point attachment to device. Unless 5 otherwise specified, provide lever trim in compliance with ADA similar to Von Duprin 35/99 x 6 06 with sag proof/vandal resistant design. 7 8 Electrified Panic Device: Provide electrified panic device where indicated. 9 10 Product/Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of 11 the following: 12 13 Exit/Panic Devices: 14 15 Corbin & Russwin Architectural Hardware, Div. Black& Decker Corp. 16 Monarch Hardware & Mfg. Co., Div Newman Tonks, Inc. 17 Sargent Manufacturing Company. 18 35/99 Series; Von Duprin, Div. Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware Group. 19 20 FABRICATION: 21 22 General: Sizes of frame units, and profile requirements, are indicated on drawings. Variable 23 dimensions are indicated, with maximum and minimum dimensions required to achieve design 24 requirements and coordination with other work. 25 26 Prefabrication: Before shipment to the project site, complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, 27 hardware application, and other work to the greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only 28 as necessary for shipment and installation. 29 30 Preglaze frame units to greatest extent possible. 31 32 Perform fabrication operations, including cutting, fitting, forming, drilling and grinding of metal 33 work to prevent damage to exposed finish surfaces. 34 35 Welding: Comply with AWS recommendations; grind exposed welds smooth and restore mechanical 36 finish. 37 38 Reinforcing: Install reinforcing as required for hardware and necessary for performance requirements, 39 sag resistance and rigidity. 40 41 Dissimilar Metals: Separate dissimilar metals with zinc chromate primer, bituminous paint, or other 42 separator that will prevent corrosion. 43 44 Continuity: Maintain accurate relation of planes and angles,with hairline fit of contacting members. 45 46 Uniformity of Finish: Abutting extruded aluminum members shall not have an integral color or 47 texture variation greater than half the range indicated in the sample pair submittal. 48 49 Fasteners: Conceal fasteners wherever possible. 50 51 ENTRANCE FABRICATION: 52 53 General: Sizes of door units, and profile requirements, are indicated on drawings. Variable 54 dimensions are indicated, with maximum and minimum dimensions required to achieve design 55 requirements and coordination with other work. 56 57 Prefabrication: Before shipment to the project site, complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, ALUMINUM STOREFRONTS AND ENTRANCES FOR INTERIOR APPLICATION GDA 08415-5 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 hardware application, and other work to the greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only 2 as necessary for shipment and installation. 3 4 Preglaze door and frame units to greatest extent possible. 5 6 Do not drill and tap for surface-mounted hardware items until time of installation of project site. 7 8 Perform fabrication operations, including cutting, fitting, forming, drilling and grinding of metal 9 work to prevent damage to exposed finish surfaces. For hardware, perform these operations 10 prior to application of finishes. 11 12 Welding: Comply with AWS recommendations; grind exposed welds smooth and restore mechanical 13 finish. 14 15 Reinforcing: Install reinforcing as required for hardware and necessary for performance requirements, 16 sag resistance and rigidity. 17 18 Dissimilar Metals: Separate dissimilar metals with zinc chromate primer, bituminous paint, or other 19 separator that will prevent corrosion. 20 21 Continuity: Maintain accurate relation of planes and angles, with hairline fit of contacting members. 22 23 Uniformity of Finish: Abutting extruded aluminum members shall not have an integral color or 24 texture variation greater than half the range indicated in the sample pair submittal. 25 26 Fasteners: Conceal fasteners wherever possible. 27 28 Weatherstripping: For exterior doors, provide compression weatherstripping against fixed stops; at 29 other edges, provide sliding weatherstripping retained in adjustable strip mortised into door edge. 30 31 Miscellaneous Break Metal: 32 33 Material: 6063-T5 aluminum alloy. 34 35 Fasteners: Hardened aluminum or stainless steel where exposed, cadmium or zinc coated 36 may be used in unexposed areas. Exposed fasteners shall be countersunk and shall match 37 storefronts in color. 38 39 ALUMINUM FINISHES 40 41 General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for 42 recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes. 43 44 Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable 45 if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece 46 are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within 47 the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 48 49 Finish designations prefixed by AA conform to the system established by the Aluminum Association 50 for designating aluminum finishes. 51 52 Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker. 53 54 55 PART 3- EXECUTION 56 57 ALUMINUM STOREFRONTS AND ENTRANCES FOR INTERIOR APPLICATION GDA 08415-6 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 INSTALLATION: 2 3 Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation. 4 5 Set units plumb, level, and true to line, without warp or rack of framing members, or panels. Provide 6 proper support and anchor securely in place. 7 8 Separate aluminum and other corrodible metal surfaces from sources of corrosion of 9 electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials. Comply with requirements 10 specified under paragraph"Dissimilar Materials" in the Appendix to AAMA 101-85. 11 12 Set sill members and other members in bed of sealant as indicated, or with joint fillers or gaskets as 13 indicated to provide weathertight construction. Comply with requirements of Division 7 for sealant, 14 fillers, and gaskets. 15 16 Refer to"Glass and Glazing"section of Division 8 for installation of glass and other panels indicated to 17 be glazed into framing, and not preglazed by manufacturer. 18 19 ADJUSTING: 20 21 Adjust operating hardware to function properly, for smooth operation without binding, and for 22 weathertight closure. 23 24 CLEANING: 25 26 Clean the completed system, inside and out, promptly after installation, exercising care to avoid 27 damage to coatings. 28 29 Clean glass surfaces after installation, complying with requirements contained in the "Glass and 30 Glazing" section for cleaning and maintenance. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt 31 and other substances from aluminum surfaces. 32 33 PROTECTION: 34 35 Institute protective measures required throughout the remainder of the construction period to ensure 36 that aluminum storefronts will be without damage or deterioration, other than normal weathering, at 37 time of acceptance. 38 ALUMINUM STOREFRONTS AND ENTRANCES FOR INTERIOR APPLICATION GDA 08415-7 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 HARDWARE SET SCHEDULE: 2 3 General: Provide the following hardware: 4 5 Set No. 17 - Pair Interior Aluminum Storefront Door w/Card Reader(Lobby) 6 7 Electrified Exit Device (CVR Type) x RX x OP—active leaf 8 Exit Device (CVR Type)x OP —inactive leaf 9 Pulls 10 Butt Hinges 11 Closers (Overhead Concealed) 12 Power Supply 13 14 Hardware provided per Section 08710 15 16 Cylinder 17 18 Hardware provided by Others 19 20 Card Reader on ingress side to activate ELR exit device 21 ALUMINUM STOREFRONTS AND ENTRANCES FOR INTERIOR APPLICATION GDA 08415-8 GDA#12018.00 December 14,2012 Issue for Permit 1 Set No.4-Single Exterior Storefront Doors (New In Existing Storefront System)—Card Reader 2 3 Electrified Exit Hardware (Rim Type)x RX 4 Offset Pivots(Electric Transfer Operation) 5 Offset Pull 6 Closers (Overhead Concealed) 7 Stop(Overhead Surface) 8 Sweep 9 Threshold 10 Weatherseals 11 Door Position Switch 12 Power Supply 13 14 Hardware provided per Section 08710 15 16 Cylinder for night latch retraction 17 18 Hardware provided by Others 19 20 Card Reader 21 22 23 Set No. 21 -Single Interior Aluminum Storefront Door 24 25 Hardware provided per Section 08410 26 27 Straight Push/Pull 28 Offset Pivots 29 Closer(Overhead Concealed) 30 Stop—Overhead Surface Mounted 31 Silencers 32 33 34 END OF SECTION 08410 ALUMINUM STOREFRONTS AND ENTRANCES FOR INTERIOR APPLICATION GDA 08415-9 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 SECTION 08710- FINISH HARDWARE 2 3 4 PART 1 - GENERAL 5 6 7 RELATED DOCUMENTS: 8 9 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and 10 Division-1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section. 11 12 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 13 14 Definition: "Builders' Hardware" includes items known commercially as builders hardware which are 15 required for swing, sliding and folding doors, except special types of unique and non-matching 16 hardware specified in the same section as the door and door frame. 17 18 Extent of finish hardware required is indicated on drawings and in schedules. 19 20 Types of finish hardware required include the following: 21 22 Hinges 23 Lock cylinders and keys 24 Lock and latch sets 25 Bolts 26 Exit devices 27 Push/pull units 28 Closers 29 Door trim units 30 Protection plates 31 Weatherstripping for exterior doors 32 Smoke and draft stripping for interior doors. 33 Silencersfor interior doors. 34 Astragals or meeting seals on pairs of doors 35 Thresholds 36 Security products 37 38 Coordinate operation with access control hardware. 39 40 Silencers included integral with hollow metal frames are specified with door frames elsewhere in 41 Division-8. 42 43 Fire-rated aluminum doors, frames and hardware are specified in Section 08125 - Fire-Rated 44 Aluminum Full Vision Doors and Frames. 45 46 QUALITY ASSURANCE: 47 48 Manufacturer: Obtain each type of hardware (latch and lock sets, hinges, closers, etc.) from only one 49 manufacturer, although several may be indicated as offering products complying with requirements. 50 51 Supplier: A recognized architectural finish hardware supplier, with warehousing facilities, who has 52 been furnishing hardware in the project's vicinity for a period of not less than 2 years, and who is, or 53 who employs an experienced architectural consultant who is available, at reasonable times during the 54 course of the work, for consultation about project's hardware requirements, to Owner, Architect and 55 Contractor. 56 57 Fire-Rated Openings: Provide hardware for fire-rated openings in compliance with NFPA Standard FINISH HARDWARE GDA 08710- 1 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 No. 80 and local building code requirements. Provide only hardware which has been tested and listed 2 by UL or FM for types and sizes of doors required and complies with requirements of door and door 3 frame labels. 4 5 Where emergency exit devices are required on fire-rated doors (with supplementary marking 6 on doors' UL or FM labels indicating "Fire Door to be Equipped with Fire Exit Hardware") 7 provide UL or FM label on exit devices indicating "Fire Exit Hardware". 8 9 COORDINATION 10 11 Coordinate size and location of recesses in walls floors for the following door hardware components. 12 Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in- 13 Place Concrete." 14 15 Coordinate operation with access control hardware. 16 17 SUBMITTALS: 18 19 Product Data: Submit manufacturers technical product data for each item of hardware in accordance 20 with Division-1 section "Submittals". Include whatever information may be necessary to show 21 compliance with requirements, and include instructions for installation and for maintenance of 22 operating parts and finish. 23 24 Hardware Schedule: Submit final hardware schedule in manner indicated below. Coordinate 25 hardware with doors, frames and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function and 26 finish of hardware. 27 28 Final Hardware Schedule Content: Based on finish hardware indicated, organize hardware 29 schedule into "hardware sets" indicating complete designations of every item required for 30 each door or opening. Include the following information: 31 32 Type, style, function, size and finish of each hardware item. 33 34 Name and manufacturer of each item. 35 36 Fastenings and other pertinent information. 37 38 Location of hardware set cross-referenced to indications on Drawings both on floor 39 plans and in door and frame schedule. 40 41 Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, codes, etc. contained in schedule. 42 43 Mounting locations for hardware. 44 45 Door and frame sizes and materials. 46 Keying information. 47 48 Submittal Sequence: Submit schedule at earliest possible date particularly where acceptance of 49 hardware schedule must precede fabrication of other work (e.g., hollow metal frames) which is critical 50 in the project construction schedule. Include with schedule the product data, samples, shop drawings 51 of other work affected by finish hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of 52 hardware schedule. 53 54 Submittal Sequence: Submit initial draft of schedule along with essential product data in order 55 to facilitate the fabrication of other work (e.g., hollow metal frame) which is critical in the 56 project construction schedule. Submit final draft of schedule after samples, product data, 57 coordination with shop drawings of other work, delivery schedules, and similar information has FINISH HARDWARE GDA 08710- 2 GDA#12018.00 December 14,2012 Issue for Permit 1 been completed and accepted. 2 3 Keying Schedule: Submit separate detailed schedule indicating clearly how the Owner's 4 final instructions on keying of locks has been fulfilled. 5 6 Templates: Furnish hardware templates to each fabricator of doors, frames and other work to be 7 factory-prepared for the installation of hardware. Upon request, check shop drawings of such other 8 work, to confirm that adequate provisions are made for proper location and installation of hardware. 9 10 PRODUCT HANDLING: 11 12 Tag each item or package separately, with identification related to final hardware schedule, and 13 include basic installation instructions with each item or package. 14 15 Packaging of hardware, is responsibility of supplier. As material is received by hardware supplier from 16 various manufacturers, sort and repackage in containers clearly marked with appropriate hardware set 17 number to match set numbers of approved hardware schedule. Two or more identical sets may be 18 packed in same container. 19 20 Inventory hardware jointly with representatives of the hardware supplier and the hardware installer 21 until each is satisfied that the count is correct. 22 23 Deliver individually packaged hardware items at the proper times to the proper locations (shop or 24 project site)for installation. 25 26 Provide secure lock-up for hardware delivered to the project, but not yet installed. Control handling 27 and installation of hardware items which are not immediately replaceable, so that completion of the 28 work will not be delayed by hardware losses, both before and after installation. 29 30 WARRANTY: 31 32 All finish hardware shall be supplied with one year warranty against defects in materials and 33 workmanship, commencing on Date of Substantial Completion. 34 35 EXTRA STOCK 36 37 At completion of Project, provide to Owner: 38 39 1. One complete bitting list of keys. 40 2. One set of instruction sheets for each item furnished. 41 3. One each of any non-standard tool for installation of any item furnished. 42 43 44 PART 2-PRODUCTS 45 46 47 MANUFACTURERS 48 49 Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 50 51 Butts and Hinges: 52 53 Hager Hinge Co. 54 McKinney Products Co. 55 Stanley Hardware, Div. Stanley Works. 56 57 Pivots: FINISH HARDWARE GDA 08710-3 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 Glynn-Johnson Corp. 3 Norton Door Controls, Div. Yale Security Inc. 4 Rixson-Firemark, Div. Yale Security Inc. 5 6 Pocket Pivots: 7 8 H. B. Ives,A Harrow Company. 9 10 Key Control System: 11 12 Key Control Systems, Inc. 13 Telkee Inc. 14 15 Cylinders and Locks: 16 17 Best Lock Corp. 18 Corbin& Russwin Architectural Hardware, Div. Black& Decker Corp. 19 Sargent Manufacturing Company. 20 Schlage Lock, Div. Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware Group. 21 Yale Security Inc. 22 23 Bolts: 24 25 Builders Brass Works Corp. 26 Glynn-Johnson Corp. 27 H. B. Ives,A Harrow Company. 28 Quality Hardware Mfg. Co., Inc.; Div. Newman Tonks, Inc. 29 30 Exit/Panic Devices: 31 32 Adams Rite Manufacturing Co. 33 Corbin & Russwin Architectural Hardware, Div. Black& Decker Corp. 34 Monarch Hardware& Mfg. Co., Div Newman Tonks, Inc. 35 Sargent Manufacturing Company. 36 Von Duprin, Div. Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware Group. 37 38 Push/Pull Units: 39 40 Builders Brass Works Corp. 41 Hiawatha, Inc. 42 H. B. Ives,A Harrow Company. 43 Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company(Trimco). 44 45 Surface Mounted Overhead Closers: 46 47 LCN, Div. Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware Group. 48 Norton Door Controls, Div. Yale Security Inc. 49 Rixson-Firemark, Div. Yale Security Inc. 50 Sargent Manufacturing Company. 51 Yale Security Inc. 52 53 Concealed Overhead Closers: 54 55 LCN, Div. Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware Group. 56 Norton Door Controls, Div. Yale Security Inc. 57 Rixson-Firemark, Div. Yale Security Inc. FINISH HARDWARE GDA 08710-4 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Sargent Manufacturing Company. 2 Yale Security Inc. 3 4 Floor Closers: 5 6 Dor-O-Matic. 7 Dorma Door Controls International. 8 Rixson-Firemark, Div. Yale Security Inc. 9 10 Door Control Devices: 11 12 Builders Brass Works Corp. 13 Glynn-Johnson Corp. 14 H. B. Ives, A Harrow Company. 15 Quality Hardware Mfg. Co., Inc.; Div. Newman Tonks, Inc. 16 Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company(Trimco). 17 18 Door Trim Units: 19 20 Builders Brass Works Corp. 21 H. B. Ives, A Harrow Company. 22 Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company (Trimco). 23 24 Kick, Mop,and Armor Plates: 25 26 Hiawatha, Inc. 27 H. B. Ives,A Harrow Company. 28 Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company(Trimco). 29 30 Bifold Door Hardware: 31 32 Grant Hardware Co. 33 P. C. Henderson Inc. 34 L. E. Johnson Products, Inc. 35 Stanley Hardware, Div. Stanley Works. 36 37 Door Stripping and Seals: 38 39 National Guard Products, Inc. 40 Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc. 41 Reese Enterprises, Inc. 42 Ultra Industries. 43 Zero International, Inc. 44 45 Thresholds: 46 47 National Guard Products, Inc. 48 Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc. 49 Reese Enterprises, Inc. 50 Zero International, Inc. 51 52 Automatic Drop Seals: 53 54 National Guard Products, Inc. 55 Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc. 56 Reese Enterprises, Inc. 57 Zero International, Inc. FINISH HARDWARE GDA 08710- 5 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 Sound Stripping: 3 4 National Guard Products, Inc. 5 Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc. 6 Reese Enterprises, Inc. 7 Zero International, Inc. 8 9 Astragals: 10 11 National Guard Products, Inc. 12 Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc. 13 Reese Enterprises, Inc. 14 Zero International, Inc. 15 16 Access Key Control Box: 17 18 The Knox Company 19 20 Access Control System: 21 22 Locknetics 23 24 Responsibilities of Finish Hardware Supplier: 25 26 Submittals: Provide through Contractor required Product Data, Final Hardware Schedule, Separate 27 Keying Schedule (if required), and samples as specified in Part 1 - General of this section, unless 28 otherwise indicated. 29 30 Construction Schedule: Inform Contractor at earliest possible date of estimated times and dates to 31 process submittals, to furnish templates, to deliver hardware, and to perform other work associated 32 with furnishing Finish Hardware for purposes of including in construction progress schedule and then 33 comply with this schedule. 34 35 Coordination and Templates: Assist Contractor as required to coordinate hardware with other work in 36 respect to both fabrication and installation. Furnish Contractor with templates and deliver hardware to 37 proper locations. 38 39 Product Handling: Package, identify, deliver, and inventory hardware as specified in Part 1 - General 40 of this section. 41 42 Discrepancies: Based on requirements indicated in Contract Documents in effect at time of hardware 43 selection: furnish proper types, finishes, and quantities of finish hardware, including fasteners, and 44 Owner's maintenance tools; and furnish or replace any items of finish hardware resulting from 45 shortages and incorrect items, at no cost to the Owner or Contractor. Obtain signed receipts from 46 Contractor for all delivered materials. 47 48 Responsibilities of Contractor: 49 50 Submittals: Coordinate and process submittals for Builders Hardware in same manner as submittals 51 for other work. 52 53 Construction Schedule: Cooperate with Finish Hardware supplier in establishing scheduled dates for 54 submittals and delivery of templates and finish hardware. 55 56 Coordination: Coordinate finish hardware with other work. Furnish hardware supplier or manufacturer 57 with shop drawings of other work where required or requested. Verify completeness and suitability of FINISH HARDWARE GDA 08710- 6 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 hardware with supplier. 2 3 Product Handling: Provide secure lock-up for hardware delivered to the site. Inventory hardware 4 jointly with representative of hardware supplier and issue signed receipts for all delivered materials. 5 Any hardware items lost, damaged or stolen after being accepted by Contractor shall be replaced at 6 Contractor's expense. 7 8 Installation Information: The general types and approximate quantities of hardware required for this 9 project are indicated at the end of this section in order to establish Contractors costs for installation 10 and other work not included in allowance. 11 12 SCHEDULED HARDWARE: 13 14 General: Products listed in the Hardware Schedule by manufacturer's product designations shall be 15 used to the exclusion of all products listed in the body of the specification. Where a product is listed 16 as only generic type (i.e. wall stop) in the Hardware Schedule, any product in the body of the 17 specification must be used to the exclusion of all other available products. 18 19 Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size and other distinctive qualities of each type of 20 finish hardware is indicated below or in the Hardware Schedule. Products are identified by using 21 hardware designation numbers of the following. 22 23 Manufacturer's product designations: One or more manufacturers are listed for each 24 hardware type required. An asterisk (*) after a manufacturer's name indicates whose product 25 designation is used in the Hardware Schedule for purposes of establishing minimum 26 requirements. Provide either the product designated, or, where more than one manufacturer 27 is listed, the comparable product of one of the other manufacturers which comply with 28 requirements including those specified elsewhere in this section. 29 30 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION: 31 32 General: 33 34 Hand of door: Drawings show direction of slide, swing or hand of each door leaf. Furnish each item of 35 hardware for proper installation and operation of door movement as shown. 36 37 Manufacturers Name Plate: Do not use manufacturer's products which have manufacturer's name or 38 trade name displayed in a visible location (omit removable nameplates), except in conjunction with 39 required UL labels and as otherwise acceptable to Architect. 40 41 Manufacturer's identification will be permitted on rim of lock cylinders, arm of closer, and end 42 cap of exit devices. 43 44 Base Metals: Produce hardware units of basic metal and forming method indicated, using 45 manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper and hardness, but in no case of lesser 46 (commercially recognized) quality than specified for the applicable hardware units by applicable 47 ANSI A156 series standard for each type hardware item and with ANSI A156.18 for finish 48 designations indicated. Do not furnish "optional" materials or forming methods for those indicated, 49 except as otherwise specified. 50 51 Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally prepared for 52 machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware which has been prepared for self-tapping sheet 53 metal screws, except as specifically indicated. 54 55 Furnish screws for installation, with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flat-head screws except as 56 otherwise indicated. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware finish 57 or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of such other work as closely as possible, FINISH HARDWARE GDA 08710- 7 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 including "prepared for paint" in surfaces to receive painted finish. 2 3 Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units which are exposed when door is closed, except to 4 extent no standard units of the type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use thru- 5 bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on the opposite face is exposed in other work, except 6 where it is not feasible to adequately reinforce the work. In such cases, provide sleeves for each thru- 7 bolt or use sex screw fasteners. 8 9 Tools and Maintenance Instructions for Maintenance: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and 10 maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal 11 and replacement of finish hardware. 12 13 HINGES, AND BUTTS: 14 15 Templates: Except for hinges to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and frames, 16 provide only template-produced units. 17 18 Screws: Furnish Phillips flat-head or machine screws for installation of units, except furnish Phillips 19 flat-head or wood screws for installation of units into wood. Finish screw heads to match surface of 20 hinges or pivots. 21 22 Doors with Closers: Provide five knuckle ball bearing butts. 23 24 Thickness: Provide thickness indicated on the schedule. If not indicated, provide standard duty. 25 26 Standard Duty(indicated as Butts): 0.134 inch, minimum. 27 28 Heavy Duty (indicated as HD Butts): 0.180 inch, minimum. 29 30 Butt Hinge Height: 31 32 Doors 1-3/4"thick and up to 36"wide shall have 4-1/2" butts. 33 34 Doors 1-3/4"thick; 37"to 48"wide shall have 5" butts. 35 36 Butt Hinge Width: All hinges shall be sized to clear all trim. 37 38 Number of hinges: Provide number of hinges indicated but not less than 3 hinges per door leaf for 39 doors 90" or less in height and one additional hinge for each 30" of additional height. 40 41 Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as follows: 42 43 Steel Hinges: Steel pins. 44 45 Non-ferrous Hinges: Stainless steel pins. 46 47 Exterior Doors: Non-removable pins. 48 49 Out-swing Corridor Doors: Non-removable pins. 50 51 Interior Doors: Non-rising pins. 52 53 Tips: Flat button and matching plug, finished to match leaves, except where hospital tip (HT) 54 indicated. 55 56 Electric Transfer Wire Hinge (indicated as ETW Butt): Where electrified device is specified for 57 hardware set, provide 5-wire electric transfer hinge as intermediate hinge. When scheduled, provide FINISH HARDWARE GDA 08710- 8 GDA#12018.00 December 14,2012 Issue for Permit 1 one less hinge for door, required by specification. 2 3 PIVOTS: 4 5 Templates: Except for pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and frames, 6 provide only template-produced units. 7 8 Screws: Furnish Phillips flat-head or machine screws for installation of units, except furnish Phillips 9 flat-head or wood screws for installation of units into wood. Finish screw heads to match surface of 10 hinges or pivots. 11 12 Pivots on non-fire rated doors: Where indicated as"Pivots", provide the following: 13 14 Product/Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the 15 following: 16 17 Top Pivot: 18 19 P1; Glynn-Johnson Corp. 20 OP440/75120; Dorma Door Controls Inc. 21 0875/280AC; Dor-O-Matic 22 117/180; Rixson 23 24 Intermediate Pivot: Provide for doors over 7'-6" high. 25 26 P3; Glynn-Johnson Corp. 27 OP440/75220; Dorma Door Controls Inc. 28 0875/019AC; Dor-O-Matic 29 117/M19; Rixson 30 31 Bottom Pivot: 32 33 P2; Glynn-Johnson Corp. 34 OP440/75320; Dorma Door Controls Inc. 35 0875/220N870; Dor-O-Matic 36 117; Rixson 37 38 Pivots on fire rated doors (three-hour maximum): Where indicated as "Pivots-FR", provide the 39 following: 40 41 Finish: US32D only. 42 43 Product/Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the 44 following: 45 46 Top Pivot: 47 48 P1 F; Glynn-Johnson Corp. 49 OPF440/75133; Dorma Door Controls Inc. 50 F0875/280AC; Dor-O-Matic 51 F117/F180; Rixson 52 53 Intermediate Pivot: Provide for doors over 7'-6"high. 54 55 P3F; Glynn-Johnson Corp. 56 OPF440/75220; Dorma Door Controls Inc. 57 F0875/019AC; Dor-O-Matic FINISH HARDWARE GDA 08710-9 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 F117/FM19; Rixson 2 3 Bottom Pivot: 4 5 P2F ; Glynn-Johnson Corp. 6 OPF440/75323/7471 K; Dorma Door Controls Inc. 7 F0875/220A/870; Dor-O-Matic 8 F117; Rixson 9 10 POCKET PIVOTS: 11 12 Templates: Except for pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and frames, 13 provide only template-produced units. 14 15 Screws: Furnish Phillips flat-head or machine screws for installation of units, except furnish Phillips 16 flat-head or wood screws for installation of units into wood. Finish screw heads to match surface of 17 hinges or pivots. 18 19 ProducUManufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products the following: 20 21 P91105F; H. B. Ives, A Harrow Company. 22 23 LOCK CYLINDERS AND KEYING: 24 25 General: Supplier will meet with Owner to finalize keying requirements and obtain final instructions in 26 writing. 27 28 System: Except as otherwise indicated, provide new grandmasterkey system for project. 29 30 Equip locks with cylinders for interchangeable-core pin tumbler inserts. Furnish only temporary inserts 31 for the construction period, and remove these when directed. 32 33 Finish hardware supplier will provide final inserts, unless otherwise indicated. 34 35 Metals: Construct lock cylinder parts from brass/bronze, stainless steel or nickel silver. 36 37 Comply with Owner's instructions for masterkeying and, except as otherwise indicated, provide 38 individual change key for each lock which is not designated to be keyed alike with a group of related 39 locks. 40 41 Permanently inscribe each key with number or lock that identifies cylinder manufacturer key 42 symbol, and notation "DO NOT DUPLICATE". 43 44 Key Material: Provide keys of nickel silver only. 45 46 Key Quantity: Furnish 3 change keys for each lock; 6 master keys for each master system. 47 48 Deliver keys to Owner's representative. 49 50 Provide a key cabinet: 51 52 Model: 300 series x Velcro as manufactured by Key Control Systems, Inc. 53 54 LOCKSETS AND LATCHSETS: 55 56 Provide mortise style locksets with 3/4" throw anti-friction latchbolt, lock strikes shall be ASA 4-7/8" 57 with curved lipped design, unless otherwise specified. Locksets, latchsets, and cylinders to be by one FINISH HARDWARE GDA 08710- 10 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 manufacturer. 2 3 Provide knurled finish on lockset levers to hazardous areas. 4 5 Product/Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the 6 following: 7 8 Mortise Locksets: 9 10 35H Series; Best Lock Corp. 11 ML2200 Series; Corbin &Russwin Architectural Hardware, Div. Black& Decker Corp. 12 8100 Series; Sargent Manufacturing Company. 13 L Series; Schlage Lock, Div. Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware Group. 14 Yale Security Inc. 15 16 Lever and Rose: 17 A; Schlage, or Architect approved equivalent from manufacturers listed 17 above. 18 19 Cylindrical Locksets: 20 21 9K Series; Best Lock Corp. 22 CL3400 Series; Corbin & Russwin Architectural Hardware, Div. Black& Decker Corp. 23 10-Line Series; Sargent Manufacturing Company. 24 D Series; Schlage Lock, Div. Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware Group. 25 5400L Series; Yale Security Inc. 26 27 Lever and Rose: Sparta, or Architect approved equivalent from manufacturers listed above. 28 29 EXIT DEVICES: 30 31 Exit Device No. 1: 32 33 Provide modern touchbar design overlapping "T" style touchpad to prevent pinching of fingers. 34 Touchpad shall incorporate fluid dampers to quiet operation and absorb shock. Unless otherwise 35 specified, touchpad shall be of stainless steel. For safety, touchpad shall not extend full length of 36 device. Provide only low friction fire rated roller strikes at all applicable applications. Latchbolts shall 37 be protected by anti-theft/pic proof device. Endcaps shall be metallic with two point attachment to door 38 and three point attachment to device. Unless otherwise specified, provide lever trim in compliance with 39 ADA similar to Von Duprin 35/99 x 06 with sag proof/vandal resistant design. 40 41 Exit Device Dogging: Except on fire-rated doors where closers are provided on doors equipped with 42 exit devices, equip the units with standard hex keyed dogging device to keep the latch bolt retracted, 43 when engaged. 44 45 Product/Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the 46 following: 47 48 Exit/Panic Devices: 49 50 Corbin & Russwin Architectural Hardware, Div. Black & Decker Corp. 51 Monarch Hardware & Mfg. Co., Div Newman Tonks, Inc. 52 Sargent Manufacturing Company. 53 35/99 Series; Von Duprin, Div. Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware Group. 54 55 Exit Device No. 2: 56 57 Provide exit devices actuated by full-width crash bar; in compliance with UL 305. Provide radius faced FINISH HARDWARE GDA 08710 - 11 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 touchbar of "I" style design touchpad. Provide unit for keyed mortise cylinder operation of the latch 2 from outside. Latchbolts shall be protected by anti-theft/pic proof device. Unless otherwise specified, 3 provide pullever trim in compliance with ADA. 4 5 Exit Device Dogging: Except on fire-rated doors where closers are provided on doors equipped with 6 exit devices, equip the units with standard hex keyed dogging device to keep the latch bolt retracted, 7 when engaged. 8 9 Product/Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the 10 following: 11 12 Exit/Panic Devices: 13 14 8000 Series; Adams Rite Manufacturing Co. 15 16 Entry Trim: 3088 pullever entry trim, 08 function. 17 18 Manufacturer: Series 8000, radius face pushbar;Adams Rite. 19 20 EXIT CONTROL (ALARM) LOCK 21 22 Where indicated, provide the following: 23 24 Product/Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the 25 following: 26 27 Alarm lock for single doors: ECL-2230D x ECL-445K with BE-960 Battery Eliminator and 28 12VAC transformer, and strike; Detex. 29 30 Alarm lock for double doors: ECL-230D x VRA-143D (Specify Door Height) with BE-960 31 Battery Eliminator and 12VAC transformer for each leaf; 32 Detex. 33 34 CLOSERS: 35 36 Provide only institutional grade heavy duty cast iron door closers with double heat treated steel 37 piston/shaft design. All closers shall be factory handed, sized and shipped with cardboard template to 38 insure correct installation by contractor. Units shall be independently certified to a minimum of 39 10,000,000 cycles in compliance with ANSI testing requirements. Hydraulic fluid shall be o-ring 40 compatible with constant viscosity for a temperature range of-20 deg. F to 100 deg. F. 41 42 At push side mounted locations provide extra duty arms and knuckles, similar to LCN 4110 EDA, or 43 Architect approved equivalent. 44 45 Size of Units: Except as otherwise specifically indicated, comply with the manufacturer's 46 recommendations for size of door control unit depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and 47 anticipated frequency of use. 48 49 Where parallel arms are indicated for closers, provide closer unit one size larger than 50 recommended for use with standard arms. 51 52 Provide parallel arms,where indicated on schedule, and for all overhead closers, except where closer 53 will be mounted on public side of door; in this case provide regular arm mounting. Avoid use of 54 brackets wherever possible. 55 56 Adjust all closers in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations at the building site. 57 FINISH HARDWARE GDA 08710- 12 GDA#12018.00 December 14,2012 Issue for Permit 1 Access-Free Manual Closers: Where manual closers are indicated for doors required to be 2 accessible to the physically handicapped, provide adjustable units complying with ANSI A117.1 3 provisions for door opening force and delayed action closing. 4 5 Mount closers with wood or machine screws. No though bolt mounting allowed. 6 7 Product/Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 8 9 Surface Mounted Overhead Closers: 10 11 4010/4110; LCN, Div. Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware Group. 12 13 Concealed Overhead Closers: 14 15 2030; LCN, Div. Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware Group. 16 17 PULLS 18 19 Concealed Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's special concealed fastener system for installation, thru- 20 bolted for matched pairs but not for single units. 21 22 Product/Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the 23 following: 24 25 Straight Pulls: 26 27 2909; Builders Brass Works Corp. 28 536B; Hiawatha, Inc. 29 No. 163; Quality Hardware Mfg. Co., Inc.; Div. Newman Tonks, Inc. 30 1195-2; Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company (Trimco). 31 32 Offset Pulls: 33 34 2952; Builders Brass Works Corp. 35 658A; Hiawatha, Inc. 36 No. 521; Quality Hardware Mfg. Co., Inc.; Div. Newman Tonks, Inc. 37 1191-3; Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company(Trimco). 38 39 PUSH BARS 40 41 Concealed Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's special concealed fastener system for installation, thru- 42 bolted for matched pairs but not for single units. 43 44 Product/Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the 45 following: 46 47 Push Bars: 48 49 2988 x 33"; Builders Brass Works Corp. 50 1081 LBP 33"; Hiawatha, Inc. 51 No. 473 x 33"; Quality Hardware Mfg. Co., Inc.; Div. Newman Tonks, Inc. 52 1741 x 33"; Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company(Trimco). 53 54 PUSH BAR/PULL SETS 55 56 Concealed Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's special concealed fastener system for installation, thru- 57 bolted for matched pairs but not for single units. FINISH HARDWARE GDA 08710- 13 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 Product/Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the 3 following: 4 5 Push Bar/Pull Sets: 6 7 2923 x 33" Builders Brass Works Corp. 8 536B x 1081 LBP 33"; Hiawatha, Inc. 9 No.482 x 33"; Quality Hardware Mfg. Co., Inc.; Div. Newman Tonks, Inc. 10 1731 x 33"; Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company (Trimco). 11 12 Offset Push Bar/Pull Sets: 13 14 2958 x 33"; Builders Brass Works Corp. 15 658A x 1081 LBP 33"; Hiawatha, Inc. 16 No.484 x 33"; Quality Hardware Mfg. Co., Inc.; Div. Newman Tonks, Inc. 17 1737 x 33"; Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company (Trimco). 18 19 PULL PLATES 20 21 Concealed Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's special concealed fastener system for installation, thru- 22 bolted for matched pairs but not for single units. 23 24 Product/Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the 25 following: 26 27 Pull Plates: 28 29 47D x 2909 (plate preped for pull); Builders Brass Works Corp. 30 200D x 535B; Hiawatha, Inc. 31 1001-2 x 1195-2 (plate preped for pull); Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company (Trimco). 32 33 PUSH PLATES 34 35 Concealed Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's special concealed fastener system for installation, thru- 36 bolted for matched pairs but not for single units. 37 38 Product/Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the 39 following: 40 41 Push Plates: 42 43 47-D; Builders Brass Works Corp. 44 200D; Hiawatha, Inc. 45 1001-2; Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company(Trimco). 46 47 PROTECTION PLATES: 48 49 Provide .050"thick stainless steel plates, with four beveled edges and flat head counter sunk screws. 50 51 Fabricate protection plates not more than 2-inches less than door width on push side and not more 52 than 1-inch less than door width on pull side by height indicated. 53 54 Kickplates: 8", unless indicated otherwise. 55 56 Mop plates: 6", unless indicated otherwise. 57 FINISH HARDWARE GDA 08710- 14 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Armor plates: 36", unless indicated otherwise. 2 3 Product/Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the 4 following: 5 6 Kick, Mop, and Armor Plates: 7 8 Hiawatha, Inc. 9 H. B. Ives,A Harrow Company. 10 Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company(Trimco). 11 12 FLOOR STOPS: 13 14 Provide floor stops with anchoring suitable for floor construction. 15 16 Product/Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the 17 following: 18 19 Builders Brass Works Corp. 20 FB16R; Glynn-Johnson Corp. 21 436 x 435; H. B. Ives, A Harrow Company. 22 441; Rockwood Manufacturing 23 Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company(Trimco). 24 25 Where rubber bumper stops(RB Stop)are indicated on the Hardware Schedule, provide: 26 27 FB18S; Glynn Johnson. 28 462; Rockwood Manufacturing. 29 30 WALL STOPS: 31 32 Provide wall stops with anchoring suitable for wall construction. 33 34 Product/Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the 35 following: 36 37 Builders Brass Works Corp. 38 60W; Glynn-Johnson Corp. 39 407-1/2; H. B. Ives,A Harrow Company. 40 406; Rockwood Manufacturing 41 Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company(Trimco). 42 43 OVERHEAD STOPS: 44 45 Provide stops of stainless steel with metallic shock blocks, endcaps, and components. Plastic 46 components are unacceptable. 47 48 Product/Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 49 50 Concealed Overhead Holder/Stop (Exterior Doors): 51 52 100; Glynn-Johnson Corp. 53 54 Concealed Overhead Holder/Stop(Interior Doors): 55 56 400; Glynn-Johnson Corp. 57 FINISH HARDWARE GDA 08710- 15 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Surface Mounted Overhead Stop: 2 3 90; Glynn-Johnson Corp. 4 5 FLUSHBOLTS AND COORDINATORS: 6 7 Provide all components by one manufacturer. Flushbolts shall incorporate low friction, investment 8 cast, cam style trigger. Flushbolts, except manual bolts, shall be of stainless steel. Provide full 9 dustproof strike, similar to Glynn-Johnson DP2, or Architect approved equivalent, at all flushbolt 10 applications. Coordinators shall be modern type with adjustable override feature. 11 12 Product/Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the 13 following: 14 15 Flushbolts: 16 17 FB6 x 12 w/DP2; Glynn-Johnson Corp. 18 No. 1357 wl No 1225; Quality Hardware Mfg. Co., Inc.; Div. Newman Tonks, Inc. 19 555 x 12 w/dustproof strike; Rockwood Manufacturing. 20 21 Flushbolts (Labeled Doors): 22 23 FB6 x 12 w/ DP2; Glynn-Johnson Corp. 24 No. 1357UL w/ No 1225; Quality Hardware Mfg. Co., Inc.; Div. Newman Tonks, Inc. 25 555 x 12 w/dustproof strike; Rockwood Manufacturing. 26 27 Coordinators: 28 29 3094; Builders Brass Works Corp. 30 COR Series; Glynn-Johnson Corp. 31 SR 400; Dorma Door Controls Inc. 32 3094; Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company (Trimco). 33 34 LATCH GUARDS 35 36 Provide units as specified or equivalent design units with respect to thickness, anchorage, finish, 37 surface, and dimensions. 38 39 LP3; Glynn-Johnson Corp. 40 41 SEALS: 42 43 Provide units as specified or equivalent design units with respect to thickness, anchorage, finish, 44 surface, and dimensions. 45 46 Smoke and Draft Seals at Jambs and Heads and Rigid Jamb Weatherstripping: 47 48 127NSA; National Guard Products, Inc. 49 305CR; Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc. 50 DS70; Reese Enterprises, Inc. 51 WS 002-C; Ultra Industries. 52 Zero International, Inc. 53 54 Bulb Seal: Flexible, hollow silicone bulb or loop insert. Color as selected by Architect. Provide 55 surface-applied type of following: 56 57 PF181; National Guard Products, Inc. FINISH HARDWARE GDA 08710- 16 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 S88; Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc. 2 WS 108; Ultra Industries. 3 4 SWEEPS: 5 6 Provide units as specified or equivalent design units with respect to thickness, anchorage, finish, 7 surface, and dimensions. 8 9 Product/Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the 10 following: 11 12 Sweep: 13 14 97VA; National Guard Products, Inc. 15 307AV; Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc. 16 806; Reese Enterprises, Inc. 17 DB 005-A; Ultra Industries. 18 19 Sweep w/Drip: 20 21 101AV; National Guard Products, Inc. 22 3452AV; Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc. 23 353; Reese Enterprises, Inc. 24 DB 037-A; Ultra Industries. 25 26 DRIP CAPS: 27 28 Provide units as specified or equivalent design units with respect to thickness, anchorage, finish, 29 surface, and dimensions. 30 31 Product/Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the 32 following: 33 34 Drip Cap: 35 36 16AD; National Guard Products, Inc. 37 346C; Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc. 38 R201A; Reese Enterprises, Inc. 39 WS 025-C; Ultra Industries. 40 142; Zero International, Inc. 41 42 THRESHOLDS: 43 44 General: Except as otherwise indicated on drawings provide standard metal threshold unit of type, 45 size and profile as shown or scheduled. 46 47 Provide threshold of following metal,finish: 48 49 Extruded aluminum with natural anodized finish; 0.062" minimum thickness of main walls and 50 flanges. 51 52 Product/Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the 53 following: 54 55 Threshold No. 1 (1/4" Full Saddle1: 56 57 513; National Guard Products, Inc. FINISH HARDWARE GDA 08710- 17 • GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 271A; Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc. 2 S405A; Reese Enterprises, Inc. 3 TH 042-A; Ultra Industries. 4 545; Zero International, Inc. 5 6 Threshold No. 2 (1/4" Half Saddle): 7 8 274A; Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc. 9 TH 162-A; Ultra Industries. 10 11 Threshold No. 3(1/2"oa. height Panic Exit Saddle): 12 13 2005AS; Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc. 14 S483AV; Reese Enterprises, Inc. 15 TH 040-A; Ultra Industries. 16 17 POWER SUPPLY 18 19 Product/Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 20 21 Provide 505 with EIR-5 option; Locknetics. 22 23 MAGNETIC LOCK 24 25 Product/Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 26 27 Provide 390+; Locknetics. 28 29 MAGNETIC DOOR HOLD 30 31 Product/Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 32 33 SEM7850 MAGNET; LCN, Div. Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware Group. 34 35 TRANSFORMER 36 37 Product/Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the 38 following: 39 40 4040SED-3210; LCN, Div. Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware Group. 41 42 SILENCERS 43 44 Silencers: Provide the following or Owner/Architect approved equal: 45 46 Provide door silencers at all openings w/o weatherstripping or smoke and draft seals. Provide two per 47 leaf at pair doors and three at single leaf doors. 48 49 Product/Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the 50 following: 51 52 W07; Builders Brass Works Corp. 53 64; Glynn Johnson. 54 1229A; Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company(Trimco). 55 56 ACCESS KEY CONTROL BOX 57 FINISH HARDWARE GDA 08710- 18 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Product/Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 2 3 Model 3200; The Knox Company 4 5 HARDWARE FINISHES: 6 7 Provide matching finishes for hardware units at each door or opening, to the greatest extent possible, 8 and except as otherwise indicated. Reduce differences in color and textures as much as commercially 9 possible where the base metal or metal forming process is different for individual units of hardware 10 exposed at the same door or opening. In general, match items to the manufacturer's standard finish 11 for the latch and lock set(or push-pull units if no latch-lock sets)for color and texture. 12 13 Provide finishes which match those established by BHMA or, if none established, match the 14 Architect's sample. 15 16 Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness and 17 other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified for the 18 applicable units of hardware by referenced standards. 19 20 Provide protective lacquer coating on all exposed hardware finishes of brass, bronze and aluminum, 21 except as otherwise indicated. The suffix "-NL" is used with standard finish designations to indicate 22 "no lacquer". 23 24 Finishes: 25 26 Exterior Doors: US32D (630) 27 Interior Doors: US26D (626) 28 29 30 PART 3- EXECUTION 31 32 33 INSTALLATION: 34 35 Mount hardware units at heights indicated in "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for 36 Standard Steel Doors and Frames" by the Door and Hardware Institute, except as specifically 37 indicated or required to comply with governing regulations, and except as may be otherwise directed 38 by Architect. 39 40 Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. 41 Wherever cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces which are later to be 42 painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage and reinstallation or application of 43 surface protections with finishing work specified in the Division-9 sections. Do not install surface- 44 mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. 45 46 Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as 47 necessary for proper installation and operation. 48 49 Drill and countersink units which are not factory-prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners 50 and anchors in accordance with industry standards. 51 52 Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl-rubber or polyisobutylene mastic sealant. 53 54 ADJUST AND CLEAN: 55 56 Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door, to ensure proper operation or 57 function of every unit. Replace units which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly as FINISH HARDWARE GDA 08710- 19 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 intended for the application made. 2 3 Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation. 4 5 Final Adjustment: Wherever hardware installation is made more than one month prior to acceptance 6 or occupancy of a space or area, return to the work during the week prior to acceptance or 7 occupancy, and make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean 8 operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door 9 control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment. 10 11 Instruct Owner's Personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware and hardware finishes, 12 during the final adjustment of hardware. 13 14 Continued Maintenance Service: Approximately six months after the acceptance of hardware in each 15 area, the Installer, accompanied by the representative of the latch and lock manufacturer, shall return 16 to the project and re-adjust every item of hardware to restore proper function of doors and hardware. 17 Consult with and instruct Owner's personnel in recommended additions to the maintenance 18 procedures. Replace hardware items which have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, materials 19 or installation of hardware units. Prepare a written report of current and predictable problems (of 20 substantial nature)in the performance of the hardware. 21 22 23 END OF SECTION 0870 24 FINISH HARDWARE GDA 08710- 20 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 EXTERIOR HARDWARE SETS: 2 3 Set No. 1 — Not Used 4 5 6 Set No. 2 - Not Used 7 8 9 Set No. 3- Not Used 10 11 12 Set No. 4- Pair Exterior Storefront Doors (Existing to Remain in Use)—Card Reader 13 14 Hardware provided by Others 15 16 Magnetic Lock 17 Door Position Switch 18 Power Supply 19 Card Reader 20 21 22 Set No. 5—Single New Exterior Hollow Metal Door—Card Reader 23 24 Exit Device- Rim Type 25 Butt Hinges 26 Closer(Overhead Surface Mount)with Heavy Duty Spring Arm 27 Electric strike 28 Sweep 29 Threshold 30 Weatherseals 31 Drip Edge 32 Door Position Switch 33 34 Hardware provided by Others 35 36 Card Reader 37 38 39 Set No. 5a —Single New Exterior Hollow Metal Door 40 41 Exit Device - Rim Type 42 Butt Hinges 43 Closer(Overhead Surface Mount)with Heavy Duty Spring Arm 44 Sweep 45 Threshold 46 Weatherseals 47 Drip Edge 48 Door Position Switch 49 FINISH HARDWARE GDA 08710 - 21 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 Set No. 6 - Pair New Exterior Hollow Metal Doors 3 4 Electrified Exit Device-Concealed Vertical Rod (CVR) x RX x Lever Trim-Active Leaf(LHR) 5 Panic Hardware (CVR)- Inactive Leaf 6 Butt Hinges 7 Closers (Overhead Surface Mount)with hold open arm - each leaf 8 Stops(Concealed) 9 Sweeps 10 Threshold 11 Weatherseals 12 Meeting Stile Weatherseal 13 Drip Edge 14 Door Position Switch 15 Power Supply 16 17 Hardware provided by Others 18 19 Card Reader 20 21 22 INTERIOR HARDWARE SETS: 23 24 Set No. 7 -Overhead Coiling Shutter 25 26 Padlock 27 Door Position Switch 28 29 30 Set No. 7a-Overhead Rail Slide Gates 31 32 Padlock 33 Door Position Switch 34 35 36 Set No. 8-Not Used 37 38 39 Set No. 9 -Single Interior Hollow Metal Door 40 41 Exit Devices- Rim type x outside lever trim (classroom function) 42 Butt Hinges 43 Closer(Overhead Surface Mount)-with Heavy Duty Spring Arm 44 Silencers 45 46 47 Set No. 10- Not Used 48 49 50 Set No. 11 - Not Used 51 FINISH HARDWARE GDA 08710- 22 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Set No. 12 - Single Interior Hollow Metal Door— Card Reader 2 3 Exit Device- Rim Type x RX x Lever Trim (Storeroom Function) 4 Butt Hinges 5 Closer(Overhead Surface Mount) 6 Electric Strike— Fail Secure 7 Stop (Wall) 8 Kick Plate- each side 9 Silencers 10 Power Supply 11 12 Hardware provided by Others 13 14 Card Reader on ingress side to retract electric strike 15 16 17 Set No. 13 -Single Interior Solid Core Wood Door 18 19 Cylindrical Lockset(Storeroom Function) 20 Butt Hinges 21 Closer(Overhead Surface Mount)w/Heavy Duty Hold Open Arm 22 Stop (Wall) 23 Silencers 24 25 26 Set No. 13a - Pair Interior Solid Core Wood Door 27 28 Cylindrical Lockset (Storeroom Function)—active leaf 29 Butt Hinges 30 Closer(Overhead Surface Mount)w/ Heavy Duty Hold Open Arm—active leaf 31 Flushbolts with dust proof strike— inactive leaf 32 Stop (Wall) 33 Silencers 34 35 36 Set No. 14 - Single Interior Door with Card Reader 37 38 Cylindrical Lockset (Storeroom Function) 39 Butt Hinges 40 Closer(Overhead Surface Mount) 41 Stop (Wall) 42 Silencers 43 Electric Strike— Fail Secure 44 Door Position Switch 45 Power Supply 46 47 Hardware provided by Others 48 49 Card Reader 50 FINISH HARDWARE GDA 08710 -23 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Set No. 15-Single Interior Solid Core Wood Door 2 3 Cylindrical Lockset(Office Function) 4 Butt Hinges 5 Stop (Wall) 6 Coat Hook 7 Silencers 8 9 10 Set No. 16-Single Interior Solid Core Wood Door 11 12 Cylindrical Latchset(Passage Function) 13 Butt Hinges 14 Stop (Wall) 15 Silencers 16 17 18 Set No. 17- Pair Interior Aluminum Storefront Door(per Section 08410)w/Card Reader 19 20 Cylinder 21 22 23 Hardware provided per Section 08410 24 25 Electrified Exit Device (CVR Type)x RX x OP—active leaf 26 Exit Device (CVR Type)x OP—inactive leaf 27 Pulls 28 Butt Hinges 29 Closers (Overhead Concealed) 30 Power Supply 31 32 Hardware provided by Others 33 34 Card Reader on ingress side to activate ELR exit device 35 36 37 Set No. 18-Single Interior Solid Core Wood Door 38 39 Cylindrical Lockset(Privacy Function) 40 Butt Hinges 41 Stop (Wall) 42 Silencers 43 Kickplates 44 45 46 Set No. 19-Single Interior Solid Core Wood Door 47 48 Butt Hinges 49 Push/Pull Plates 50 Closer(Overhead Surface Mount) 51 Stop (Wall) 52 Silencers 53 Kickplate both sides 54 FINISH HARDWARE GDA 08710-24 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Set No. 20- Pair Interior Fire Rated Solid Core Wood Doors 2 3 Exit Devices—CVR type x outside lever trim (classroom function) 4 Butt Hinges 5 Closers(Overhead Surface Mount)- Heavy Duty Arm 6 Stops (Wall) 7 Smoke Seals 8 9 10 Set No. 21 -Single Interior Aluminum Stile and Rail Doors (per Section 08121) 11 12 Straight Push/Pull 13 Butt Hinges 14 Closer(Overhead Surface) 15 Stop—Concealed Mounted 16 Silencers 17 18 Set No. 21a - Pair Interior Aluminum Stile and Rail Doors (per Section 08121) 19 20 Straight Push/Pulls 21 Butt Hinges 22 Closers (Overhead Surface) 23 Stops—Concealed Mounted 24 Silencers 25 26 HARDWARE NOTES 27 28 1. Set thresholds in full bed of mastic. Provide interchangeable core cylinders in all locks. 29 30 2. Provide number of hinges indicated but not less than 3 hinges per leaf for door 90"or less in height 31 and one additional hinge for each 30" of additional height. Provide 4 hinges per leaf for doors wider 32 than 36". Provide heavy duty ball bearing hinges on doors with closer. All hinges shall be fully 33 mortised type. 34 35 3. Provide tactile lever handle where indicated and at all hazardous locations (e.g. mechanical 36 equipment rooms, electrical rooms, sprinkler pump, and fire rooms). 37 38 4. Door closers shall be adjusted so that the sweep period of the door from an open position of 39 seventy (70) degrees, the door will take at least three (3) seconds to move to a point three (3) inches 40 from the latch, measured at leading edge of the door. 41 42 5. Signage "ACC"-provide accessable signage per accessibility standard and ADA requirements. 43 Note: all signage shall contain braille characters as required by building code. 44 45 6. Contractor to contract the purchase and installation of interior signage, required per accessibility 46 standard and the building code. 47 48 7. Provide smoke seals at all fire rated doors with a U.L. listing for the noted exposure. 49 50 8. Provide silencers for all doors not provided with weatherstripping or smoke seals 51 52 9. Provide lock guard at outside face of exterior H.M. doors typ. 53 54 10. Handles, latches, knobs, pulls, locks and other operating devices on accessible doors shall be 55 mounted no higher than 48"above the finished floor or ground surface. Door levers, etc. For wood and 56 hollow metal doors to be located at the same height a.f.f. 57 FINISH HARDWARE GDA 08710 -25 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 11. Operating force for interior hinged doors shall not exceed (5)ft. Lbs. 2 3 12. Strikes for door frames per Section 08125: 4 5 A. Adjustable strikes: Emboss frames for TA-1 strike for cylindrical lock. Provide TA-1 strike in 6 finish compatible with hardware finish. (ANSI 2 3/4" T strike supplied with cylindrical lock cannot be 7 used with standard frame because of unique strike location and screw piercing method) 8 9 B. Prepare frames for ASA 4-7/8"strikes where required. Provide minimum '/," depth of 10 threads in factory tapped screw holes 11 12 13 End of Schedule FINISH HARDWARE GDA 08710- 26 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 SECTION 08800- GLASS AND GLAZING 2 3 4 PART 1 - GENERAL 5 6 7 RELATED DOCUMENTS: 8 9 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and 10 Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 11 12 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 13 14 Definitions: "Glass" includes both primary and fabricated glass products as described in FMGA 15 "Glazing Manual". "Glazing" includes glass installation and materials used to install glass. 16 17 Extent of glass and glazing work is indicated on drawings and schedules. 18 19 Types of work in this section include glass and glazing for: 20 21 Interior storefront glazing 22 Borrowed lites 23 24 QUALITY ASSURANCE: 25 26 Glazing Standards: Comply with recommendations of Flat Glass Marketing Association (FMGA) 27 "Glazing Manual" and "Sealant Manual" except where more stringent requirements are indicated. 28 Refer to those publications for definitions of glass and glazing terms not otherwise defined in this 29 section or other referenced standards. 30 31 Safety Glazing Standard: Where safety glass is indicated or required by authorities having 32 jurisdiction, provide type of products indicated which comply with ANSI Z97.1 and testing 33 requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201 for category II materials. 34 35 Single Source Responsibility: Provide materials obtained from one source for each type of glass and 36 glazing product indicated. 37 38 SUBMITTALS: 39 40 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for each glazing material and fabrication glass 41 product required, including installation and maintenance instructions. 42 43 Samples: Submit, for verification purposes, 12" square samples of each type of glass indicated 44 except for clear single pane units, and 12" long samples of each color required (except black)for each 45 type of sealant or gasket exposed to view. Install sealant or gasket sample between two strips of 46 material representative of adjoining framing system in color. 47 48 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: 49 50 Protect glass and glazing materials during delivery, storage and handling to comply with 51 manufacturer's directions and as required to prevent edge damage to glass, and damage to glass and 52 glazing materials from effects of moisture including condensation, of temperature changes, of direct 53 exposure to sun, and from other causes. 54 55 56 PART 2— PRODUCTS 57 GLASS AND GLAZING GDA 08800 - 1 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS 3 4 Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products indicated in 5 schedules at the end of Part 3. 6 7 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL: 8 9 Heat-Treated Glass Standard: Provide heat-treated glass which complies with FS DD-G-1403 10 requirements, including those indicated by reference to grade,style, type, quality, and class. 11 12 Sizes: Fabricate glass to sizes required for glazing openings indicated, with edge clearances and 13 tolerances complying with recommendations of glass manufacturer. Provide thicknesses indicated or, 14 if not otherwise indicated, as recommended by glass manufacturer for application indicated. 15 16 PRIMARY FLOAT GLASS 17 18 Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Quality q3 (glazing select); class as 19 indicated in schedules at the end of Part 3. 20 21 HEAT-TREATED FLOAT GLASS 22 23 Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom 24 edge of glass as installed, unless otherwise indicated. 25 26 Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I (transparent glass, flat); Quality q3 (glazing select); 27 class, kind, and condition as indicated in schedules at the end of Part 3. 28 29 GLAZING GASKETS 30 31 Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of material indicated below, complying 32 with standards referenced with name of elastomer indicated below, and of profile and hardness 33 required to maintain watertight seal: 34 35 Silicone, ASTM C 1115. 36 37 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS: 38 39 Compatibility: Provide materials with proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in 40 installation. 41 42 Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. 43 44 Setting Blocks: Silicone blocks as required for compatibility with glazing sealants, 80 to 90 Shore A 45 durometer hardness. 46 47 Spacers: Silicone blocks, or continuous extrusions, as required for compatibility with glazing sealant, 48 of size, shape and hardness recommended by glass and sealant manufacturers for application 49 indicated. 50 51 Edge Blocks: Silicone blocks as required for compatibility with glazing sealant, of size and hardness 52 required to limit lateral movement(side-walking)of glass. 53 54 55 PART 3- EXECUTION 56 57 GLASS AND GLAZING GDA 08800-2 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 INSPECTION: 2 3 Require Glazier to inspect work of glass framing erector for compliance with manufacturing and 4 installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, offsets at corners; for presence and 5 functioning of weep system; for existence of minimum required face or edge clearances; and for 6 effective sealing of joinery. Obtain Glazier's written report listing conditions detrimental to 7 performance of glazing work. Do not allow glazing work to proceed until unsatisfactory conditions 8 have been corrected. 9 10 PREPARATION: 11 12 Clean glazing channels and other framing members to receive glass, immediately before glazing. 13 Remove coatings which are not firmly bonded to substrates. Remove lacquer from metal surfaces 14 where elastomeric sealants are indicated for use. 15 16 GLAZING, GENERAL: 17 18 Comply with combined printed recommendations of glass manufacturers, of manufacturers of 19 sealants, gaskets and other glazing materials, except where more stringent requirements are 20 indicated, including those of referenced glazing standards. 21 22 Glazing channel dimensions as indicated in details are intended to provide for necessary bite on 23 glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable 24 tolerances. Adjust as required by job conditions at time of installation. 25 26 Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation; use a rolling block in rotating glass 27 units to prevent damage to glass corners. Do not impact glass with metal framing. Use suction cups 28 to shift glass units within openings; do not raise or drift glass with a pry bar. Rotate glass with flares or 29 bevels along one horizontal edge which would occur in vicinity of setting blocks so that these are 30 located at top of opening. Remove from project and dispose of glass units with edge damage or other 31 imperfections of kind that,when installed, weakens glass and impairs performance and appearance. 32 33 GLAZING: 34 35 Install setting blocks of proper size in sill rabbet, located one quarter of glass width from each corner, 36 but no closer than 6", unless otherwise required. Set blocks in thin course of sealant which is 37 acceptable for heel bead use. 38 39 Provide spacers inside and out, of correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, for 40 glass sizes larger than 50 united inches, except where gaskets or glazing tapes with continuous 41 spacer rods are used for glazing. Provide 1/8" minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness 42 equal to sealant width, except with sealant tape use thickness slightly less than final compressed 43 thickness of tape. 44 45 Provide edge blocking to comply with requirements of referenced glazing standard, except where 46 otherwise required by glass unit manufacturer. 47 48 Set units of glass in each series with uniformity of pattern, draw, bow and similar characteristics. 49 50 Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on 51 opposite side, provide adequate anchorage to ensure that gasket will not "walk" out when installation 52 is subjected to movement. 53 54 Miter cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in manner recommended by gasket 55 manufacturer to prevent pull away at corners; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant 56 recommended by gasket manufacturer. 57 GLASS AND GLAZING GDA 08800-3 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 PROTECTION AND CLEANING: 2 3 Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately upon installation by use of crossed streamers 4 attached to framing and held away from glass. Do not apply markers to surfaces of glass. Remove 5 nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. 6 7 Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If, 8 despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove 9 immediately by method recommended by glass manufacturer. 10 11 Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent 12 intervals during construction, but not less often than once a month, for build-up of dirt, scum, alkali 13 deposits or staining. When examination reveals presence of these forms of residue, remove by 14 method recommended by glass manufacturer. 15 16 Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged in other ways 17 during construction period, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism. 18 19 Wash glass on both faces not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for inspections intended to 20 establish date of substantial completion in each area of project. Wash glass by method recommended 21 by glass manufacturer. 22 23 SCHEDULE OF GLASS TYPES 24 25 Glass Type GL-1: Fully tempered float glass. 26 27 Thickness: 1/4". 28 29 Tint: Clear. 30 31 32 END OF SECTION 08800 GLASS AND GLAZING GDA 08800- 4 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 SECTION 08830-MIRRORS 2 3 4 PART 1 -GENERAL 5 6 7 RELATED DOCUMENTS 8 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions 9 and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 10 11 SUMMARY 12 13 This Section includes the following types of silvered flat glass mirrors. 14 15 Annealed monolithic glass mirrors. 16 17 Related Sections include the following: 18 19 Division 8 Section "Glazing" for clear glass and glass with reflective coatings used for interior and 20 exterior vision lites. 21 22 DEFINITIONS 23 24 Deterioration of Mirrors: Defects developed from normal use that are attributable to the manufacturing 25 process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning 26 mirrors contrary to mirror manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include discoloration, black 27 spots, and clouding of the silver film. 28 29 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 30 31 Provide mirrors that will not fail under normal usage. Failure includes glass breakage and 32 deterioration attributable to defective manufacture,fabrication, and installation. 33 34 SUBMITTALS 35 36 Product Data: For the following: 37 38 Mirrors. Include description of materials and process used to produce each type of silvered flat glass 39 mirror specified that indicates sources of glass, glass coating components, edge sealer, and quality- 40 control provisions. 41 42 Mirror mastic. 43 44 Mirror hardware. 45 46 Shop Drawings: Include mirror elevations, edge details, mirror hardware, and attachments to other 47 work. 48 49 Samples: For each type of mirror product required, in the form indicated below: 50 51 Mirrors, 12 inches (300 mm)square, including edge treatment on 2 adjoining edges. 52 53 Mirror clips. 54 55 Mirror trim, 12 inches(300 mm)long. 56 57 Product Certificates: For each type of mirror and mirror mastic, signed by product manufacturer. MIRRORS GDA 08830-1 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 Coordinate paragraph below with qualification requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality 3 Requirements"and as supplemented in "Quality Assurance"Article. 4 5 Qualification Data: For Installer. 6 7 Mirror Mastic Compatibility Test Reports: From mirror manufacturer indicating that mirror mastic was 8 tested for compatibility and adhesion with mirror backing and substrates on which mirrors are 9 installed. 10 11 Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 12 13 QUALITY ASSURANCE 14 15 Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed mirror glazing similar in material, 16 design, and extent to that indicated for this Project;whose work has resulted in mirror installations with 17 a record of successful in-service performance; and who employs glass installers for this Project who 18 are certified under NGA's Glazier Certification Program as Level 2 (Senior Glaziers) or Level 3 19 (Master Glaziers). 20 21 Source Limitations for Mirrors: Obtain mirrors from one source for each type of mirror indicated. 22 23 Source Limitations for Mirror Glazing Accessories: Obtain mirror glazing accessories from one source 24 for each type of accessory indicated. 25 26 Glazing Publications: Comply with the following published recommendations: 27 28 GANA Mirror Division's "Mirrors, Handle with Extreme Care: Tips for the Professional on the Care and 29 Handling of Mirrors." 30 31 Preconstruction Mirror Mastic Compatibility Test: Submit mirror mastic products to mirror 32 manufacturer for testing to determine compatibility of mastic with mirror backing and substrates on 33 which mirrors are installed. 34 35 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING 36 37 Protect mirrors according to mirror manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent 38 damage to mirrors from condensation, temperature changes,direct exposure to sun, or other causes. 39 40 Comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions for shipping, storing, and handling mirrors as 41 needed to prevent deterioration of silvering, damage to edges, and abrasion of glass surfaces and 42 applied coatings. Store indoors, protected from moisture including condensation. 43 44 PROJECT CONDITIONS 45 46 Environmental Limitations: Do not install mirrors until ambient temperature and humidity conditions 47 are maintained at levels indicated for final occupancy. 48 49 WARRANTY 50 51 Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by mirror 52 manufacturer agreeing to replace mirrors that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the 53 nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below: 54 55 Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 56 57 MIRRORS GDA 08830-2 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 PART 2- PRODUCTS 2 3 4 SILVERED FLAT GLASS MIRROR MATERIALS 5 6 Clear Glass Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Select Quality. 7 8 Nominal Thickness: 6.0 mm. 9 10 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS 11 12 Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Type A Shore durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. 13 14 Edge Sealer: Coating compatible with glass coating and approved by mirror manufacturer for use in 15 protecting against silver deterioration at mirrored glass edges. 16 17 Mirror Mastic: An adhesive setting compound, produced specifically for setting mirrors and certified by 18 both mirror manufacturer and mastic manufacturer as compatible with glass coating and substrates on 19 which mirrors will be installed. 20 21 Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 22 23 Gunther Mirror Mastics. 24 Palmer Products Corporation. 25 26 MIRROR HARDWARE 27 28 Top and Bottom Aluminum J-Channels: Aluminum extrusions with a return deep enough to produce a 29 glazing channel to accommodate mirrors of thickness indicated and in lengths required to cover 30 bottom and top edges of each mirror in a single piece. 31 32 Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into 33 the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 34 35 Bottom Trim: J-channels formed with front leg and back leg not less than 5/16 and 3/4 inch (7.9 and 36 19 mm)in height, respectively. 37 38 Top Trim: Formed with front leg with a height of 5/16 inch (7.9 mm) and back leg designed to fit into 39 the pocket created by wall-mounted aluminum cleat. 40 41 Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 42 43 Bottom Trim: C. R. Laurence Co., Inc.; D638 FHA Type"J" Channel. 44 45 Top Trim: C. R. Laurence Co., Inc.;D 1638 Top Channel. 46 47 Cleat: C. R. Laurence Co., Inc.; D 1637M Mirror Mount System Cleat. 48 49 Mirror Bottom Clips: As selected by architect. 50 51 Mirror Top Clips: As selected by architect. 52 53 Fasteners: Fabricated of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal and matching it in finished 54 color and texture where fasteners are exposed. 55 MIRRORS GDA 08830-3 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Anchors and Inserts: Provide devices as required for mirror hardware installation. Provide toothed or 2 lead-shield expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Provide galvanized anchors and 3 inserts for applications on inside face of exterior walls and where indicated. 4 5 FABRICATION 6 7 Mirror Sizes: To suit Project conditions, cut mirrors to final sizes and shapes. 8 9 Cutouts: Fabricate cutouts for notches and holes in mirrors without marring visible surfaces. Locate 10 and size cutouts so they fit closely around penetrations in mirrors. 11 12 Mirror Edge Treatment: Flat polished edge for concealed edges and pencil edge for exposed edges. 13 14 Seal edges of mirrors after edge treatment to prevent chemical or atmospheric penetration of glass 15 coating. 16 17 Require mirror manufacturer to perform edge treatment and sealing in factory immediately after cutting 18 to final sizes. 19 20 21 PART 3 - EXECUTION 22 23 24 EXAMINATION 25 26 Examine substrates, over which mirrors are to be mounted, with Installer present, for compliance with 27 installation tolerances, substrate preparation, and other conditions affecting performance. 28 29 Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility of mirror mastic with 30 existing finishes or primers. 31 32 Proceed with mirror installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces 33 are dry. 34 35 PREPARATION 36 37 Comply with mastic manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparation of substrates, 38 including coating surfaces with mastic manufacturer's special bond coating where applicable. 39 40 INSTALLATION 41 42 General: Install mirrors to comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions and with referenced 43 GANA publications. Mount mirrors accurately in place in a manner that avoids distorting reflected 44 images. 45 46 Provide a minimum air space of 'ICI' (3 mm) between back of mirrors and mounting surface for air 47 circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface. 48 49 Where mastic applications are specified for wall mirrors, GANA Mirror Division recommends use of 50 mirror hardware, with or without mastic, to support mirror weight at bottom edge and to prevent mirror 51 at top edge from coming away from wall. 52 53 For wall-mounted mirrors, install mirrors with mastic and mirror hardware. 54 55 Attach mirror hardware securely to mounting surfaces with mechanical fasteners installed with 56 anchors or inserts as applicable. Install fasteners so heads do not impose point loads on backs of 57 mirrors. MIRRORS GDA 08830-4 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 For mirror hardware in the form of continuous J-channels at bottom, provide setting blocks 1/8 inch (3 3 mm) thick by 4 aches (100 mm) long at quarter points. To prevent trapping water, provide, between 4 setting blocks, 2 slotted weeps not less than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm)wide by 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) long. 5 6 For mirror hardware in the form of a continuous J-channel at bottom and continuous top trim at top, 7 fasten J-channel directly to wall and attach top trim to continuous cleat fastened directly to wall. 8 9 Where indicated, install mirror hardware in the form of J-channels specified in "Mirror Hardware" 10 Article that are fabricated in single lengths to fit and cover top and bottom edges of mirrors. 11 12 Install mastic as follows: 13 14 Apply mastic to comply with mastic manufacturer's written instructions for coverage and to allow air 15 circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface. 16 17 After mastic is applied, align mirrors and press into place while maintaining a minimum air space of 18 1/8 inch (3 mm) between back of mirrors and mounting surface. 19 20 CLEANING AND PROTECTION 21 22 Protect mirrors from breakage and contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. 23 24 Do not permit edges of mirrors to be exposed to standing water. 25 Maintain environmental conditions that will prevent mirrors from being exposed to moisture from 26 condensation or other sources for continuous periods of time. 27 28 29 END OF SECTION 08830 MIRRORS GDA 08830-5 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 SECTION 08842—DECORATIVE PLASTIC GLAZING 2 3 4 PART 1 -GENERAL 5 6 7 R ELATED DOCUMENTS 8 9 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions 10 and other Division 1 Specification sections, apply to this Section 11 12 SUMMARY 13 14 This Section includes the following: 15 16 Decorative Plastic Glazing in vertical Applications 17 18 The extent of Decorative Plastic Glazing is shown on the drawings. 19 20 SUBMITTALS 21 22 Product Data: Indicate product description, fabrication information, and compliance with specified 23 performance requirements. 24 25 Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Indicate: 26 Product, Decor, Dimensions, Thickness, and texture(s). 27 28 Samples for Verification: Submit minimum 8 inch by 10-inch sample for each type, texture, pattern and 29 color of polymer. Submit one sample of each item of hardware. 30 31 Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's care and maintenance data, including care, repair and 32 cleaning instructions. Include in Project closeout documents. 33 34 QUALITY ASSURANCE 35 36 Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide original fire test reports to ensure compliance with the 37 following requirements: 38 39 Rate of Burning: ASTM D635 Class: C2 or CC2 rating. 40 41 Self-Ignition Temperature: ASTM D1929: greater than 650°F 42 43 Density of Smoke:ASTM D2843: Less than 75% 44 45 Flammability Classification: ASTM E-84/UL 723: Smoke less than 450, Flame spread less than 46 75. 47 48 Allowable Tolerances: 49 50 Maximum deflection: 1/16"over 12" 51 52 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING 53 54 Deliver no components to project site until areas are ready for installation 55 56 Handle materials to prevent damage to finished surfaces and edges. DECORATIVE PLASTIC GLAZING GDA 08842- 1 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 Keep protective masking in place white fabricating. 3 4 Provide protective coverings to prevent damage or staining following installation for duration of project. 5 6 Store components on edge, fully supported at 10 off vertical, indoors where atmospheric conditions 7 are controlled to avoid temperature extremes and exposure to ultraviolet light and moisture. 8 9 Follow Manufactures recommendations for storage and handling. 10 11 Before installing Decorative Plastic Glazing, permit them to reach room temperature. 12 13 PROJECT CONDITIONS 14 15 Environmental Limitations: Do not install Decorative Plastic Glazing until spaces are enclosed and 16 weatherproof, and ambient temperatures and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels 17 indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. 18 19 WARRANTY 20 21 Provide manufacturers 1 year warranty against defects in materials. Warranty shall provide material to 22 repair, or replace, defective materials. Damage caused by physical or chemical abuse, or exposure to 23 high heat will not be warranted. 24 25 The warranty shall not deprive the owner of other rights or remedies the Owner may have under other 26 provisions of the Contract Documents, and is in addition to and runs concurrent with other warranties 27 made by the Contractor under the requirements of the Contract Documents. 28 29 30 PART 2- PRODUCTS 31 32 33 MANUFACTURERS 34 35 Provide the following, unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings. 36 37 Product: Varia Ecoresin; 3form 38 39 Product Style and Color: traffic+ atlantic 40 41 Gauge: 0. 375" 42 43 Texture (Front Finish): traffic emboss 44 45 Texture (Back Finish): sandstone 46 47 Panel Size: As indicated on the Drawings 48 49 Material: Acrylic. 50 51 Superficial damage to a depth of 0.010" (.25mm) shall be considered repairable by sanding 52 and polishing 53 54 Decorative Glazing: 55 56 Mounted as indicated on the drawings. DECORATIVE PLASTIC GLAZING GDA 08842- 2 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 FABRICATION 3 4 General: Fabricate Decorative Plastic Glazing to designs, sizes and thicknesses indicated and to 5 comply with indicated standards. Sizes, profiles and other characteristics are indicated on the 6 drawings. 7 8 Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for fabrication. 9 10 Machining: Acceptable means of machining are listed below. Ensure that material is not chipped or 11 warped by machining operations. 12 13 Sawing: Select equipment and blades suitable for type of cut required. 14 Drilling: Drills specifically designed for use with plastic products. 15 Milling: Climb cut where possible. 16 Routing 17 Tapping 18 Shearing and Punching: Acceptable only on 1/16"material. 19 Die Cutting:Acceptable only on material 1/8"or less. 20 21 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS 22 23 General: Provide products of material, size, and shape required for application indicated, and with a 24 proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. 25 26 Cleaner: Type recommended by manufacturer. 27 28 Fasteners: Use screws designed specifically for plastics. Self-threading screws are acceptable for 29 permanent installations. Provide threaded metal or nylon inserts for applications requiring frequent 30 disassembly such as light fixtures. 31 32 Bonding Cements: Solvent or adhesives, suitable for use with product and application. 33 34 35 PART 3- EXECUTION 36 37 38 EXAMINATION 39 40 Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where installation of Decorative Plastic Glazing will occur, 41 with Installer present, for compliance with manufacturer's requirements. Verify that substrates and 42 conditions are satisfactory for installation and comply with requirements specified. 43 44 INSTALLATION 45 46 General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for the installation of Decorative Plastic 47 Glazing. 48 49 Shop fabricates items to the greatest degree possible. 50 51 Utilize fasteners, adhesives and bonding agents recommended by manufacturer for type of installation 52 indicated. Material that is chipped, warped, hazed or discolored as a result of installation or fabrication 53 methods will be rejected. 54 55 Install components plumb, level and rigid, scribed to adjacent finishes, in accordance with approved 56 shop drawings and product data. DECORATIVE PLASTIC GLAZING GDA 08842-3 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 Form field joints using manufacturer's recommended procedures. Locate seams in panels so that they 3 are not directly in line with seams in substrates. 4 5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION 6 7 Protect surfaces from damage until date of substantial completion. Repair work or replace damaged 8 work, which cannot be repaired to Architect's satisfaction. 9 10 11 End of Section DECORATIVE PLASTIC GLAZING GDA 08842-4 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 SECTION 08871 -SOLAR CONTROL FILM 2 PART 1 - GENERAL 3 SECTION INCLUDES 4 Solar control film applied to glass. 5 SUBMITTALS 6 Submit under provisions of Section 01300. 7 Product Data: Manufacturer's data on products to be provided, showing physical properties and 8 including installation instructions. 9 Test Data: Independent testing agency reports showing compliance with properties specified by 10 reference to a test method. 11 QUALITY ASSURANCE 12 Installer Qualifications: Experienced in application of self-adhesive window films, with at least 10 13 applications of similar size and complexity, and approved by manufacturer. 14 Mock-Up: Before proceeding with work, apply film to one window designated by Architect. 15 Accepted mock-up will constitute standard for workmanship for remaining work. 16 Accepted mock-up may remain. 17 Remove and replace rejected work. 18 WARRANTY 19 Provide film manufacturer's 10-year warranty against failure of film, including change of color, peeling, 20 bubbling, rippling, cracking, and delamination; include cost of material and labor for removal and 21 reinstallation. 22 PART 2- PRODUCTS 23 MANUFACTURERS 24 Acceptable Manufacturer: 25 3M 26 MATERIALS 27 Solar Control Film:As indicated on the Drawings Finishes Schedule. 28 PART 3- EXECUTION 29 INSTALLATION SOLAR CONTROL FILM GDA 08871-1 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2 Install without bubbles, ripples, drips, dirt, cuts, tears, or gaps between film and frame. 3 Clean newly installed film and window frames. 4 Clean cleaning solutions, run-off cleaning water, and adhesive mounting solution from adjacent 5 surfaces. 6 Where installed film could be damaged by subsequent construction work provide tape warning strips 7 or barricades to prevent contact. 8 END OF SECTION SOLAR CONTROL FILM GDA 08871-2 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 SECTION 09250- GYPSUM DRYWALL 2 3 PART 1 - GENERAL 4 5 6 RELATED DOCUMENTS: 7 8 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and 9 Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section. 10 11 SUMMARY: 12 13 Extent of each type of gypsum drywall construction required is indicated on Drawings: 14 15 This Section includes the following types of gypsum board construction: 16 17 Steel framing members to receive gypsum board. 18 19 Gypsum board screw-attached to steel framing and furring members. 20 21 Load-bearing steel studs and "C" shaped steel joists for structural framing are specified in Division-5 22 Section"Cold-Formed Metal Framing." 23 24 Wood framing and furring are specified in the following Division 6 sections: 25 26 "Rough Carpentry." 27 28 Gypsum sheathing for screw-attachment to steel framing is specified in Division-6 Section "Rough 29 Carpentry." 30 31 DEFINITIONS: 32 33 Gypsum Board Construction Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 and GA 505 for definitions of terms 34 for gypsum board construction not otherwise defined in this section or other referenced standards. 35 36 SUBMITTALS: 37 38 Product data from manufacturers for each type of product specified. 39 40 QUALITY ASSURANCE: 41 42 Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction which are identical to 43 those of assemblies whose fire resistance rating has been determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing 44 and inspecting organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 45 46 Provide fire-resistance-rated assemblies, identical to those indicated by reference to GA File 47 Nos. in GA-600 "Fire Resistance Design Manual" or to design designations in U.L. "Fire 48 Resistance Directory" or in listing of other testing and agencies acceptable to authorities 49 having jurisdiction. 50 51 Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of gypsum board and related joint treatment materials 52 from a single manufacturer. 53 54 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING: 55 56 Deliver materials in original packages, containers or bundles bearing brand name and identification of 57 manufacturer or supplier. GYPSUM DRYWALL GDA 09250- 1 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, 3 direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic and other causes. Neatly stack 4 gypsum boards flat to prevent sagging. 5 6 Handle gypsum boards to prevent damage to edges, ends and surfaces. Do not bend or otherwise 7 damage metal corner beads and trim. 8 9 PROJECT CONDITIONS: 10 11 Environmental Conditions, General: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for application 12 and finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 and with gypsum board manufacturer's 13 recommendations. 14 15 Minimum Room Temperatures: For nonadhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing, maintain 16 not less than 40 deg F (4 deg C). For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum board maintain 17 not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 48 hours prior to application and continuously thereafter until 18 drying is complete. 19 20 Ventilate building spaces to remove water not required for drying joint treatment materials. Avoid 21 drafts during dry, hot weather to prevent materials from drying too rapidly. 22 23 24 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 25 26 27 MANUFACTURERS: 28 29 Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements provide products of one of the following: 30 31 Steel Framing and Furring: 32 33 Clark Steel Framing Systems. 34 Dale Industries, Inc. - Dale/Incor. 35 Dietrich Industries, Inc. 36 MarinoWare; Division of Ware Ind. 37 National Gypsum Company. 38 Unimast, Inc. 39 Western Metal Lath & Steel Framing Systems. 40 41 Grid Suspension Systems: 42 Chicago Metallic Corp. 43 National Rolling Mills Co. 44 45 Gypsum Boards and Related Products: 46 47 American Gypsum Co. 48 BPB America Inc. 49 G-P Gypsum. 50 National Gypsum Company. 51 Temple. 52 USG Corporation. 53 54 STEEL FRAMING COMPONENTS FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS: 55 56 General: Provide components which comply with ASTM C 754 for materials and sizes, unless 57 otherwise indicated. GYPSUM DRYWALL GDA 09250- 2 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 Wire for Hangers and Ties: 3 4 Tie Wire: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- (1.59-mm-) diameter 5 wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch-(1.21-mm-)diameter wire. 6 7 Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162-inch (4.12-mm) 8 diameter. 9 10 Hanger Rods: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint. 11 12 Flat Hangers: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint. 13 14 Angle-Type Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch wide, formed from 0.0635 inch thick 15 galvanized steel sheet complying with ASTM A 466, Coating Designation G90, with bolted 16 connections and 5/16 inch diameter bolts. 17 18 Channels: Cold-rolled steel, 0.0598 inch minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and 7/16 inch 19 wide flanges, protected with rust-inhibitive paint, and as follows: 20 21 Carrying Channels: 1-1/2 inch deep, 475 lbs per 1000 ft., unless otherwise indicated. 22 23 Steel Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, hat-shaped, depth of 7/8 inch, and minimum thickness of 24 base (uncoated) metal as follows: 25 26 Thickness: 0.0179 inch, unless otherwise indicated. 27 28 STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS: 29 30 Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645, with flange edges of studs bent back 90 deg and doubled 31 over to form 3/16" minimum lip (return) and complying with the following requirements for minimum 32 thickness of base(uncoated) metal and for depth: 33 34 Thickness: 0.179 inch, unless otherwise indicated. 35 36 Depth: 3-5/8 inches, unless otherwise indicated. 37 38 Fasteners: Provide fasteners of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power and other 39 properties required to fasten steel framing and furring power members securely to substrates involved; 40 complying with the recommendations of gypsum drywall manufacturers for applications indicated. 41 42 GYPSUM BOARD: 43 44 General: Provide gypsum board of types indicated in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to- 45 end joints. 46 47 Thickness: Provide gypsum board in thicknesses indicated, or if not otherwise indicated, in 48 either 1/2 inch or 5/8 inch thicknesses to comply with ASTM C 840 for application system and 49 support spacing indicated. 50 51 Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36,ASTM C1396, and as follows: 52 53 Type: Type X. 54 55 Edges: Tapered. 56 57 Thickness: 5/8", unless otherwise indicated. GYPSUM DRYWALL GDA 09250-3 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 630,and as follows: 3 4 Type: Regular, unless otherwise indicated. 5 6 Thickness: 5/8 inch, unless otherwise indicated. 7 8 CEMENTITIOUS BACKER UNITS 9 10 Provide cementitious backer units complying with ANSI A118.9, of thickness and width indicated 11 below, and in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end butt joints. 12 13 Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm), unless otherwise indicated. 14 15 Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following products: 16 17 The Original Wonderboard; Custom Building Products. 18 DUROCK Cement Board; United States Gypsum Co. 19 20 TRIM ACCESSORIES: 21 22 Cornerbead and Edge Trim for Interior Installation: Provide corner beads, edge trim and control joints 23 which comply with ASTM C 1047 and requirements indicated below: 24 25 Material: Formed metal, plastic or metal combined with paper, with metal complying with the 26 following requirement: 27 28 Sheet steel zinc-coated by hot-dip process. 29 30 Edge trim shapes indicated below by reference to designations of Fig. 1 in ASTM C 1047: 31 32 "LC" Bead, unless otherwise indicated. 33 34 "L" Bead where indicated. 35 36 One-Piece Control Joints: Formed with vee-shaped slot per Fig. 1 in ASTM C 1047, with slot opening 37 covered with removable strip. 38 39 Aluminum Accessories: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum 40 accessories of profile indicated complying with the following requirements: 41 42 Aluminum Alloy: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of 43 finish indicated and with not less than the strength and durability properties of aluminum 44 extrusions complying with ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221' for alloy and temper 6063-T5. 45 46 Primed Finish: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint 47 compound and finish materials specified. 48 49 Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide aluminum accessories by one of 50 the following: 51 52 Z Reveal Molding: 53 54 DRMZ-625-50, Fry Reglet Corp. or equivalent from: 55 Gordon, Inc. 56 57 GYPSUM BOARD JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS: GYPSUM DRYWALL GDA 09250- 4 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 General: Provide materials complying with ASTM C 475, ASTM C 840, and recommendations of 3 manufacturer of both gypsum board and joint treatment materials for the application indicated. 4 5 Joint Tape: Paper reinforcing tape, unless otherwise indicated. 6 7 Use pressure sensitive or staple-attached open-weave glass fiber reinforcing tape with 8 compatible joint compound where recommended by manufacturer of gypsum board and joint 9 treatment materials for application indicated. 10 11 Setting-Type Joint Compounds: Factory-prepackaged, job-mixed, chemical-hardening powder 12 products formulated for uses indicated. 13 14 Where setting-type joint compounds are indicated for use as taping and topping compounds, 15 use formulation for each which develops greatest bond strength and crack resistance and is 16 compatible with other joint compounds applied over it. 17 18 For prefilling gypsum board joints, use formulation recommended by gypsum board 19 manufacturer for this purpose. 20 21 For filling joints and treating fasteners of water-resistant gypsum backing board behind base 22 for ceramic tile, use formulation recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for this 23 purpose. 24 25 Drying-Type Joint Compounds: Factory-prepackaged vinyl-based products complying with the 26 following requirements for formulation and intended use. 27 28 Ready-Mix Formulation: Factory-premixed product. 29 30 Job-Mixed Formulation: Powder product for mixing with water at Project site. 31 32 Taping compound formulated for embedding tape and for first coat over fasteners and flanges 33 of corner beads and edge trim. 34 35 Topping compound formulated for fill (second)and finish (third)coats. 36 37 All-purpose compound formulated for use as both taping and topping compound. 38 39 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS: 40 41 General: Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum drywall construction which comply with referenced 42 standards and the recommendations of the manufacturer of the gypsum board. 43 44 Spot Grout: ASTM C 475, setting-type joint compound of type recommended for spot grouting hollow 45 metal door frames. 46 47 Gypsum Board Screws: ASTM C 1002. 48 49 Asphalt Felt: ASTM D 226,Type I (No. 15). 50 51 Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying 52 with ASTM C 834 and the following requirements: 53 54 Product is effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and 55 openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies per 56 ASTM E 90. 57 GYPSUM DRYWALL GDA 09250-5 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 2 3 Acoustical Sealant: 4 5 "SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant," United States Gypsum Co. 6 "AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant," Pecora Corp. 7 8 Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard, nondrying, nonhardening, 9 nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior 10 concealed joints to reduce transmission of airborne sound. 11 12 Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 13 14 Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: 15 16 "BA-98," Pecora Corp. 17 "Tremco Acoustical Sealant," Tremco, Inc. 18 19 Sound Attenuation Blankets: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket insulation produced by combining mineral 20 fibers of type described below with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C 665 for Type I 21 (blankets without membrane facing): 22 23 Thickness: 3-1/2" nominal. 24 25 26 PART 3- EXECUTION 27 28 29 EXAMINATION: 30 31 Examine substrates to which drywall construction attaches or abuts, preset hollow metal frames, cast- 32 in-anchors, and structural framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for 33 installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of drywall construction. Do not 34 proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 35 36 PREPARATION: 37 38 Ceiling Anchorages: Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension system with installation of overhead 39 structural system to ensure that inserts and other structural anchorage provisions have been installed 40 to receive ceiling anchors in a manner that will develop their full strength and at spacing required to 41 support ceiling. 42 43 Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated, to other trades for installation well in 44 advance of time needed for coordination with other construction. 45 46 INSTALLATION OF STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL: 47 48 Steel Framing Installation Standard: Install steel framing to comply with ASTM C 754 and with ASTM 49 C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation. 50 51 Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing at terminations in the work and for support of 52 fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, and similar 53 construction to comply with details indicated and with recommendations of gypsum board 54 manufacturer, or if none available, with "Gypsum Construction Handbook" published by United States 55 Gypsum Co. 56 57 Isolate steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural GYPSUM DRYWALL GDA 09250- 6 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 movement, at locations indicated below to comply with details shown on Drawings: 2 3 Where edges of suspended ceilings abut building structure horizontally at ceiling perimeters 4 or penetration of structural elements. 5 6 Where partitions and wall framing abuts overhead structure. 7 8 Provide slip or cushioned type joints as detailed to attain lateral support and avoid 9 axial loading. 10 11 Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with steel framing or furring members; 12 independently frame both sides of joints with framing or furring members or as indicated. 13 14 INSTALLATION OF STEEL FRAMING FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS: 15 16 Secure hangers to structural support by connecting directly to structure where possible, or other 17 anchorage devices or fasteners as indicated. 18 19 Do not attach hangers to metal deck tabs. 20 21 Do not attach hangers to metal roof deck. 22 23 Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes or conduit. 24 25 Keep hangers and braces 2 inches clear of ducts, pipes and conduits. 26 27 Sway-brace suspended steel framing with hangers used for support. 28 29 Install suspended steel framing components in sizes and at spacings indicated but not less than that 30 required by referenced steel framing installation standard. 31 32 Wire Hangers: 0.1620 inch diameter(8 gage),4 ft. on center. 33 34 Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 1-1/2 inch,4 ft. on center. 35 36 Rigid Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches on center, or as indicated on the 37 Drawings. 38 39 Installation Tolerances: Install steel framing components for suspended ceilings so that cross furring 40 members or grid suspension members are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 ft. as measured both 41 lengthwise on each member and transversely between parallel members. 42 43 Wire-tie or clip furring members to main runners and to other structural supports as indicated. 44 45 INSTALLATION OF STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS: 46 47 Install runners (tracks) at floors, ceilings and structural walls and columns where gypsum drywall stud 48 system abuts other construction. 49 50 Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install asphalt felt strips between 51 studs and wall. 52 53 Installation Tolerances: Install each steel framing and furring member so that fastening surface do not 54 vary more than 1/8 inch from plane of faces of adjacent framing. 55 56 Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, 57 except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing over GYPSUM DRYWALL GDA 09250-7 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide 2 support for gypsum board. 3 4 Install steel studs and furring in sizes and at spacings indicated but not less than that required by 5 referenced steel framing installation standard. 6 7 Install steel studs and furring in sizes and at spacings indicated. 8 9 For single layer construction: 24 inches on center, or as indicated on the drawings. 10 11 Cementitious Backer Unit Construction: Space studs 16 inches (406 mm) o.c., unless otherwise 12 indicated. 13 14 Install steel studs so that flanges point in the same direction and gypsum boards can be installed in 15 the direction opposite to that of the flange. 16 17 Seismic Bracing: Diagonally-brace wall systems. 18 19 Partitions that are tied to the ceiling and all partitions greater than 6 feet in height shall be 20 laterally braced to the structure. Bracing shall be independent of the ceiling splay bracing 21 system. Comply with ASCE 7-05 section 13.5.8.1. 22 23 Frame door openings to comply with detailed indicated, with GA-219-89 (Fig.6) and with applicable 24 published recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer. Attach vertical studs at jambs with 25 screws either directly to frames or to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for 26 cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. 27 28 Extend vertical jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of floor or roof 29 structure above. 30 31 Frame openings other than door openings to comply with details indicated or if none indicated, in 32 same manner as required for door openings; and install framing below sills of openings to match 33 framing required above door heads. 34 35 Install thermal insulation and sound attenuation balls as follows: 36 37 Erect balls vertically and hold in place until gypsum board is installed, hold insulation in place 38 with 10-inch staples fabricated from 0.0625-inch (16-gage)-diameter tie wire and inserted through 39 slot in web of member. 40 41 APPLICATION AND FINISHING OF GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL: 42 43 Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standard: Install and finish gypsum board to comply with 44 ASTM C 840. 45 46 Install sound attenuation blankets where indicated, prior to gypsum board unless readily installed after 47 board has been installed. 48 49 Locate exposed end-butt joints as far from center of walls and ceilings as possible, and stagger not 50 less than 24 inches in alternate courses of board. 51 52 Install ceiling boards across framing in the manner which minimizes the number of end-butt joints, and 53 which avoids end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger end joints at least 24 inches. 54 55 Install wall/partition boards in manner which minimizes the number of end-butt joints or avoids them 56 entirely where possible. At stairwells and similar high walls, install board horizontally with end joints 57 staggered over studs. GYPSUM DRYWALL GDA 09250- 8 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 Install exposed gypsum board with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged or damp boards. 3 Butt boards together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch open space 4 between boards. Do not force into place. 5 6 Locate either edge or end joints over supports, except in horizontal applications or where intermediate 7 supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Position boards so that like 8 edges abut, tapered edges against tapered edges and mill-cut or field-cut ends against mill-cut or 9 field-cut ends. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints over 10 different studs on opposite sides of partitions. 11 12 Attach gypsum board to steel studs so that leading edge or end of each board is attached to open 13 (unsupported)edge of stud flange first. 14 15 Attach gypsum board to supplementary framing and blocking provided for additional support at 16 openings and cutouts. 17 18 Spot grout hollow metal door frames for solid core wood doors, hollow metal doors and doors over 32 19 inches wide. Apply spot grout at each jamb anchor clip just before inserting board into frame. 20 21 Form control joints and expansion joints at locations indicated on drawings,with space between edges 22 of boards, prepared to receive trim accessories, but in no case to exceed limits as defined in ASTM C 23 840. 24 25 Provide control joint in walls between framing suspended from structure and floor bearing 26 framing. 27 28 Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum board in concealed spaces (above 29 ceilings, etc.), except in chase walls which are properly braced internally. 30 31 Except where concealed application is required for sound, fire, air or smoke ratings, coverage 32 may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. area,and may be limited to not less 33 than 75 percent of full coverage. 34 35 Fit gypsum board around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 36 37 Where partitions intersect open concrete coffers, cut gypsum board to fit profile of coffers and 38 allow 1/4 to 1/2 inch wide joint for sealant. 39 40 Isolate perimeter of non-load-bearing drywall partitions at structural abutments. Provide 1/4" to 1/2" 41 space and trim edge with "U" bead edge trim. Seal joints with acoustical sealant. 42 43 Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 919 for use of 44 joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions 45 indicated. 46 47 Where sound-rated drywall construction work is indicated, seal construction at perimeters, control and 48 expansion joints, openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant including a 49 bead at both faces of partitions. Comply with ASTM C 919 and manufacturer's recommendations for 50 location of edge trim, and close off sound-flanking paths around or through construction including 51 sealing of partitions above acoustical ceilings. 52 53 Space fasteners in gvpsum boards in accordance with referenced gypsum board application and 54 finishing standard and manufacturer's recommendations. 55 56 METHODS OF GYPSUM BOARD APPLICATION: 57 GYPSUM DRYWALL GDA 09250-9 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Single-Layer Application: Install gypsum wallboard as follows. 2 3 On ceilings apply gypsum board prior to wall/partition board application to the greatest extent 4 possible. 5 6 On partitions/walls apply gypsum board vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise 7 indicated, and provide sheet lengths which will minimize end joints. 8 9 On partitions/walls 8'-1" or less in height apply gypsum board horizontally (perpendicular to 10 framing); use maximum length sheets possible to minimize end joints. 11 12 At "wet areas" install moisture resistant units and treat joints to comply with manufacturer's 13 recommendations for type of application indicated. 14 15 Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum boards to supports as follows: 16 17 Fasten with screws. 18 19 At toilets and locker rooms except as indicated below, install moisture resistant units and treat joints to 20 comply with manufacturer's recommendations for type of application indicated. 21 22 Wall Tile Substrates: For areas indicated below to receive thin-set ceramic tile and similar rigid 23 applied wall finishes, comply with the following: 24 25 Install water-resistant gypsum backing board panels at "wet areas" other than showers, and 26 where indicated. Install with 1/'4-inch open space where panels abut other construction 27 or penetrations. 28 29 INSTALLATION OF DRYWALL TRIM ACCESSORIES: 30 31 General: Where feasible, use the same fasteners to anchor trim accessory flanges as required to 32 fasten gypsum board to the supports. Otherwise, fasten flanges to comply with manufacturer's 33 recommendations. 34 35 Install corner beads at external corners. 36 37 Install metal edge trim whenever edge of gypsum board would otherwise be exposed or semi- 38 exposed, and except where plastic trim is indicated. Provide type with face flange to receive joint 39 compound except where "U-bead"(semi-finishing type)is indicated. 40 41 Install "LC" bead where drywall construction is tightly abutted to other construction and back 42 flange can be attached to framing or supporting substrate. 43 44 Install "L" bead where edge trim can only be installed after gypsum board is installed. 45 46 Install U-type trim where edge is exposed, revealed, gasketed, or sealant-filled (including 47 expansion joints). 48 49 Install U-bead where indicated, and where exterior gypsum board edges are not covered by applied 50 moldings or indicated to receive edge trim with face flanges covered with joint compound. 51 52 Install plastic edge trim where indicated on wall panels at juncture with ceilings. 53 54 Install control joints at locations indicated, or if not indicated at spacings and locations required by 55 referenced gypsum board application and finish standard, and approved by the Architect for visual 56 effect. 57 GYPSUM DRYWALL GDA 09250 - 10 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 FINISHING OF DRYWALL: 2 3 General: Apply joint treatment at gypsum board joints (both directions), flanges of corner bead, edge 4 trim, and control joints; penetrations; fastener heads, surface defects and elsewhere as required to 5 prepare work for decoration. 6 7 Prefill open joints and rounded or beveled edges, if any, using setting-type joint compound. 8 9 Apply joint tape at joints between gypsum boards, except where trim accessories are indicated. 10 11 Level 0: Only for areas indicated on the drawings or in schedules: 12 13 No taping, finishing, or accessories required. 14 15 Level 1: For plenum areas above ceilings, attics, and areas where assembly will be concealed from 16 view: 17 18 Finish interior gypsum wallboard by applying the following joint compounds in an embed coat (not 19 including prefill of openings in base), and sand after embed coat: 20 21 Embedding Coat: Setting-Type Joint Compound. 22 23 Level 2: For areas where gypsum wallboard receives tile, slotwall, FRP board or similar opaque panel: 24 25 Finish interior gypsum wallboard by applying the following joint compounds in 1 coat (not including 26 prefill of openings in base), and sand between coats and after last coat: 27 28 Embedding and First/Finish Coat: Setting-Type Joint Compound. 29 30 Level 3: For areas where gypsum wallboard receives medium or heavy texture, or heavy wallcoverinq: 31 32 Finish interior gypsum wallboard by applying the following joint compounds in 2 coats (not including 33 prefill of openings in base), and sand between coats and after last coat: 34 35 Embedding and First Coat: Setting-Type Joint Compound. 36 Finish (Second)Coat: Ready-mix drying-type all-purpose or topping compound. 37 38 Level 4: For areas where gypsum wallboard receives texture, semigloss enamel,or wallcoverinq: 39 40 Finish interior gypsum wallboard by applying the following joint compounds in 3 coats (not including 41 prefill of openings in base), and sand between coats and after last coat: 42 43 Embedding and First Coat: Setting-Type Joint Compound. 44 Fill (Second)Coat: Setting-type joint compound. 45 Finish (Third)Coat: Ready-mix drying-type all-purpose or topping compound. 46 47 Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board Base for Ceramic Tile: Comply with ASTM C 840 and 48 manufacturer's recommendations for treatment of joints behind tile. 49 50 Partial Finishing: Omit third coat and sanding on concealed drywall work which is indicated for drywall 51 finishing or which requires finishing to achieve fire-resistance rating, sound rating or to act as air or 52 smoke barrier. 53 54 Remove any texture droppings or oversprav from door frames, windows and other adjoining 55 construction. 56 57 PROTECTION: GYPSUM DRYWALL GDA 09250- 11 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner suitable to Installer, which ensures 3 gypsum drywall construction being without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 4 5 6 Drywall Finish Level Schedule: 7 8 Utility rooms, Warehouse, Electrical Rooms Level 3 9 10 All other exposed wall surfaces Level 4 11 12 13 END OF SECTION 09250 GYPSUM DRYWALL GDA 09250- 12 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 SECTION 09300—CERAMIC TILE 2 3 4 PART 1 -GENERAL 5 6 7 RELATED DOCUMENTS 8 9 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and 10 Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 11 12 SUMMARY 13 14 This Section includes the following: 15 16 Porcelain floor/wall tile. 17 18 Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 19 20 Division 3 Section "Concrete Work"for monolithic slab finishes specified for tile substrates. 21 22 Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers" for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation 23 joints in tile surfaces. 24 25 Division 9 Section "Gypsum Drywall" for substrate backer units installed as part of gypsum 26 wallboard systems. 27 28 SUBMITTALS 29 30 General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification 31 Sections. 32 33 Product data for each type of product specified. 34 35 Shop drawings indicating tile patterns and locations and widths of expansion, contraction, control, and 36 isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces. 37 38 Locate precisely each joint and crack in tile substrates by measuring, record measurements 39 on shop drawings, and coordinate them with tile joint locations, in consultation with Architect. 40 41 Samples for verification purposes of each item listed below, prepared on samples of size and 42 construction indicated, products involve color and texture variations, in sets showing full range of 43 variations expected. 44 45 Each type and composition of tile and for each color and texture required, at least 12 inches 46 square, mounted on plywood or hardboard backing and grouted. 47 48 Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color required. 49 50 Master grade certificates for each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by tile manufacturer 51 and Installer. 52 53 Material test reports from qualified independent testing laboratory indicating and interpreting test 54 results relative to compliance of tile and tile setting and grouting products with requirements indicated. 55 CERAMIC TILE GDA 09300-1 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" article to demonstrate their 2 capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with project names, addresses, names 3 of Architects and Owners, plus other information specified. 4 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 6 7 Single-Source Responsibility for Tile: Obtain each color, grade, finish, type, composition, and variety 8 of tile from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and 9 physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. 10 11 Single-Source Responsibility for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform 12 quality from one manufacturer for each cementitious and admixture component and from one source 13 or producer for each aggregate. 14 15 Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has successfully completed tile 16 installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project. 17 18 Field-Constructed Mock-Up: Before installing tile, erect mock-ups for each form of construction and 19 finish required to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects 20 as well as qualities of materials and execution. Build mock-ups to comply with the following 21 requirements, using materials indicated for final unit of Work. 22 23 Locate mock-ups on site in location and size indicated or, if not indicated, directed by 24 Architect. 25 26 Erect mock-ups in presence of Architect. 27 28 Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 29 30 Obtain Architect's acceptance of mock-ups before start of final unit of Work. 31 32 Retain and maintain mock-ups during construction in undisturbed condition as a standard for 33 judging completed unit of Work. 34 35 When directed, demolish and remove mock-ups from Project site. 36 37 Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of 38 Division 1 Section "Project Meetings". 39 40 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 41 42 Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until 43 time of use. Comply with requirement of ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages. 44 45 Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water,freezing, foreign matter, and other causes. 46 47 Handle tile with temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces from 48 contacting backs or edges of other units. If despite these precautions coating does contact bonding 49 surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile. 50 51 PROJECT CONDITIONS 52 53 Maintain environmental conditions and protect work during and after installation to comply with 54 referenced standards and manufacturer's printed recommendations. 55 56 Vent temporary heaters to exterior to prevent damage to tile work from carbon dioxide buildup. 57 CERAMIC TILE GDA 09300-2 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Maintain temperatures at 50 deg F (10 deg C)or more in tiled areas during installation and for 7 days 2 after completion, unless higher temperatures are required by referenced installation standard or 3 manufacturer's instructions. 4 5 EXTRA MATERIALS 6 7 Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials that match products installed as described 8 below, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels clearly describing 9 contents. 10 11 Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed, 12 for each type, composition,color, pattern, and size. 13 14 15 PART 2- PRODUCTS 16 17 18 MANUFACTURERS 19 20 Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products as indicated on the 21 Drawings. 22 23 PRODUCTS, GENERAL: 24 25 ANSI Standard for Ceramic Tile: Comply with ANSI A137.1 "American National Standard 26 Specifications for Ceramic Tile"for types, compositions, and grades of tile indicated. 27 28 Furnish tile complying with "Standard Grade" requirements unless otherwise indicated. 29 30 ANSI Standard for Tile Installation Materials: Comply with ANSI standard referenced with products 31 and materials indicated for setting and grouting. 32 33 Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated for tile, grout, 34 and other products requiring selection of colors, surface textures, patterns, and other appearance 35 characteristics, provide specific products or materials complying with the following requirements: 36 37 Provide selections indicated on the drawings and on the schedules or as selected by the 38 Owner/Architect. 39 40 Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during sample 41 submittals, blend tile in factory and package accordingly so that tile units taken from one package 42 show the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved samples. 43 44 TILE PRODUCTS 45 46 Floor/Wall Tile: Provide flat tile complying with the following requirements: 47 48 Composition: As indicated. 49 50 Wearing Surface: Matte. 51 52 Dimensions: As indicated on the Drawings. 53 54 Nominal Thickness:As indicated on the Drawings. 55 56 Trim Units: Provide tile trim units to match characteristics of adjoining flat tile and to comply with 57 following requirements: CERAMIC TILE GDA 09300-3 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 Size:As indicated, coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable. 3 4 Shapes:As follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes: 5 6 Floor Base for Thinset Mortar Installations:As indicated on the Drawings. 7 8 SETTING MATERIALS 9 10 Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.4, composition as follows: 11 12 Latex additive (water emulsion)of type described below, serving as replacement for part or all of 13 gauging water, combined at job site with prepackaged dry mortar mix supplied or specified by 14 latex additive manufacturer. 15 16 Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 17 18 Mortars: 19 20 "Hydroment Tile-Mate Premium"; Bostik Construction Products Div. 21 "Premium Blend"; Custom Building Products 22 "Laticrete Floor and Wall Thin Set"; Laticrete International Inc. 23 "Kerabond"; Mapei Corp. 24 25 Latex-Emulsion-Based Latex-Portland Cement Additive: 26 27 "Flexalastic"; Bostik Construction Products Div. 28 "Custom-Flex Ultra Strength Thin Set Additive"; Custom Building Products 29 "Laticrete No. 333"; Laticrete International Inc. 30 "Keralastic"; Mapei Corp. 31 32 GROUTING MATERIALS 33 34 Latex-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6, color as indicated, composition as follows: 35 36 Latex additive (water emulsion) serving as replacement for part or all of gauging water, added at 37 job site with dry grout mixture,with type of latex and dry grout mix as follows: 38 39 Dry Grout Mixture: Dry-set grout specified or supplied by latex additive manufacturer. Use 40 latex additive without retarder with dry-set grout. 41 42 Application: Use dry-set grout combined with latex additive for grouting joints in glazed 43 wall tile. 44 45 Color: As selected by the Architect. 46 47 Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 48 49 Dry-Set Grouts: 50 51 "Hydroment Ceramic Tile Grout"; Bostik Construction Products Div. 52 "Polyblend Colored Tile Grout-Sanded"; Custom Building Products 53 "Laticrete Grout"; Laticrete International Inc. 54 "Keracolor Floor Grout-Sanded"; Mapei Corp. 55 56 Latex-Emulsion-Based Latex-Portland Cement Additive: 57 CERAMIC TILE GDA 09300-4 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 "Flexalastic"; Bostik Construction Products Div. 2 "Custom-Flex Ultra Strength Thin Set Additive"; Custom Building Products 3 "Laticrete No. 1776"; Laticrete International Inc. 4 "Keralastic"; Mapei Corp. 5 6 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS 7 8 General: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants of base polymer 9 indicated that comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers," including ASTM C 920 10 as referenced by Type, Grade, Class, and Uses. 11 12 Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of grout in tile adjoining sealed joints 13 unless otherwise indicated. 14 15 One-Part Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and as 16 applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, 0; formulated with fungicide, intended for sealing 17 interior ceramic tile joints and other nonporous substrates that are subject to in-service exposures of 18 high humidity and temperature extremes. 19 20 One-Part Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: 21 22 "Dow Corning 786"; Dow Corning Corp. 23 "SCS 1702"; General Electric Co. 24 "863#345 White"; Pecora Corp. 25 "Rhodorsil 6B White"; Rhone-Poulenc Inc. 26 "Proglaze White"; Tremco Corp. 27 28 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT 29 30 Mix mortars and grouts to comply with requirements of referenced standards and manufacturers 31 including those for accurate proportioning of materials, water, or additive content; type of mixing 32 equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures needed 33 to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for 34 application indicated. 35 36 37 PART 3- EXECUTION 38 39 40 EXAMINATION 41 42 Examine substrates and areas where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with 43 requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile. 44 45 Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, and free from oil or waxy films and 46 curing compounds. 47 48 Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units 49 of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed before installing tile. 50 51 Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 52 53 PREPARATION 54 55 Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during sample submittals, 56 verify that tile has been blended in factory and packaged accordingly so that tile units taken from one 57 package show the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved CERAMIC TILE GDA 09300-5 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before 2 installing. 3 4 INSTALLATION, GENERAL 5 6 ANSI Tile Installation Standard: Comply with parts of ANSI 108 series of tile installation standards 7 included under "American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile" that 8 apply to type of setting and grouting materials and methods indicated. 9 10 TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation"; comply with TCA 11 installation methods indicated. 12 13 Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form a complete 14 covering without interruptions except as otherwise shown. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, 15 edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. 16 17 Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible 18 surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned 19 joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so that plates, collars, 20 or covers overlap tile. 21 22 Jointing Pattern: Unless otherwise shown, lay tile in grid pattern. Align joints when adjoining tiles on 23 base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each 24 space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths unless 25 otherwise shown. 26 27 Lay out tile wainscots to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated. 28 29 Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, 30 contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, 31 and tile. Do not saw cut joints after installation of tiles. 32 33 Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates. 34 35 Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint 36 Sealers." 37 38 Grout tile to comply with the requirements of the following installation standards: 39 40 For ceramic tile grouts (latex-portland cement grouts), comply with ANSI A108.10. 41 42 FLOOR INSTALLATION METHODS 43 44 Glazed Floor Tile: Install tile to comply with requirements indicated below for setting bed methods, 45 TCA installation methods related to types of subfloor construction, and grout types: 46 47 Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A108.5. 48 49 Concrete Subfloors, Interior: TCA F113. 50 51 Grout: Latex-portland cement. 52 53 WALL TILE INSTALLATION METHODS 54 55 Glazed Wall Tile: Install types of tile designated for wall application to comply with requirements 56 indicated below for setting-bed methods, TCA installation methods related to subsurface wall 57 conditions, and grout types: CERAMIC TILE GDA 09300-6 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A108.5. 3 4 Wood or Metal Studs, Interior: TCA W243. 5 6 Grout: Latex-portland cement. 7 8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION 9 10 Cleaning: Upon completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free 11 of foreign matter. 12 13 Remove latex-portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 14 15 Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, unbonded, 16 and otherwise defective tile work. 17 18 Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and installer 19 that ensures that tile is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 20 21 When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply a protective coat of neutral protective cleaner to 22 completed tile walls. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during 23 construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. 24 25 Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces. 26 27 28 END OF SECTION 09300 CERAMIC TILE GDA 09300-7 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 SECTION 09512-ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 2 3 4 PART 1 -GENERAL 5 6 7 RELATED DOCUMENTS 8 9 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and 10 Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 11 12 SUMMARY 13 14 This Section includes the following: 15 16 Acoustical tile ceilings, exposed grid suspension. 17 18 SUBMITTALS 19 20 General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification 21 Sections. 22 23 Product data for each type of product specified. 24 25 Coordination drawings for reflected ceiling plans drawn accurately to scale and coordinating 26 penetrations and ceiling-mounted items. Show the following: 27 28 Ceiling suspension members. 29 30 Method of attaching hangers to building structure. 31 32 Ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures; air outlets and inlets; sprinkler heads; and 33 special moldings at walls, column penetrations, and other junctures with adjoining 34 construction. 35 36 Scale: 1/8 inch = 1,-0". 37 38 Samples for verification purposes of each type of exposed finish required, prepared on samples of 39 size indicated below and of same thickness and material indicated for final unit of Work. Where 40 finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include sample sets showing full range of 41 variations expected. 42 43 6-inch-square samples of each acoustical tile type, pattern, and color. 44 45 Set of 12-inch-long samples of exposed moldings for each color and system type required. 46 47 Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their 48 capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with project names, addresses, names 49 of Architects and Owners, and other information specified. 50 51 Research reports or evaluation reports of the model code organization acceptable to authorities 52 having jurisdiction that show compliance of acoustical ceiling system and components with building 53 code in effect for Project. 54 55 Product test reports from qualified independent testing laboratory that are based on its testing of 56 current products for compliance of acoustical ceiling systems and components with requirements. 57 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS GDA 09512- 1 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 QUALITY ASSURANCE 2 3 Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has successfully completed acoustical 4 ceilings similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project. 5 6 Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide acoustical ceilings that are identical to those tested for the 7 following fire performance characteristics, per ASTM test method indicated below, by UL or other 8 testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify acoustical 9 ceiling components with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization. 10 11 Surface Burning Characteristics: As follows, tested per ASTM E 84 and complying with ASTM 12 E 1264 for Class A products. 13 14 Flame Spread: 25 or less. 15 Smoke Developed: 50 or less. 16 17 Fire-Resistance Ratings: As indicated by reference to design designations in UL "Fire 18 Resistance Directory," for types of assemblies in which acoustical ceilings function as a fire 19 protective membrane and tested per ASTM E 119. 20 21 Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements indicated for rated 22 assembly. 23 24 Seismic Standard: Provide acoustical tile ceilings designed and installed to withstand the effects of 25 earthquake motions according to the following: 26 27 Standard for Ceiling Suspension Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply with 2110 28 OSSC Section 1613.1. 29 30 CISCA's Guidelines for Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply with CISCA's 31 "Guidelines for Seismic Restraint of Direct-Hung Suspended Ceiling Assemblies--Seismic 32 Zones 3 &4." 33 34 ASCE 7, 2005, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 13.5.6. 35 36 Single-Source Responsibility for Ceiling Units: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling unit from a 37 single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical 38 properties without delaying progress of the Work. 39 40 Single-Source Responsibility for Suspension System: Obtain each type of suspension system from a 41 single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical 42 properties without delaying progress of the Work. 43 44 Obtain suspension system from same manufacturer that produces acoustical ceiling units. 45 46 Coordination of Work: Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical ceiling units and suspension 47 system components with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including 48 light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system components, and partition system. 49 50 Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of 51 Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." 52 53 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 54 55 Deliver acoustical ceiling units to project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully 56 enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface 57 contamination, and other causes. ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS GDA 09512- 2 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 Before installing acoustical ceiling units, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized 3 moisture content. 4 5 Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. 6 7 PROJECT CONDITIONS 8 9 Space Enclosure: Do not install interior acoustical ceilings until space is enclosed and weatherproof, 10 wet work in space is completed and nominally dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient 11 conditions of temperature and humidity will be continuously maintained at values near those indicated 12 for final occupancy. 13 14 EXTRA MATERIALS 15 16 Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials described below that match products 17 installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with appropriate labels. 18 19 Acoustical Ceiling Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 2.0 percent of amount 20 installed. 21 22 23 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 24 25 26 MANUFACTURERS: 27 28 Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 29 30 As indicated on the Drawings 31 32 ACOUSTICAL CEILING UNITS, GENERAL 33 34 Standard for Acoustical Ceiling Units: Provide manufacturers' standard units of configuration 35 indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by reference to types, patterns, 36 acoustical ratings, and light reflectance, unless otherwise indicated. 37 38 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL 39 40 Standard for Metal Suspension Systems: Provide manufacturer's standard metal suspension systems 41 of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable ASTM C 635 42 requirements. 43 44 Duty Class: Heavy 45 46 Seismic Design Category: D 47 48 Attachment Devices: Size for 5 times design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung, 49 unless otherwise indicated. 50 51 Wire for Hangers and Ties: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 52 53 Gage: Provide wire sized so that stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, 54 Direct-Hung) will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch 55 diameter(12-gage). 56 57 Hanger Rods: Mild steel, zinc coated, or protected with rust-inhibitive paint. ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS GDA 09512 - 3 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 Flat Hangers: Mild steel, zinc coated, or protected with rust-inhibitive paint. 3 4 Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8-inch wide, formed with 0.0365-inch-thick 5 galvanized steel sheet complying with ASTM A 446, Coating Designation G90, with bolted 6 connections and 5/16-inch-diameter bolts. 7 8 Seismic Struts: Manufacturer's standard compression struts designed to accommodate lateral forces. 9 10 Seismic Clips: Manufacturer's standard seismic clips designed and spaced to secure acoustical tiles 11 in-place. 12 13 Edge Moldings and Trim: Metal of types and profiles indicated or, if not indicated, provide 14 manufacturer's standard molding for edges and penetrations of ceiling that fits with type of edge detail 15 and suspension system indicated. 16 17 For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required to 18 fit penetration exactly. 19 20 For Seismic Separation Joint in ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to profiles and 21 thickness indicated. 22 23 Thickness: 0.0239 inch minimum, painted to match metal suspension system. 24 25 Finish Color: White 26 27 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS 28 29 Concealed Acoustical Sealant: Nondrying, non-hardening, non-skinning, non-staining, non-bleeding, 30 gunnable sealant complying with requirement specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers." 31 32 33 PART 3-EXECUTION 34 35 36 EXAMINATION 37 38 Examine substrates and structural framing to which ceiling system attaches or abuts, with Installer 39 present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other sections that affect installation 40 and anchorage of ceiling system. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have 41 been corrected. 42 43 PREPARATION 44 45 Coordination: Furnish layouts for preset inserts, clips, and other ceiling anchors whose installation is 46 specified in other sections. 47 48 Furnish concrete inserts and similar devices to other trades for installation well in advance of 49 time needed for coordination of other work. 50 51 Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical units to balance border widths at 52 opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid use of less-than-half-width units at borders, and comply with 53 reflected ceiling plans. 54 55 INSTALLATION 56 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS GDA 09512-4 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 General: Install acoustical tile ceilings to comply with OSSC 1613.1 and seismic requirements 2 indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's"Ceiling Systems Handbook." 3 4 Arrange acoustical units and orient directionally patterned units (if any) in manner shown by reflected 5 ceiling plans. 6 7 Install tile with pattern running in one direction. 8 9 Suspend ceiling hangers from building structural members and as follows: 10 11 Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling 12 plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers 13 only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, 14 counter splaying, or other equally effective means. 15 16 Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacing 17 that interfere with the location of hangers at spacing required to support standard suspension 18 system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes 19 or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support 20 ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards. 21 22 Secure wire hangers by looping and wire-tying, either directly to structures or other devices 23 that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause them to 24 deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 25 26 Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing 27 members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and 28 appropriate for structure to which hangers are attached as well as for type of hanger involved, 29 and in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or 30 elevated temperatures. 31 32 Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms. 33 34 Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 35 36 Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members or 37 intermediate framing members. 38 39 Space hangers not more than 4'-0" o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers, 40 unless otherwise shown, and provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each 41 member. 42 43 Install edge moldings of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and at locations where 44 necessary to conceal edges of acoustical units. 45 46 Sealant Bed: Apply continuous ribbon of acoustical sealant, concealed on back of vertical leg 47 before installing moldings. 48 49 Screw-attach moldings to substrate at intervals not over 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 50 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12'-0". 51 Miter corners accurately and connect securely. 52 53 Seismic Separation Joints: For ceiling areas exceeding 2500 square feet, a seismic separation joint 54 that breaks the ceiling shall be provided. 55 56 The layout and location of the seismic separation joint shall be as indicated on the plans. 57 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS GDA 09512-5 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Install precut fiberglass batt insulation in coordination with suspension/tile system at locations 2 indicated on the drawings. 3 4 Install acoustical tile in coordination with suspension system. 5 6 Fit adjoining tile to form flush, tight joints. Scribe and cut for accurate fit at borders and 7 around penetrating work. 8 9 CLEANING 10 11 Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension 12 members. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch-up of minor finish damage. 13 Remove and replace work that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate 14 evidence of damage. 15 16 17 END OF SECTION 09512 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS GDA 09512- 6 GDA#12018.00 December 14,2012 Issue for Permit 1 SECTION 09650-RESILIENT FLOORING 2 3 4 PART 1 -GENERAL 5 6 7 RELATED DOCUMENTS: 8 9 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and 10 Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 11 12 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 13 14 Extent of resilient flooring and accessories is shown on drawings and in schedules. 15 16 Vinyl Composition Tile 17 Static Dissipative Tile 18 Rubber flooring and stair treads 19 Rubber Wall Base 20 21 QUALITY ASSURANCE: 22 23 Manufacturer: Provide each type of resilient flooring and accessories as produced by a single 24 manufacturer, including recommended primers, adhesives, sealants, and leveling compounds. 25 26 Fire Test Performance: Provide resilient flooring which complies with the following fire test 27 performance criteria as determined by an independent testing laboratory acceptable to authorities 28 having jurisdiction. 29 30 Critical Radiant Flux (CRF): Not less than the following rating as per ASTM E 648. 31 32 0.45 watts per sq. cm. 33 34 0.22 watts per sq. cm. 35 36 Flame Spread: Not more than 75 per ASTM E 84. 37 38 Smoke Developed: Not more than 450 per ASTM E 84. 39 40 Smoke Density: Not more than 450 per ASTM E 662. 41 42 Installer's Qualifications: Engage Installer who is certified in writing by resilient flooring manufacturer 43 as qualified for installation of sheet vinyl employing heat welded seams. 44 45 SUBMITTALS: 46 47 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for each type of resilient flooring and accessory. 48 49 Samples for Verification Purposes: Submit the following samples of each type, color, and pattern of 50 resilient flooring required, showing full-range of color and pattern variations. 51 52 Full size tile samples. 53 54 6"x 9"samples of sheet flooring. 55 56 2-1/2"long samples of resilient flooring accessories. 57 RESILIENT FLOORING GDA 09650- 1 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Other materials as required. 2 3 Certification for Fire Test Performance: Submit certification from independent testing laboratory 4 acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that resilient flooring complies with fire test performance 5 requirements. 6 7 Maintenance Instructions: Submit 2 copies of manufacturer's recommended maintenance practices 8 for each type of resilient flooring and accessory required. 9 10 PROJECT CONDITIONS: 11 12 Maintain minimum temperature of 65°F (18°C) in spaces to receive resilient flooring for at least 48 13 hours prior to installation, during installation, and for not less than 48 hours after installation. Store 14 resilient flooring materials in spaces where they will be installed for at least 48 hours before beginning 15 installation. Subsequently, maintain minimum temperature of 55°F (13°C) in areas where work is 16 completed. 17 18 Install resilient flooring and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been 19 completed. Do not install resilient flooring over concrete slabs until the latter have been cured and are 20 sufficiently dry to achieve bond with adhesive as determined by manufacturer's recommended bond 21 and moisture test. 22 23 Space Enclosure and Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet until space is enclosed and 24 weatherproof, wet-work in space is completed and nominally dry, work above ceilings is complete, and 25 ambient temperature and humidity conditions are and will be continuously maintained at values near 26 those indicated for final occupancy. 27 28 Subfloor Moisture Conditions: Moisture emission rate of not more than 3 lb/1000 sq. ft./24 hours 29 Ji 1JUu sq. mil=l rio... when tested by calcium chloride moisture test in compliance with CRI 104, 30 6.2.1,with subfloor temperatures not less than 55 deg F (12 7 deg C . 31 32 Subfloor Alkalinity Conditions: A pH range of 5 to 9 when subfloor is wetted with potable water and 33 pHydrion paper is applied. 34 35 36 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 37 38 39 FLOORING: 40 41 42 Manufacturers of Resilient Flooring Tile and Treads: 43 44 As indicated on the Drawings. 45 46 Manufacturers of Base and Trims: 47 48 As indicated on the Drawings. 49 50 Fire Test Data : ASTM E 648 Critical Radiant Flux Class I - 0.45 or more watts/cm2 51 52 ASTM E 662 Smoke Developed 450 or less 53 54 Static Load Limit: ASTM F 970 75 psi (5.27 kg/cm2) 55 56 Gauges: 1/8 in (3.2 mm)overall (nominal) 57 RESILIENT FLOORING GDA 09650- 2 GDA#12018.00 December 14,2012 Issue for Permit 1 Durability : 1/8 in (3.2 mm)-Very Good 2 3 Maintainability : 1/8 in (3.2 mm)-Good 4 5 Resilience : 1/8 in (3.2 mm)-Good 6 7 Electrical Resistence: ESD-S7.1 and ASTM F-150 10e6 to 10e9 ohms 8 Point to point, and point to ground, when installed as a system. 9 10 Static Generation: ESD STM 97.2 At 40% R.H.:<10 volts. At 12% R.H.:<100 volts when installed as a 11 system,flooring in combination with ESD footwear and a person. 12 13 Static Decay: Fed Test 101c, Method 4046 5000 volts to zero in < 0.5 sec.; avg. 0.5 sec. system in 14 combination with ESD footwear and a person. 15 16 Color: As indicated on the drawings, or if not indicated, as selected by the Architect from the 17 manufacturer's standard range of colors. 18 19 ACCESSORIES: 20 21 Rubber Wall Base: Provide rubber base complying with FS SS-W-40, Type I, with matching end stops 22 and preformed or molded corner units, and as follows: 23 24 Height: 4". 25 26 Thickness: 1/8"gage. 27 28 Style: Standard top-set cove at areas indicated on the drawings. 29 30 Finish: Matte. 31 32 Color: As indicated on the drawings, or if not indicated, as selected by the Architect from the 33 manufacturer's standard range of colors. 34 35 Resilient Edge Strips: 1/8" thick, homogeneous rubber composition, tapered or bullnose edge, color 36 to match flooring, or as selected by Architect from standard colors available; not less than 1"wide. 37 38 Adhesives (Cements): Waterproof, stabilized type as recommended by flooring manufacturer to suit 39 material and substrate conditions, except no cutback asphalt adhesives allowed. 40 41 Static Dissipative Tile Adhesives(Cements): Waterproof, stabilized type as recommended by flooring 42 manufacturer to suit material and substrate conditions, except no cutback asphalt adhesives allowed. 43 44 Copper Grounding Strips: Type as recommended by flooring manufacturer. 45 46 Static Dissipative Polish: Type as recommended by flooring manufacturer. 47 48 Concrete Slab Primer: Non-staining type as recommended by flooring manufacturer. 49 50 Leveling and Patching Compound: Latex modified cementitious types as recommended by flooring 51 manufacturer. 52 53 RESILIENT STAIR ACCESSORIES 54 55 Resilient Stair Treads: 56 57 Manufacturers: As indicated on the Drawings RESILIENT FLOORING GDA 09650-3 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 Resilient Stair Treads Standard: ASTM F 2169. 3 4 Material Requirement: Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset) or Type TP (rubber, 5 thermoplastic). 6 Surface Design: 7 8 Manufacturing Method: Group 1, tread with embedded abrasive strips. 9 10 Nosing Style: Round. 11 12 Nosing Height: 2 inches (51 mm). 13 14 Thickness: 1/4 inch (6 mm)and tapered to back edge. 15 16 Size: Lengths and depths to fit each stair tread in one piece. 17 18 Risers: Smooth, flat, coved-toe, 7 inches (178 mm)high by length matching treads; produced 19 by same manufacturer as treads and recommended by manufacturer for installation with 20 treads. 21 22 Thickness: 0.080 inch (2.0 mm). 23 24 Colors and Patterns: As indicated by Architect from full range of industry colors and pattern. 25 26 PART 3- EXECUTION 27 28 29 INSPECTION: 30 31 Require Installer to inspect subfloor surfaces to determine that they are satisfactory. A satisfactory 32 subfloor surface is defined as one that is smooth and free from cracks, holes, ridges, coatings 33 preventing adhesive bond, and other defects impairing performance or appearance. 34 35 Perform bond and moisture tests on concrete subfloors to determine if surfaces are sufficiently cured 36 and dry as well as to ascertain presence of curing compounds. 37 38 Checking For Moisture Content 39 40 Before beginning any installation on concrete(on grade or below grade), check for moisture. 41 42 Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and as follows. Proceed with 43 installation only after substrates pass testing. 44 45 Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation 46 only after substrates have relative humidity level measurement acceptable to flooring 47 manufacturer. 48 49 Do not proceed with installation when moisture content readings exceed these rates. Notify Architect 50 of results immediately. 51 52 Checking for Porosity 53 54 All concrete is porous to some extent. Porosity also affects the adhesive, therefore care should be 55 taken to be sure that all areas of the building have the same porosity. Floor porosity is the number 56 one factor that influences adhesive setup time. 57 RESILIENT FLOORING GDA 09650-4 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 The pH of the floor surface can be determined by slightly wetting the floor and applying pH paper is 2 placed in water on the concrete it changes colors, indicating the pH level. 3 4 Do not proceed with installation when pH level readings exceed the flooring adhesive manufacturer's 5 acceptable range. Notify Architect of results immediately. 6 7 1- ApHof7isneutral. 8 2- A pH of less than 7 indicates acidity which increases as the numbers decrease. 9 3- A pH of more than 7 denotes alkalinity which increases as the numbers increase. 10 11 Highly alkaline surfaces be "Neutralized" using an acid wash (Muriatic Acid). This can be 12 accomplished by using 10 parts water to 1 part Muriatic Acid and rinsing twice with clear water. In 13 some cases a 30% mixture of white vinegar to water can be used. Follow all manufacturers 14 recommendations and precautions before proceeding. 15 16 Do not allow resilient flooring work to proceed until subfloor surfaces are satisfactory. 17 18 ACCEPTANCE 19 20 Commencement of work indicates acceptance and suitability of surface for installation. 21 22 PREPARATION: 23 24 Prepare subfloor surfaces as follows: 25 26 Use leveling and patching compounds as recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer for 27 filling small cracks, holes and depressions in subfloors. 28 29 Remove coatings from subfloor surfaces that would prevent adhesive bond, including curing 30 compounds incompatible with resilient flooring adhesives, paint, oils, waxes and sealers. 31 32 Broom clean or vacuum surfaces to be covered, and inspect subfloor. 33 34 Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by flooring manufacturer, prior to application of adhesive. 35 Apply in compliance with manufacturer's directions. 36 37 INSTALLATION: 38 39 GENERAL: 40 41 Where movable partitions are shown, install resilient flooring before partitions are erected. 42 43 Install resilient flooring using method indicated in strict compliance with manufacturer's printed 44 instructions. Extend flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, and into closets and similar openings. 45 46 Scribe, cut, and fit resilient flooring to permanent fixtures, built-in furniture and cabinets, pipes, outlets 47 and permanent columns, walls and partitions. 48 49 Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or plainly marked for future cutting by 50 repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other non-permanent marking device. 51 52 Install resilient flooring on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, and other such items as occur 53 within finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern with pieces of flooring 54 installed on these covers. Tightly cement edges to perimeter of floor around covers and to covers. 55 56 Tightly cement resilient flooring to subbase without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, 57 telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, or other surface imperfections. Hand roll resilient flooring at RESILIENT FLOORING GDA 09650- 5 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 perimeter of each covered area to assure adhesion. 2 3 INSTALLATION OF TILE FLOORS: 4 5 Lay tile from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so that tile at 6 opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid use of cut widths less than 7 1/2 tile at room perimeters. Lay tile square to room axis, unless otherwise shown. 8 9 Match tiles for color and pattern by using tile from cartons in same sequence as manufactured and 10 packaged if so numbered. Cut tile neatly around all fixtures. Broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed 11 tiles are not acceptable. 12 13 Lay tile with grain running in direction and in patterns as shown on the drawings, or as 14 directed by Architect. 15 16 Adhere tile flooring to substrates using full spread of adhesive applied in compliance with flooring 17 manufacturer's directions. 18 19 Static Dissipative Tile Requirements: 20 21 See manufacturer's instructions for adhesives, trowel notchings, and seam treatment. 22 When using tile from two or more cartons, check to be sure all pattern and lot numbers are the same 23 to ensure proper color match. On larger installations, open several cartons and mix them as they are 24 installed to help blend any slight shade differences from one carton to the next. 25 26 1. Line off the entire area to be installed. 27 28 2. Apply the SDT adhesive over the area not covering the chalk lines and using the fine notching of 29 the manufacturer's recommended trowel. 30 31 3. Allow the adhesive to set until dry to the touch approximately 60 minutes depending on atmospheric 32 conditions. To test, press your thumb lightly on the surface of the adhesive in several places. If the 33 surface feels slightly tacky as your thumb is drawn away and does not stick to your 34 thumb, the adhesive is ready for the installation. 35 36 4. Cut copper strips (0.0032 thick)which are supplied with the adhesive into two-foot strips. Generally, 37 one grounding strip (two-foot length) is recommended for every 1000 ft2 of SDT installed over 38 concrete on grade. For suspended subfloors, one grounding strip is recommended for every 500 ft2 of 39 tile. Additional strips may be requested by the end user. The installer should receive some guidance 40 from the general contractor or end user as to the desired location of the copper strips to make 41 subsequent grounding more convenient. 42 43 5. Install the tile along the chalk lines, laying the field area first and then fitting in the border tile. 44 45 6. In the copper grounding strip locations, place 18" of the copper grounding strip over the dry-to-touch 46 SDT adhesive on the subfloor. The remaining 6"of the strip should continue up the wall. 47 48 7. Apply additional SDT adhesive over the 18" section of the copper grounding strip on the floor. Allow 49 this adhesive to dry to the touch and install the tile over the strip. 50 51 8. Roll in both directions within the adhesive's six-hour working time using a 100-lb. roller. Clean 52 adhesive residue from the surface of the flooring using a clean, white cloth dampened with mineral 53 spirits. 54 55 9. Newly installed flooring should not be exposed to rolling load traffic for at least 72 hours after 56 installation to allow setting and drying of the adhesive. 57 RESILIENT FLOORING GDA 09650- 6 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 10. Follow manufacturer's initial maintenance procedures. 2 3 Grounding of SDT: It is NOT the responsibility of the flooring contractor to actually ground the strips. 4 Grounding is normally done by an electrician. It is important to note that it is the responsiblity of the 5 end-user and/or electrician to make certain that the grounding method employed meets applicable 6 code requirements. The ground connection may be made to either an earth ground or an electrical 7 ground. Two methods of grounding normally used are as follows: 8 9 1. Ground to steel support columns: Drill and tap holes in the steel column, and fasten the copper strip 10 using a machine screw. 11 12 2. Connect to ground bus: Solder a wire (#12 or #14) to the copper strip and connect this wire to a 13 ground bus in accordance with applicable building or electrical codes. Once the connection is made, 14 copper strip and wire may be hidden or covered as desired. 15 16 Precautions: If electrical certification of an installation is required, do not perform any maintenance 17 procedures until after certification has been completed. 18 19 Use manufacturer's Static Dissipative Tile Polish on SDT. 20 21 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES: 22 23 Apply wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and other permanent fixtures in rooms or areas 24 where base is required. Install base in lengths as long as practicable, with preformed corner units, or 25 fabricated from base materials with mitered or coped inside corners. Tightly bond base to substrate 26 throughout length of each piece, with continuous contact at horizontal and vertical surfaces. 27 28 On masonry surfaces, or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient 29 wall base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. 30 31 Install inside and exterior corners before installing straight pieces. 32 33 Form inside corners on lob from straight pieces of maximum lengths possible by cutting an 34 inverted V-shaped notch in toe of wall base at the point where corner is formed. Shave back 35 of base where necessary to produce snug fit to substrate. 36 37 Form outside corners on lob from straight pieces of maximum lengths possible by shaving 38 back of base at point where bending will occur. Remove a strip perpendicular to length of 39 base and only deep enough to produce a snug fit without bends whitening or removal of more 40 than half the thickness of wall base. 41 42 Place resilient edge strips tightly butted to flooring and secure with adhesive. Install edging strips at 43 edges of flooring which would otherwise be exposed. 44 45 Apply resilient accessories to stairs as indicated and in strict accordance with manufacturer's 46 installation instructions. 47 48 Resilient Stair Accessories: 49 50 Use stair-tread-nose filler to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours. 51 52 Tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. 53 54 CLEANING AND PROTECTION: 55 56 Perform following operations immediately upon completion of resilient flooring: 57 RESILIENT FLOORING GDA 09650- 7 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly. 2 3 Do not wash floor until time period recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer has 4 elapsed to allow resilient flooring to become well-sealed in adhesive. 5 6 Damp-mop floor being careful to remove black marks and excessive soil. 7 8 Remove any excess adhesive or other surface blemishes, using appropriate cleaner 9 recommended by resilient flooring manufacturers. 10 11 Protect flooring against damage during construction period to comply with resilient flooring 12 manufacturer's directions. 13 14 Apply protective floor polish to resilient flooring surfaces free from soil, excess adhesive or 15 surface blemishes. Use commercially available metal cross-linked acrylic product acceptable 16 to resilient flooring manufacturer. 17 18 Protect resilient flooring against damage from rolling loads for initial period following 19 installation by covering with plywood or hardboard. Use dollies to move stationary equipment 20 or furnishings across floors. 21 22 Cover resilient flooring with undyed, untreated building paper until inspection for substantial 23 completion. 24 25 Clean resilient flooring not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for inspections intended to 26 establish date of substantial completion in each area of project. Clean resilient flooring by method 27 recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer. 28 29 Strip protective floor polish, which was applied after completion of installation, prior to 30 cleaning. 31 32 Reapply floor polish after cleaning. 33 34 EXTRA STOCK: 35 36 Deliver stock of maintenance materials to Owner. Furnish maintenance materials from same 37 manufactured lot as materials installed and enclosed in protective packaging with appropriate 38 identifying labels. 39 40 Tile Flooring: Furnish not less than one box for each 50 boxes or fraction thereof, for each 41 type, color, pattern and size installed. 42 43 44 END OF SECTION 09650 RESILIENT FLOORING GDA 09650- 8 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 SECTION 09681 -CARPET TILE 2 3 4 PART 1 - GENERAL 5 6 7 RELATED DOCUMENTS 8 9 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions 10 and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 11 12 SUMMARY 13 14 This Section includes carpet tile and installation. 15 16 Related Sections include the following: 17 18 Division 9 Section "Resilient Tile Flooring" for resilient wall base and accessories installed 19 with carpet tile. 20 21 SUBMITTALS 22 23 Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on physical 24 characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. Include installation methods. 25 26 Shop Drawings: Show the following: 27 28 Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where 29 cutouts are required in carpet tiles. 30 Carpet tile type, color, and dye lot. 31 Type of subfloor. 32 Type of installation. 33 Pattern of installation. 34 Pattern type, location, and direction. 35 Pile direction. 36 Type, color, and location of insets and borders. 37 Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips. 38 Transition details to other flooring materials. 39 40 Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each 41 Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated 42 on Drawings and in schedules. 43 44 Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample. 45 Exposed Edge Stripping and Accessory: 12-inch- (300-mm-) long Samples. 46 47 Product Schedule: Use same room and product designations indicated on Drawings and in 48 schedules. 49 50 Maintenance Data: For carpet tile to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. 51 Include the following: 52 53 Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain-removal products and 54 procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule. 55 Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet tile. 56 CARPET TILE GDA 09681 - 1 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 QUALITY ASSURANCE 2 3 Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Covering Installation 4 Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program requirements. 5 6 Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with the critical radiant flux classification 7 indicated in Part 2, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 648 by an independent 8 testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 9 10 Product Options: Products and manufacturers named in Part 2 establish requirements for product 11 quality in terms of appearance, construction, and performance. Other manufacturers' products 12 comparable in quality to named products and complying with requirements may be considered. 13 Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions." 14 15 Mockups: Before installing carpet tile, install mockups for each type of carpet tile installation 16 required to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. Install mockups 17 to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: 18 19 Install mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by 20 Architect. 21 Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be installed. 22 Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 23 Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work. 24 Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging 25 the completed Work. 26 Remove mockups when directed. 27 Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undamaged at time of 28 Substantial Completion. 29 30 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 31 32 General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling." 33 34 PROJECT CONDITIONS 35 36 General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.1, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity." 37 38 Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet tile until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, 39 and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project 40 when occupied for its intended use. 41 42 Do not install carpet tile over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond 43 with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 44 45 WARRANTY 46 47 General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights 48 Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and 49 run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract 50 Documents. 51 52 Special Carpet Tile Warranty: Written warranty, signed by carpet tile manufacturer agreeing to 53 replace carpet tile that does not comply with requirements or that fails within specified warranty 54 period. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic, failure 55 of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent 56 loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, and delamination. CARPET TILE GDA 09681 - 2 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 3 4 EXTRA MATERIALS 5 6 Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed 7 and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing 8 contents. 9 10 Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 2 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, 11 but not less than i sq yd. (8.3 sq. m). 12 13 14 PART 2- PRODUCTS 15 16 CARPET TILE 17 18 Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 19 20 Citadel#100499 21 22 Interface Flooring Systems, Inc. 23 1503 Orchard Hill Road 24 LaGrange, GA 30241 25 Voice 706/882-1891 26 Fax: 706/882-0500 27 28 Contact: Stephanie Glinka 29 Voice 214-497-2340 30 31 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES 32 33 Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based 34 formulation provided by or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 35 36 Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor 37 conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile and that 38 is recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 39 40 Vapor Retarder System: Moisture retarder that prevents high moisture and pH from concrete slabs 41 from reaching carpet manufacturer's modular carpet backing. Vapor retarder system protects 42 against up to 15 lbs of moisture and a pH of 12,when tested in accordance with ASTM F1869-04. 43 44 Manufacturer: Moisturegard 2.0, Interface Flooring Systems, Inc. 45 46 47 PART 3- EXECUTION 48 49 50 EXAMINATION 51 52 Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for maximum 53 moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet tile 54 performance. Verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for carpet tile installation and 55 comply with requirements specified. 56 CARPET TILE GDA 09681 - 3 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following: 2 3 Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other 4 materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness 5 characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet tile 6 manufacturer. 7 Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place 8 Concrete"for slabs receiving carpet tile. 9 Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits. 10 11 Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 12 13 PREPARATION 14 15 General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and carpet tile 16 manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet 17 tile installation. 18 19 Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, 20 to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. 21 22 Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with 23 adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical 24 methods recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. 25 26 Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile. After 27 cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Proceed with 28 installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 29 30 VAPOR RETARDER INSTALLATION 31 32 Installation Method: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to manufacturer's 33 written instructions. 34 35 INSTALLATION 36 37 General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 13, "Carpet Modules (Tiles)." 38 39 Installation Method: Install per manufacturers recommendations. 40 41 Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture 42 including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as 43 recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 44 45 Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable 46 flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. 47 48 Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by 49 repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking 50 device. 51 52 Install pattern as directed by architect. 53 54 CLEANING AND PROTECTION 55 56 Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile: CARPET TILE GDA 09681 - 4 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface. 3 Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element. 4 5 Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI 104, Section 15, "Protection of Indoor Installations." 6 7 Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and 8 fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or 9 recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. 10 11 12 END OF SECTION 09681 CARPET TILE GDA 09681 -5 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 SECTION 09900-PAINTING 2 3 4 PART 1 -GENERAL 5 6 7 RELATED DOCUMENTS 8 9 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions 10 and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 11 12 SUMMARY 13 14 This Section includes surface preparation, painting, and finishing of exposed interior and exterior 15 items and surfaces. 16 17 Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop-priming 18 and surface treatment specified under other Sections. 19 20 Painted exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designated in schedules, except where a surface 21 or material is specifically indicated not to be painted or is to remain natural. Where an item or surface 22 is not specifically mentioned, paint the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If color or 23 finish is not designated,the Architect will select from standard colors or finishes available. 24 25 Painting includes field-painting exposed bare and covered pipes, hanger, exposed steel and 26 iron work, and primed metal surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. 27 28 Painting is not required on prefinished items, finished metal surfaces, concealed surfaces, operating 29 parts and labels. 30 31 Prefinished items not to be painted include the following factory-finished components: 32 33 Finished mechanical and electrical equipment. 34 35 Light fixtures. 36 37 Switchgear. 38 39 Distribution cabinets. 40 41 Concealed surfaces not to be painted include wall or ceiling surfaces in the following generally 42 inaccessible areas: 43 44 Foundation spaces. 45 46 Furred areas. 47 48 Utility tunnels. 49 50 Pipe spaces. 51 52 Finished metal surfaces not to be painted include: 53 54 Anodized aluminum. 55 56 Stainless steel. 57 PAINTING GDA 09900- 1 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Chromium plate. 2 3 Copper. 4 5 Bronze. 6 7 Brass. 8 9 Operating parts not to be painted include moving parts of operating equipment, such as the 10 following: 11 12 Valve and damper operators. 13 14 Linkages. 15 16 Sensing devices. 17 18 Motor and fan shafts. 19 20 Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories, Factory Mutual or other code-required 21 labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 22 23 Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 24 25 Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for shop-priming structural steel. 26 27 Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications: for shop-priming ferrous metal. 28 29 Division 8 Section "Standard Steel Doors and Frames" for shop-priming steel doors and 30 frames. 31 32 SUBMITTALS 33 34 General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification 35 Sections. 36 37 Product data for each paint system specified, including block fillers and primers. 38 39 Provide the manufacturer's technical information including label analysis and instructions for 40 handling, storage, and application of each material proposed for use. 41 42 List each material and cross-reference the specific coating, finish system, and application. 43 Identify each material by the manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. 44 45 Certification by the manufacturer that products supplied comply with federal, state, and local 46 regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs). 47 48 Samples for initial color selection in the form of manufacturer's color charts. 49 50 After color selection, the Architect will furnish color chips for surfaces to be coated. 51 52 Samples for Verification Purposes: Provide samples of each color and material to be applied, with 53 texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative samples of the actual substrate. 54 55 Provide stepped samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and primers. 56 Use representative colors when preparing samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen, 57 color, and texture are achieved. PAINTING GDA 09900-2 GDA#12018.00 December 14,2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 Provide a list of material and application for each coat of each sample. Label each sample as 3 to location and application. 4 5 Submit samples on the following substrates for the Architect's review of color and texture only: 6 7 Concrete: Provide two 4-inch-square samples for each color and finish. 8 9 Concrete Masonry: Provide two 4-by-8-inch samples of masonry, with mortar joint in 10 the center,for each finish and color. 11 12 Ferrous Metal: Provide two 4-inch-square samples of flat metal and two 8-inch-long 13 samples of solid metal for each color and finish. 14 15 VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPONENTS (VOC)COMPLIANCE: 16 17 In no circumstance, whether referenced in these specifications or not, shall any material or coating 18 product not in compliance with requirements and regulations for Volatile Organic Components (VOC) 19 of the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), Occupational Safety Health Administration (OSHA), 20 and any State, County, or Local Air Control District be included on this project. If any product not in 21 compliance with these regulations and requirements is included herein, this clause shall have the 22 effect of removing it from the available products allowed in the work. If any of these regulations or 23 requirements do not have jurisdiction over the locale in which the work is to be performed, this clause 24 shall not have effect on the provisions of this section. 25 26 QUALITY ASSURANCE 27 28 Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting system 29 applications similar in material and extent to those indicated for the Project that have resulted in a 30 construction record of successful in-service performance. 31 32 Single-Source Responsibility: Provide primers and undercoat paint produced by the same 33 manufacturer as the finish coats. 34 35 Field Samples: On wall surfaces and other exterior and interior components, duplicate finishes of 36 prepared samples. Provide full-coat finish samples on at least 100 sq. ft. of surface until required 37 sheen, color, and texture are obtained; simulate finished lighting conditions for review of in-place work. 38 39 Final acceptance of colors will be from job-applied samples. 40 41 The Architect will select one room or surface to represent surfaces and conditions for each 42 type of coating and substrate to be painted. Apply coatings in this room or surface according 43 to the schedule or as specified. 44 45 After finishes are accepted, this room or surface will be used to evaluate coating 46 systems of a similar nature. 47 48 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING 49 50 Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers 51 bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information: 52 53 Product name or title of material. 54 55 Product description (generic classification or binder type). 56 57 Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. PAINTING GDA 09900-3 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 3 4 Thinning instruction. 5 6 Application instructions. 7 8 Color name and number. 9 10 Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient 11 temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of 12 foreign materials and residue. 13 14 Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste 15 daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from 16 fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application. 17 18 JOB CONDITIONS 19 20 Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air 21 temperatures are between 50 deg F (10 deg C)and 90 deg F (32 deg C). 22 23 Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air 24 temperatures are between 45 deg F (7 deg C)and 95 deg F (35 deg C). 25 26 Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at 27 temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 28 29 Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are 30 enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by the manufacturer during 31 application and drying periods. 32 33 EXTRA STOCK 34 35 Deliver to and store on site where directed by Owner, not less than ten gallons of each type and color 36 used. 37 38 39 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 40 41 42 MANUFACTURERS 43 44 Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: 45 46 Devoe and Reynolds Co. (Devoe) 47 Fuller O'Brien (Fuller) 48 The Glidden Company (Glidden) 49 Benjamin Moore and Co. (Moore) 50 PPG Industries, Pittsburgh Paints (PPG) 51 Pratt and Lambert(P & L) 52 The Sherwin-Williams Company (S-W) 53 54 Equivalent products of the following companies may be provided after signed approval of the 55 Architect: 56 57 Anchor Paint Co. (Anchor) PAINTING GDA 09900- 4 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Monarch Paint Co. (Monarch) 2 3 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL 4 5 Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, finish coat materials, and related materials that 6 are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and 7 application, as demonstrated by the manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 8 9 Material Quality: Provide the manufacturer's best-quality trade sale paint material of the various 10 coating types specified. Paint material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification 11 will not be acceptable. 12 13 Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or 14 materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the 15 exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish the manufacturer's material 16 data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions. 17 18 Colors: Match colors indicated by reference to the manufacturer's standard color designations. 19 20 EXTERIOR FINISH MATERIAL 21 22 Finish Paint: Provide the manufacturer's recommended factory-formulated finish-coat materials that 23 are compatible with the substrate and undercoats indicated. 24 25 Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products as scheduled at the end of this 26 section. 27 28 INTERIOR FINISH PAINT MATERIAL 29 30 Finish Paint: Provide the manufacturer's recomended factory-formulated finish-coat materials that are 31 compatible with the substrate and undercoats indicated. 32 33 34 PART 3- EXECUTION 35 36 37 EXAMINATION 38 39 Examine substrates and conditions under which painting will be performed for compliance with paint 40 application requirements. Surfaces receiving paint must be thoroughly dry before paint is applied. 41 42 Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 43 44 Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions 45 within a particular area. 46 47 Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of 48 the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish 49 materials to ensure use of compatible primers. 50 51 Notify the Architect about anticipated problems using the materials specified over substrates 52 primed by others. 53 54 PREPARATION 55 56 General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, 57 and similar items already installed that are not to be painted, or provide surface-applied protection PAINTING GDA 09900- 5 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 prior to surface preparation and painting. Remove these items, if necessary, to completely paint the 2 items and adjacent surfaces. Following completion of painting operations in each space or area, have 3 items reinstalled by workers skilled in the trades involved. 4 5 Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of substances that 6 could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease prior to cleaning. Schedule 7 cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, 8 newly painted surfaces. 9 10 Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to the manufacturer's 11 instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 12 13 Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. Notify Architect in 14 writing about anticipated problems using the specified finish-coat material with substrates 15 primed by others. 16 17 Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, and concrete tiltwall panel surfaces to be painted. 18 Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen, as 19 required, to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use 20 mechanical methods of surface preparation. 21 22 Use abrasiveor brush-off blast-cleaning methods. 23 24 Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. 25 If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister an burn, correct 26 this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content 27 exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's printed directions. 28 29 Prime all surfaces with alkali resistant primers where PH level is 13 or greater. 30 31 Concrete Tiltwall Panels: All patching of concrete tiltwall panels shall be completed at 32 least thirty (30) days prior to applying specified coating. If patchwork is not completed 33 at least thirty (30) days prior to coating, all surfaces shall be tested for alkalinity 34 content and primed with specified primer if PH levels exceed 13. 35 36 Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous metal surfaces that have not been shop-coated; 37 remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or 38 mechanical cleaning methods that comply with recommendations of the Steel Structures 39 Painting Council (SSPC). 40 41 Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by the paint system manufacturer and 42 according to requirements of SSPC specification SSPC-SP 10. 43 44 Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat 45 before priming. 46 47 Touch up bare areas and shop applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire- 48 brush, clean with solvents recommended by the paint manufacturer, and touch up 49 with the same primer as the shop coat. 50 51 Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so that 52 the surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized 53 sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. 54 55 Materials Preparation: Carefully mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's 56 directions. 57 PAINTING GDA 09900- 6 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign 2 materials and residue. 3 4 Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density; stir as required during 5 application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and, if necessary, strain 6 material before using. 7 8 Use only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits. 9 10 Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat where multiple 11 coats of the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but 12 provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. 13 14 APPLICATION 15 16 General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and techniques best 17 suited for substrate and type of material being applied. 18 19 Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to 20 formation of a durable paint film. 21 22 Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the schedules. 23 24 Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers. 25 26 The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of the 27 application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as 28 recommended by the manufacturer. Sand between applications where sanding is required to 29 produce a smooth even surface according to the manufacturer's directions. 30 31 Apply additional coats if substrate, undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final 32 coat of paint until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention 33 to ensure that surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners, 34 receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 35 36 The term exposed surfaces includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, 37 convector covers, covers for finned tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in 38 place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and 39 provide desired protection. 40 41 Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed 42 surfaces. Before the final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed 43 equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 44 45 Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, with a flat, 46 nonspecular black paint. 47 48 Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges same as exterior faces. 49 50 Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. 51 52 Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop-primed and touch-up painted. 53 54 Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise 55 prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface 56 deterioration. 57 PAINTING GDA 09900- 7 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat until 2 paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb 3 pressure, and where application of another coat of paint does not cause the undercoat to lift 4 or lose adhesion. 5 6 Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators 7 according to the manufacturer's directions. 8 9 Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the material applied. 10 11 Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by the 12 manufacturer for the material and texture required. 13 14 Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by the 15 manufacturer for the material and texture required. 16 17 Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials no thinner than the manufacturer's recommended 18 spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the 19 manufacturer. 20 21 Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed 22 in mechanical equipment rooms and as indicated below: 23 24 Paint PVC roof drain leaders. 25 26 Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following: 27 28 Switchgear(if not factory finished). 29 Distribution cabinets (if not factory finished). 30 31 Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with 32 pores filled. 33 34 Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by the 35 manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime-coated 36 by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in 37 first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient 38 sealing. 39 40 Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evidence of 41 rolling such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections. 42 43 Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform 44 finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, 45 sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. 46 47 Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or 48 repaint work not complying with specified requirements. 49 50 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 51 52 The Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and as often as the 53 Owner deems necessary during the period when paint is being applied: 54 55 The Owner will engage the services of an independent testing agency to sample the paint 56 material being used. Samples of material delivered to the Project will be taken, identified, 57 sealed, and certified in the presence of the Contractor. PAINTING GDA 09900- 8 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 The testing agency will perform appropriate tests for the following characteristics as required 3 by the Owner: 4 5 Quantitative materials analysis. 6 Abrasion resistance. 7 Apparent reflectivity. 8 Flexibility. 9 Washability. 10 Absorption. 11 Accelerated weathering. 12 Dry opacity. 13 Accelerated yellowness. 14 Recoating. 15 Skinning. 16 Color retention. 17 Alkali and mildew resistance. 18 19 If tests results show material being used does not comply with specified requirements, the 20 Contractor may be directed to stop painting, remove noncomplying paint, pay for testing, 21 repaint surfaces coated with rejected paint, and remove rejected paint from previously painted 22 surfaces if, upon repainting with specified paint,the two coatings are incompatible. 23 24 CLEANING 25 26 Cleanup: At the end of each work day, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint 27 materials from the site. 28 29 After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint 30 by washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. 31 32 PROTECTION 33 34 Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct 35 damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing,and repainting, as acceptable to Architect. 36 37 Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings 38 provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations. 39 40 At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or 41 defaced painted surfaces. 42 PAINTING GDA 09900-9 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 PAINTING SCHEDULE 2 1.1 CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT BLOCK FILLERS 3 A. Concrete Masonry Unit Block Filler: Factory-formulated high-performance latex block fillers. 4 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Craft Latex Block Filler No. 285: Applied at a dry 5 film thickness of not less than 3.1 mils (0.206 mm). 6 2. Kelly-Moore; 521 Fill and Prime Acrylic Block Filler: Applied at a dry film thickness of 7 not less than 10 0 r- (0 254 mm). 8 3. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-7 SpeedHide Interior/Exterior Masonry Latex Block Filler: Applied 9 at a dry film thickness of not less than 3 U to 12.5 rugs (0.152 to 0,318 mm). 10 4. Sherwin-Williams; PrepRite Interior/Exterior Block Filler B25W25: Applied at a dry 11 film thickness of not less than (0.203 mm). 12 1.2 INTERIOR PRIMERS 13 A. Interior Gypsum Board Primer: Factory-formulated latex-based primer for interior 14 application. 15 1. Benjamin Moore; Regal FirstCoat Interior Latex Primer & Underbody No. 216: 16 Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than J mil (0.025 mm). 17 2. Kelly-Moore; 971 Acry-Prime Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: Applied at a dry film 18 thickness of not less than 6 mils (0 041 mm). 19 3. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-2 SpeedHide Interior Quick-Drying Latex Sealer: Applied at a dry 20 film thickness of not less than 1.0 (0.025 mm). 21 4. Sherwin-Williams; PrepRite 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W200 Series: Applied at a dry 22 film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils (0.041 mm). 23 B. Interior Ferrous-Metal Primer: Factory-formulated quick-drying rust-inhibitive alkyd-based 24 metal primer. 25 1. Benjamin Moore; IronClad Alkyd Low Lustre Medal and Wood Enamel No. 163: 26 Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than ' 3 m . (0.033 mm). 27 2. Kelly-Moore; 1711 Kel-Guard Alkyd White Rust Inhibitive Primer: Applied at a dry film 28 thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 29 3. Pittsburgh Paints; 7-858 Pittsburgh Paints Industrial Rust Inhibitive Steel Primer: 30 Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than m ,s (0.038 mm). 31 4. Sherwin-Williams; Kem Kromik Universal Metal Primer B50NZ6/B50WZ1: Applied at 32 a dry film thickness of not less than 3 mils (0.076 mm). 33 5. Sherwin-Williams; DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish: Applied at a dry film thickness of not 34 less than 3.0 mils (0.076 mm). 35 PAINTING GDA 09900- 10 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 1.3 INTERIOR FINISH COATS 2 A. Interior Flat Acrylic Enamel: Factory-formulated flat acrylic-latex interior enamel. 3 1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's Regal Classic Premium Interior Paint No. 215: Applied at a 4 dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils (0.036 mm). 5 2. Kelly-Moore; 1610 Sat-N-Sheen Interior Latex Flat Wall and Trim Finish: Applied at a 6 dry film thickness of not less than 1.7 mils (0.043 mm). 7 3. Pittsburgh Paints; 86-Line Manor Hall Interior Flat Wall and Trim: Applied at a dry film 8 thickness of not less than 1 mils (0.036 mm). 9 4. Sherwin-Williams; SuperPaint Interior Latex Flat Wall Paint A86 Series: Applied at a 10 dry film thickness of not less than '.6 mils (0.041 mm). 11 B. Interior Eggshell Acrylic Enamel: Factory-formulated eggshell acrylic-latex interior enamel. 12 1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's Regal Classic Premium Interior Paint No. 319: Applied at a 13 dry film thickness of not less than m is (0.036 mm). 14 2. Kelly-Moore; 1610 Sat-N-Sheen Interior Latex Low Sheen Wall and Trim Finish: 15 Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.7 mils (0.043 mm). 16 3. Pittsburgh Paints; 89-Line Manor Hall Interior Eggshell Wall and Trim: Applied at a 17 dry film thickness of not less than 1 4 mils (0.036 mm). 18 4. Sherwin-Williams; SuperPaint Interior Latex Satin Wall Paint A87 Series: Applied at a 19 dry film thickness of not less than I 6 'rilS (0.041 mm). 20 C. Interior Semigloss Acrylic Enamel: Factory-formulated semigloss acrylic-latex enamel for 21 interior application. 22 1. Benjamin Moore; Regal Classic Premium Interior Paint No. 333: Applied at a dry film 23 thickness of not less than ' 3 rriis (0.033 mm). 24 2. Kelly-Moore; 1650 Acry-Plex Latex Interior Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel: Applied at a 25 dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). 26 3. Pittsburgh Paints; 88-110 Satinhide Interior Enamel Wall & Trim Lo-Lustre Semi- 27 Gloss Latex: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.1 mils (0.028 mm). 28 4. Sherwin-Williams; SuperPaint Interior Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel A88 Series: Applied 29 at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils (0.041 mm). 30 D. Interior Full-Gloss Acrylic Enamel: Factory-formulated full-gloss acrylic-latex interior enamel. 31 1. Benjamin Moore; Impervex Enamel No. 309: Applied at a dry film thickness of not 32 less than 1 2 m ,s (0.031 mm). 33 2. Kelly-Moore; 1680 Dura-Poxy Gloss Acrylic Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of 34 not less than 1.6 mils (0.041 mm). 35 3. Pittsburgh Paints; 51 Line Brilliant Reflections Interior/Exterior Latex Gloss Enamel: 36 Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1 3 ails (0.033 mm). 37 4. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Interior Latex Gloss Enamel B21 W201: Applied at a 38 dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). 39 E. Interior Acrylic Dryfall: Factory-formulated flat acrylic interior dryfall finish. 40 1. Sherwin-Williams; Waterborne Acrylic Dryfall B42W1: Applied at a dry film 41 thickness/coat of not less than 3.0 to 4.5 mils (0.076 to .114 mm). 42 PAINTING GDA 09900- 11 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 1.4 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE 2 A. Concrete Masonry Units: Provide the following finish systems over concrete masonry units: 3 1. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a block filler. 4 a. Block Filler: Concrete Unit Masonry Block Filler. 5 b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel. 6 B. Gypsum Board: Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum board ceiling 7 surfaces: 8 1. Flat Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. 9 a. Primer: Interior gypsum board primer. 10 b. Finish Coats: Interior flat acrylic enamel. 11 C. Gypsum Board: Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum board wall 12 surfaces: 13 1. Low-Luster Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. 14 a. Primer: Interior gypsum board primer. 15 b. Finish Coats: Interior low-luster acrylic enamel. 16 D. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal, except as indicated 17 below: 18 1. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. 19 a. Primer: Interior ferrous-metal primer. 20 b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel. 21 2. Full-Gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish:Two finish coats over a primer. 22 a. Primer: Interior ferrous-metal primer. 23 b. Finish Coats: Interior full-gloss acrylic enamel. 24 E. Ferrous Metal — Steel Joists, Joist Girders, Steel Roof Deck, HVAC Ducts, Electrical 25 Conduits, Roof Drain Leaders, etcetera (all surfaces): Provide the following finish systems 26 over primed ferrous metal: 27 1. Dryfall Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. 28 a. Primer(if not shop primed): DTM Acrylic primer. 29 b. Finish Coats: Interior acrylic dryfall. 30 PAINTING GDA 09900- 12 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 1.5 EXTERIOR FINISH COATS 2 A. Exterior Flat Acrylic Paint: Factory-formulated flat acrylic-emulsion latex paint for exterior 3 application. 4 1. Benjamin Moore; MoorLife Latex House Paint No. 105: Applied at a dry film thickness 5 of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). 6 2. Kelly-Moore; 1240 Acry-Shield Exterior Acrylic Flat Finish: Applied at a dry film 7 thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 8 3. Pittsburgh Paints; 72 Line Sun-Proof Exterior Flat Latex House Paint: Applied at a dry 9 film thickness of not less than , 5 mils (0.038 mm). 10 4. Sherwin-Williams; SuperPaint Exterior Latex Flat House and Trim Paint, A80 Series: 11 Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils (0.036 mm). 12 B. Exterior Low-Luster Acrylic Paint: Factory-formulated low-sheen (eggshell) acrylic-latex 13 paint for exterior application. 14 1. Benjamin Moore; MoorGard Latex House Paint No. 103: Applied at a dry film 15 thickness of not less than 1.1 mils (0.028 mm). 16 2. Kelly-Moore; 1245 Acry-Velvet Exterior Low Sheen Acrylic Finish: Applied at a dry 17 film thickness of not less than ' <. s (0.046 mm). 18 3. Pittsburgh Paints; 76 Line Sun-Proof Exterior House & Trim Acrylic Satin Latex: 19 Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil (0.025 mm). 20 4. Sherwin-Williams; SuperPaint Exterior Latex Satin Wall Paint A89 Series: Applied at 21 a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils (0.036 mm). 22 C. Exterior Semigloss Acrylic Enamel: Factory-formulated semigloss waterborne acrylic-latex 23 enamel for exterior application. 24 1. Benjamin Moore; MoorGlo Latex House & Trim Paint No. 096: Applied at a dry film 25 thickness of not less than 1 2 ' l:, (0.031 mm). 26 2. Kelly-Moore; 1250 Acry-Lustre Exterior Semi-Gloss Acrylic Finish: Applied at a dry 27 film thickness of not less than '.6 mils (0.041 mm). 28 3. Pittsburgh Paints; 78 Line Sun-Proof Semi-Gloss Acrylic Latex House and Trim Paint: 29 Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.031 mm). 30 4. Sherwin-Williams; SuperPaint Exterior Gloss Latex A-84 Series: Applied at a dry film 31 thickness of not less than 1.4 mils (0.036 mm). 32 D. Exterior Acrylic Emulsion: Refer to Section 09985—Exterior Acrylic Coating. 33 E. Exterior Full-Gloss Acrylic Enamel for Ferrous and Other Metals: Factory-formulated full- 34 gloss waterborne acrylic-latex enamel for exterior application. 35 1. Benjamin Moore; Impervex Enamel High Gloss Metal & Wood Enamel No. 309: 36 Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1 2 mils (0.031 mm). 37 2. Kelly-Moore; 5780 DTM Acrylic Gloss Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not 38 less than 1.7 mils (0.043 mm). 39 3. Pittsburgh Paints; 90-Line Pitt-Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior High Performance 40 Waterborne High Gloss DTM Industrial Enamels: Applied at a dry film thickness of 41 not less than 3.0 mils (0.076 mm). 42 4. Sherwin-Williams; DTM Acrylic Coating Gloss (Waterborne) B66W100 Series: 43 Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2 4 mils (0.061 mm). 44 PAINTING GDA 09900- 13 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 1.6 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE 2 A. Concrete Masonry Units (CMU): Provide the following finish systems over exterior CMU 3 substrates: 4 1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats. 5 a. Exterior Acrylic Emulsion: Refer to Section 09985—Exterior Acrylic Coating. 6 B. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior ferrous metal. Primer is 7 not required on shop-primed items. 8 1. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a rust-inhibitive primer. 9 a. Primer: Exterior ferrous-metal primer. 10 b. Finish Coats: Exterior semigloss acrylic enamel. 11 2. Full-Gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a rust-inhibitive primer. 12 a. Primer: Exterior ferrous-metal primer. 13 b. Finish Coats: Exterior full-gloss acrylic enamel for ferrous and other metals. 14 C. Zinc-Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior zinc-coated metal 15 surfaces: 16 1. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a galvanized metal primer. 17 a. Primer: Exterior galvanized metal primer. 18 b. Finish Coats: Exterior semigloss acrylic enamel. 19 2. Full-Gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a galvanized metal primer. 20 a. Primer: Exterior galvanized metal primer. 21 b. Finish Coats: Exterior full-gloss acrylic enamel for ferrous and other metals. 22 23 END OF SECTION 09900 PAINTING GDA 09900-14 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 GDA SECTION 10155-TOILET COMPARTMENTS 2 3 4 PART 1 -GENERAL 5 6 7 RELATED DOCUMENTS: 8 9 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and 10 Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 11 12 SUMMARY: 13 14 Extent of toilet partitions is indicated on drawings. 15 16 Types of toilet compartments include: 17 18 Metal --baked enamel finish. 19 20 Styles of toilet compartments include: 21 22 Floor-anchored, overhead braced with anti-grip head rails. 23 24 Toilet access ories, such as toilet paper holders, grab bars, purse shelves, are specified elsewhere in 25 Division 10. 26 27 SUBMITTALS: 28 29 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's detailed technical data for materials, fabrication, and 30 installation, including catalog cuts of anchors, hardware, fastenings, and accessories. 31 32 Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection of toilet partition assemblies not 33 fully described by product drawings, templates, and instructions for installation of anchorage devices 34 built into other work. 35 36 Samples: Submit full range of color samples for each type of unit required. Submit 6" square samples 37 of each color and finish on same substrate to be used in work, for color verification after selections 38 have been made. 39 40 QUALITY ASSURANCE: 41 42 Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication 43 where possible, to ensure proper fitting of work. However, allow for adjustments within specified 44 tolerances wherever taking of field measurements before fabrication might delay work. 45 46 Coordination: Furnish inserts and anchorages which must be built into other work for installation of 47 toilet partitions and related work;coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay. 48 49 50 PART 2- PRODUCTS 51 52 53 MANUFACTURERS: 54 55 Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturer offering products which may be 56 incorporated in the work is limited to the following: 57 TOILET COMPARTMENTS GDA 10155- 1 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Hadrian Manufacturing Inc. 2 3 MATERIALS: 4 5 General: Provide materials which have been selected for surface flatness and smoothness. Exposed 6 surfaces which exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, telegraphing of core 7 material, or other imperfections on finished units are not acceptable. 8 9 Steel Sheets for Baked Enamel Finish: ASTM A 591, Class C, galvanized-bonderized, of following 10 minimum thicknesses: 11 12 Construction: Doors, Panels and Pilasters shall be constructed of two sheets of panel flatness 13 zinc-coated steel, Galvanneal ASTM A653 GR33, laminated under pressure to a honeycomb 14 core for sound deadening and rigidity. Formed edges to be welded together and inter-locked 15 under tension with a roll-formed oval crown locking bar, mitred, welded and ground smooth at 16 the corners. 17 18 Doors: Shall be 25mm (1")thick with cover sheets not less than 22ga. (0.8mm). 19 20 Panels: Shall be 25mm (1")thick with cover sheets not less than 22ga. (0.8mm). 21 22 Pilasters: Shall be 32mm (1.25")thick with cover sheets not less than 20 ga. (0.9mm). Pilaster 23 tops shall be reinforced with 20 ga. channel to create extra strength and twist-free rigidity 24 along with minimizing damage by handling and/or shipping. 25 26 Headrail: Shall be 25mm (1") by 41mm (1.625") extruded anodized aluminum with double- 27 ridge anti-grip design. Wall thickness to be 1.5mm (0.060") and shall be securely attached to 28 wall and pilasters with manufacturer's fittings in such a way as to make a strong and rigid 29 installation. All joints in headrails shall be made at pilaster. 30 31 Concealed Anchorage Reinforcement: Minimum 12-gage galvanized steel sheet. 32 33 Concealed Tapping Reinforcement: Minimum 14-gage galvanized steel sheet. 34 35 Core Material for Metal Partitions: Manufacturer's standard sound-deadening, honeycomb, of 36 impregnated Kraft paper, in thickness to provide finished dimension of 1" minimum for doors, panels, 37 and screens, 1-1/4" minimum for pilasters. 38 39 Pilaster Shoes: ASTM A 167, Type 302/304 stainless steel, not less than 3" high, 20 gage, finished to 40 match hardware. 41 42 Brackets (Fittings): 43 44 Full-Height(Continuous) Type: Manufacturer's standard design; stainless steel. 45 46 Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating hardware and 47 accessories of chromium-plated non-ferrous cast alloy ("Zamac"). 48 49 Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel, chromium- 50 plated steel, or brass finished to match hardware, with theft-resistant type heads and nuts. For 51 concealed anchors, use hot-dip galvanized, cadmium-plated, or other rust-resistant protective-coated 52 steel. 53 54 FABRICATION: 55 56 General: Furnish standard doors, panels, screens, and pilasters fabricated for partition system, 57 unless otherwise indicated. Furnish units with cutouts, drilled holes, and internal reinforcement to TOILET COMPARTMENTS GDA 10155- 2 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 receive partition-mounted hardware, accessories, and grab bars, as indicated. 2 3 Door Dimensions: Unless otherwise indicated, furnish 24" wide inswinging doors for ordinary toilet 4 stalls and 32"wide (clear opening) outswinging doors at stalls equipped for use by handicapped. 5 6 Metal Toilet Partitions and Screens: 7 8 General: Pressure laminate seamless face sheets to core material and seal edges with continuous 9 interlocking strip or with lapped and formed edges. Weld edges and corners, with exposed welds 10 ground smooth. 11 12 Overhead-Braced Partitions: Furnish galvanized steel supports and leveling bolts at pilasters, as 13 recommended by manufacturer to suit floor conditions. Make provisions for setting and securing 14 continuous extruded aluminum anti-grip overhead-bracing at top of each pilaster. Furnish shoe at 15 each pilaster to conceal supports and leveling mechanism. 16 17 Wall-Hung Screens: Furnish panel units in sizes indicated, of same construction and finish as 18 partition system panels. 19 20 Hardware and Fittings: Furnish hardware for each compartment in partition system, as follows: 21 22 All panel and pilaster brackets and all door hardware shall be chrome plated zinc die castings. 23 Fasteners are zinc plated 12 x 1-3/4" and 12 x 5/8" TR-27 6-lobe security screws. Doors shall be 24 equipped with a gravity type hinge mounted on the lower pilaster hinge bracket. Door hinges shall be 25 fully concealed within the thickness of the door and adjustable to permit the door to come to rest at 26 any position when not latched. Each door to be fitted with a combined coat hook and bumper and a 27 concealed latch, with face mortised flush with edge strip of door. Barrier-free doors shall include 28 thumbturn lever to activate latch without fingertip grip application. Both standard and barrier-free 29 latches shall have a turn slot designed to allow emergency access from exterior. The combined stop 30 and keeper shall have a 19mm (0.75") diameter bumper locked in place. Threaded upper hinge pin 31 shall have a metal core and self-lubricating nylon sleeve to ensure smooth, quiet operation. Pilaster 32 shoes shall be a welded one-piece design made from polished stainless steel. Two-piece shoes that 33 can disassemble when kicked are unacceptable. 34 35 Shelf: Purse shelf(women's only). 36 37 Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation. 38 39 FINISHES: 40 41 Clean galvanized steel surfaces after fabrication and before application of powder coating system, to 42 remove processing compounds, oils, and other contaminants. 43 44 All sheet metal to be thoroughly cleaned, phosphated and finished with a high performance powder 45 coating, electrostatically applied and oven cured to provide a uniform, smooth protective finish. Color 46 shall be as selected from Hadrian's color card. 47 48 Color: Linen, #504. 49 50 51 PART 3 - EXECUTION 52 53 54 INSTALLATION: 55 56 General: Comply with manufacturer's recommended procedures and installation sequence. Install 57 partitions rigid, straight, plumb, and level. Provide clearances of not more than 1/2" between pilasters TOILET COMPARTMENTS GDA 10155 - 3 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 and panels, and not more than 1" between panels and walls. Secure panels to walls with not less than 2 two stirrup brackets attached near top and bottom of panel. Locate wall brackets so that holes for wall 3 anchorages occur in masonry or tile joints. Secure panels to pilasters with not less than two stirrup 4 brackets located to align with stirrup brackets at wall. Secure panels in position with manufacturer's 5 recommended anchoring devices. 6 7 Overhead-Braced Partitions: Secure pilasters to floor, and level, plumb, and tighten installation with 8 devices furnished. Secure overhead-brace to each pilaster with not less than two fasteners. Hang 9 doors and adjust so that tops of doors are parallel with overhead-brace when doors are in closed 10 position. 11 12 Screens: Attach with concealed anchoring devices, as recommended by manufacturer to suit 13 supporting structure. Set units to provide support and to resist lateral impact. 14 15 ADJUST AND CLEAN: 16 17 Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware for proper operation. Set hinges on inswinging 18 doors to hold open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on 19 outswinging doors (and entrance swing doors)to return to fully closed position. 20 21 Clean exposed surfaces of partition systems using materials and methods recommended by 22 manufacturer, and provide protection as necessary to prevent damage during remainder of 23 construction period. 24 25 END OF SECTION 10160 TOILET COMPARTMENTS GDA 10155-4 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 SECTION 10260—WALL SURFACE PROTECTION 2 3 4 PART 1 -GENERAL 5 6 7 SUMMARY 8 9 Section Includes: 10 11 Wall protection systems: 12 13 Impact-resistant wall coverings. 14 15 Related Sections/Items: 16 17 Section 06100-Wood blocking and grounds. 18 Section 09250-Gypsum Board:Wall substrates. 19 Section 09900-Painting: Preparation and priming of substrate surfaces. 20 21 SUBMITTALS 22 23 Comply with Section 01330. 24 25 Product data indicating compliance with specified requirements. 26 27 Shop drawings showing methods of attachment to substrate. 28 29 Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of impact-resistant wall-protection unit indicated. 30 31 Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size 32 indicated below. 33 34 Wall and Corner Guards: 12 inches (300 mm) long. Include examples of joinery, corners, 35 and field splices. 36 37 QUALITY ASSURANCE 38 39 Single Source Responsibility: Obtain wall surface protection system components from a single 40 source. 41 42 Deliver materials in original factory wrappings and containers, clearly labeled with manufacturer and 43 brand name. 44 45 Store materials in original undamaged packages and containers inside a well-ventilated area 46 protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity. 47 48 Maintain room temperature within the storage area between 60 deg F (16 deg C) and 80 deg F (27 49 deg C) during the period plastic materials are stored. Keep materials out of direct sunlight to avoid 50 excessive surface temperatures. 51 52 Store rigid plastic corner guard, wall guard and handrail covers in a horizontal position for a minimum 53 of 72 hours, or until the plastic material attains the ambient room installation temperature of between 54 65 deg F (18 deg C)and 75 deg F (24 deg C). 55 56 PROJECT CONDITIONS 57 WALL SURFACE PROTECTION GDA 10260-1 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Maintain ambient temperature within building at not less than 65 deg F (18 deg C) or greater than 75 2 deg F (24 deg C)for a minimum 72 hours prior to beginning of installation. 3 4 Do not install wall surface protection system components until the space is enclosed, weatherproof 5 and climate controlled. 6 7 Do not install semi-rigid wall protection systems until temperature is stable and permanent lighting is in 8 place. 9 10 MAINTENANCE 11 12 Maintenance Instructions: Include precautions against cleaning materials and methods that may be 13 detrimental to finishes and performance. 14 15 Replacement Materials: Minimum 2 percent of each type, color, and pattern of wall surface protection 16 materials and components. Include accessory components as required. Replacement materials shall 17 be from the same production run as installed materials. Package with protective coverings and 18 appropriate labels. 19 20 21 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 22 23 24 MATERIALS 25 26 Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M. 27 28 IMPACT-RESISTANT WALL COVERINGS 29 30 Impact-Resistant Sheet Wall Covering: Fabricated from stainless steel sheet wall-covering material. 31 32 Size: As indicated, and to minimize seams, in longest possible stock lengths to 33 minimize field joints 34 35 Sheet Thickness: 0.028 inch (0.7 mm). 36 37 Finish: No. 4, directional. 38 39 Height: Wainscot, as indicated. 40 41 Mounting: Adhesive and button head sheet metal screws. 42 43 FABRICATION 44 45 Comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, 46 including wall thicknesses of components. 47 48 Shop-assemble components to the greatest extent possible. Disassemble only as necessary for 49 shipping and handling. 50 51 Fabricate components with tight seams and joints with exposed edges rolled. Provide surfaces free of 52 evidence of wrinkling, chipping, uneven coloration, dents, and other imperfections. Fabricate 53 members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, and rigid hairline joints. 54 55 Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and 56 anchors for interconnection of members to other construction. 57 WALL SURFACE PROTECTION GDA 10260-2 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 PART 3- EXECUTION 3 4 5 EXAMINATION 6 7 Examine areas and conditions in which wall surface protection components and wall protection 8 systems will be installed. 9 10 Complete finishing operations, including painting, before beginning installation of wall surface 11 protection system materials. 12 13 Wall surfaces to receive impact-resistant wall covering materials shall be dry and free from dirt, 14 grease, loose paint, and scale. 15 16 Do not proceed with installations until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 17 18 PREPARATION 19 20 Properly prepare substrate and clean to remove dust, debris, and loose particles. 21 22 INSTALLATION 23 24 Install wall surface protection units plumb, level, and true to line without distortions. 25 26 Do not use materials with scratches, chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be visible 27 in the finished work. 28 29 Install impact-resistant wall covering in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 30 31 Where splices occur in horizontal runs, splice over stud backup or blocking. Abut pieces and install 32 with sheet metal button head screws. Fasten at 16-inches on center, unless manufacturer 33 recommends closer spacing. Apply continuous beads of construction adhesive to wall at 4' on center, 34 immediately prior to application of impact-resistant wall covering. Apply in longest possible stock 35 lengths to minimize field joints. 36 37 CLEANING 38 39 Clean metal impact-resistant wall covering in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 40 41 Remove excess adhesive using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer. 42 43 44 END OF SECTION 10260 WALL SURFACE PROTECTION GDA 10260-3 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 SECTION 10425-SIGNS 2 3 4 PART 1 -GENERAL 5 6 RELATED DOCUMENTS 7 8 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions 9 and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 10 11 SUMMARY 12 13 This Section includes the following types of signs: 14 15 Panel signs. 16 17 Braille plates. 18 19 Specialty metal signage 20 21 Meet with Owner's representative to develop complete list of all necessary signage. 22 23 Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 24 25 Division 1 Section"Temporary Facilities"for temporary project identification signs. 26 27 Division 8 Section "Finish Hardware"for schedule of signs required. 28 29 SUBMITTALS 30 31 General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 32 Specification Sections. 33 34 Product Data: Include manufacturer's construction details relative to materials, dimensions of 35 individual components, profiles, and finishes for each type of sign required. 36 37 Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings for fabrication of signs. Include elevations, and large-scale 38 sections of typical members and other components. Show anchors, grounds, reinforcement, 39 accessories, layout, and installation details. 40 41 Provide message list for each sign required, including large- scale details of wording and 42 layout of lettering. 43 For signs supported by or anchored to permanent construction, provide setting drawings, 44 templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other anchors to be installed as a 45 unit of Work in other Sections. 46 47 Samples: Provide the following samples of each sign component for initial selection of color, pattern 48 and surface texture as required and for verification of compliance with requirements indicated. 49 50 Samples for initial selection of color, pattern, and texture: 51 52 Cast Acrylic Sheet and Plastic Laminate: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual 53 sections of material including the full range of colors available for each material required. 54 55 Samples for verification of color, pattern, and texture selected and compliance with requirements 56 indicated: 57 SIGNS GDA 10425- 1 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Cast Acrylic Sheet and Plastic Laminate: Provide a sample panel not less than 8-1/2 inches 2 by 11 inches for each material, color, texture, and pattern required. On each panel include a 3 representative sample of the graphic image process required, showing graphic style, and 4 colors and finishes of letters, numbers, and other graphic devices. 5 6 QUALITY ASSURANCE 7 8 Single-Source Responsibility: For each separate type of sign required, obtain signs from one source 9 from a single manufacturer. 10 11 Design Criteria: The drawings indicate sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements of signs. Other 12 signs with deviations from indicated dimensions and profiles may be considered, provided deviations 13 do not change the design concept. The burden of proof of equality is on the proposer. 14 15 16 PART 2- PRODUCTS 17 18 MANUFACTURERS 19 20 Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers that may be incorporated in 21 the work include the following: 22 23 Manufacturers of Panel Signs: 24 25 Series 1000; Andco Industries Corp. 26 ASI SignSystems 27 28 MATERIALS 29 30 Steel: 31 32 Steel Plate: ASTM A 558. 33 34 Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), Type UVA (UV absorbing). 35 36 PANEL SIGNS 37 38 Sign Type No. 1: 39 40 Panel Signs: Comply with requirements indicated for materials, thicknesses, finishes, colors, designs, 41 shapes, sizes, and details of construction. 42 43 Produce smooth, even, level sign panel surfaces, constructed to remain flat under installed 44 conditions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch measured diagonally. 45 46 Unframed Panel Signs: Fabricate signs with edges mechanically and smoothly finished to conform 47 with the following requirements: 48 49 Edge Condition: Beveled. 50 51 Edge Color for Plastic Laminate: Edge color same as background. 52 53 Corner Condition: Corners rounded to radius indicated. 54 55 Graphic Content and Style: Provide sign copy that complies with the requirements indicated for size, 56 style, spacing, content, position, material, finishes, and colors of letters, numbers, and other graphic 57 devices. SIGNS GDA 10425- 2 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 Raised Copy: Machine-cut copy characters from matte-finished opaque acrylic sheet and chemically 3 weld onto the acrylic sheet forming sign panel face. Produce precisely formed characters with square 4 cut edges free from burrs and cut marks. 5 6 Panel Material: Matte-finished opaque acrylic sheet. 7 8 Raised Copy Thickness: Not less than 1/32 inch. 9 10 Colors and Surface Textures: For exposed sign material that requires selection of materials with 11 integral or applied colors, surface textures or other characteristics related to appearance, provide 12 color matches indicated, or if not indicated, as selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's 13 standards. 14 15 Color: 16 17 Facing: As selected by Architect. 18 19 Backing: As selected by Architect. 20 21 Copy: As selected by Architect. 22 23 Character Proportion: Letters and numbers on signs shall have a width-to-height ratio between 1:5 24 and 1:10. 25 26 Raised and Brailled Characters: Letters and numerals shall be raised 1/32 in (0.8 mm) minimum, 27 upper case, sans serif, or simple serif type and shall be accompanied with Grade 2 Braille. Raised 28 characters shall be 5/8 in (16mm) high, but no higher than 2 inches (50mm), or as scheduled. 29 30 Mounting Location and Height: Where permanent identification is provided for rooms and spaces, 31 signs shall be installed on the wall adjacent to the latch side of the door. Where there is no wall space 32 to the latch side of the door, including at double leaf doors, signs shall be placed on the nearest 33 adjacent wall. Mounting location for such signage shall be so that a person may approach within 3 in. 34 (76mm)of signage without encountering protruding objects or standing within the swing of a door. 35 36 Sign Type No. 2: Specialty metal corporate logo sign. 37 38 Graphic Content and Style: Provide sign graphic content that complies with the requirements 39 indicated for size, style, spacing, content, position, material, finishes, and colors of letters, numbers, 40 and other graphic devices. 41 42 Material: Cor-Ten steel. 43 44 Thickness: Not less than 1/4 inch. 45 46 Colors and Surface Textures: For sign material that requires selection of materials with integral or 47 applied colors, surface textures or other characteristics related to appearance, provide color matches 48 indicated, or if not indicated, as selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's standards. 49 50 Mounting Location and Height: As indicated on the drawings. 51 52 FABRICATION 53 54 General: Provide manufacturer's standard signs of configurations indicated. 55 56 Welded Connections: Comply with AWS standards for recommended practices in shop 57 welding. Provide welds behind finished surfaces without distortion or discoloration of exposed SIGNS GDA 10425- 3 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 side. Clean exposed welded surfaces of welding flux and dress exposed and contact 2 surfaces. 3 4 Mill joints to tight, hairline fit. Form joints exposed to weather to exclude water penetration. 5 6 Preassemble signs in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble signs only as 7 necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and 8 installation, in location not exposed to view after final assembly. 9 10 Conceal fasteners if possible; otherwise, locate fasteners where they will be inconspicuous. 11 12 FINISHES, GENERAL 13 14 Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for 15 recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 16 17 Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, 18 temporary protective covering before shipping. 19 20 STEEL FINISHES 21 22 Surface Preparation: Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying 23 with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning,"or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling." 24 25 Finish: Natural or accelerated weathering to match Architect's sample. 26 27 ACRYLIC SHEET FINISHES 28 29 Colored Coatings for Acrylic Sheet: For copy and background colors, provide colored 30 coatings, including inks, dyes, and paints, that are recommended by acrylic manufacturers for 31 optimum adherence to acrylic surface and that are UV and water resistant for five years for 32 application intended. 33 34 35 PART 3- EXECUTION 36 37 INSTALLATION 38 39 General: Locate sign units and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of the type 40 described and in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions. 41 42 Install signs level, plumb, and at the height indicated, with sign surfaces free from distortion or 43 other defects in appearance. 44 45 Interior Wall Mounted Panel Signs: Attach panel signs to wall surfaces using the methods indicated 46 below: 47 48 Vinyl-Tape Mounting: Use double-sided foam tape, of thickness indicated, to mount signs to 49 smooth, nonporous surfaces. Do not use this method for vinyl-covered or rough surfaces. 50 51 CLEANING AND PROTECTION 52 53 At completion of the installation, clean soiled sign surfaces in accordance with the manufacturer's 54 instructions. Protect units from damage until acceptance by the Owner. 55 56 SCHEDULE OF SIGNS 57 SIGNS GDA 10425-4 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 All signs as scheduled on the Drawings. 2 3 END OF SECTION 10425 SIGNS GDA 10425-5 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 SECTION 10505 - METAL LOCKERS 2 3 4 PART 1 - G_ENERAL 5 6 7 RELATED DOCUMENTS 8 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions 9 and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 10 11 SUMMARY 12 This Section includes the following: 13 Knocked-down, standard metal lockers. 14 Related Sections include the following: 15 Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for furring, blocking, and shims required for installing 16 metal lockers and concealed within other construction before metal locker installation. 17 18 DEFINITIONS 19 Uncoated Steel Sheet Thicknesses: Indicated as the minimum thicknesses. 20 21 SUBMITTALS 22 Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual 23 components and profiles, and finishes for each type of metal locker and bench. 24 Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 25 Show and other accessories. 26 Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes. 27 Samples for Verification: For metal lockers and locker benches, in manufacturer's standard sizes. 28 Maintenance Data: For adjusting, repairing, and replacing locker doors and latching mechanisms to 29 include in maintenance manuals. 30 Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 31 32 QUALITY ASSURANCE 33 Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative of metal locker manufacturer for installation 34 and maintenance of units required for this Project. 35 Source Limitations: Obtain metal lockers and accessories through one source from a single 36 manufacturer. 37 Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of metal lockers 38 and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements." METAL LOCKERS GDA 10505- 1 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with 2 Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory 3 data to Architect for review. 4 Regulatory Requirements: Where metal lockers are indicated to comply with accessibility 5 requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's 6 "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities 7 (ADAAG)," and California Title 24, Part 2. 8 Provide not less than 1 shelf located no higher than 48 inches (1219 mm) above the floor 9 for forward reach. 10 11 Provide hardware that does not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist, and 12 that operates with a force of not more than 5 lbf(22.2 N). 13 Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in 14 Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 15 16 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 17 Do not deliver metal lockers until spaces to receive them are clean, dry, and ready for metal locker 18 installation. 19 20 PROJECT CONDITIONS 21 Field Measurements: Verify the following by field measurements before fabrication and indicate 22 measurements on Shop Drawings: 23 Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the 24 Work, establish recessed opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal lockers 25 without field measurements. Coordinate wall and floor construction to ensure that actual 26 recessed opening dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 27 28 COORDINATION 29 Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units 30 of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that metal lockers can be supported and installed as 31 indicated. 32 33 WARRANTY 34 Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace 35 components of metal lockers that fail in materials or workmanship, excluding finish, within specified 36 warranty period. 37 Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 38 Structural failures. 39 Faulty operation of latches and other door hardware. 40 Damage from deliberate destruction and vandalism is excluded. 41 Warranty Period for Knocked-Down Metal Lockers: Two years from date of Substantial 42 Completion. METAL LOCKERS GDA 10505 -2 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 3 PART 2- PRODUCTS 4 5 6 MANUFACTURERS 7 In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product 8 selection: 9 Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the products specified, or 10 Architect approved equivalent. 11 12 MATERIALS 13 Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008, Commercial Steel (CS) Type B, suitable for exposed 14 applications. 15 Fasteners: Zinc- or nickel-plated steel, slotless-type exposed bolt heads, and self-locking nuts or 16 lock washers for nuts on moving parts. 17 Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for secure anchorage to each substrate. 18 Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of 19 exterior walls and elsewhere as required]for corrosion resistance. 20 21 Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors. 22 23 STANDARD METAL LOCKERS 24 Products: Standard Lockers; Lyon Workspace Products 25 Locker Arrangement: 2-tier 26 Locker Size: 12-inches wide by 12-inches deep by 72-inches tall. 27 Product:#5202 28 Body: Assembled by riveting or bolting body components together. Fabricate from unperforated, 29 cold-rolled steel sheet with thicknesses as follows: 30 Tops, Bottoms, Sides and Intermediate Dividers: 0.024 inch, with single bend at sides. 31 Backs: 0.024 inch thick, with full-height, double-flanged connections. 32 Frames: Channel formed; fabricated from 0.0528-inch- (1.35-mm-) thick, cold-rolled steel sheet; 33 lapped and factory welded at corners; with top and bottom main frames factory welded into vertical 34 main frames. Form continuous, integral door strike full height on vertical main frames. 35 Cross Frames between Tiers: Channel formed and fabricated from same material as main 36 frames;welded to vertical frame members. 37 Doors: One-piece; fabricated from 0.0528-inch- (1.35-mm-) thick, cold-rolled steel sheet; formed 38 into channel shape with double bend at vertical edges, and with right-angle single bend at 39 horizontal edges. 40 METAL LOCKERS GDA 10505-3 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard reinforcing angles, channels, or stiffeners for 2 doors more than '5 inches (381 mn• wide; welded to inner face of doors. 3 4 Stiffeners: Manufacturer's standard full-height stiffener fabricated from 0.0428-inch- (1.1- 5 I thick, cold-rolled steel sheet; welded to inner face of doors. 6 Door Style: 7 Louvered Vents: No fewer than six louver openings at top and bottom. 8 Hinges: Self-closing; welded to door and attached to door frame with not less than 2 factory-installed 9 rivets per hinge that are completely concealed and tamper resistant when door is closed; fabricated 10 to swing 180 degrees. 11 Hinges: Manufacturer's standard, steel 5 knuckle type. 12 Projecting Door Handle and Latch: Manufacturer's standard, finger-lift latch control designed for use 13 with padlocks; positive automatic, prelocking, pry resistant; chromium-plated, vandal-resistant, lift-up 14 handle. 15 Latch Hooks: Equip doors less than 45 Ie es (1219 mm) high with 2 latch hooks; 16 fabricated from minimum :)96i; ;h- (2.5-mm-)thick steel; welded or riveted to full-height 17 door strikes; with resilient silencer on each latch hook. 18 Provide ADA-Compliant handles for lockers designated for the disabled. 19 Padlocks: Provided by Owner. 20 Equipment: Equip each metal locker with identification plate and the following, unless otherwise 21 indicated: 22 2 Tier Box Units: One double-prong ceiling hook, and three single-prong coat hooks. 23 Finish: Powder coat. 24 Color(s): As indicated on the Drawings, or as selected by Architect. 25 Accessories: 26 Continuous Sloping Tops: Fabricated from standard thickness, but not less than 036 •ich (0.91- 27 mm) nominal-thickness steel sheet. 28 Sloping-top corner fillers, mitered. 29 Individual Sloping Tops: Fabricated from 1.024-inch (0.61-mm' nominal-thickness steel sheet. 30 LOCKER BENCHES 31 Provide bench units with overall assembly height of 17-1/2 inches (445 mm). 32 Bench Tops: Manufacturer's standard one-piece units, with rounded corners and edges. 33 Size: Minimum 9-1/2 inches wide by 48 inches long by 1-1/4 inches thick(508 mm wide by 34 1200 mm long by 32 mm thick). METAL LOCKERS GDA 10505 -4 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Laminated clear hardwood with one coat of clear sealer on all surfaces and one coat of 2 clear lacquer on top and sides. 3 Fixed Pedestals: Manufacturer's standard supports, with predrilled fastener holes for attaching 4 bench top and anchoring to floor, complete with fasteners and anchors, and as follows: 5 Tubular Steel: 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) diameter steel tubing threaded on both ends, with 6 standard pipe flange at top and bell-shaped cast-iron base; with powder-coat finish; 7 anchored with exposed fasteners. 8 Color: Match metal lockers. 9 FABRICATION 10 General: Fabricate metal lockers square, rigid, and without warp; with metal faces flat and free of 11 dents or distortion. Make exposed metal edges free of sharp edges and burrs, and safe to touch. 12 Form body panels, doors, shelves, and accessories from one-piece steel sheet, unless 13 otherwise indicated. 14 Provide fasteners, filler plates, supports, clips, and closures as required for a complete 15 installation. 16 Unit Principle: Fabricate each metal locker with an individual door and frame; individual top, bottom, 17 and back; and common intermediate uprights separating compartments. 18 Knocked-Down Construction: Fabricate metal lockers for nominal assembly at Project site using 19 nuts, bolts, screws, or rivets. Factory weld frame members together to form a rigid, one-piece 20 assembly. 21 Hooks: Manufacturer's standard ball-pointed type, aluminum or steel; zinc plated. 22 23 STEEL SHEET FINISHES 24 General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for 25 recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 26 Factory finish steel surfaces and accessories except stainless-steel and chrome-plated surfaces. 27 Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, grease, mill scale, rust, and other contaminants that 28 could impair paint bond. Use manufacturer's standard methods. 29 Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, electrostatically apply 30 manufacturer's standard, baked-polymer, thermosetting powder finish. Comply with resin 31 manufacturer's written instructions for application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness. METAL LOCKERS GDA 10505-5 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Color: As indicated on the Drawings, or as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full 2 range. 3 PART 3- EXECUTION 4 EXAMINATION 5 Examine walls, floors, and support bases, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for 6 installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. 7 For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental 8 to performance of work. 9 Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 10 11 INSTALLATION 12 General: Install level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims. 13 Anchor single rows of metal lockers to walls near top and bottom of lockers. 14 Knocked-Down Metal Lockers: Assemble knocked-down metal lockers with standard fasteners, with 15 no exposed fasteners on door faces or face frames. 16 17 Fixed Locker Benches: Provide no fewer than two pedestals for each bench, uniformly spaced not 18 more than 36 inches(915 mm)apart. Securely fasten tops of pedestals to undersides of bench tops, 19 and anchor bases to floor. 20 ADJUSTING, CLEANING,AND PROTECTION 21 Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. Adjust doors and latches to operate easily without binding. 22 Protect metal lockers from damage, abuse, dust, dirt, stain, or paint. Do not permit metal locker use 23 during construction. 24 Touch up marred finishes, or replace metal lockers that cannot be restored to factory-finished 25 appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by metal locker 26 manufacturer. 27 28 29 END OF SECTION 10505 30 METAL LOCKERS GDA 10505-6 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 SECTION 10522- FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS,AND ACCESSORIES 2 3 PART 1 - GENERAL 4 5 6 RELATED DOCUMENTS 7 8 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and 9 Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 10 11 SUMMARY 12 13 This Section includes the following: 14 15 Fire extinguishers. 16 Fire extinguisher cabinets. 17 Mounting brackets. 18 19 SUBMITTALS 20 21 General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification 22 Sections. 23 24 Product data for each type of product specified. For fire extinguisher cabinets include rough-in 25 dimensions, details showing mounting methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding 26 construction, door hardware, cabinet type and materials, trim style, door construction, panel style, and 27 materials. 28 29 Samples for verification purposes of each type of metal finish required, prepared on metal samples of 30 same thickness and alloy indicated for final unit of Work. Where finishes involve normal color and 31 texture variations, include sample sets showing full range of variations expected. 32 33 QUALITY ASSURANCE 34 35 Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain fire extinguishers and cabinets from one source from a single 36 manufacturer. 37 Coordination: Verify that fire extinguisher cabinets are sized to accommodate fire extinguishers 38 provided by Owner under separate contract of type and capacity indicated. 39 40 UL-Listed Products: Fire extinguishers UL-listed and bear UL "Listing Mark" for type, rating, and 41 classification of extinguisher. 42 43 FM-Listed Products: Fire extinguishers approved by Factory Mutual Research Corporation for type, 44 rating, and classification of extinguisher and carry appropriate FM marking. 45 46 47 PART 2- PRODUCTS 48 49 50 MANUFACTURERS 51 52 Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products the following: 53 54 Allenco. 55 J.L. Industries. 56 Larsen's Manufacturing Co. Fire Extinguishers, Cabinets&Access. 10522- 1 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Walter Kidde, Division of Kidde, Inc. 2 3 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 4 5 General: Provide fire extinguishers for each extinguisher cabinet and other locations indicated, in 6 colors and finishes selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard, which comply with 7 requirements of governing authorities. 8 9 Fill and service extinguishers to comply with requirements of governing authorities and 10 manufacturer. 11 12 Abbreviations indicated below identify extinguisher types related to UL classification and 13 rating system and not necessarily to type and amount of extinguishing material contained in 14 extinguisher. 15 16 Multipurpose Dry Chemical Type: UL-rated 2-A:10:B:C, 5-lb nominal capacity, in enameled steel 17 container. 18 19 MOUNTING BRACKET S 20 21 Provide brackets designed to prevent accidental dislodgement of extinguisher, of sizes required for 22 type and capacity of extinguisher indicated in plated finish. 23 24 Identify bracket-mounted extinguishers with red letter decals spelling "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" applied 25 to wall surface. Letter size, style, and location as selected by Architect. 26 27 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 28 29 General: Provide fire extinguisher cabinets for all cabinets in private offices, open office areas, 30 corridors, and public spaces of suitable size for housing fire extinguishers of types and capacities 31 indicated. 32 33 Construction: Manufacturer's standard enameled steel box, with trim, frame, door, and hardware to 34 suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Weld all joints and grind smooth. Miter and weld 35 perimeter door frames. 36 37 Cabinet Type: Suitable for mounting conditions indicated,of the following types: 38 39 Semi-recessed Cabinet (indicated as FEC-SR on the Drawings): Cabinet box partially recessed 40 in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of trim indicated; with one-piece combination trim and 41 perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return 42 at outer edge (backbend). Provide where walls are of insufficient depth for recessed cabinets but 43 are of sufficient depth to accommodate semi-recessed cabinet installation. 44 45 Rolled-Edge Trim: 3-incn backbend depth. 46 47 Trim Metal: Of same metal and finish as door. 48 49 Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following product: 50 51 Product: 1017V10, JL Industries 52 53 Door Material and Construction: Manufacturer's standard door construction, of material indicated, 54 coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected. 55 Fire Extinguishers, Cabinets&Access. 10522-2 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Enameled Steel: Manufacturer's standard finish, hollow steel door construction with tubular 2 stiles and rails. 3 4 Identify fire extinguisher in cabinet with lettering spelling "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" applied to door. 5 Provide lettering to comply with requirements indicated for letter style, color, size, spacing, and 6 location or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard 7 arrangements. 8 9 Application Process: Silk screen. 10 11 Door Style: Manufacturer's standard design. 12 13 Duo Panel: Vertical duo panel with frame. 14 15 Silk-screen lettering or design as indicated. 16 17 Door Glazing: Acrylic sheet. 18 19 Acrylic Sheet Color: Clear transparent acrylic sheet. 20 21 Door Hardware: Provide manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet 22 type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. Provide either lever handle with cam action 23 latch, or door pull, exposed or concealed, and friction latch. Provide concealed or continuous-type 24 hinge permitting door to open 180 deg. 25 26 FINISHES FOR FIRE EXTINGUISH E R CABINETS, GENERAL 27 28 Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to application and 29 designations of finishes. 30 31 Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by application of strippable, temporary 32 protective covering prior to shipment. 33 34 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET FINISHES 35 36 Interior Surfaces: 37 38 Surface Preparation: Solvent-clean surfaces in compliance with SSPS-SP 1 to remove dirt, oil, 39 grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, 40 from uncoated steel in compliance with SSPC-SP 5 (White Metal Blast Cleaning) or SSPC-SP 8 41 (Pickling). 42 43 Baked Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreatment, apply manufacturer's standard 2- 44 coat baked enamel finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with paint 45 manufacturer's instructions for application and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 46 mils. 47 48 Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard choices for color and 49 gloss. 50 51 52 PART 3- EXECUTION 53 54 55 INSTALLATION 56 Fire Extinguishers, Cabinets&Access. 10522-3 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Install items included in this section in locations and at mounting heights indicated, or if not indicated, 2 at heights to comply with applicable regulations of governing authorities. Obtain Owner approval of all 3 locations prior to installation of any extinguishers, or accessories. 4 5 Prepare recesses in walls for fire extinguisher cabinets as required by the type and size of 6 cabinet and style of trim and to comply with manufacturer's instructions. 7 8 Fire-Protection Cabinets: 48 inch( above finished floor to top of cabinet. 9 10 Mounting Brackets: ^R inr.hcr: above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher. 11 12 Fire-Protection Cabinets: Fasten fire-protection cabinets to structure, square and plumb. 13 14 Provide brackets for all extinguishers in mechanical rooms, warehouse areas and where shown on 15 Drawings. 16 17 Securely fasten mounting brackets to structure, square and plumb, to comply with 18 manufacturer's instructions. 19 20 Provide Multi-Purpose Dry Chemical type fire extinguishers at locations indicated on the drawings and 21 in accordance with Fire Department requirements. 22 23 Where exact location of fire extinguishers is not indicated, locate as directed by Architect. 24 25 26 END OF SECTION 10522 Fire Extinguishers, Cabinets&Access. 10522- 4 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 SECTION 10530- EXTRUDED ALUMINUM WALKWAY COVERS 2 3 4 PARTI -GENERAL 5 6 7 RELATED DOCUMENTS: 8 9 The bidding requirements, general conditions, supplementary conditions, drawings and requirements 10 of division one specification shall apply to work specified in this section. 11 12 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 13 14 The extent of aluminum walkway cover decking is shown on the drawings and as specified herein. 15 16 Definition: Extruded Aluminum Decking shall consist entirely of extruded aluminum sections (roll- 17 formed not acceptable). System shall consist of decking, fascia, accessory items and hardware to 18 provide a complete system. 19 20 Water shall drain from deck into designated beams and out at grade level of columns through 21 weepholes. 22 23 SUBMITTALS 24 25 Shop Drawings: Submit detailed drawings, layout of walkway cover system, bent locations (identify 26 drain columns and wet bents), all mechanical joint locations with complete details, connections, 27 jointing and accessories. Include details of concrete footings and bent anchorage. 28 29 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, specifications, component performance data 30 and installation instructions. 31 32 Calculations: Provide signed and sealed structural calculations for the proposed walkway cover, by a 33 professional engineer registered in the state of Oregon, who professes his discipline to be structural 34 engineering. 35 36 QUALITY ASSURANCE 37 38 Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the following except as other-wise indicated: 39 40 Standard Building Code, latest addition with amendments, if any. 41 42 AWS (American Welding Society)standards for structural aluminum welding. 43 44 Manufacturer: Obtain aluminum covered walkway system from only one (1) manufacturer, although 45 several may be indicated as offering products complying with requirements. 46 47 Installer Qualification: Firm with not less than three (3) years experience in installation of aluminum 48 walkway covers of type, quantity and installation methods similar to work of this section. 49 50 Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication 51 where possible, to insure proper fitting of work. However, allow for adjustments within specified 52 tolerations wherever taking of field measurements before fabrication might delay work. 53 54 Coordination: Coordinate work of this section with work of other sections which interface with covered 55 walkway system (sidewalks, curbs, building fascias, etc.). 56 EXTRUDED ALUMINUM WALKWAY COVERS GDA 10530- 1 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS: 2 3 System Performance: Provide aluminum covered walkway system that has been designed, produced, 4 fabricated and installed to withstand normal temperature changes as well as live loading, dead loading 5 and wind loading in compliance with local or state building code requirements for geographic area in 6 which work is located and as follows: 7 8 Live Load: 30 psf, minimum 9 10 Structural design for wind forces: Comply with ANSI A58.1-1982 11 12 Design Wind Velocity: 90 mph. 13 14 Importance Factor: 1.0. 15 16 Stability Criteria: Building code for the State of Oregon. 17 18 Sizes shown on drawings are to be considered minimum. 19 20 Structure shall be capable of sustaining severe icing, hail, hurricane force winds and supporting a 21 concentrated load such as being walked upon. 22 23 WARRANTY: 24 25 Manufacturer shall warrant the entire system against defects in labor and materials for a 26 period of one (1) year commencing on the date of substantial completion as established in 27 Division One of these specifications. 28 29 Intention of this warranty is the manufacturer will come onto the jobsite and do all necessary 30 to effect corrections of any deficiencies. 31 32 Prima Facie Evidence of defects in labor and material may include but is not limited to, one or 33 more of the following: 34 35 Moisture leaks 36 37 Metal failure including excessive deflection 38 39 Fastener failure 40 41 Finish failure 42 43 44 PART 2 - PRODUCT 45 46 47 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 48 49 50 Basis-of-Design: Aluminum decking by MAPES Architectural Canopies is specified as the standard of 51 quality. 52 53 MATERIALS 54 55 All aluminum extrusions shall be alloy 6063 heat treated to a T-6 temper. 56 EXTRUDED ALUMINUM WALKWAY COVERS GDA 10530- 2 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Standard finish for all components shall be satin anodize 204-R1 meeting Aluminum Association 2 Specification AA-M-10C-22A-21. 3 4 Fasteners: 5 6 Deck Screws (rivets not permitted): Type 18-8 non-magnetic stainless steel sealed with a 7 neoprene"0"ring beneath 5/8"outside dimension, conical washer. 8 9 Fascia Rivets: Size 3/16" by 1/2"grip range aluminum rivets with aluminum mandrel. 10 11 Bolts: All bolts, nuts and washers to be 18-8 non-magnetic stainless steel. 12 13 Tek Screws: not permitted 14 15 FABRICATION 16 17 Comply with indicated profiles, dimensioned requirements and structural requirements. 18 19 Use sections true to details with clean, straight, sharply defined profiles and smooth surfaces of 20 uniform color and texture, free from defects impairing strength and durability. 21 22 All welding do be done by heli-arc process. 23 24 Bents shall consist of shop welded one piece units. When size of bents do not permit shipment as a 25 welded unit, concealed mechanical joints may be used. 26 27 Mechanical joints shall consist of stainless steel bolts with a minimum of two (2) bolts per fastening. 28 Bolts and nuts shall be installed in a concealed manner utilizing 1/2" thick by 1 1/2" aluminum bolt 29 bars welded to structural members. 30 All such mechanical joints must be detailed on shop drawings showing all locations. 31 32 Roof Deck: Extruded Aluminum shapes, interlocking self-flashing sections. Shop fabricate to lengths 33 and panels widths required for field assembly. Depth of sections to comply with structural 34 requirements. Provide shop induced camber in deck units with spans greater than 16'- 0" to offset 35 dead load deflections. Welded dams are to be used at non-draining ends of deck. 36 37 Expansion joints, design structure for thermal expansion and contraction. Provide expansion joints as 38 required. 39 40 Exposed rivets used to fasten bottom of fascia to deck to have finish to match fascia. 41 42 Apply a shop applied dip-coat of clear acrylic enamel to each column end terminating in concrete to 43 insulate from electrolytic reaction. Column ends shall be pierced to "key" grout to bent for maximum 44 uplift protection. 45 46 FINISH: 47 48 Manufacturer's standard baked enamel finish for decking and fascia, and polyurethane for bents and 49 columns. 50 51 Color:As selected by Architect. 52 53 54 PART 3-EXECUTION 55 56 EXTRUDED ALUMINUM WALKWAY COVERS GDA 10530-3 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: 2 3 Deliver, store and handle covered walkway system components as recommended by manufacturer. 4 Handle and store in a manner to avoid deforming members and to avoid excessive stresses. 5 6 EXAMINATION 7 8 Examine adjacent work for conditions that would prevent quality installation of system. 9 10 Do not proceed until defects are corrected. 11 12 CONCRETE FOOTINGS 13 14 Concrete footings are not work of this section. Refer to"concrete work", Section 03310. 15 16 Sleeves (styrofoam blockouts) shall be furnished by walkway cover manufacturer and placed by 17 general contractor. 18 19 FIELD DIMENSIONS 20 21 General contractor shall field confirm bent locations, dimensions and elevations shown on shop 22 drawings prior to fabrication. 23 24 INSTALLATION 25 26 Erection: Set roof support frames (bents) into pockets provided in top of footings; set to required 27 elevations, align, plumb and level; and grout in place with 2,000 p.s.i. portland cement grout. Assure 28 that grout fills all voids and "keys" to columns. Fill downspout units with grout to bottom of discharge 29 level. Install aluminum deflectors after grouting. Follow manufacturer's instructions. Match to finish 30 and elevation of adjacent sidewalks. 31 32 Install roof deck sections, accessories and related flashing in accordance with manufacturer's 33 instructions. Provide roof slope for rain drainage without ponding water. Align and anchor roof deck 34 units to structural support frames. 35 36 Assemble all components in a neat, workmanlike manner. 37 38 FLASHING 39 40 Flashings: Flashings required between covered walkway system and adjoining structures are not 41 work of this section. Refer to"Flashing and Sheet Metals", Section 07600. 42 43 CLEANING AND PROTECTION 44 45 Damaged Units: Replace roof deck panels and other components of the work which have been 46 damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful minor repair. 47 48 Cleaning: Remove protective coverings at time in project construction sequence which will afford 49 greatest protection of work. Clean finished surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. Maintain in a 50 clean condition during construction. 51 52 Protection: Advise Contractor of protection and surveillance procedures, as required to ensure that 53 work of this section will be without damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion. 54 55 56 END OF SECTION 10530 EXTRUDED ALUMINUM WALKWAY COVERS GDA 10530- 4 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 SECTION 10800-TOILET ACCESSORIES 2 3 PART 1 -GENERAL 4 5 6 RELATED DOCUMENTS 7 8 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and 9 Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 10 11 SUMMARY 12 13 This Section includes the following toilet accessory items: 14 15 As scheduled on the drawings. 16 17 SUBMITTALS 18 19 General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specifications 20 Sections. 21 22 Product Data for each toilet accessory item specified, including details of construction relative to 23 materials, dimensions, gages, profiles, method of mounting, specified options, and finishes. 24 Samples: When requested, full-size samples of each toilet accessory item for verification of design, 25 operation, and finish requirements. Acceptable samples will be returned and may be used in the 26 work. 27 28 Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations (by room) for each toilet 29 accessory item to be provided for project. 30 31 Setting Drawings: Where cutouts are required in other work, provide templates, substrate preparation 32 instructions, and directions for preparing cutouts and for installation of anchorage devices. 33 34 QUALITY ASSURANCE 35 36 Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices that must be set in concrete or built 37 into masonry; coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay. 38 39 Single-Source Responsibility: Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of accessory unit 40 and for units exposed to view in same areas, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. 41 42 PROJECT CONDITIONS 43 44 Coordination: Coordinate accessory locations, installation, and sequencing with other work to avoid 45 interference and to assure proper installation, operation, adjustment, cleaning, and servicing of toilet 46 accessory items. 47 48 WARRANTY 49 50 Special Project Warranty: Provide manufacturer's written 5-year warranty against silver spoilage of 51 mirrors, agreeing to replace any mirrors that develop visible defects within warranty period. 52 53 54 PART 2- PRODUCTS 55 56 57 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS TOILET ACCESSORIES GDA 10800- 1 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide toilet accessories by one of the 3 following: 4 5 Bradley Corporation, or Architect approved equal from: 6 7 American Specialties, Inc. 8 Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 9 10 MATERIALS, GENERAL 11 12 Stainless Steel: AISI Type 302/304, with polished No. 4 finish, 22-gage (.034-inch) minimum 13 thickness, unless otherwise indicated. 14 15 16 Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. 17 18 Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit or of galvanized steel 19 where concealed. 20 21 Keys: Unless otherwise indicated, provide universal keys for access to toilet accessory units requiring 22 internal access for servicing, resupply, etc. Provide minimum of six (6) keys to Owner's representative 23 and obtain receipt. 24 25 FABRICATION 26 27 General: No names or labels are permitted on exposed faces of toilet accessory units. On either 28 interior surface not exposed to view or on back surface, provide identification of each accessory item 29 by either a printed, waterproof label or a stamped nameplate indicating manufacturer's name and 30 product model number. 31 32 Surface-Mounted Toilet Accessories, General: Except where otherwise indicated, fabricate units with 33 tight seams and joints, exposed edges rolled. Hang doors or access panels with continuous stainless 34 steel piano hinge. Provide concealed anchorage wherever possible. 35 36 Framed Mirror Units, General: Fabricate frames for glass mirror units to accommodate wood, felt, 37 plastic, or other glass edge protection material. Provide mirror backing and support system that will 38 permit rigid, tamperproof glass installation and prevent accumulation of moisture, as follows: 39 40 Provide galvanized steel backing sheet, not less than 22 gage (.034 inch) and full mirror size, 41 with nonabsorptive filler material. Corrugated cardboard is not an acceptable filler material. 42 43 Mirror Unit Hangers: Provide system of mounting mirror units that will permit rigid, tamperproof, and 44 theftproof installation, as follows: 45 46 Heavy-duty wall brackets of galvanized steel, equipped with concealed locking devices 47 requiring special tool to remove. 48 49 50 PART 3- EXECUTION 51 52 53 INSTALLATION 54 55 Install toilet accessory units in accordance with manufacturers' instructions, using fasteners 56 appropriate to substrate and recommended by manufacturer of unit. Install units plumb and level, 57 firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. TOILET ACCESSORIES GDA 10800- 2 GDA#12018.00 December 14,2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 Secure mirrors to walls in concealed, tamperproof manner with special hangers, toggle bolts, or 3 screws. Set units plumb, level, and square at locations indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's 4 instructions for type of substrate involved. 5 6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING 7 8 Adiust toilet accessories for proper operation and verify that mechanisms function smoothly. Replace 9 damaged or defective items. 10 11 Clean and polish all exposed surfaces in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations after 12 removing temporary labels and protective coatings. 13 14 TOILET ACCESSORY SCHEDULE 15 16 Refer Drawings. 17 18 19 END OF SECTION 10800 TOILET ACCESSORIES GDA 10800-3 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 SECTION 10990- MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES 2 3 4 PART 1 - GENERAL 5 6 7 RELATED DOCUMENTS 8 9 Provisions established within the General and Supplementary General Conditions of the Contract, 10 Division 1 -General Requirements,and the Drawings are collectively applicable to this Section. 11 12 SECTION INCLUDES 13 14 Section Includes: Miscellaneous specialty items as listed herein: 15 16 High security key box 17 Knox Box Pedestal 18 Access Control Device Pedestals for Swing Gates 19 20 Related Sections: 21 22 Swing gates specified in Division 2 section"Ornamental Metal Fencing System." 23 24 Pedestals for access controls for sliding cantilever gates specified in Division 2 section "Gate 25 Operator." 26 27 SUBMITTALS 28 29 General: Submit following items in accordance with Section 01340. 30 31 Product Data: Including all pertinent performance characteristics and criteria. 32 33 Shop Drawings: Indicate materials,construction, sizes, quantities, finishes, and installation details. 34 35 QUALITY ASSURANCE 36 37 Pre-order Confirmation: Prior to ordering television brackets, confirm with Owner television bracket is 38 adequate to support size and weight of television to be installed by Owner. 39 40 Coordinate layout and installation of television brackets and concealed wall bracing with other 41 construction including electrical and communication cabling. 42 43 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 44 45 Deliver, store, handle, and protect products in accordance with Section 01600. 46 47 48 PART 2- PRODUCTS 49 50 51 HIGH SECURITY KEY BOX 52 53 General: High security key box, recess mounted with hinged door, UL Listed tamper switches, 'A-inch 54 steel plate housing, Winch thick steel door with interior gasket seal and stainless steel door hinge. MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES GDA 10990- 1 GDA #12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 Box and lock shall be UL Listed. Lock has 1/8-inch thick stainless steel dust cover with tamper seal 2 mounting capability. 3 4 Manufacturer: 3200 Series Knox Box Recessed, Knox Company, aluminum finish. 5 6 KNOX BOX AND ACCESS CONTROL DEVICE PEDESTAL 7 8 Access Control Device Pedestals: Steel, mounted to concrete pad as indicated on Drawings. 9 10 Manufacturer: Model 42-9C, The Pedestal Company 11 12 Pedestal CEO 13 561 Wilderness Dr. 14 Alpine, UT 84004 15 Ph: (800)660-3072 16 FX: (801)907-7773 17 info(c pedestalCEO.com 18 19 20 PART 3- EXECUTION 21 22 23 EXAMINATION 24 25 Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to receive work of this Section. 26 27 Notify General Contractor of any existing conditions that will adversely affect execution. 28 29 Beginning of execution will constitute acceptance of existing conditions. 30 31 PREPARATION 32 33 Prepare substrate surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. 34 35 INSTALLATION 36 37 Install using skilled workmen in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and 38 recommendations. 39 40 High security Key Box and Pedestals: Install at locations indicated by the Drawings to comply with 41 device manufacturer's written instructions. Provide for two locations 42 43 Card Reader Pedestals: Install at locations indicated by the Drawings to comply with device 44 manufacturer's written instructions. 45 46 ADJUSTING/CLEANING 47 48 Adjust and fit items to be flush with adjacent construction. 49 Fasten or adhere for tight connections and joints. 50 51 52 END OF SECTION MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES GDA 10990-2 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 SECTION 12500- HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 2 3 4 PART 1 -GENERAL 5 6 7 RELATED DOCUMENTS 8 9 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and 10 Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this section. 11 12 SUMMARY 13 14 This Section includes basic window treatment as follows: 15 16 Horizontal blinds. 17 18 SUBMITTALS 19 20 General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 21 Specification Sections. 22 23 Product data and installation instructions for each type of window treatment unit required. Include 24 methods of installation for each kind of opening and supporting structure. 25 26 Shop drawings for special components and application conditions that are not fully dimensioned or 27 detailed in manufacturers' product data. Show relationships to adjoining work. 28 29 Include typical elevation layout indicating proposed division between blind units and 30 meeting edges at corners. Provide sections and details at head and sill between blind 31 units and corners including inclined installations. 32 33 Provide schedule of all units to be furnished, including field measurements at each location. 34 35 Samples for initial selection of colors, in form of manufacturers' color charts consisting of sections of 36 exposed components with integral or applied finishes showing full range of colors and materials. 37 38 Samples for verification purposes, in full-size units of each component, material, and finish to be 39 exposed to view, for each type of window treatment required. Prepare samples from same materials 40 to be used for fabricating units. 41 42 In addition, submit one complete small operating unit for each type of window treatment 43 required. 44 45 QUALITY ASSURANCE 46 47 General: Provide units produced by one manufacturer for each type required, with complete 48 standard assemblies including hardware, accessory items, mounting brackets, and fastenings. 49 50 Furnish materials in colors and patterns selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard 51 colors/patterns. 52 53 54 55 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 56 57 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS GDA 12500-1 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 MODEL MANUFACTURER 2 3 Model/Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of the following: 4 5 Lightlines; Hunter Douglas,or Architect approved equivalent. 6 7 HORIZONTAL BLINDS 8 9 Headrail: Channel-shaped section complete with tilting mechanism, top and end braces, top 10 cradles, cord lock, and accessory items required for type of blind and installation. 11 12 Bottom Rail: Tubular steel bottom rail, designed to withstand twisting or sagging. Contour top 13 surface to match slat curvature, with flat or slightly curved bottom. Close ends with metal or plastic 14 end caps of same color as rail. Finish rail in same color as slats. 15 16 Slats: Spring-tempered aluminum (louver blades), rounded corners with forming burrs removed, as 17 follows: 18 19 Slat Width: 1-inch (25mm) nominal slats,with other components sized to suit. 20 21 Ladders: Designed to support and maintain slats at proper spacing and alignment in open and 22 closed positions, as follows: 23 24 Braided polyester cord design consisting of vertical components of not less than 0.043-inch 25 nor more than 0.068-inch in diameter and integrally braided ladder rungs of not less than 4 26 threads; space ladders not further than 23 inches apart and 7 inches from ends of slats. 27 28 Tilting Mechanism: Assembly including disengaging worm and gear mechanism to eliminate 29 overdrive, low-friction gear tilter, drum and cradle at each ladder, tilt rod, tape clips, and grommet 30 guides to prevent wear on ladder and cords; designed to hold slats at any angle and prevent 31 movement of slats due to vibration, operated as follows: 32 33 Wand Operation: Detachable clear plastic wand, of proper length to suit blind installation, 34 detachable without tools by raising locking sleeve. 35 36 Lifting, Mechanism: Crashproof cord locks with cord separators and braided polyester or nylon lift 37 cords with tassels at ends. Size cord to suit blind type. Include self-aligning cord equalizers 38 designed to maintain horizontal blind position. 39 40 Installation Brackets: Designed to facilitate removal of head channels. Provide intermediate brackets 41 at spacing recommended by blind manufacturer. Include hardware necessary for secure attachment 42 of brackets to adjoining construction and to headrails. Design brackets to support safely the weight 43 of blind assemblies plus forces applied to operate blinds. 44 45 Finish: Provide finishes indicated below. Finish exposed accessories and hardware to match rail 46 color. Provide corrosion-resistant finish to concealed items of hardware. 47 48 Color:#318, Silver Cloud 49 50 Ionized Coating: Antistatic, dust-repellent, baked polyester finish. 51 52 FABRICATION AND OPERATION 53 54 Prior to fabrication, verify actual opening dimensions by accurate site measurements. Adjust 55 dimensions for proper fit at openings. 56 57 Coordinate with other trades for securing tracks to substrates and other finished surfaces. HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS GDA 12500-2 GDA#12018.00 December 14, 2012 Issue for Permit 1 2 Fabricate window treatment components from noncorrosive, nonstaining, nonfading materials which 3 are completely compatible and which do not require lubrication during normal expected life. 4 5 Fabricate blind units to openings from head to sill and from jamb to jamb. 6 7 For continuous window wall installations, fabricate blinds so that ends occur only over mullions or 8 other defined vertical separation. 9 10 Space slats to provide overlap for light exclusion when fully closed. 11 12 Equip horizontal blind units for the following operation: 13 14 Full-tilting operation with slats rotating approximately 180 deg. Place tilt operating controls 15 on left-hand side of blind units unless otherwise indicated. 16 17 Full-height raising, to minimum stacking dimension, with lifting cord locks for stopping blind 18 at any point of ascending or descending travel. Place pull cords on right-hand side of blind 19 units unless otherwise indicated. 20 21 22 PART 3- EXECUTION 23 24 25 INSTALLATI.ON 26 27 General: Install window treatment units to comply with manufacturer's instructions. Position units 28 level, plumb, secure, at proper height and location relative to adjoining window units and other 29 related work. Securely anchor units with clips, brackets, and anchorages suited to type of substrate. 30 31 Provide clearance between sash and blinds to permit unencumbered operation of sash hardware. 32 33 Isolate metal parts from concrete and mortar to prevent galvanic action. Use thick coating or other 34 means recommended by manufacturer to effect separation. 35 36 Protect installed units to ensure their being in operating condition, without damage, blemishes, or 37 indication of use at substantial completion of project. Correct nonconforming damaged units. 38 Replace units that cannot be field corrected. 39 40 41 END OF SECTION 12500 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS GDA 12500-3